1 Getting Started.
Welcome to the BrailleNote PK, an innovative personal productivity system from Pulse Data International. BrailleNote PK incorporates a Braille style keyboard, an 18 cell Braille display, high quality responsive speech and a suite of powerful applications running under the Windows CE operating system, all packaged into a truly portable system. This User Guide tells you all about them.


1.1 Equipment Checklist.
Carefully unpack your BrailleNote PK. Save the box and packing materials for future use. Your BrailleNote PK package comprises the following items:
BrailleNote PK;
AC adapter;
USB to USB cable;
Serial to Serial cable
Serial to Serial and Serial to PS2 double cable;
Slim line carrying case;
CDROM with PC Software, User Guide files etc.

1.2 General Features.
The BrailleNote PK is a pocket size PDA with a Braille keyboard, and 18 cell Braille display. Each cell comprises 8 dots, allowing for both the display of 6 dot and 8 dot Braille, and has an associated cursor routing button. Six navigation keys on either side of the Braille display provide convenient navigation control.
The PK also has synthesized speech output that can be used in conjunction with the Braille display or on its own. 
The BrailleNote PK runs under the Windows CE operating system and incorporates email software, which is compatible with all of the popular mainstream email protocols. A Compact Flash card slot allows for additional data storage, running a card modem and Network options. USB and serial ports allow for cable connectivity with other devices.
The BrailleNote PK uses flash memory technology to retain information indefinitely even if the batteries run flat. 
The BrailleNote PK runs on AC power or batteries.


1.3 Software Features.
A multipurpose program, called KeySoft, running under the Windows CE operating system, is especially designed for people with a visual impairment. KeySoft provides the following functions:
A word processor called KeyWord that is powerful yet surprisingly simple to learn. KeyWord has most of the features of an office word processor, including unlimited text insertion, search and replace, indents, clipboard operations, spell check and so on. It can even directly import and export the popular Microsoft Word format documents.
An email program called KeyMail that lets you send and receive electronic mail. KeyMail works using a standard email connection. You can also send and receive attachments with your email.
An internet browser called KeyWeb, that allows you to search and use the world wide web and also read locally stored html documents.
A Media player that plays a range of audio format files. You can play files by themselves, or in the background of other tasks.
A calendar, scheduler and planner called KeyPlan. Your entries may include alarms that sound even if the BrailleNote PK is switched off.
An address list manager called KeyList that sorts your entries and allows flexible searching. Addresses can be copied into letters and email.
A synchronization Tool called KeySync that works in conjunction with KeyPlan and KeyList to keep their records up to date with MS Outlook on a PC.
A 10 digit scientific calculator called KeyPlus. Support is provided for both Nemeth and British Braille mathematics.
A book reader called KeyBook that enables you to read Braille books, or books in any standard text format including Microsoft Word format. Books opened in KeyBook are protected from accidental editing.
A Keyboard Learn function that helps you to learn the keyboard layout and the available quick key functions.
A File Manager that allows folder management and files to be copied, renamed, protected, deleted or translated.
A program called ActiveSync that allows the BrailleNote PK disk structure to be viewed and managed on a PC running Microsoft Windows.
A Braille Terminal mode that allows the BrailleNote to act as a Braille display for a screen reader such as Window Eyes, JAWs, HAL and SuperNova running on a desktop or laptop computer.
A Remote Synthesizer mode that allows the BrailleNote PK to act as a speech synthesizer for other computers.
You can switch easily between these KeySoft tasks, which are fully integrated so you can transfer information between them.
KeySoft has both forward and back translators, so a text document can be imported into the BrailleNote PK and translated automatically into an uncontracted (grade 1) or contracted (grade 2) Braille document, and vice versa.
The BrailleNote PK can output its display to a separate visual display. Sighted observers or teachers can use the visual display screen to view what you are doing on the BrailleNote PK. A remote screen viewer based on the Palm handheld computer is also available.
Information can be transferred to and from another computer such as a PC or Apple Macintosh, or specialized equipment such as a selfcontained scanning system.
BrailleNote PK has a onehanded Braille input keyboard mode, providing convenience for people restricted to the use of one hand.


1.3.1 The Windows CE Operating System.
The Windows CE operating system version 4.2 is a modern, powerful operating system designed for small handheld computers. It supports many technologies such as email, desktop PC synchronization, portable mass storage and more. Handheld computers have quite different processors from the Pentium type processors incorporated in PC's that run the standard Windows operating system. Standard Windows programs like Microsoft Word and Excel do not run under Windows CE. Furthermore, programs like Pocket Word and Pocket Excel that run on handheld computers under Windows CE generally require a builtin visual display. Consequently standard Windows CE programs are not suitable for the BrailleNote PK.


1.4 Braille Display.
The Braille display is situated in the middle of the top of the PK, just above the SPACE bars. The electronic Braille display comprises eighteen identical eight dot cells that can display any Braille symbol. Each dot of the Braille display is, in fact, a pin that is controlled electronically. To display a dot the pin is raised, and the pin is lowered when there is no dot. When the display is off all dots are raised slightly and are somewhat spongy to touch. The Braille display is refreshable; it can be written and rewritten repeatedly.


1.5 Joystick
Housed in a small recess on the front edge of the PK is a joystick. It is used for navigating menus and lists. The joystick can be operated using your thumb without moving your fingers from the Braille display. 
The joystick scrolls in four directions; UP,DOWN,LEFTand RIGHT. 
You can also select a menu item by pressing the joystick in.


1.6 Touch Cursor.
If you run your finger up past Braille cell, you will notice that there is a curved, springy strip above it with a raised vertical ridge through the middle. This is the touch cursor button for that Braille cell. It is especially useful when editing a document. In KeyWord, for example, when you press a touch cursor button, the cursor moves to that cell. You can then edit the character displaying on that cell, if any. This is discussed in chapter 3.
The touch cursor can also be used to select an item from a menu or list.


1.7 Keyboard.
On the top surface of the BrailleNote PK as well as the Braille display, you will find the keyboard.
This comprises a set of eight Braille keys, two space keys, two pairs of control keys and two sets of three navigation keys. This section covers each of these in turn and how they are used.
There are eight square Braille keys, arranged in two rows of four, curving symmetrically out from the center. The three inner keys on each side represent the 6 dots of a Braille cell. The two extra keys on the extreme left and right are for your little fingers. The lefthand key is called BACKSPACE, or sometimes dot7, and the righthand key is called ENTER, or dot8. 
There are two SPACE keys on the PK keyboard that make up the space bar. You can press them both or just one of them, either way they perform the function of a space bar. They are found right on the front edge of the keyboard, to left and right of center. The surface of each is slightly dipped, for easy location and to help prevent accidental operation.
The pairs of round Control keys are located on either side of the space keys. 
At either end of the Braille display you will find three small round buttons. These are called Navigation keys.
In this User Guide, Braille key presses are described in the following way. The instruction:
Press Fmeans that you should press the dots for the letter F, which are 1, 2, and 4, then release them. This instruction may also be presented as:
Press dots124.
The order in which you press the keys does not matter. The character is typed when the keys are released. 
You will also encounter instructions such as: "press SPACEwithF." This means that you press a space key as well as dots124, and then release them. In KeySoft, a space key pressed by itself produces a space in the way you would expect but in addition, it can be used in combination with other keys to obtain many KeySoft commands. Similarly, the BACKSPACE, ENTER and Navigation keys can be used on their own or in combination with other keys.


1.8 CONTROL keys
The two pairs of slightly recessed round buttons on either side of the SPACE bars are called the CONTROL keys. They are mainly used for power and reset functions. From left to right, they are called C1,C2,C3 and C4.
C1and C2 are to the left of the SPACE bars, C3 and C4 to the right.
For information on how to use them for powering the unit on and off, refer to 1.9 Turning the BrailleNote PK on and Off.
For information on how to use them to perform resets, refer to 1.10 Resets.


1.9 Turning the BrailleNote PK on and Off.
There are two ways of turning the BrailleNote PK on and off. The one you will use most often is pressing the far right CONTROL key, C4, for three seconds (until it beeps once). This puts the BrailleNote PK into a standby mode, and is the best way to turn on and off for everyday usage. When you turn the unit on this way, you will be at the same place as you were when you turned off.
If you are putting the BrailleNote PK into storage for a while, you should power it right down by holding down the far right and far left CONTROL keys, C1and C4, at the same time for three seconds, until it beeps twice, and the word "off" appears on the Braille display. This is not something you would do every day however as it also deletes any files you have created on the KeySoft System Disk. To turn it on again, repeat the holding down of the far right and far left CONTROL keys at the same time for three seconds. When the BrailleNote PK starts up, it will chime and announce the KeySoft version before putting you in the Main Menu.


1.10 Resets.
The Reset function is activated by holding down the two right hand control keys, C3 and C4, together with a combination of dot keys.
There are three kinds of resets possible on the BrailleNote PK, each has a different function. They are described below.
A.1.1 Standard Reset
Perform a standard reset when:
 prompted to do so during an upgrade/new feature installation program to install new drivers and restart KeySoft
 the BN stops responding for any reason (assuming the problem is not that the power is off, or the battery is flat!)
 the BN generally seems to not be its normal self.
To perform a standard reset, hold down the two right hand control keys, C3 and C4, until you hear a deep chirp. 
You will lose data if you have to reset while a file is open in the word processor, the planner is open, an email is being written or the address list is open and changes have been made and not saved, before performing the reset.
A.1.2 Reset with 1 2 3 held down.
Hold down the dots 123 then press C3 and C4until you hear the BrailleNote PK chime.
Runs the original factoryinstalled software. Useful if an upgrade or addon has become corrupted and the BrailleNote PK will not start after a reset due to this. The data lost will be the same as above.
A.1.3 Reinitialize with 456 (Hard Reset)
If KeySoft still does not start, BrailleNote PK's memory may have been corrupted. If this has happened, then it is necessary to reinitialize the memory. Make sure the BrailleNote PK is switched on. Hold down keys 456and then C3 and C4. The BrailleNote PK should beep immediately. Continue to hold down 456. After about ten seconds silence, a chime should sound and the BrailleNote PK should speak. Release the keys. KeySoft reports the software version: "KeySoftCE,version6.0x.Build(number)"then takes you to the Main Menu.



1.11 NAVIGATION Keys
The 6 Navigation keys are used in conjunction with the Braille display when reading and navigating menus and lists.
The navigation keys can be set up for lefthanded or righthanded operation as discussed in 5.4.14 Navigation Key Set. You can also create a custom navigation key set up to suit your personal preference as discussed in 5.4.4 Function of Previous and Next navigation Keys. The factory setting is righthanded. 
For convenience we will refer to the navigation keys as a numbered set from 16, in the same configuration as a Braille cell, so on the left from top to bottom they are N1, N2 and N3, and on the right from top to bottom, N4, N5, and N6. Each also has a name relating to its function and in this user guide we will refer to the key by that name.
The navigation keys are named as follows:
N1: SLOW
N2: BACK
N3: PREVIOUS
N4: FAST
N5: ADVANCE
N6: NEXT
In the lefthanded configuration BACK and PREVIOUS are mapped to N5 and N6, and ADVANCE and NEXT to N2 and N3 respectively.
The SLOW and FAST keys control the speed of the continuous scrolling. To slow it down, tap the SLOW key repeatedly. To make it go faster, tap the FAST key.
Pressing SLOW and FAST together starts the Braille display scrolling continuously. Press them again and the scrolling will stop. 


1.12 Speech.
You can listen to the BrailleNote PK using either the builtin loudspeaker at the center back of the BrailleNote PK or headphones. If headphones are plugged in, the loudspeaker is automatically disabled.
The headphone socket is on the back of the BrailleNote PK, directly to the right of the central "bump".
The speech volume, speed and pitch can all be controlled by keyboard commands. These commands are described fully in 1.17.6 Setting Speech Volume Speed and Pitch, but nevertheless it is important to know how to control the volume of the speech right now.
To increase the volume press ENTERwithdot4 To gradually increase the volume you can hold down the ENTER key and tap the dot4 key repeatedly.
To decrease the volume press ENTERwithdot1.
The speech supplements the Braille display. You might prefer the Braille display when editing text, reading detailed material or accessing notes during meetings but prefer speech for reading longer documents such as novels when reading for pleasure. We will explain how to turn off the speech or the Braille display later.


1.13 Headphones.
BrailleNote PK has a standard 3.5mm female headphone port that works with most commercially available headphones. The headphone port is located on the back panel, just to the right of the central hub.
Headphones will only work when Speech is turned on, and when headphones are plugged in, the speech will only be audible through the headphones.
Volume controls for media player and speech work as normal when using headphones. Adjust the volumes to suit your preferences. For more information on volume control of speech, refer to 5.16 Change Speech Volume Rate and Pitch and for the Media player, 15.1.7 Volume Control.


1.14 KeySoft Concepts.
Learning to use the BrailleNote PK is easy because the User Interface is very consistent. Similar operations in different parts of KeySoft are carried out in similar ways. This section covers the concepts behind the way KeySoft operates.


1.14.1 Help Messages.
At any point in KeySoft you can get information about the options that are available. To do this, press SPACEwithH. KeySoft help is context sensitive, which means that you are only given help relevant to your current situation. Remember to press SPACEwithH for Help when you need it. It does not affect your work in any way, and after you have finished reading the Help message, you are returned to the point at which you selected Help.
When the help system is being used to review a list of available commands, pressing ENTER on the displayed command will cause that command to be executed.
To read a longer Help message on the Braille display, use the ADVANCE navigation key and to review the message use the BACKnavigation key. 
The Braille grade used when displaying text can be selected. The factory setting is Grade 2 Braille. You can change the setting as described in 5.4.6 Preferred Reading Grade.


1.14.2 Prompts.
Whenever KeySoft requires input from you, a brief message called a prompt is displayed. The prompt indicates what input is required from you. If you are unsure how to respond, press SPACEwithH for help. Where possible, KeySoft offers reasonable suggested choices. 
BrailleNote PK provides prompts in Braille, speech or both together. The factory set up turns on both the Braille display and speech and the following discussion assumes that both are on. You can read the Braille display or listen to the voice or do both. In this User Guide when we say that the BrailleNote PK "displaysamessage" we mean that the message is both written on the Braille display and spoken. 
You can turn off one or other of the outputs; you will learn how to do this in 1.17.1 Turning the Braille Display On or Off and 1.17.2 Turning Speech On or Off.


1.14.3 Reading Prompts on the Braille Display.
Generally the prompts displayed in Braille are identical to what is spoken. Sometimes there are slight differences because what is appropriate in speech does not need to be displayed in Braille. Also, because the Braille display has a limited length, Braille output is limited to the number of whole words that fit on the display. If a prompt is longer than the Braille display or you are reading a long passage of Braille, you can scroll the Braille display to see the next group of words by pressing the ADVANCEnavigation key. In the following discussion it is assumed that you will scroll to read the full prompt as necessary. Remember you can also scroll back to see the previous display by pressing the BACKnavigation key.
To help reading longer messages and prompts you can press PREVIOUStogether with BACK to move the Braille display one word to the left. Pressing PREVIOUS together with ADVANCE moves the Braille display one word to the right.
You can return to the previous prompt by pressing PREVIOUSat any time.


1.14.4 Repeating Spoken Prompts.
If you miss hearing a prompt when it is spoken the first time, don't worry. You can listen to it again by pressing SPACEwithR.


1.14.5 Menus.
KeySoft uses a series of menus to provide a quick and easy way of performing many complex functions. Each menu contains a list of options from which to choose. For example, the Main Menu allows you to select the Word Processor, Planner, Address List, and so on. The selection of items is described in 1.15.3 Reviewing the Main Menu.
Many of the more frequently used functions are also available via shortcut key combinations. These are mentioned in context throughout this user guide, as well as being listed in the Command Summary.


1.14.6 Exiting the Current Activity.
Another concept used throughout KeySoft is that of exiting what you are doing and taking one step back to the previous option point.
You can do this by pressing SPACEwithE particularly while using the keyboard, orthe PREVIOUS navigation key particularly when you are using the Braille display.


1.14.7 Automatic Cutoff of Prompts.
KeySoft gives detailed spoken prompts and messages to help you learn the system. To prevent these messages slowing down an experienced user, speech is cut off automatically by the next keystroke.


1.14.8 Instant Access.
You can switch from one KeySoft task to another with a simple key sequence. For example, you can switch from the Word Processor to the Planner, and then return to the same point in your document. For information on how to do this, refer to 1.18 Switching Between Tasks.


1.14.9 Braille Documents.
KeySoft assumes that you want to create Braille documents, so that is the suggested choice.
You also have the option of generating text documents directly.


1.15 The KeySoft Menus.
1.15.1 Structure.
The entry point to KeySoft is the Main Menu, which contains 13 items. You can display each of these items in turn, and select one. 
When you have done this, you are generally presented with another menu. The system may extend to 3 or 4 levels of submenu. This structure is an important aspect of KeySoft. Items are grouped together for easy location, so a huge range of functions can be found from one starting point, the Main Menu. 
For example, if you start at the Main Menu and choose the Word processor option, you are presented with the KeyWord menu. This contains the following items: Create a document, Open a document and Setup options. These all relate to wordprocessing. 
Now let's see how the Main Menu works.


1.15.2 Reading a List or Menu.
You can read through any menu or list using only the navigation keys and Braille display. Consequently, you can keep your hands on the Braille display avoiding the need to go back and forwards between the Braille display and keyboard.
The navigation keys perform the following functions:
To step forwards through a menu  press the ADVANCEnavigation key. Menu items are displayed one at a time.
To step back through a menu  press the BACKnavigation key.Menu items are displayed one at a time in reverse order.
To select a menu item  press the NEXTnavigation key.
To exit a menu  press the PREVIOUSnavigation key.


Remember that these functions are also available through the joystick. You will soon ascertain which method suits you best.


1.15.3 Reviewing the Main Menu.
To start with, go to the Main Menu by pressing SPACEwithdots1to6. KeySoft displays: "MainMenu."
To display the first item of the Main Menu, press SPACE or ADVANCE. KeySoft displays: "Wordprocessor."
You could select the word processor at this point, but our present object is to review all the items in the Main Menu. So, press SPACE or ADVANCE repeatedly, pausing to read and listen to each of the 13 options in the menu, which are:
Planner;
AddressList;
Email;
Internet;
MediaPlayer;
BookReader;
ScientificCalculator;
FileManager, which allows files to be copied, translated, etc;
Utilities, which is a group of general purpose functions;
TerminalforScreenReader, which allows the BrailleNote PK to act as a Braille display for other computers;
RemoteSynthesizer, which makes the BrailleNote PK act as a speech synthesizer for other computers;
KeyboardLearn, which helps you to learn the Braille keyboard functions;
ForInformationpressSPACEwithI,which provides information about the BrailleNote PK such as the serial number and software version.
FortheOptionsMenu,pressSPACEwithO,anywhere, which is a reminder of how to access the Options Menu.
The last item is: "EndofMenu." Having stepped forward along the menu by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE repeatedly, you can step back by pressing BACKSPACEorBACKrepeatedly.
When using speech, if you don't want to hear a complete announcement, you can cut it off and move to the next item by pressing SPACE or BACKSPACE. This speech cutoff occurs at all points in KeySoft.


1.15.4 Selecting from the Main Menu.
When KeySoft displays the option you want, press the ENTERkey. The exceptions are Information and OptionsMenu, which contain directions on how to access them. Don't worry about getting in over your head, because you can always back out of a selection by pressing SPACEwithE for exit on the keyboard.
When you have selected an item from the Main Menu, you are generally presented with another menu, from which you can again select an item. To display a Help message describing your options at any point, press SPACEwithH. To return to the previous menu, press SPACEwithE. To go directly to the Main Menu, press SPACEwithdots1to6.


1.15.5 Keyboard shortcuts.
As well as moving through the menus an item at a time as described in the previous section, you can take a keyboard shortcut directly to the menu item by typing its first letter. This automatically selects the item, so instead of having to press ENTER when the item is displayed, KeySoft takes you straight to the action selected when you would have pressed ENTER.
For example, if you were at the Main Menu and you wanted to go to the Word processor, you could press W. Instead of "Wordprocessor", KeySoft will go straight to "KeyWordMenu". Press O and instead of "OpenaDocument", KeySoft will go straight to "FolderName". This is a real time saver.


1.16 A First Experience.
Most people hate reading User Guides. They would much rather just have a go, on the presumption that if the product is any good, it should be obvious how it works.
If that's you, then this is your section. We'll go through two simple demonstrations: in the first we'll create a basic word processor document, and in the second we'll do an addition with the calculator. You should only need the simple commands that have been introduced so far.
If you are not keen on jumping in at the deep end, don't panic. It's not essential to follow these demonstrations, because after this part we'll revert to normal manual mode, and describe in detail all the wonderful things that the BrailleNote PK can do.

1.16.1 General.
Most people hate reading User Guides. They would much rather just have a go, on the presumption that if the product is any good, it should be obvious how it works.
If that's you, then this is your section. We'll go through two simple demonstrations: in the first we'll create a basic word processor document, and in the second we'll do an addition with the calculator. You should only need the simple commands that have been introduced so far.
If you are not keen on jumping in at the deep end, don't panic. It's not essential to follow these demonstrations, because after this part we'll revert to normal manual mode, and describe in detail all the wonderful things that the BrailleNote PK can do.


1.16.2 Writing a Simple Document.
The aim of this first exercise is to write a very simple document with the word processor. 
To reach a common starting point, go to the Main Menu by pressing SPACEwithdots1to6. Your BrailleNote PK displays: "Mainmenu."
To get to the word processor, press W. Your BrailleNote PK displays: "KeyWordmenu."
To Create a document, press C, for Create, and your BrailleNote PK displays: "Foldername?General,"
KeySoft is asking which part of its filing system you want to use, and is offering the "General" folder. This is fine for now, so follow the prompt and press ENTER. KeySoft then displays: "Documenttocreate?"
You are being asked to provide a name for the new document, so Braille a name such as: "test."
When you have typed the name, press ENTER. Your BrailleNote PK displays: "Topofdocument.Blank."
This means that you have created a new document named Test, and the cursor is sitting at the top of it. 
You are now free to Braille whatever you like. For this demo, just Braille a simple sentence such as: "ThisisatestofmynewBrailleNotePK." Braille the first word and press SPACE. Each word is spoken when the space bar is pressed. Complete your sentence.
That's all we'll write for now. To finish this little exercise, press SPACEwithE.Your BrailleNote PK displays: "KeyWordmenu." You are back at the Word processor menu, and your new document has been automatically saved. If you press SPACEwithE again you arrive back where you started, at the Main Menu.


1.16.3 Trying Out the Calculator.
You might also like to try out the Calculator, which you can do without any extensive knowledge of the BrailleNote PK. From the Main Menu, go to the Scientific Calculator by pressing S.You hear: "KeyPlus.Zero."
This means that the Calculator is ready. If someone has previously used the Calculator and it displays a number other than 0, you can clear it by pressing SPACEwithdots356.
Both the Nemeth Braille Code for Mathematics and the UK Braille Mathematics Notation are supported. The correct code for your country is automatically selected when you set up your Calculator Braille Language as described in 5.4.10 Computer Braille Language. The following exercise assumes use of the Nemeth mathematics code.
Let's try calculating 2 + 3. The BrailleNote PK knows that you are using the Calculator, so you don't need to use any number signs. The numbers 1 through 9 and zero are just the letters A through J. Input the following key sequence without using the SPACE bar in between entries. First Braille 2, which is the letter B. Because we are assuming use of Nemeth code for mathematical symbols, the "plus" operand is represented by Braille dots 346. Then Braille 3, which is the letter C. Complete the calculation by pressing ENTER. The number 5will be displayed.
You can review the calculation by pressing the PREVIOUS and NEXT navigation keys together. The Braille display will show 2+3=5, in Nemeth. Pressing the PREVIOUS and NEXT navigation keys again will return to just displaying the answer. If the speech is on, the speech will mirror the content on the Braille display.
To complete the exercise, press SPACEwithdots1to6, to return to the Main Menu.


1.17 General Functions.
Some useful general functions are available wherever you are in KeySoft. These functions may be accessed from the Options Menu, or often more conveniently via a Quick Command sequence.
The general functions allow you to control the configuration of Time, Date, Braille settings and so on. You could be using the Word processor, or using the Calculator, or reading a menu when you request one of these functions. After display of the requested function you are returned to the place from where you initiated the request.
The Quick Commands typically use the SPACE,BACKSPACE or ENTER key in combination with another letter. For example, ENTERwithT displays the current time.
Not all items on the Options Menu have an associated Quick Command key combination.
Pressing SPACEwithO anywhere in KeySoft will access the Options Menu. KeySoft displays: "Optionsmenu." The Options Menu can then be reviewed by pressing the SPACE and BACKSPACE keys on the keyboard. The Options Menu comprises a long list of items. Only some of the items are relevant at this point but the complete list is provided so you know what to expect when you read the menu. Where applicable, the equivalent Quick Command is also given.
The Options Menu contains the following items:
Date;	ENTERwithD
Time Options;	For Time press ENTERwithT
	For Stopwatch press ENTERwithW
Grade for Braille entry and Keyboard type;
Braille Display Options;
Keyboard settings;	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithK
Review voice;	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithR
Connectivity;
Visual display;
Next appointment;	ENTERwithN
Power and battery status;
User Guide;	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithH
Insertion;	ENTERwithI
Spell. Repeat and spell;	ENTERwithS
Hear punctuation. Repeat with maximum punctuation;	ENTERwithH
Change task;	FunctionwithS 
and finally the speech settings, a list of 6 items that tell you how to adjust the volume, speed and pitch of KeySoft's speech.
The "Insertion" item is displayed only when it is appropriate to insert such things as the date or time such as in KeyWord.
To select an item, move through the menu until the required item is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, from anywhere in the Options menu, press the initial letter of your choice. This does not apply to the speech settings, which are discussed in 1.17.6 Setting Speech Volume Speed and Pitch.
We will now deal with some of the more commonly used items in the Options menu. All the functions in the Options Menu are detailed in Chapter 5.


1.17.1 Turning the Braille Display On or Off.
To turn off the Braille display, hold down the NEXTnavigation key, press SPACE, then release both keys. The same key combination turns the Braille display on.
Note that if the Braille display is turned off when speech is off, speech is forced on. This avoids having both Braille and speech off simultaneously.
The function to turn the Braille display off is also available from the Options Menu, under Braille Display Options.


1.17.2 Turning Speech On or Off.
There are three speech options: Speech On, Speech on Request and Speech Off. If speech is currently on, hold down the PREVIOUSnavigation key, press SPACE, then release both keys to select Speech on Request. KeySoft displays: "Speechonrequest."
To select the next option, Speech Off, press the same key combination again. KeySoft confirms that speech is off by displaying "Speechoff" only on the Braille display. To turn Speech On again, press that key combination again. KeySoft displays: "Speechon."
You are returned to where you started with Speech On.
When the Speech on Request option is selected, KeySoft only speaks when you use a command that is a specific speech command. For example, in KeyWord, the word processor, when you move forward wordbyword using SPACEwithdot5, nothing is spoken. However if you use the dedicated "Speak Word under Cursor" command, SPACEwithdots25, the word under the cursor is spoken.
Note that if speech is turned off when the Braille is off, the Braille display is forced on. This avoids having both Braille and speech off simultaneously.
The function to select Speech On, Speech on Request, or Speech Off is also available from the Options Menu, under Review Voice.


1.17.3 Startup Braille and Speech Mode.
The BrailleNote PK may be forced to start in one of three modes when it is switched on. You may choose to start with Braille only, speech only, or both Braille and speech.
This feature is very convenient if, for example, you have previously been using both Braille and speech, but you are now attending a meeting and for privacy you wish to start in the Braille only mode.
As you turn on the switch, simply hold down one of the following key combinations:
Speech only:	dot2;
Braille only:	dot3;
Speech and Braille:	both dots2and3.

1.17.4 Setting the Keyboard Voice.
The first of these settings determines how KeySoft speaks what you type. Press SPACEwithO, then K for Keyboard. KeySoft displays: "Keyboardvoice?Words."
The options are as follows:
To turn off speech altogether, press F followed by ENTER;
To spell words as they are typed, press Sfollowed by ENTER;
To speak whole words, press Wfollowed by ENTER;
To both spell and speak words, press B followed by ENTER;
Or just press ENTER to leave the selection unchanged.
The suggested setting is "Words."
You can request help, using SPACEwithH for a reminder of these options.
Three further Keyboard settings are then presented relating to your preferred typing Braille grade, alerting of prompts requiring input of computer Braille and whether you wish to use 6 or 8 dot computer Braille. See 5.5.2 Preferred Keyboard Braille Grade.
To leave the Keyboard Settings, press SPACEwithE.


1.17.5 Repeating an Announcement.
As we have already mentioned, you can get KeySoft to say a prompt again by pressing SPACEwithR if you didn't quite catch it. To repeat the prompt with variables such as file names or folder names spelled out, press ENTERwithS.
To reveal the most detail, you can repeat the last prompt with full punctuation and spaces. To do this, press ENTERwithH.
After either command you are returned to your original place in KeySoft.


1.17.6 Setting Speech Volume Speed and Pitch.
The characteristics of BrailleNote PK's voice can be changed anywhere in KeySoft, as follows:
For higher volume, press ENTERwithdot4;
For lower volume, press ENTERwithdot1;
For faster speech, press ENTERwithdot6;
For slower speech, press ENTERwithdot3;
For higher pitch, press ENTERwithdot5;
For lower pitch, press ENTERwithdot2.
There are 32 volumes, 16 speeds and 16 pitches, and they change one step at each key press. A reminder of the commands is given in the Options Menu, at the end of the list.


1.17.7 Power and Battery Status.
The BrailleNote PK Power & Battery status can be obtained at any time. Press SPACEwithO, then P.
KeySoft displays the battery charge level as a percentage of fully charged, and whether the AC Adapter is On or Off.


1.18 Switching Between Tasks.
KeySoft allows you to move directly from one KeySoft task to another without returning to the Main Menu. You can switch between the Word processor, Scientific Calculator, Planner, Address List, EMail, etc. For example, if you are writing a document and you need an address, you can switch directly to the Address List, look up the address, and then return to the Word processor. You are placed back at the same point in your document.
The following hot keys are available for switching tasks:
To select the Word processor press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithW;
To select the Scientific Calculator press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithS;
To select the Planner press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithP;
To select the Address List press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithA;
To select the Email system press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithE;
To select the Book Reader press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithB;
To select the Internet browser, press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithI;
To select the Media Player, press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithM.
There is also a Task menu available. To access this, either:
1. Press SPACEwithO for the Options menu then Mfor Move to another task, or
2. PressFunctionwithS.
KeySoft displays: "Taskmenu."
You can make a selection by either:
1. Review the menu items using SPACEorADVANCEand select one by pressingNEXTorENTER. or,
2. Press the initial letter of the task; for example, Wfor Word Processor.
Remember that, if necessary, you can always get back to the Main Menu by pressing SPACEwithdots1to6.


1.19 Keyboard Assistance.
There are two ways of getting help with keyboard input. The first is available from the Main Menu, and is called "Keyboard Learn." In Keyboard Learn, KeySoft displays the letter or sign of any dot combination that you press and also speaks it, but no further action results. It also displays the function of the navigation keys and key commands that are always available. For example, pressing ENTERwithT will give the response displaythetime.
Keyboard Learn is invaluable for familiarizing yourself with the keyboard layout and Quick Commands that are available at any point within KeySoft.
The second mode works in the Word processor, Web browser, Calculator, Planner and Book reader. It is called Announce Key mode, and can be entered by pressing SPACEwithW. In addition to displaying letters and signs, the function of any key or key combination is displayed. For example, in the Word processor, SPACEwithdot2 displays: "Backoneword," without causing any further action.
Announce Key mode is helpful for learning the commands available in the selected KeySoft application.
You can exit either mode by pressing SPACEwithE.


1.20 OneHanded Mode.
BrailleNote PK provides a onehanded mode for users restricted to the use of one hand for Braille input. To turn on this mode, switch your BrailleNote PK on by pressing C4, then immediately hold down BACKSPACE, and keep holding it down until "Onehanded mode" is displayed. This mode stays in effect until it is deliberately turned off. 
To type a character in onehanded mode you can press the dots at any time and in any order. When you have pressed all the required dots, press SPACE, and the character is entered. To enter the letter J, for example, you might press dot2 first, and then dots4and5 separately or together. After releasing the keys, press SPACE, and J is entered. To speed input the concluding SPACE may be performed in conjunction with key input. For example, to enter the letter J, you could press dot2 first, and then dots45 and the SPACE bar together. 
A command that includes SPACE can be obtained by pressing SPACE both before and after the other keys. For example, to return to the Main Menu, press and release SPACE, then press and release dots 1 to 6 in any combination or order, then press and release SPACEagain. 
To make a space between words, press SPACE twice, after pressing SPACE once to enter the last character typed. 
The operation of the navigation keys remains the same as in twohanded mode. 
To return to twohanded mode, switch your BrailleNote PK on by pressing C4, then immediately hold down ENTER, and keep holding it down until KeySoft starts normally. If onehanded mode is on, the BrailleNote PK will advise this each time it is powered on, and will also advise what to do to return to the standard twohanded mode. 

1.21 Saving before Switching off.
Before you switch off your BrailleNote PK, it is good practice to return to the Main Menu first. This ensures your current work is saved. If you don't do this, and subsequently the battery becomes discharged, the current version of your work will be lost. That's fairly unlikely, but it's good insurance for the cost of one keystroke.
If you have storage cards and/or an external memory drive , you should consider backing up your work regularly. It's a common thing to do with any computer. It minimizes the amount of data you could lose should a computer or software "crash" occur. You can back up all your working files by using the Back up function in the Utilities menu, as described in 14.1.1 Backing Up.


1.22 Setting Time and Date.
When you first get your BrailleNote PK you should check that the time, date and Time Zone settings are correctly set. By selecting your correct time zone, you can have the BrailleNote PKs clock adjust automatically when you select whether you are in or out of daylight saving time.
If the BrailleNote PKs battery goes completely flat, the system will advise that the time and date need to be set when the machine is restarted.
To display the current day and date, press ENTERwithD.
To display the current time, press ENTERwithT.
These commands are available from any place within KeySoft. If either the date or the time is incorrect you can set new values and have them displayed in your preferred format from the Date and Time Set option in the Utilities Menu.
To set the Date and time, follow this procedure. Remember that online help is available at any point by pressing SPACEwithH, and that if you wish to leave a displayed value unchanged, just press ENTER to move onto the next item in the list. You may exit the setup list at any point by pressing SPACEwithE.
1. Return to the Main Menu by pressing SPACEwithdots1to6.
2. Press U to go to the Utilities Menu.
3. Press D to go to the Date and Time set option.
4. Choose your preferred date format. For USA format where the date is in the form month/day/year press S, or for UK format where the date is in the form day/month/year press K. To save your entry, press ENTER.
5. Choose your preferred time format, 12 or 24 hour. For a 12hour clock press A, for a 24hour clock press B then complete your entry by pressing ENTER.
6. Select your Time Zone. To cycle through the list of time zones, press SPACEwithdots34.Alternatively press the initial letter. Complete your entry by pressing ENTER.
7. In daylight saving time: Press Yif you are in daylight saving time, or N if you are not, followed by ENTER.
8. Enter the current time. Press SPACEwithH to display instructions on how to enter the time in the format you have selected.
9. Enter the current date. Press SPACEwithH to display instructions on how to enter the date in the format you have selected.
After setting the time and date you will be returned to the Utilities Menu.


1.23 User Settings.
BrailleNote PK provides many user definable options. As you get to know more about how your BrailleNote PK works, you can change the way it behaves to better suit your personal preferences. Your BrailleNote PK supplier will most probably have set the User settings most appropriate to your needs. The following items will be of principal interest:
Speech; volume, rate, and pitch;
Time and date correctly set, and in preferred format;
Keyboard input voice setting; words, characters, or off;
Review or reading voice settings; punctuation settings, numbers or digits;
Preferred cursor shape on Braille display;
Preferred Braille reading grade;
Braille language; US, UK, or Australian;
Braille grade for keyboard input; grade 1, or 2;
Calculator language Nemeth or UK math;
Computer Braille language; US, or UK;
Computer Braille 6 dot or 8 dot;
navigation key layout;
Spelling checker dictionary language installed;
Address list database installed;
Email database installed.
Some of these items have already been covered in this chapter, but for convenience, Appendix A of the User Guide provides additional assistance and, if appropriate, a reference to the relevant section in the User Guide. The next section explains how to use the Electronic User Guide to read a particular section of the user guide. After reading this next section, you could use the Electronic User Guide to read Appendix A, User settings for the BrailleNote PK.


1.24 User Guide.
The User Guide is built into KeySoft, so that you can look it up any time you want. Using either the Table of Contents or the Index to locate a reference, the User Guide will take you directly to the topic you wish to read.
If you wish to read the User Guide like a book rather than look up specific references, simply open the chapter or appendix in the Book Reader like any other book file. You will find the files in the Manuals folder on your KeySoft System Disk.
Alternatively, the entire User Guide is available in several PC friendly formats on the CDRom that came with your BrailleNote PK. This gives you the option of working through a chapter trying things out on the BrailleNote PK while reading the user guide on a PC, printing or embossing a copy etc.
The rest of this section concentrates on the onboard User Guide, how to access it and how to use it.


1.24.1 Onboard User Guide.
You can access the User Guide through the Options Menu, or by the quick command BACKSPACEwithENTERwithH. You can look up a topic in the Table of Contents or Index, and read that section of the user guide. When you are finished with that section, you can return to the Table of Contents or Index or exit the user guide. You are returned to your original place in KeySoft when you exit. 
If you have edited your user guide KeyWord Text files in any way (a practice we do not recommend as it can interfere with the table of contents and index functions) it is important to note that the user guide files are loaded on every reset. This means that to save any edited copies, you should first change the file names so the newly loaded copies do not over write them.
To refer to the User Guide either press SPACEwithO for the Options menu, then U for the User Guide, or BACKSPACEwithENTERwithH. 
If this is the very first time you have accessed the Electronic User Guide your BrailleNote PK displays:
"LookupTableofContentsorIndex?"
Press Tto select the Table of Contents or I to select the Index. KeySoft confirms your selection. 
If you have accessed the User Guide before, your BrailleNote PK displays:
"Continuereading(reference)?"
where "reference" is the last topic accessed. If you press Y to continue you are returned to that topic. If you press N you go to the Table of Contents or Index. 
The Table and Contents or Index both respond to initial letter searches. To jump to the items starting with a letter, press that letter. To move through the items, press SPACE or ADVANCE to go forwards and BACKSPACEorBACK to move back.
Once the desired item has been found, press ENTER to select it. If the item has subindexes, repeat the selection procedure. You can then read the selected section like you would any document. 
Once you have entered the User Guide at a particular place, the following review commands are available for reading the content:
To read from the start of the previous sentence, press SPACEwithdot1;
To read from the start of the current sentence, press SPACEwithdots14;
To read from the start of the next sentence, press SPACEwithdot4;
To read from the start of the previous paragraph, press SPACEwithdots23;
To read from the start of the next paragraph, press SPACEwithdots56;
To skip back one section, press SPACEwithdots123;
To advance one section, press SPACEwithdots456;
To go back to the Table of Contents or Index press BACKSPACE;
To exit the User Guide and return to your original place in KeySoft press SPACEwithE.
To continuously read a section of the User Guide using speech, select your starting point from the Table of Contents or Index as discussed above, then press SPACEwithG. To pause reading, press BACKSPACEwithENTER.
You can issue the review commands while reading is in progress or after it has stopped. If you give a command while reading is in progress, what is currently being displayed is cut off and reading begins immediately from the new position. This provides a very convenient method of quickly panning through a section of the User Guide. If you are continuously reading, you can jump forward or back through the text by sentence or paragraph without halting the continuous reading function.


1.24.2 Location of User Guide Files.
As an alternative to accessing the Electronic User Guide through its Table of Contents or Index, you can also read the User Guide as a number of KeyWord documents. Each chapter and appendix is a separate KeyWord text document. As of version 5.0 of KeySoft, you may notice that each file name ends with a two letter code such as bb, bq, pk, vb or vq. This identifies the model type  the first letter is b for BrailleNote or v for VoiceNote, the second letter is b for BT, q for QT. The PK files have pk after them. If the code is not correct for your model, contact your distributor.
These files are all stored in a folder called "Manual" on your KeySoft System Disk drive.


1.24.2.1 User Guide Version Check.
There is a simple version check built into the User Guide. Simply access the Index, and select the "Version" entry in the usual way. When you press ENTER it will announce the heading "Version" after which it should say, "ThismanualisfortheBrailleNotePKusingversionx.xofKeySoft." If the model name or version is not what you expected, contact your distributor.


1.25 Where to Now.
By now you should have a good basic knowledge of the BrailleNote PK and KeySoft. The entire User Guide is stored in the BrailleNote PK so you can read each chapter at your leisure.
The User Guide can be read using your BrailleNote PK as previously described. A good starting point is to browse through the Table of Contents, as this will provide you with an appreciation of the topics covered in the User Guide. The distributor who sold you your BrailleNote PK can supply this. There is also a folder on the BrailleNote Family CDRom provided with your BrailleNote PK that contains text versions of all the model's user guides, so that you can read it using a PC.
Please read the next chapter, which concerns practical hardware matters like the batteries, port connectors and card slot. To read chapter 2, follow the procedure discussed in the previous section. You will find chapter 2 in the Table of Contents so you can select it from there and start reading.
After Chapter 2, the remainder of the User Guide is all about KeySoft and you can pick and choose what to read. If you are new to KeySoft, you might want to work through Chapter 3, which introduces the basic Word processor functions. You might then want to read Chapter 5, which deals with the functions available via the Options Menu, or Chapter 6 for advanced word processing features. Alternatively, you can read Chapter 7 on the Calculator, Chapter 8 on the Planner, or Chapter 9 on the Address List.
If you are interested in using email or accessing the internet, and/or using the other connectivity options the BrailleNote PK offers, read Chapter 12 on Connectivity, then Chapter 10 on Email, or Chapter 11 on the Web Browser, depending on your interest and requirements.
Chapter 12 describes use of the File and Folder Manager, and the translation of files from Text to Braille and other formats. Chapter 13 covers the Utilities menu, where topics like backing up, restoring files and software upgrades are discussed.
Chapter 15 covers the Media Player.
Chapter 16 provides a convenient listing of all the keyboard commands for the BrailleNote PK. These are categorized under general commands as well as commands for each of the applications of KeySoft.
You might find it tedious to read a User Guide, but we have endeavored to make sure it is full of useful information, and it's surprising what sticks in your memory. When people say, "I didn't know you could do that!" it usually means that they havent read the User Guide.
And remember; please make frequent use of BrailleNote PKs superb Help that you can access at any point by pressing SPACEwithH. It's a valuable source of information, whatever part of KeySoft you are using.


1.26 Version.
This manual is for the BrailleNote PK using version 6.0 of KeySoft.
End of Chapter Getting Started.



2 BrailleNote PK Hardware.
2.1 AC Adapter and Battery.
The BrailleNote PK can operate from its internal rechargeable battery or from its AC adapter. The length of time you can run the BrailleNote PK from a fully charged battery is typically over 20 hours before it becomes flat. Activities like emailing and connecting using bluetooth or wireless networking increase the drain on the battery. 
The BrailleNote PK warns you if the battery is getting low. When the battery gauge indicates that the battery is less than 10% full, the following warning is displayed periodically:
"Batteryislow."
If possible, connect the AC adapter to recharge the battery now. If not, you typically have about 2 hours of battery life remaining. If the battery continues to run down and becomes nearly flat, KeySoft displays the following message:
"Batteryiscritical."
If this message is displayed you should act within the next 30 seconds or your BrailleNote PK may discharge itself, which has the same effect as a dots456 reset i.e. wiping any user files on the KeySoft system disk. The time available to switch off may be as little as 30 seconds but it is typically 15 to 20 minutes if you are not using high current accessories. You have two options. You can connect the AC adapter and carry on working indefinitely, or you can save your current work and switch off. To save your work, just return to the Main Menu. If the BrailleNote PK switches itself off, it cannot be switched on again until it is powered from the AC adapter. While the AC adapter is connected, the battery gauge will always display 100 percent.


2.2 Charging the Battery.
To charge the battery, simply plug the AC adapter in and the BrailleNote PK looks after the battery charging itself.
If the BrailleNote PK battery is flat and the AC adapter is connected, the battery is fast charged in about 2 hours. Charging takes less time if the battery is only partially discharged. You can charge the battery and run the BrailleNote PK simultaneously although the battery may take longer to charge. You can leave the AC adapter connected indefinitely without any risk of damaging the battery. To connect the AC adapter, locate the power socket on the back of the BrailleNote PK, near the lefthand corner of the case. Insert the plug on the AC adapter cable into the socket, and plug the AC adapter into a wall socket. The BrailleNote PK displays: "ACadapteron.
The message is displayed even if the BrailleNote PK is switched off. If this message is not displayed after a second or two, check that the AC supply is switched on, and that the plug on the end of the AC adapter cord is inserted securely into the BrailleNote PK's power socket.
When the battery is charging, if the AC supply is interrupted, or the AC adapter is disconnected the BrailleNote PK displays: "ACadapteroff.
This message, too, is displayed even if the BrailleNote PK is switched off.


2.3 Checking Power Status. PK
You can check the stateofcharge of the battery and whether the AC adapter is connected from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing SPACEwithO,thenP.
First, the batterystateofcharge in percent is displayed: Levelcpercent,
where c is the battery's stateofcharge. Then the AC adapter status is displayed: "Adapter(status),"
where "status" is either "on" or "off." After these messages are displayed, you are returned to your original place in KeySoft. .
Remember that when the AC Adapter is connected, the percentage will always display as 100 percent.


2.4 Battery Care.
Like all rechargeable batteries, as the BrailleNote PK battery ages its capacity reduces. If your BrailleNote PK is used every day we expect that the battery will last typically 18 months before the battery's capacity is noticeably lower than it was 18 months before. We recommend that you send the BrailleNote PK back to an authorized BrailleNote PK service center to replace the battery. Replacement batteries are expected to last typically 18 months before they too, need replacing.


2.4.1 Operating Temperature.
Batteries are particularly temperature sensitive. Exposure to temperatures outside of the ranges indicated below can cause the battery to cut out altogether.
The battery lasts longer if the BrailleNote PK is used in and stored at the same temperature range that you are comfortable in. If possible, avoid exposing the BrailleNote PK and its battery to high temperatures. The battery should only be charged in ambient temperatures from 50 to 104 degrees Fahrenheit or from 10 to 40 degrees Celsius. If the BrailleNote PK has been exposed to temperatures outside this range, leave it at room temperature for at least half an hour before plugging in the AC adapter. If you want the greatest capacity and longest life out of the battery we recommend that you keep the BrailleNote PK in a temperature range of 60 to 86 degree Fahrenheit, or 15 to 30 degrees Celsius.
To help ensure the BrailleNote PK is not overheated, we recommend that you do not leave it near a window, in a car, or in any other space where the sun can cause much higher temperatures than the ambient temperature. 


2.5 Long Term Storage.
If you store a BrailleNote PK for more than two to three weeks, the battery will become completely flat. If the battery was less than fully charged prior to storing the BrailleNote PK, the time for the battery to become fully flat will be shorter. This is because BrailleNote PK's battery self discharges internally and because BrailleNote PK draws a very small amount of current even when it is switched off. 
If you intend to leave the BrailleNote PK switched off for more than a few days, fully charge the battery beforehand, or leave the AC adapter connected if this is convenient. If you intend to store a BrailleNote PK for more than two to three weeks without the AC adapter connected, ensure your work is saved by returning to the Main Menu, and fully charge the battery before putting the BrailleNote PK into storage. 
When you take a BrailleNote PK out of longterm storage, first connect the AC adapter to charge the battery. Switch the BrailleNote PK on by pressing C1 and C4 together. If the battery has gone quite flat, you will be prompted to reset the time and date and so on. 

2.6 Using the Serial Port.
Reach beyond the keyboard to the back of your BrailleNote PK and investigate the layout of the back of your BrailleNote PK. This is where all the sockets and connectivity points are arranged. From the right there is a serial port, two recessed lights, USB port, headphone socket, a rounded protrusion that houses the inbuilt Bluetooth transceiver, the compact flash slot and the AC adapter socket.


2.6.1 Serial Port.
The serial port on the BrailleNote PK is a lot smaller than the standard 9 pin serial port. However it does the same thing  providing a connection to other devices such as a PC and a computer style qwerty keyboard. 
The serial plug goes into the port flat side up. It has two little lugs on either side that operate a locking mechanism that holds the plug in the port. To remove the plug, push these lugs in as you slide it out.
Because the serial port is a nonstandard type, the BrailleNote PK is shipped with its own cables, two in this case. One is a serial to PS2 adapter and is about 12 inches long, and the other is serial to 9 pin serial that also has a PS2 plug cable attached. You can use this second type of cable with just the serial to serial cable, to link up with a PC. 
The PS2 plugs are for use with a separate keyboard. The short serial to PS2 adapter allows you to plug the keyboard directly into the BrailleNote PK. The PS2 plug cable joined into the serial to serial cable allows you to be plugged into a PC with the 9 pin serial plug while also being plugged into a separate keyboard dedicated to the BrailleNote PK. This is great as you get two types of connection from the one serial port. For more information on using the BrailleNote PK with a separate keyboard, please refer to 15.2.2 Connecting to a PS2 keyboard.


2.6.2 USB Client Port.
The port to the left of the serial port is a USB clientonly port. This means that you can plug it into the USB port of a PC and perform tasks, but you can't plug into a "dumb" device, like a keyboard, using USB. The primary purpose of the USB client port on the BrailleNote PK is to allow you to access a PC via ActiveSync, with the option of accessing the internet over that connection. This is explained in 12.13.5 ActiveSync using USB


2.7 Compact Flash Cards.
A Compact Flash card is 3.5cm by 4cm, about the size of a matchbook. It provides considerable extra data storage, and cards come in a large range of capacities running into several gigabytes.
The BrailleNote PK has a card slot for Compact Flash cards. This slot is located on the back of the unit. As well as allowing you to use Compact Flash cards for extra data storage, the Compact Flash card slot can be used for data storage using a CF memory card, or as a plug for Compact Flash card type accessories. 

2.7.1 Inserting and Removing Compact Flash Cards.
The Compact Flash card is wider than it is long, so it is important to orient the card correctly, as attempting to plug the shorter side in may damage the pins in the back of the slot. Also, a polarizing key makes the card more difficult to plug in if it is the wrong way up. A simple strategy for finding the correct orientation is to just try gently plugging it in. If it engages, gently push it home. If it resists being inserted, take it out, invert it and try again.
You can also identify most Compact Flash cards' correct orientation by touch. The front of the Compact Flash card is the longer side that has two rows of pin sized indentations. The bottom side of most Compact Flash cards has a slight grip ridge along the opposite edge.
You could label the Compact Flash card once you have identified the correct orientation.
Compact cards can be installed with the BrailleNote PK switched on. When you do so the BrailleNote PK displays: "Cardinserted."
To remove a Compact Flash card, hold the card firmly and pull it out. This is quite tricky if you have big fingers or no fingernails. Most Compact Flash cards have a grip ridge that makes them easier to grasp. If the card is unplugged with the power on, BrailleNote PK displays: "Cardremoved."


2.7.2 Accessing files on the Compact Flash Card.
The Compact Flash card slot is treated as a drive by KeySoft. To access files on the Compact Flash Card, at any file prompt, go to the drive list and press C for compactflash card. Proceed as normal.


2.8 Using a Remote Visual Display.
BrailleNote PK can provide a text output via the serial or USB ports to a visual display. Sighted observers or teachers can use the visual display screen to view KeySoft's prompts and help messages, and your text if you are typing a document. The visual display can be a terminal or a PC, laptop or handheld computer running terminal emulation software. The terminal or terminal emulation software must emulate a DEC VT100 or an ANSI terminal.
For PC's running Windows, "HyperTerminal" is provided as part of the communications accessories and can be used as the terminal software. To facilitate the use of HyperTerminal as the remote Visual Display for the BrailleNote PK, a program shortcut is provided on the CDRom supplied as part of the BrailleNote PK package.


2.8.1 Connecting a Visual Display to the Serial Port.
In the following discussion when we refer to a terminal, we mean either a dedicated terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software. 
The following procedure might require the help of a technician if the terminal is unfamiliar to you. The procedure involves connecting the BrailleNote PK to the terminal using a cable and setting up the terminal to communicate at a certain speed and format. This can be done manually for some terminals. Or if the terminal is intelligent, done by the terminal itself as it automatically detects the serial speed and format. The necessary settings are:
bit rate: 38400 bps.
parity: none.
data bits: 8.
stop bits: 1.
To connect BrailleNote PK's serial port to a terminal, use the double serial to serial cable provided. Plug the small end of the serial cable into the serial port as described in 2.6.1 Serial Port. Plug the junction end of the cable into a matching socket on the terminal. Ensure the terminal is switched on. 
Finally, direct the BrailleNote PK to drive the serial port by selecting the remote visual display output as described in 2.8.2 Turning the Visual Display On and Off below. Now, when the BrailleNote PK displays something such as a prompt the terminal should also display the corresponding prompt. If the terminal responds when the connected BrailleNote PK displays something but the terminal's display is not intelligible then the speed and/or format are probably not right. Correct the settings and retry.


2.8.2 Turning the Visual Display On and Off.
The last step towards providing a visual display is to have your BrailleNote PK send text to the serial output. Press SPACEwithO, then V for Visual display. KeySoft displays:
"Visualdisplay,Currentlyoff."
The options are:
To turn the visual display ON press N then ENTER;
To send the visual display to the Serial port press Sthen ENTER;
Or just press ENTER to leave the selection unchanged.
To turn the visual display off again after use, press SPACEwithO, then V, thenF for OFF then ENTER.
Use the serial port if you are using a standard computer terminal or a PC running a terminal emulator program.


2.9 Braille Terminal for Screen Reader.
BrailleNote can act like a remote Braille line or terminal. You can then run a screen reader, for example Window Eyes, JAWS, or HAL on a desktop PC, using the BrailleNote PK as its Braille display.
The serial communications or null modem cable provided with your BrailleNote PK should be used to connect the PC to your BrailleNote PK. If your PC's serial port has a 25 pin connector you will need to use the 9 pin to 25 pin adapter also provided. Plug the cable into the serial port on the rear of BrailleNote PK as described in 2.6.1 Serial Port. Plug the other end into a serial port on your PC.
To access the Braille Terminal, either go to the Main Menu and press T, or from anywhere, press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithT. KeySoft displays: "BrailleTerminal."
The BrailleNote PK now acts as a Braille display connected to the serial port of the desktop PC. You are able to run a screen reader from the desktop keyboard, and BrailleNote PK displays text on its display. Refer to your screen reader documentation for details of how the screen reader interacts with the BrailleNote PK. The screen reader will have an associated driver, and maybe other configuration files, that determine the function of the BrailleNote PK keyboard when it is being used as a Braille display.
BrailleNote PK cannot be used for its normal functions while it is acting as a remote Braille display, however, you can use the "Change Task" option to temporarily leave the Braille Terminal. For example, during a screen reading session, you may wish to temporarily switch to the Planner to add an appointment, and then switch back to using the Braille Terminal mode. To exit the Terminal for Screen Reader mode, press SPACEwithE and you are returned to the Main Menu.
You should plug in the AC adapter if you intend to use your BrailleNote PK as a remote display for an extended period.


2.10 Remote Synthesizer.
Your BrailleNote PK can act like a Keynote Gold Stand Alone speech synthesizer. You can then run a screen reader on a desktop PC, using your BrailleNote PK as its synthesizer.
You must connect your BrailleNote PK to your PC as described for the Braille Terminal in 2.9 Braille Terminal for Screen Reader.
On your BrailleNote PK, at the Main Menu, press R. KeySoft displays: "Remotesynthesizerready."
The BrailleNote PK now acts as a Keynote Stand Alone synthesizer.
On the Braille display, the message "Remotesynthesizerready" will remain while the BrailleNote PK is being used in this mode.
BrailleNote PK cannot be used for its normal functions while it is acting as a synthesizer. To exit the Remote Synthesizer mode, press SPACEwithE and you are returned to the KeySoft Main Menu. You should plug in the AC adapter if you intend to use your BrailleNote PK as a remote synthesizer for an extended period.


2.11 Braille Display Care.
Each cell of the Braille display has eight pins. For each pin there is a special crystal that lifts the pin to make a dot, and allows the pin to drop when there is no dot. The pins have to be able to move freely. In normal use dirt unavoidably accumulates on the display and around the touch cursor buttons. To prevent the pins from jamming, the display and touch cursor should be cleaned regularly. Cleaning the Braille display is not straightforward. We recommend that you send the BrailleNote PK back to an authorized BrailleNote PK service center every twelve months to clean the Braille display.
Making sure that your hands are always clean is a good start towards minimizing problems with your Braille display. We suggest that once per week you wipe the surface of the Braille display using a soft damp cloth. The cloth should be squeezed hard to ensure that all excess moisture has been removed. Use only warm water on the cloth.


2.12 General Care.
Apart from cleaning the case, the BrailleNote PK needs no special maintenance. The internal battery should last typically 18 months before needing replacement and this must be done by an authorized service agent. Keep beverages like tea and coffee away from the BrailleNote PK. Periodically wipe the case down with a warm damp cloth. Don't use any cleaning compounds.



3 Word Processor.
This chapter introduces the basics of KeyWord, the word processor part of KeySoft, and describes how to create, read and edit a document. Advanced aspects of KeyWord, including creating documents with more complex formats, and quickly making extensive changes to a document, are covered in Chapter 6.
In the following discussion, the general terms "announcements," "prompts" and "reading" apply to any of the outputs available in the BrailleNote family of products. If your model is a VoiceNote, they refer to audio output only. For BrailleNote models, they can refer to either the Braille display, the audio output, or both.


3.1 What is a Word Processor?
A word processor is like a sophisticated Braille writer or typewriter. The difference is that you do not have to get the document right first time. You can add, delete and change things to your heart's content, and all the time your work is stored in BrailleNote PK's memory. 
There are other advantages too. You can make changes at a later date, and you can keep all the various versions. It's easy to make copies of documents, and filing and retrieving is much simpler than with hard copy. 
Besides writing documents, KeyWord is useful just for reading documents such as emailed documents that have originated elsewhere. These can be read directly without translating them to Braille.


3.2 Braille and Text.
When you start to compose a document, KeyWord assumes that you want to do it in Braille, so the layout and format are for a Braille page, as it would appear when embossed. This doesn't mean that you are committed to a Braille document, however. You can send it to another computer or email it, and KeySoft automatically translates it into a suitable format. 
Alternatively, you have the option of creating a text document directly, with a layout and format for an inkprint page. A text document requires the use of Computer Braille, which is discussed in 6.19 Computer Braille. 
Unlike some other word processors, KeyWord allows you to work with the layout of a document as it will be embossed or printed. This means that you are working with the actual layout while you are editing, and you do not have to make allowances for any effects of formatting commands. 
KeyWord allows you to format a document for embossing and independently format the same document for printing. The two sets of formatting controls are independent. Consequently the layout of a document, either Braille or text, can be precisely controlled without making changes between embossing and printing. 


3.3 The KeyWord Menu.
To select the word processing functions, start from the Main Menu and press SPACE repeatedly until "Wordprocessor" is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, just press W. If you have the Braille display on, you can also use the ADVANCE navigation key to step through the menu and the NEXT navigation key to select an item. KeySoft displays: "KeyWordMenu."
Press SPACEto display the first item in the KeyWord Menu, which is: "Createadocument."
As the prompt suggests, you use this option when you want to create a new document. Press SPACE again, and KeySoft displays the second item, which is: "Openadocument."
You use the "Open" option to read an existing document, or to make changes to one.


3.4 Documents Folders and Drives.
3.4.1 Documents.
Documents are the most common type of file you will use on the BrailleNote PK. You must give each document a unique name enabling KeySoft to distinguish one document from another. For example, when you use KeyWord to write a letter, that letter is stored as a document. Every document name should indicate what type of information it contains. Document names can be up to 250 characters long, and can contain any Braille sign except for: \ / : " < > | * and ?.


3.4.2 Folders.
When you have been using your BrailleNote PK for a while you could very easily accumulate several hundred documents, and it could become tedious to find any particular one. To make life easier, documents can be organized into groups called "Folders." Initially, there are folders named "General," and "My Books," together with a number of others which KeySoft uses. Besides these, you can create as many new folders as you wish.
If you have a lot of files to organize and are comfortable with the concept, you might want to create a directory structure of folders, where there is more than one layer of folders. Details about how to do this and all other aspects of folder and file management are covered in Chapter 12.
Folders can contain both Braille and text documents. Folder names can be up to 250 characters long, and can consist of any Braille signs except those for the following characters: \ / : * ? " < > |


3.4.3 Drives.
Documents can be stored by different pieces of hardware in the BrailleNote PK, called disk drives, or just drives. BrailleNote PK incorporates a type of memory called flash memory. The associated drive is referred to as a Flash Disk. It provides fast, secure storage, retaining its contents even if the battery is flat. It is the memory you normally use to save your documents. You can copy, rename, erase or edit and resave documents to the Flash Disk.
Another drive is the KeySoft System Disk. This drive stores information installed in the factory. This includes the main operating software, User Guide, and a sample book. Information installed at the Factory is retained even if the battery goes flat, but user information stored in the KeySoft System Disk will be lost. It is therefore not recommended that you save documents in the KeySoft System Disk, but you can open documents like the sample book and the BrailleNote PK user guide that are stored in it. If you do save documents in the KeySoft System Disk, be aware that they will be lost if the battery goes flat or you do a Reset with dots456 held down.
You can also add external drives to the BrailleNote PK.


3.4.4 Changing the Current Drive.
There is a way of selecting a drive in KeySoft generally, which is not restricted to KeyWord. If you are at a prompt for a filename or folder name, and you have not had the opportunity to select a drive, then press BACKSPACE. KeySoft displays: "Drive?(Lastdriveused)."
To step through the list of available drives press SPACE. The list comprises the Flash Disk and KeySoft System Disk, and if in use, the Compact Flash card, PC card, SD card and Network. To select a drive, either step through the list of available drives press SPACEorADVANCEthen press NEXTorENTER,or just type the first letter of the drive name. 


3.5 Opening a Document.
Several documents are provided with KeySoft. If you want to read one of them, how do you select it? From the KeyWord menu, select "Open a document." Or press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithW to go directly there. KeyWord displays: "Foldername?PressENTERfor(name),"where the word "name" between the brackets is really the name of the last folder used.
To select a document you must first select the appropriate folder. There are three different methods of doing this:
1. To select the offered folder, just press ENTER. This is the folder that was last used.
2. To look through the list of available folders, press SPACE or ADVANCE repeatedly. When the name of the folder you require is displayed, select it by pressing NEXTorENTER. You can move back along the list by pressing BACKSPACEorPREVIOUS repeatedly.
While scanning the list you can quickly relocate to an alphabetical position in the list by pressing a letter. For example, pressing T puts you at the beginning of the list of folders starting with T. If you keep on pressing T, you cycle through all the names starting with that letter.
3. Type the name of the folder you require, and press ENTER. With this method, remember that you must type the name exactly or this will not work.
You can change the current drive by pressing BACKSPACE at the "Foldername?" prompt. The Flash Disk is assumed here. If another drive was previously selected, a drive prompt is given as described in 3.4.4 Changing the Current Drive above.
When you have selected a folder, KeyWord asks: "Documenttoopen?PressENTERfor(name),"where (name) is the name of the last document you accessed.
Just like folder selection, the same three methods are available for selecting a document. Select the offered document by just pressing ENTER, or review the list of documents by pressing SPACE repeatedly and select a document by pressing ENTER, or Braille the document name and press ENTER.
This selection procedure is significant because it is general throughout KeySoft, and is not restricted to just opening a document.


3.6 Naming a Document.
In the next section we talk about creating a document, but first we discuss names. Each document must have a unique, meaningful name so that it can be stored and later retrieved by specifying its name. You can use whatever name you like, with up to 250 Braille characters and spaces, in Grade 1 or Grade 2 as you wish.
If you have several documents on a similar subject, you may find it helpful to put the common part of the name first. For example, you might have:
"Club minutes, January,"
"Club minutes, February,"
and so on. These document names would be grouped together alphabetically for easy location. If the months are put first, the documents are scattered through the list of documents.
Documents can be grouped into folders to make them easier to find. As an example, the documents just mentioned might all be put into a folder called "Club minutes 2001." If you do this, it may then be easier to name your documents without the common part of the name, for example, "January" and "February". The rules for naming a folder are the same as for naming a document.
Some characters are reserved and you may not use them in a document name. They are: \ / : " < > | * and ?.


3.7 Creating a Document
We now create a trial document. From the Main Menu, select the Word Processor option. From the KeyWord menu select "Createadocument." KeySoft prompts:
"Foldername?General."
The General folder is fine, so press ENTER to accept KeySoft's suggestion. You are then asked:
"Documenttocreate?"
Type in the name: "Sample", with or without a capital sign as you wish, and press ENTER. KeySoft says:
"TopofDocument.Blank."
The Braille display is blank. You are now at the top lefthand corner of an empty Braille document. 
Press a character. Why are there two dots on the Braille display below and to the right of your character? It's the BrailleNote PK's standard Braille cursor. The cursor shows where the next character will go. It is discussed in more detail below. 
Without worrying about mistakes, Braille half a dozen sentences, using either Grade 1 or Grade 2. Each character is displayed on the Braille display as you Braille it. Each word is spoken only when you have pressed the space bar to complete the word. You can change the Keyboard Voice so that KeySoft speaks each letter as it is Brailled, or both words and letters, or nothing at all. How to change the Keyboard Voice is discussed in 1.17.4 Setting the Keyboard Voice. 
You may also notice that you can Braille indefinitely without worrying about the right margin. This is because KeyWord automatically starts a new line if it cannot fit another word onto the current line. This process is known as word wrapping. The start of a new line is shown on the Braille display as dots 1246, followed by the letter L. You probably know dots 1246 as the grade 2 contraction "ed." It is also $ in computer Braille. The symbols $l indicate a line break. There are many of these special format indicators that start with "ed" or $ such as this. They are described in more depth in 3.12 Format Indicators.
Also notice that when you fill the Braille display KeySoft automatically moves so that there is room to show the last complete word at the right of the display. 
Start a new Braille paragraph by pressing ENTER to start a new line, followed by two spaces, and Braille a few more sentences. Places where you have pressed ENTER to start a new line are shown on the Braille display as dots 1246 or "ed" followed by the letter p. This is also discussed again later. 
When you have finished brailling, press SPACEwithE. Your document is saved, and you are returned to the KeyWord menu.


3.8 Reading a Document.
We now discuss the various commands for reading a document. We recommend you open your "Sample" document, or the "Demonstration Document" that comes with KeySoft, so that you can practice using the reading commands. The "Demonstration Document" is found in the "General" folder. Open the document as explained in 3.5 Opening a Document.
Reviewing the document by reading the Braille display is, of course, quite different from listening to the document, so these two methods are discussed separately below. First we discuss reviewing using the Braille display.


3.8.1 Reading Using the Braille Display
 You can read through the document up to eighteen or thirtytwo symbols at a time. This depends on the width of the Braille display of your BrailleNote PK and the number of whole words that fit on the display. KeySoft avoids breaking the last word by leaving the last few cells blank.
The Braille display provides a window into the document. You can step this window forwards or backwards through the document using the joystick. ADVANCE steps forward one window and BACK steps back a window. After reading across the display press ADVANCE to display the next window.
Repeat the procedure to read through the document. You can go back if necessary by pressing BACK. You can also move the display to the left or right a word at a time. To move the display back a word in the document, press PREVIOUS with BACK at the same time. To move the display forward a word, press PREVIOUS with ADVANCE.
The function of the PREVIOUS and NEXT navigation keys is defined in the Braille Display Options. For information on how to change the setting, refer to 5.4.4 Function of Previous and Next navigation Keys.
The default setting is Up and Down, and using this setting PREVIOUS steps directly up and NEXT steps directly down where the document has text organized in columns or tables. When text is arranged in sentences the cursor moves to the same place in the line directly above or below.
The function of PREVIOUS and NEXT can also be set to move back or forward by sentence or paragraph. By changing the cursor movement mode within the document, these joystick commands move by line rather than sentence, and section rather than paragraph. Cursor movement modes are discussed in 6.8 Cursor Movement Modes.
To return to the top of the document, press SPACEwithdots123. KeySoft displays a window of text starting at the very first symbol in the document.
To jump directly to the end of the document, press SPACEwithdots456. KeySoft displays a window of text ending with the last symbol in the document.
Experiment with the navigation to become familiar. Try reading your "sample" document or the "Demonstration Document" in this way.
You can set your BrailleNote PK to automatically advance the display without you having to press the ADVANCEkey all the time. Each Braille window is displayed for a time before the next window is displayed. You can set the speed to suit your particular preference. To start the automatic advance press N1and N4together.Press N4 to speed up and N1 to slow down the display rate. You can stop by pressing N1and N4 simultaneously again. You can read through the document up to eighteen symbols at a time. This depends on the number of whole words that fit on the display. 
In text documents, you can change the reading grade of Braille by simply pressing ADVANCEwithNEXTrepeatedly to cycle through the options, which are your preferred Braille grade, 6 dot computer Braille or 8 dot computer Braille.




3.8.2 Listening to a Document.
When you are reading sentences or paragraphs, you may be simply listening to the text, or checking it in detail for errors. You can choose to hear the amount of detail you require by setting the punctuation level. You may also choose whether numbers are spoken as words or as digits. 
You can use the primary Braille keyboard to enter commands when listening to BrailleNote PK's speech. To listen to a document without stopping, press SPACEwithG. KeySoft continues reading to the end of the document unless you stop by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTER at the same time. You can start and stop as you wish with these two commands. 
To return to the top of the document, press SPACEwithdots123. KeySoft says: "Topofdocument,"and announces the first word of the document. 
To jump directly to the end of the document, press SPACEwithdots456.
Experiment with the Go, Stop, Beginning and End commands until you are happy that you understand their effects. 
There are several other important commands for moving around the text. There is an important convention here:
To move back and read something, use the lefthand keys;
To move forward and read something, use the righthand keys;
To read something without moving, use both left and righthand keys. 
For example, try the commands for reading characters:
To move back a character and read it, press SPACEwithdot3;
To read the current character, press SPACEwithdots36; (Press this command once to hear the character spoken. Press it again, and if the character is a letter, you will hear its "call sign" e.g. Alpha for A, Bravo for B etc.)
To move forward a character and read it, press SPACEwithdot6.
This convention also applies to reading whole words, as follows:
To move back a word and read it, press SPACEwithdot2;
To read the current word, press SPACEwithdots25; (Press this command once to hear the word spoken. Press it again, and the word is spelled out)
To move forward a word and read it, press SPACEwithdot5.
You may be able to guess the next triplet of commands:
To move back a sentence and read it, press SPACEwithdot1;
To read the current sentence, press SPACEwithdots14;
To move forward a sentence and read it, SPACEwithdot4;
You may have noticed another scheme in use. The outer fingers, on dots3and6, are used to read small elements, or characters. The inner fingers, on dots1and4, are used for larger elements like sentences. A similar convention applies for previous, current, and next paragraphs:
To move back a paragraph and read it, press SPACEwithdots23;
To read the current paragraph, press SPACEwithdots2356;
To move forward a paragraph and read it, press SPACEwithdots56.
You can follow a sentence or paragraph read command with another sentence or paragraph read command to immediately change the prose being read. 
Try reading your "Sample" document or the "Demonstration Document" with these commands. You can refresh your memory by pressing SPACEwithH, for Help, and opening the "Review Commands" list. Alternatively you can enter the Announce Key mode by pressing SPACEwithW and practice the review keystrokes. 
When using several review commands one after the other, you do not have to wait for speech to finish, nor do you have to release SPACE after each command. Here is an example where we move back several words and then move forward a character at a time. First press, and hold down, SPACE with either thumb. Now, with SPACE held down, tap dot2 several times, to move back several words. With the SPACEstill held down, tap dot6 several times to move forward several characters. Finally release the space bar. 
The BACKSPACE and ENTER keys operate in the same way when they are used for deleting and formatting text as described later. You will find this feature very convenient to use and easy on your wrists.


3.8.3 Review Voice.
The Review Voice settings determine when KeySoft speaks and how much detail KeySoft includes when reading. When you hold down the PREVIOUS navigation key, press SPACE and release both keys, KeySoft displays the current Review Voice. The options are;Speech On, Speech On Request, and Speech Off.
The Review Voice settings can also be accessed by pressing SPACE with O then R, anywhere in KeySoft. KeySoft might prompt: "Speech?Currentlyon."
The options are as follows:
To have speech and sounds on, press N for ON.
To have speech on Request, press R.
To turn off speech and all sounds except alarms, press F for OFF.
When the Speech on Request option is selected, KeySoft only speaks when you use a command that is a specific speech command. For example, in KeyWord, the word processor, when you move forward word by word using SPACEwithdot5, nothing is spoken. However if you use the dedicated "Speak Word under Cursor" command, SPACEwithdots25, the word under the cursor is spoken.
After selecting the speech setting above, or pressing ENTER to leave the current level unchanged, KeySoft displays: "Punctuationlevel?(number)."
where the word "number" shown in brackets is really an actual number from 1 to 5. At level 1, no punctuation is announced. At level 5, all characters are spelt out, along with all punctuation. The default setting is 2. The intermediate levels are described in 5.6.3 Punctuation level. This setting applies whenever you are editing or reviewing documents or text.
To leave the setting unchanged, press ENTER. To select a particular punctuation level, press a number from 1 to 5, then press ENTER.
KeySoft then prompts: "NumberFormat?(Words)."
where the word shown in brackets is really the currently selected option either "Words" or "Digits."The options are W, for numbers spoken as words, or D, for numbers spoken digit by digit. If you select the word format, the number 1942 is spoken as nineteenfortytwo, since it is assumed to be a date. The sequence $25.15 is spoken as twentyfivedollarsandfifteencents.
If you select the digits option, the number 1942 is spoken digit by digit. The choice is a matter of personal preference.
To leave a setting unchanged, just press ENTER, or press W or D for the option you prefer, followed by ENTER. You are returned to the point at which you selected the Review Voice settings.


3.8.4 Identifying Indistinctly Spoken Characters.
When you read a character by pressing SPACEwithdots36, it is sometimes difficult to distinguish between letters that sound similar. If you press SPACEwithdots36, twice, KeySoft expands the current character into a word, such as A  Alpha, B  Bravo, etc. 

3.8.5 Spelling Out a Word.
If you press SPACEwithdots25, twice, KeySoft spells the current word. 
In a Braille document, three presses of SPACEwithdots25 cause KeySoft to spell a translated version of the word. If the word in question contains one or more grade 2 contractions, those contractions are expanded to their equivalent characters and the expanded word is spelt out. For example, the word "time" is spelled as "dot5T" on the second press but "time" on the third press. 

3.9 Review Commands.
The following discussion is applicable when reading the Braille display and when listening to a document.


3.9.1 Moving to Either End of a Line.
You can move position to the start of the current line by pressing SPACEwithdots13. To move to one position past the last word in the line, press SPACEwithdots46.Notice the leftright symmetry of these two commands.


3.9.2 Selecting ReviewOnly Mode.
If you are reading a document that you don't wish to alter, you can avoid having to press SPACE with all the reading commands. To enter this ReviewOnly Mode, press SPACEwithX.
You can then use all the reading commands without needing to press SPACE.For example, to read the current word, just press dots 25.This mode continues until you press SPACEwithX again or exit the word processor.


3.10 The Cursor.
The cursor is an important concept because many KeyWord commands use the cursor as a reference to determine where to apply the command. It is also very important to understand exactly where the cursor is in your document so that your changes occur as you intend. Otherwise you may find the changes you make are wrong.
The cursor is a pointer to a single character in a document. The cursor is normally indicated on the Braille display as two dots below the usual six dot Braille cell; dots7and8, This is the factory setting form of the cursor. To find out how to change the form of the cursor, refer to 5.4 Braille Display Options. When you are using speech you can tell which character the cursor is on by pressingSPACEwithdots36. You can use the read current word, sentence and paragraph commands to determine the context of the cursor.
Editing takes effect at the cursor position. Whether you are using the Braille display or listening to the voice, if you want to edit the document, you must position the cursor at the point you want the change to start. The cursor indicates the position in the document where the next character will appear when it is Brailled. The character is inserted at the cursor position and everything to the right, including the cursor, is shifted one character to the right to make room. Pressing BACKSPACE deletes the character immediately to the left of the cursor, and everything to the right of the cursor is moved one character to the left to fill the vacated space.


3.10.1 Using the Touch Cursor.
Remember that the buttons immediately behind each cell of the Braille display comprise the touch cursor. To position the cursor at a particular cell you only have to press the cursor button associated with that cell. This is convenient to start editing at that point. First find the Braille cell in the Braille display where you want to start editing. Now move your finger directly above that cell and away from yourself until you feel a vertical ridge that curves upwards slightly. Press this and you notice a tactile action that confirms your press. Read the cell again. You find that the cursor is now positioned at the cell because dots7and8 are displayed, assuming that you are using the standard cursor form. It is as simple as that.


3.10.2 Displaying the Cursor.
Having the cursor always displayed on the Braille display can make reading awkward, but it is needed for editing. KeySoft provides several Braille display modes to suit the situation. When you first enter KeyWord, Automatic mode is the default. You will probably use this mode most of the time when you are Brailling and/or proofreading. Here the cursor is turned on automatically when you are editing and turned off when you are reading. Reading with the ADVANCE and BACK navigation keys leaves the cursor position unchanged so that you can read the context without losing your place.
You can always bring the cursor to a particular cell in any of the following ways:
Press the touch cursor directly behind the cell;
Press SPACEwithdots36 to read the current character or SPACEwithdots25 to read the current word;
Bring the cursor to the first cell of the display by pressing BACK and ADVANCEtogether.
Some format indicators are displayed only if the cursor is on the indicator, others are displayed always. Format indicators are discussed later in 3.12 Format Indicators.


3.10.3 Moving the Cursor.
BrailleNote PK also allows you to position the cursor using the keyboard. The following discussion describes the cursor movement commands using the keyboard.
When you press SPACEwithdot3 or SPACEwithdot6, the cursor moves backward or forward by one character on each press. The character that is spoken is the character under the cursor after the move.
After reading the current character, word, sentence or paragraph, the cursor position remains unchanged.
If you read the previous or next word, the cursor moves to the first character of that word.
When you read the previous or next sentence, the cursor moves to the first character of the first word of that sentence, after reading has been completed.
Similarly, when you read the previous or next paragraph, the cursor ends up on the first character of that paragraph.
You can skip through a document quickly by using the readnextsentence or readnextparagraph commands, SPACEwithdot4 and SPACEwithdots56. If you press either of these commands while reading is in progress, KeyWord immediately jumps to the start of the next sentence or paragraph and begins reading from there. Try this by going to the start of your document and skipping through to the end by using SPACEwithdot4.
At any time during reading you can stop the process by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTER at the same time. The cursor is placed on the first character of the last word that was spoken. Alternatively, you can press SPACEwithE. In this case KeySoft stops reading, and returns the cursor to where reading began.
There are some more advanced cursor movement commands that provide movement by lines rather than sentences, and vertical movement within a document. These commands are explained in 6.8 Cursor Movement Modes.
When a new document is created, the cursor is placed at the top left corner of the blank document. When an existing document is opened, the cursor is placed where it was when the document was last accessed. On entry into the document, KeySoft displays the last few words before the cursor, and the word at the cursor position.


3.11 Braille Display Modes.
In KeyWord you use the Braille display for three purposes:
Reading. For example, your own notes, or a document someone has given or sent you, or an email. You are interested in just reading the text as efficiently as possible. You are not interested in how the author has laid out the text as long as you can tell where paragraphs begin. You definitely don't want a cursor getting in the way of your reading.
Editing and proofreading. Here you need to move the cursor around the document and read all detailed formatting information.
Checking the layout for printing or embossing. You want to check what the margins, indents, tabs, centering, and so on, will actually be like before you convert your document to a format that can be embossed or printed. For example, when editing, a tab appears as a special marker. This is so that you know it is a tab rather than just several spaces. In layout mode the symbol disappears and the display shows how the tab will appear on paper.
To allow you to use the Braille display efficiently for each of these purposes, KeyWord has four Braille display modes. You can check which mode you are in and change the mode using the Braille Display Options in the Options menu. Alternatively you can check or change the mode by pressing the PREVIOUSandNEXTnavigation keys together. The first press displays the current mode; subsequent presses cycle through the modes.


3.11.1 Automatic Mode.
Automatic mode is the default setting for KeyWord. This is a combination of the reading and editing modes and you will probably use this mode most of the time when you are Brailling and/or proof reading. Here the cursor is turned on automatically when you are editing and turned off when you are reading. Reading with ADVANCE and BACK leaves the cursor position unchanged so that you can read the context without losing your place. You can always bring the cursor to a particular position by using the touch cursor or bring the cursor to the first cell of the display by pressing BACKandADVANCE together. Detailed information such as format indicators are displayed only if the cursor is on the indicator.


3.11.2 Reading Mode.
Use this mode for straight reading. In this mode the cursor is never displayed but always resides on the leftmost cell of the display. The only formatting indicated is what is necessary for reading, such as new line indicators and tabs. The format indicator for displaying new lines and tabs is by default based on those recommended by the Braille Authority of North America. If desired you may change the method by which new lines are indicated. This is covered in more detail in 3.12.2 New Line Indicator.


3.11.3 Editing Mode.
In this mode the cursor is always on and all formatting information is displayed.


3.11.4 Layout Mode.
In this mode the document is laid out on the Braille display in the same way as it will appear on paper when it is printed, in the case of text documents, or embossed, in the case of Braille documents. Each line starts with a Braille format indicator, $p, $f, or $l to show whether it is the first line of a page, paragraph, etc. The line is then shown complete with margins, indents, etc., and ends with another Braille format indicator. The display is not word wrapped and does not wrap around lines. Each press of ADVANCE or BACK moves the display by exactly one display width along the line or starts a new line. The NEXT and PREVIOUS navigation keys move the display up and down.


3.12 Format Indicators.
To tell you how a document is formatted, KeySoft places special format indicators at particular points in a document. These format indicators are both spoken and displayed on the Braille display. You may have encountered a number of special groups of symbols on the Braille display when you were reviewing your "Sample" document. They tell you how the document is formatted. When displaying format indicators KeySoft follows the guidelines set for literary Braille format established by the Braille Authority of North America.
When using speech, format indicators are identified by their names. If the cursor is positioned over an indicator, the name of the indicator is displayed. On the Braille display, if the cursor is positioned under a format indicator, it appears under each of the characters of the format indicator.


3.12.1 Common Indicators.
Format indicators are groups of symbols that always start with a computer Braille dollar sign, $. In US computer Braille this is dots1246 which is the same as the grade 2 "ed" contraction. In UK computer Braille it is dots456.There is always a space before the $ and another space after the group of symbols. The symbol or symbols following the $ determine what the format indicator is showing.
For example, the new line indicator, which usually indicates the end of a paragraph, is a space followed by the dollar sign, followed by the letter p, and terminated by a space.
Common format indicators are:
LINE BREAK: KeySoft automatically started a new line because there wasn't any more room on the current line. A line break indicator is shown as the dollar sign followed by the letter l, $l.KeySoft automatically word wraps meaning that it starts a new line if it runs out of room on the current line. A line break indicator is inserted into the text showing you where a new line is started. The line break indicator is announced as "linebreak".
NEW LINE: A new line was started by pressing ENTER. A new line is shown as the dollar sign followed by the letter p, $p. Often a new line indicator marks the beginning of a new paragraph. The new line indicator is announced as "newline".
PAGE BREAK: KeySoft started a new page because the previous page was full in much the same way that word wrap starts a new line when the previous line is full. The page break indicator always appears in conjunction with a line break or new line indicator in a document and is indicated by the addition of an f for new form after the $l or $p indicators. For example, $lf or $pf. The page break indicator is announced as "pagebreak."The position of a page break varies as you add or delete lines of text.
NEW PAGE: The start of a new page is forced by pressing SPACEwithP. The new page indicator is shown in Braille as the dollar sign followed by the letter f for form, $f. The new page indicator is announced as "newpage."
Don't forget that all of the indicators have a space before them and after them.
The positions of block markers, place markers and a range of other formatting markers described in this chapter and in Chapter 6, are also indicated in a document. The full set of format indicators used by KeyWord is below. If you don't recognize all of them or what they do, don't worry as they are all mentioned in context elsewhere in the user guide.

Line Break:	$l.
New Line:	$p.
Page Break:	$lf or $pf.
New page:	$f.
Placemarker:	$plc
New layout:	$nl
Indent:	$i
Tab:	$t
Tab 2:	$t#2
Center line:	$c
Right Justify Line:	$r
Paragraph Style:	$sp
Heading style:	$h
Sub heading:	$h#n
Outline style:	$ou
Line style:	$sl
Identical to Source:	$si
Ink print layout:	$nli
Ink print Indent:	$ii
Ink print exclusion:	$xis
End ink print exclusion:	$xie
Translation option:	$txi
Ink print page setting:	$psi
Top Block Marker:	$blt
Insert date:	$dtp
Binding space:	$bsp
Start Underline:	$fsu
End Underline:	$feu
Font start:	$fsn
Font end:	$fen
New Braille Layout:	$nlb
Braille indent:	$ib
Braille only inclusion:	$ob
Start Braille exclusion:	$xbs
End Braille exclusion:	$xbe
Braille Grade 0 indicator :	$g#0.
Braille Grade 1 indicator :	$g#1.
Braille Grade 2 indicator :	$g#2.
Braille page setting:	$psb
Braille Translation Indicator:	$txb
Extended character:	$ch
Extended symbol:	$m


3.12.2 New Line Indicator.
When reading large amounts of text you may find the new line indicator annoying. It is possible to change the way in which new lines are indicated.
This option is available within a document, an email, or within the Planner. It determines how the start of a new line or paragraph is shown on the Braille display.
For linear Braille format where the start of a new line is indicated by the Computer Braille dollar sign then p, (dots1246p), press L.
For an indent of one cell, press A.
For an indent of two cells, press B.
For two spaces anywhere they happen to fall on the display, press dots23.
For three spaces anywhere they happen to fall on the display, press dots25.


3.12.3 Searching for Format Indicators.
If you wish to introduce changes to the layout or presentation of a document, you may need to locate format indicators such as layout indicators, font indicators, underline indicators, etc. If you want to change the format of paragraphs, you may need to locate new line indicators.
The Find command, SPACEwithF, and the Find and Replace command, BACKSPACEwithF, can be used to locate any of these format indicators. To go to the next occurrence of the selected format indicator, press SPACE with N.
You can use the following command sequences to search for these indicators, and also to insert Format indicators into a document when entered at the "Replace with?" prompt:
New Line:	SPACEwithdots126.
New Page:	SPACEwithP.
New Layout:	BACKSPACEwithL.
Underline On:	ENTERwithUN.
Underline Off:	ENTERwithUF.
Font On:	ENTERwithTXN.
Font Off:	ENTERwithTXF.
Center Line:	ENTERwithC.
Right Justify:	ENTERwithR.
Indent:	ENTERwithI.
Start Braille or inkprint exclusion:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithdots34.
End Braille or inkprint exclusion:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithdots26.
Translation Options indicator:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithO.
Text or Braille only inclusion:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithI.
Text or Braille layout:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithL.
Style of presentation indicator:	BACKSPACEwithS.
Template Menu:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithdots2346.
Change Braille grade:	BACKSPACEwithG.


3.13 Editing a Document.
We have described how to create a new document and review its contents. This section introduces the basic text editing commands. The most common forms of editing are deleting or inserting characters, words, or sentences. These commands are described here, along with searching, search and replace, defining pages, and moving to particular points in a document. Advanced word processing commands are covered in Chapter 6.


3.13.1 Inserting Text.
To insert a character, word, sentence, or any amount of text, you need only to position the cursor at the point where you want to insert the text, and start Brailling. No special command is required because KeyWord is always in the insert mode.
Text is inserted at the cursor position. The character that was at the cursor, and all following characters, move to the right to make room. Experiment with this by inserting some words in your "Sample" document.


3.13.2 Deleting Text.
There are seven different delete commands available with KeyWord, allowing for the deleting of sections of text from one character to the whole document.
Delete current character 
Press BACKSPACEwithdots36.
This deletes the character under the cursor. A short beep is sounded followed by announcement of the new character under the cursor. This command is also available by holding down SPACE and pressing D twice. The text to the right of the character is all moved one character to the left to fill the gap. The cursor is now placed on the next character and this character is displayed.
Delete last character 
Press BACKSPACE.
This deletes the previous character, that is, the last character entered if you are typing. The character deleted is displayed followed by a short beep. 
Delete current word 
Press BACKSPACEwithdots25.
This deletes the word under the cursor together with any following spaces. A short beep is sounded and the text to the right of the word is all moved to the left to fill the gap. The cursor is now on the first character of the next word and this word is displayed. If the cursor is on a space, all spaces up to the beginning of the next word are deleted and the cursor is placed on that word.
Delete previous word 
Press BACKSPACEwithdot2.
The word before the cursor is deleted, together with any following spaces.
Delete to end of sentence 
Press BACKSPACEwithdots14.
KeySoft prompts you to make sure that you really mean to delete such a significant amount of text. If you press Y, all text will be deleted from the cursor position to the end of the current sentence. The cursor will be placed on the first character of the next sentence.

Delete to end of paragraph 
Press BACKSPACEwithdots2356.
KeySoft prompts you to make sure that you really mean to delete such a significant amount of text. If you press Y, all text will be deleted from the cursor position to the end of the current paragraph. The cursor remains in the same position.
Delete to end of document 
Press BACKSPACEwithdots456.
KeySoft prompts you to make sure that you really mean to delete such a significant amount of text. If you press Y, all text will be deleted from the cursor position to the end of the document. The cursor remains in the same position.
There is no specific command to delete all text from a document, but this can easily be done by pressing SPACEwithdots123 to move to the top of the document and then pressing BACKSPACEwithdots456.
Note that the keys used to delete a particular section of text correspond to the commands for reading the same section of text except that the BACKSPACE key is used in place of the SPACE key.
In summary, the full set of delete commands is:
Delete current character,	BACKSPACEwithdots36;
Delete previous character	BACKSPACE;
Delete current word,	BACKSPACEwithdots25;
Delete previous word,	BACKSPACEwithdot2;
Delete to end of sentence,	BACKSPACEwithdots14;
Delete to end of paragraph,	BACKSPACEwithdots2356;
Delete to end of document,	BACKSPACEwithdots456.
In case it is not obvious, if you press one wrong key while you are typing, you will want to delete the character to the left of the cursor position, not the blank which is currently under the cursor. For this reason you should use BACKSPACE if you have just made a single typing mistake. Use BACKSPACE also to correct mistakes during entry of file names, search strings, etc.
For the same reason, if you realize that the word you have just typed is wrong when KeySoft echoes it, use the deletepreviousword command to remove it.
On reading your document again, you may find a word misspelled. When using speech it is often simpler to delete the word and retype it correctly, followed by a single space, rather than delete one or two characters and correct on a letter by letter basis.


3.14 Searching a Document.
The Search Command allows you to find a particular string of text within a large document. The term "string" refers to a sequence of characters which may be part of a word, a whole word, or 2 or 3 words. Searches may be either backwards or forwards from the current cursor position.
Press SPACEwithF to initiate the search. KeySoft prompts: "Searchforwardorback?"


3.14.1 Searching Forward.
Press F to search forward from the current cursor position. KeySoft displays: "Find?"
The last string searched for, if any, is offered as a suggestion.
Press ENTER to select the suggested text, or type the text string to be found, and press ENTER. KeySoft starts to search the document. If the text is found, the cursor jumps to the first occurrence of that text.
KeySoft displays: "Found(word)."
where word is the first word of the text string that was entered. If the text string cannot be found, KeySoft displays: "Cannotfind(string)."
Either press ADVANCE or PREVIOUSto return the display to the document.
If you want to carry on searching forward for the next occurrence of the same text, press SPACEwithN. In a large document the search may take a few seconds.
If searching for a particular email, use the binding space command ENTERwithB to put spaces between words. This is not necessary in other contexts.


3.14.2 Searching Back.
You can search back from the current cursor position by pressing B, instead of F, at the Search Forward or Back prompt. The rest of the procedure for searching back is the same as that just described for searching forward.


3.14.3 The Search String.
The Search string can be up to 50 characters long and it can contain words separated by spaces.
Either upper or lower case letters may be used as the search process will locate text regardless of capitalization.
It is also possible to search for special indicators such as New Line or New Page markers, printer control markers, underline markers, etc. For information on the way to specify these markers, refer to 3.12.3 Searching for Format Indicators.


3.14.4 Find and Replace.
In addition to searching for a particular word or string of characters, you can also replace one string with another. Only whole words are replaced. This is useful, for instance, if you discover you have misspelled a word which is frequently used throughout a lengthy document.
The command for "Find and Replace" is BACKSPACEwithF. This command is followed by F for a forward search, or B for a back search. KeySoft prompts: "Find?(Searchstring),"
where "search string" is the text string used last time a search was made. The very first time you use your BrailleNote PK or if you reset it, there is nothing to display. Type the new word or words to find and press ENTER, edit the previous search string and press ENTER, or just press ENTER to search for the same string again.
KeySoft prompts: "Replacewith(replacementtext),"
where "replacement text" is the last entry you made here. Type up to 50 characters of replacement text and then press ENTER, edit the previous replacement text and press ENTER, or just press ENTER to replace the same text as last time. KeySoft then prompts: "Replaceallorfirst?"
To avoid the problem of words which happen to be embedded in other words, KeyWord replaces whole words only.
If you want to replace all occurrences, forward or back as appropriate, with the new text, press A. To replace just the first occurrence, press F.
If the word you are searching for does not occur within the document being searched, KeySoft displays: "Can'tfind(searchstring),"where search string is the text string used.
It is important to remember whether you are searching forwards or backwards in a document. The "Can'tfind" message means that a word cannot be found in the direction that is currently being searched. For instance, if you search forward from the middle of a document, you will miss an occurrence in the first half.
KeySoft always remembers the most recent search and replacement text, and these become the new suggested strings. Special indicators such as New Line Marker and New Page Marker can be replaced in the same way.


3.15 Breaking your Document into Pages.
You can force a new pages in your text manually at any point you choose by putting the cursor where you definitely want a new page to start, such as the start of new chapters and pressing SPACEwithP.
KeyWord breaks the remaining text into pages automatically, so that the maximum number of lines fit onto each page.
When you have finished editing the document, check that it breaks into pages to your satisfaction. You can examine each page break to verify that important text is not split between pages. If you are not satisfied, you can force a new page before a page break by pressing SPACEwithP.
To examine each page break, you can move to the start of the next page by using the "Go To" command, SPACEwithdots126, followed by SPACEwithdots126thenSPACEwithdot4. You can also move back a page at a time by pressing SPACEwithdots126, followed by SPACEwith126thenSPACEwithdot1. The "Go To" command is described further in 3.18 Going to a Specified Position.
To cancel a new page, move to the position where the "New Page" indicator is displayed, and use the "deletecurrentcharacter" command to delete it.


3.16 Checking the Word Count and File name.
If at any time while in a document, you wish to check the file name or word count, press SPACEwithI. This will give you the Information Menu, with two items, Filename and WordCount. Select an option in the usual manner.
If you select File name, the name will be displayed. If you select Word count, KeySoft will display "Pleasewait" and after a brief pause, the total word count.


3.17 Checking the Cursor Position.
To check where the cursor is currently positioned, press SPACEwithwhsign(dots156).KeySoft responds with the page number, line number and column number of the cursor position. To return the Braille display to the document, press either ADVANCE or PREVIOUS.
Used in conjunction with the cursor movement commands, this is a useful way of checking your page layout for printing or embossing. For example, you can position the cursor on the first character of a particular line by pressing SPACEwithdots13, and then check the cursor position to find out which column this line starts on. This enables you to check margin settings.


3.18 Going to a Specified Position.
The cursor can be moved to any chosen page, line or column with the "Go To" command. To do this, press SPACEwithdots126,then enter a page, line and column position in the document, and press ENTER.This command is very flexible, and you can make entries such as the following:
C6 moves the cursor to Column 6 on the current line. P3 moves the cursor to Page 3, Line 1, Column 1.
P5 L10 moves the cursor to Page 5, Line 10, Column 1.
You can also go to the top of the next or previous page by pressing SPACEwithdots126,followed by SPACEwithdot4or1.


3.19 Marking Places for Quick Reference.
Up to 26 positions in a document may be marked with Place Markers, enabling instant future reference. Place Markers are identified by letters. Typically, you might put a place marker where you are editing a document. You can then move to another part of the document, and return quickly to the edited text.
Place Markers are not retained in nonKeyWord documents when they are saved.
A Place Marker is announced as "PlaceMarkerc," where c is a letter which names the Place Marker. It does not affect the document format and is not embossed or printed.


3.19.1 Define a Place Marker.
Position the cursor at the point you wish to mark, and press BACKSPACEwithD. KeySoft prompts: "DefinePlaceMarker.Letter?"
Press a letter, such as A, to name the Place Marker. KeySoft displays: "PlaceA."


3.19.2 Jump to a Place Marker.
Press SPACEwithJ.KeySoft prompts: "JumptoPlaceMarker.Letter?"
Press the letter corresponding to the Place Marker. The cursor is placed just to the right of the Place Marker itself.


3.19.3 Delete a Place Marker.
Locate the Place Marker you wish to delete, using the Jump to Place Marker command. This places the cursor just to the right of the Place Marker, so delete the marker by pressing BACKSPACE.


3.20 The Spelling Checker.
The Spelling Checker can be used in the Word processor or Planner. It finds typing and spelling mistakes in the current document by looking up each word in a dictionary of 65,000 words.
The Spelling Checker can check the whole document or part of a document. Select the Spelling Checker by pressing SPACEwithdots16,thechsign. If the Spelling Checker has not been used since KeySoft was installed, you are asked to install the language. There is an American English spelling dictionary and a United Kingdom English spelling dictionary available. Press SPACEorADVANCE until your dictionary of choice is displayed, and select it by pressing NEXTorENTER.
The Spelling Checker menu contains 6 items:
Document Check:	check the whole document;
Lookup Word:	lookup any word;
Word Check:	check the word under the cursor;
Paragraph or Section Check:	check paragraph or section;
Check from Cursor:	check from cursor to end of document;
Select language.
If the Spelling Checker finds a word which is not in its dictionary, it displays the word and then: "Option?"
There are 7 possible actions at this point. You may wish to press SPACEwithHfor assistance. After you have selected your action, checking continues. When the checking has finished, you hear the total number of words checked and the number of unknown words found. The cursor then returns to its original position.
The seven options are now discussed.

3.20.1 Review the Word Using Speech.
If you want to hear the word again, press SPACEwithdots25.On the first press the word is spoken. On the second press the word is spelled out. This sequence repeats on subsequent presses.
You can also review the word in context at the "Option?" prompt as follows:
1. To read the current sentence, press SPACEwithdots14.
2. To read the current paragraph, press SPACEwithdots2356.
If Line Reading mode has been selected, these two commands speak the current line or section instead. You can set the Reading Mode at the "Option?"prompt by pressing SPACEwithM.Reading modes are discussed in 6.8 Cursor Movement Modes.


3.20.2 Skip this occurrence of the word.
To skip the current occurrence of the word and leave it unchanged, press SPACEwithdot5.If the word occurs elsewhere, the Spelling Checker queries it again.


3.20.3 Ignore the word.
To leave all instances of the word unchanged, press I, for Ignore. Use this option to ignore a name or specialized word which occurs throughout the document, but is not recognized by the spelling checker, and which you do not wish to add to the dictionary.


3.20.4 Add the word to the dictionary.
To add the current word to the user dictionary, press A.The word will never again be displayed as an unknown word when the Spelling Checker is used. Use this option for names, technical terms, etc which you often use. For more information on the User Dictionary, refer to 3.20.10 The User Dictionary.


3.20.5 Correct the Word.
To correct the word being queried, press C, and KeySoft displays: "Enterreplacement."
Type the replacement word or edit the existing word, and press ENTER.The Spelling Checker looks up your entry in its dictionary before accepting it. If it can't find it, the Spelling Checker asks for confirmation by prompting: "Wordnotindictionary.Use?"
Press Y to use the new word, or N and then reenter the correction.
If you correct a missing space between two words, KeySoft checks each separate word before accepting your correction.
In case the word you are correcting occurs more than once in the document, the Spelling Checker also asks: "Correctallorfirst?"
To correct this and all subsequent occurrences of the word in the document, press A, for All. To correct only this first instance, press F, for First.
When making corrections, don't worry about capital signs or capital letters because the Spelling Checker leaves them as they are.


3.20.6 Review Suggestions.
To obtain a "Suggestions list," press S. This is a list of words which resemble the original, and may be reviewed by pressing SPACEorADVANCE or BACKorBACKSPACE. The following 3 options are then available:
1. To display the original word, press I. In speech, subsequent presses alternately spell out and speak the word.
2. To replace the misspelled word in your document with the current suggestion, press NEXT or ENTER. You are given the option of replacing all occurrences or just the first one.
3. To spell out the current suggestion using speech, press SPACEwithO, then S.
If you don't like the suggestions, press SPACEwithE to go back to the "Option?" prompt.


3.20.7 Look up the Word in the Dictionary.
This option allows you to browse the dictionary, word by word, until you have found the correct spelling. You can then replace the misspelled word with the correct one.
At the "Option?"prompt, press L, and KeySoft asks: "Wordtolookup?PressENTERfor(word),"
where "word" is the unknown word. You normally press ENTERto select the unknown word. Alternatively, you can enter a possible alternative spelling, or just the first few letters, followed by ENTER.
You are then placed at the word in the dictionary which most closely matches the letters you have typed. To browse through the dictionary until you find the word you are looking for, use SPACEorADVANCE or BACKorBACKSPACE.
There are 4 options here, similar to the Suggestions options. These are:
1. To replace the misspelled word in your document with the current dictionary word, press NEXTorENTER.You are asked whether you want to replace the first occurrence or all, in case there are multiple occurrences.
2. To return to the "Wordtolookup?"prompt, press SPACEwithE.You can then type another alternative spelling, or press SPACEwithE again to return to the "Option?"prompt.
3. To display the original word, press I.In speech, subsequent presses alternately spell and speak the word.
4. To spell the current word in the dictionary, press SPACEwithO, then S.


3.20.8 Leaving the Spelling Checker.
To exit from the Spelling Checker, press SPACEwithE.The cursor is placed at the point where the Spelling Checker was interrupted. To restart the spelling check from where you left off, press SPACEwithdots16,thechsign, then C.


3.20.9 Browse The Dictionary.
You can look up any word, and browse the spelling dictionary, without having first found the word with the Spelling Checker. From anywhere in the document, press SPACEwithdots16,thechsign, then L, and KeySoft prompts: "Wordtolookup?"
Type the word, or just the first few letters, and press NEXTorENTER.You are placed at the word in the dictionary which most closely matches the letters you have typed, and the word is displayed. To browse through the dictionary until you find the word you are looking for, use navigation keys SPACEorADVANCE or BACKorBACKSPACE.
There are three options available while browsing through the dictionary, as follows:
1. To insert the current dictionary word into your document at the present cursor position, press NEXT or ENTER. No spaces are included, so you may need to add a space if the word is inserted in a sentence. No capital signs are included so you may need to add these, if necessary.
2. To return to the "Wordtolookup?" prompt, press SPACEwithE.You can then narrow down the options by typing more starting letters, or enter a different word. To return to the document, press SPACEwithE again.
3. To spell the current word in the dictionary, press SPACEwithO, then S.


3.20.10 The User Dictionary.
When you use the "Addtodictionary" option, the new word is stored separately in a KeyWord text document called "User dictionary." The words are arranged one per line. You can review the User Dictionary using KeyWord, and correct or remove words. If you edit the User Dictionary, use only lower case letters and apostrophes.
The User Dictionary is saved in the "Dictionaries" folder.


3.21 Opening ASCII and Plain Braille format Documents.
Documents in KeyWord's native format, as well as Microsoft Word, RTF, or WordPerfect documents precisely specify their contents and formatting. However, the contents and formatting of documents containing plain ASCII text and the formatting of plain Braille documents are not at all precisely defined, so it is necessary to give you control over how KeyWord interprets them. This is done through a list of options presented when you open such a document. The initial settings for these options are either the ones you established last time you opened the same document, or if you have never opened the document before, settings that KeyWord assumes are most appropriate for the document and therefore usually you will not need to make any changes. So that you can tell whether or not you have opened this document before, the wording of the prompt changes from "Reviewtheoptions?" to "Reviewpreviousoptions?"accordingly. To continue and open the document without reviewing the options, just pressENTER. To review the options, press Y.
The options given when opening a document are as follows:
IsthisaBrailleorTextdocument?
If the name extension is .brl or .brf indicating that it will be a Braille file, then this option will have already been set to Braille. When open, these documents default to a reading grade of contracted Braille, regardless of the preferred reading grade set, as most Braille documents are in contracted Braille.
If the document is not .brf or .brl but contains Braille, then select "Braille" by pressing B. Otherwise select "Text" by pressing T. Follow either entry with ENTER.
UseLineorParagraphformatwhenopeningthedocument?currentlyParagraph.
When opening a document, it is important that KeyWord knows the difference between the ends of lines within a paragraph and the end of the paragraph itself. Without this knowledge, paragraphs might be run together, or each line within a paragraph may be taken as the end of a paragraph, causing the speech to pause in the wrong places, and stopping the proper reformatting of lines within a paragraph when a change is made. Plain text or plain Braille documents use the same "control characters," for example, "carriage returns" and "line feeds" to show where lines within paragraphs end as they use to show where a paragraph ends. This option allows you to control how KeyWord interprets these control characters to distinguish between ends of lines and end of paragraphs.
The option you choose here depends on the way the document you are opening is formatted:
The Paragraph format option assumes that a single carriage return and/or line feed character sequence, that is not followed by an indent of more than one space, denotes the end of a line within a paragraph and is therefore removed so that KeyWord can reformat the paragraph within the margins that you have set. A sequence of two or more carriage return and/or line feed characters or a single sequence followed by an indent is interpreted as being the start of a new paragraph and is substituted for KeyWord's New Line markers. This option is the initial setting when you first open a document and is the one that you will need for most prose type documents.
The Line format option retains every carriage return and/or line feed sequence as a New Line in KeyWord. Use this setting when opening documents containing lists or documents where each paragraph is formatted as one long line.
To retain "Paragraph" format when opening the document, just press ENTER.To select "Line" format, press L followed by ENTER.
UseLineorParagraphformatwhensavingthedocument?CurrentlyParagraph.
In a similar way to the previous option for opening documents, this option controls the use of carriage returns and line feeds when a plain text or plain Braille document is saved. Paragraph option puts carriage return/line feed sequences only where New Line markers occurred while the document was being edited. Line option puts them where either Line Break indicators or New Line markers occur.
If you are saving a document for use again in KeySoft or for transferring to another word processor, use Paragraph format. This will ensure that all paragraphs, headings, list, etc. are properly formatted when the document is opened next time. However each paragraph will appear as one long line, so if you are saving the document for use on a system which may not be able to handle this, then save using Line format.
To retain "Paragraph" format when saving the document, just press ENTER.To select "Line" format, pressL followed by ENTER.
You may have worked out that if you open a document using Paragraph format and then save it using Paragraph format, then you must open it next time using Line format. KeyWord changes the setting automatically for you so that if you have saved a document using paragraph format, next time you open it, the opening setting will be Line format.
Whether or not KeyWord uses Line Feed control characters in addition to Carriage Return characters is controlled by the "UseofLineFeedcharacters?" option in the ASCII Translation Options in the Translation Menu. The use of the ASCII End of File character is controlled by the "UseofEndofFilecharacter" option in the same list.
ExtendedASCIIcharacteroption?CurrentlyRetain.
The standard ASCII character set uses numbers between 0 and 127 to denote each character within the set. It does not make provision for accented characters and other special symbols, so where necessary this is done by extending this set with numbers greater than 127. This option controls how KeyWord interprets these characters.
Sometimes extended characters occur not because they are accented characters or special symbols, but because the file has been transmitted through a communications system that has added a "parity bit" which in effect has added an offset to some of the characters. To adjust for this, use the "Convert to standard ASCII" option, by pressing C, followed by ENTER.
Sometimes the extended characters are used purely for visual effects such as boxes around paragraphs, etc. In these cases the document will be easier to read if the extended characters are removed altogether, use the "Ignore" option for this.
To retain the extended characters when the document is opened, select "Retain." On selection of Retain, another option is presented:
"Extendedcharacterset?CurrentlyANSI.
More than one system has been used for extended characters, therefore you must tell KeyWord which one to use for this document. The options are the "ANSI" character set and the "MSDOS" character set. If you don't know which one to use, try one and if the extended characters do not come out correctly, try the other. For the "MSDOS" set press M followed by ENTER. For the "ANSI" set press A followed by ENTER.
KeySoft will now display: "Endoflist."
When you are ready to open the document, press SPACEwithE.


3.22 Large Documents.
There is no significant limit to the size of a document, but as it gets bigger, some operations take longer to perform. For instance, when you press SPACEwithE to exit a document, a delay of several seconds may occur. Moving to the top or bottom of a document may also take a few seconds. In such instances KeySoft displays: "Pleasewait",or"Repositioning,"depending on the situation. Keystrokes are not actioned until such an operation has been completed. If necessary, divide large documents into two or more smaller ones to speed the editing of the text.


3.23 Switching Between Documents.
There may be times when you are working with two or more documents. This can happen when you are modifying a document and need to refer often to the original. While you can close one document by pressing SPACEwithE, opening the other can involve several keystrokes.
There is a quicker way. From the current document, press SPACEwithdots1256.This closes the current document, and places you at the"Documenttoopen?"prompt. KeySoft then offers the name of the document which was opened before the last one. To open this, press ENTER.This means that you can switch back and forth between your two most recent documents just by pressing SPACEwithdots1256, followed by ENTER.
This scheme also works if you are working with several documents, because the document name that KeySoft offers when you press SPACEwithdots1256 is just the first in a list. If you press SPACEwithdots56, KeySoft offers the next most recent document, and you can work down the list towards progressively older documents. You can also work back up the list by pressing SPACEwithdots23.When you find the one you want, press ENTER.
To provide fast access to recently used documents and folders, SPACEwithdots56is available at most document and folder prompts throughout KeySoft.



4 Book Reader.
BrailleNote PK has a book reader called KeyBook. It enables you to read electronic books in the following formats: KeyWord text and Braille, Microsoft word, ASCII text, RTF, WordPerfect 5.1 and plain Braille files with a BRF or BRL extension. KeyBook has the same reading commands as KeyWord, but KeyBook does not allow the book contents to be modified.


4.1 Instant Braille Transcription.
If the book is in text format, KeyBook can transcribe the text into your preferred reading grade instantly, as you read. For example, if your preferred reading grade is Grade 2 Braille, KeyBook automatically displays the book in Grade 2 as you read. However, the underlying text is still in its original form, and you can examine it in computer Braille, at any time, should you wish.


4.2 Reading the Sample Book.
After selecting KeyBook from the Main Menu, KeyBook displays: "Readbookinwhichfolder?PressENTERforBooks."
Press ENTER. If this is the very first time a book is read, the book name must be selected from the list of books in the Books folder. Press SPACE repeatedly to display the list; then press ENTERwhen "AChristmasCarol" is displayed.
KeyBook prompts: "Reviewtheoptions?" Press ENTER to accept the default options, and the book will load. For more information about reviewing the options, see 4.8 Reading Books Stored on Other Drives.
Note: If a book has been read before, KeyBook will prompt: "Bookname?PressENTERforaChristmasCarol."
To load the book, press ENTER. Once the book is loaded, the beginning of the text will display and, if the speech is on, KeyBook announces: "Topofdocument."You are now ready to start reading.


4.3 Braille Display Reading Commands.
The same commands that are used in KeyWord also apply to KeyBook. The following commands can be used to read using the Braille display.
To advance the display forward by one width, press ADVANCE(N5);
To move the display back by one width, press BACK(N2);
To move the display forward by a chosen amount of text, press NEXT(N6).
You can set the amount of text at sentence, paragraph or line in the "FunctionofPREVIOUSandNEXTnavigationkeys" option as described in 5.4.4 Function of Previous and Next navigation Keys.
Likewise, to move the display back by the chosen amount of text, press PREVIOUS(N3).
The following commands control the automatic Braille display advance mode: 
To start the display advancing automatically, press N1andN4,thetwotopnavigationbuttons.;
To decrease the speed of advance of the Braille display, press N1;
To increase the speed of advance of the Braille display, press N4;
To stop the Braille display advancing, press N1 and N4 together;
To move the display back a word, press PREVIOUSwithBACK;
To move the display forward a word, press PREVIOUSwithADVANCE;
To turn the Braille display on or off, press SPACEwithNEXT. This is described in more detail in 1.17.1 Turning the Braille Display On or Off;
To turn speech on or off, press SPACEwith PREVIOUS. This is described in more detail in 1.17.2 Turning Speech On or Off;
To route the cursor to the beginning of the Braille display, press BACKwithADVANCE.
To cycle through the four Braille display modes, press PREVIOUSwithNEXT repeatedly. The Braille display modes are discussed in 3.11 Braille Display Modes. The Factory setting is "Automatic." Leave it this way until you are acquainted with how the modes work. To change the text document reading grade, press ADVANCEwithNEXTrepeatedly. This only applies to a book in text format. The options are your preferred Braille grade, 6 dot computer Braille or 8 dot computer Braille.


4.4 The Review Cursor.
When you are reading, the cursor is hidden because it serves no useful purpose. However, in the automatic Braille display mode, when you are reviewing character by character, the cursor is shown to indicate the current character. For grade 1 or grade 2 Braille, the cursor is both dots7and8 by default. For computer Braille the cursor is dot8 only. Remember that KeyBook automatically displays the book in your preferred grade of Braille if the original book is in text format. If you move the cursor onto a word, however, that word is displayed in computer Braille. This gives you a onetoone correspondence between the Braille display and the word you are reviewing. Of course, if the original book is in Braille there is no change as you move the cursor.
When the cursor is under a format indicator, the cursor spans all of the cells of the indicator.


4.5 Additional Reading Commands.
KeyBook's reading commands are the same as KeyWord's, but KeyBook does not allow the book to be edited. This feature prevents intentional or unintentional modification to the text of the book being read.
The following commands can be used to listen to the book that has been opened:
To go forward reading, press SPACEwithG.
Note that while you are continuously reading, you can skip back or forward by sentences or paragraphs without stopping the continuous reading function. This feature is extremely useful if you want to quickly browse forward or back from your current reading position.
To stop reading, press BACKSPACEwithENTER together.
The following 6 commands can be used both while KeyBook is continuously reading and when you are reviewing:
To move back a sentence,	press SPACEwithdot1;
To hear the current sentence,	press SPACEwithdots14;
To move forward a sentence,	press SPACEwithdot4;
To move back a paragraph,	press SPACEwithdots23;
To hear the current paragraph,	press SPACEwithdots2356;
To move forward a paragraph,	press SPACEwithdots56.
The other commands available when reviewing are:
To go to the beginning of the book,	press SPACEwithdots123;
To go to the end of the book,	press SPACEwithdots456;
To find a text string in the book, press SPACEwithF.This command is described in 3.14 Searching a Document.
To move back a character,	press SPACEwithdot3;
To hear the current character,	press SPACEwithdots36.(Press this command once to hear the character spoken. Press it again, and if the character is a letter, you will hear its "call sign" e.g. Alpha for A, Bravo for B etc.)
To move forward a character, 	press SPACEwithdot6;
To move back a word,	press SPACEwithdot2;
To hear the current word, 	press SPACEwithdots25. The first time you press this command, the word is spoken. The second time the word is spelled out;
To move forward a word, 	press SPACEwithdot5;
To enter Announce Key Mode, press SPACEwithW;
To query the cursor position, 	press SPACEwithwhsign(dots156);
To go to any page, line, or column, 	press SPACEwithdots126. This command is described in 3.18 Going to a Specified Position.
Besides accepting the SPACEwithdot combinations, KeyBook also accepts the commands without the SPACE because the meaning is clear. This is the same as KeyWord's "review only" mode that was discussed in 3.9.2 Selecting ReviewOnly Mode.
This is quite a long list to remember, but assistance is always available by pressing SPACE with H.


4.6 Miscellaneous commands.
KeyBook has a group of block commands. These commands are the same as KeyWord's block commands. To go to the block commands menu, press SPACEwithB.The block commands are described in 6.7 Block Commands.
To open another book, press SPACEwithdots1256. KeyBook prompts: "Bookname?PressENTERfor(booktitle)."
where book title is the name of the last book read. You can type the name of the book that you want to load or review the list of books in the current folder by pressing SPACEorADVANCE. You can then select the book you want by pressing NEXTorENTER.
If you want to change the folder, press BACKSPACEat the"Bookname?"prompt. KeySoft displays: "Foldername?(Lastusedfolder),"
To step through the list of folders, press SPACEorADVANCE. This procedure was described in more detail in 3.21 Opening ASCII and Plain Braille format Documents. When you have selected a folder, KeyWord asks for the book name as before.
To check what document you have selected, press SPACEwithI and KeySoft will display the document name.


4.7 Review Book Opening Options.
Books in KeyWord's native format, as well as Microsoft Word, RTF and WordPerfect format, precisely specify their contents and formatting. However, the contents and formatting of books in ASCII text or plain Braille are not at all precisely defined, so it is necessary to give you control over how KeyBook interprets them. This is done through a list of options presented when you open such a book. The initial settings for these options are either the ones you established last time you opened the same book, or if you have never opened the book before, settings that KeyBook assumes are most appropriate for the book. Because of this, you usually won't need to make any changes. So that you can tell whether you have opened this book before, the wording of the prompt used changes from "Reviewtheoptions?" to "Reviewpreviousoptions?" accordingly. To continue and open the book without reviewing the options, just press ENTER. To review the options, press Y.
The options given when opening a book are as follows: IsthisaBrailleorTextdocument?
If the file extension is .brl or .brf (plain Braille) then this option will have already been set to Braille. If not, you must respond to the question before moving on.
If the book contains grade 1 or grade 2 Braille, then select "Braille" by pressing B. Otherwise select "Text" by pressing T. Follow either entry with ENTER. KeySoft then prompts: "UseLineorParagraphformatwhenopeningthedocument?currentlyParagraph."
When opening a book, it is important that KeyBook knows the difference between the ends of lines within a paragraph and the end of the paragraph itself. Without this knowledge, paragraphs might be run together, or each line within a paragraph might be treated as a separate paragraph. This would cause the speech to pause in the wrong places, and make it impossible to skim by paragraph. Plain text and plain Braille books use the same "control characters," for example, "carriage returns" and "line feeds," to show where lines within paragraphs end. This option allows you to control how KeyBook interprets these control characters to distinguish between ends of lines and ends of paragraphs.
The option you choose here depends on the way the book you are opening is formatted:
The Paragraph format option assumes that a single carriage return or carriage return/line feed pair that is followed by one or no spaces, denotes the end of a line within a paragraph. This end of line marker is removed so that KeyBook can reformat the paragraph within the margins that you have set. A sequence of two or more carriage return and/or line feed characters or a single sequence followed by an indent of two or more spaces is interpreted as the start of a new paragraph. This option is the default setting when you first open a book, and is the one that you will need for most prose books.
The Line format option retains every carriage return and/or line feed sequence as a New Line in KeyWord. Use this setting when opening books containing lists, or poetry, or books where each paragraph is formatted as one long line.
To retain "Paragraph" format when opening the book, just press ENTER. To select "Line" format, press L followed by ENTER. KeySoft then prompts:
"UseLineorParagraphformatwhensavingthedocument?CurrentlyParagraph."
Because KeyBook does not allow the text within a book to be modified or added to, just press ENTER to confirm the prompted option. KeySoft then prompts: "ExtendedASCIIcharacteroption?CurrentlyRetain."
The most common writing system used by computers is ASCII. In this system, each letter, number, and commonly used punctuation mark is represented by a number between 0 and 127 (Since the system was developed in the U.S., "commonly used" means commonly used in the U.S.) There is no way to represent accented characters and other special symbols, so the system has been extended with numbers greater than 127. The Extended ASCII option controls how KeyBook interprets these characters represented by numbers greater than 127, socalled "extended characters."
Sometimes extended characters occur not because they are accented characters or special symbols, but because the file has been transmitted through a communications system that has added a "parity bit" which in effect has added an offset to some of the characters. To adjust for this, use the "Convert to standard ASCII" option, by pressing C, followed by ENTER.
Sometimes the extended characters are used purely for visual effects such as boxes around paragraphs, etc. In these cases the book will be easier to read if the extended characters are removed altogether; use the "Ignore" option for this.
To retain the extended characters when the book is opened, select "Retain" by pressing R, or press ENTER as this is the default setting. If you select Retain, another option is presented: KeySoft prompts: "Extendedcharacterset?CurrentlyANSI."
More than one system has been used for extended characters; therefore you must tell KeyWord which one to use for this book. The options are the "ANSI" character set and the "MSDOS" character set. If you don't know which one to use, try one and if the extended characters do not come out correctly, try the other. For the "MSDOS" set, press M followed by ENTER. For the "ANSI" set, press A followed by ENTER.
KeySoft will now prompt: "Endoflist."
When you have made all your selections, press SPACEwithE.


4.8 Reading Books Stored on Other Drives.
The sample book is stored in the Books folder on the KeySoft System Disk. You should be careful about storing other books in the KeySoft System Disk, because any book other than the sample book will be lost if the battery goes flat, or the BrailleNote PK is reset with dots456 held down.
If you have a backup of the book, or are not concerned about the possibility of losing it, then storing your books on this drive means that you don't use space on the Flash Disk.
The Flash Disk is shared by the other programs like KeyWord and KeyMail, and its contents are preserved much like files on a conventional hard drive. There is an empty folder called My Books provided on the Flash Disk. However the Flash Disk has limited storage capacity and you would probably not want to store more than six or seven books in it. Many users who have a large collection of books prefer to keep these on a storage card.


4.8.1 Selecting a Drive.
We have previously discussed the selection of files and folders within KeyBook, but we haven't described the selection of a drive. You can change the current drive at any time that you are prompted for a folder name by pressing BACKSPACE. For example when you select KeyBook, it prompts: "Readbookinwhichfolder?(Books)."
Press BACKSPACE. KeyBook then prompts: "Drive?PressENTERfor(lastdriveused)."
You can select the last drive used by pressing ENTERorNEXT, or you can review the list of drives by pressing SPACE repeatedly. You can select a drive by pressing ENTER when the required drive is displayed, or by typing a letter. There are always at least two drive options available. These are:
To select the Flash Disk, press F.
To select the KeySoft System Disk, press K.
If you have plugged a storage card into the card slot on the back of the unit, select it by pressing S. 

4.8.2 Loading a Book from Another Drive.
After you have selected a drive, KeySoft prompts: "Readbookinwhichfolder?PressENTERfornone."
Select the folder in the usual way. When you have selected a folder, KeyBook asks for the book name as before.


4.8.3 Advanced Storage Methods.
Another way of storing a large book library is to do so on a PC or laptop. There are several methods available for transferring files to and from a PC, including ActiveSync, using Network client, or a card reader attached to your PC. These are all discussed in the Connectivity chapter of this user guide.
Transfer the "Books" folder on the "KeySoft System Disk," or create your own folder.


4.9 Exiting KeyBook.
Exit KeyBook in the usual way by pressing SPACEwithE to take you back to the Main Menu. The book is closed when you exit. To reopen the book press B, then ENTER twice, from anywhere in the Main Menu. You are returned to the place where you were last reading.
Remember that you can switch to another task while using KeyBook, as described in 1.18 Switching Between Tasks. For example, to make an entry in the Planner, press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithP. When you have completed your entry, press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithB to return to KeyBook. The BrailleNote PK may beep once or twice, indicating it is busy preparing to resume from where you were when you switched tasks.


4.10 Bookshare.
Bookshare.org is an online service that provides electronic format books that are both in and out of copyright. It is possible to access Bookshare books via KeyWeb on your BrailleNote PK, and read them using KeyBook. Bookshare.org's public domain content is available to anyone, but copyrighted material is available only to members.
For information about Bookshare.org, who is eligible to join and how to join, check out www.bookshare.org, or for more specific URLs, please refer to Appendix B. Humanware expects that persons utilizing the Bookshare.org service from their BrailleNote PK will honor the criteria for usage outlined in their membership agreement with Benetech.
In this section on how to access Bookshare.org, it is assumed that you have already set up your BrailleNote PK to use KeyWeb, and are a member of Bookshare.org and have created access codes and passwords etc. Be assured that the Bookshare.org site is very user friendly and set up to be easily accessible using a screen reader like KeyWeb. For information on how to use KeyWeb, please refer to Chapter 11.


4.10.1 How Books from Bookshare work.
When first downloaded from the site, Bookshare.org books are "packed" into a special compressed format that has a .bks file extension, regardless of what book format you have chosen.
Once the book is downloaded, it is then possible to "unpack" it from the .bks file into its normal format such as .brf or .txt. Once this is done, you can then delete the .bks file. To make this clearer, you could think of the .bks file as the bag that Bookshare.org put your book into, and once you have taken it out of its bag, you can throw the bag away.
All copyrighted Bookshare.org books are password protected to help prevent them being used or distributed in ways contrary to the terms and conditions of membership. To unpack the book, you need to enter your password. Books that are in the public domain, that is, out of copyright, do not require a password even though the prompt will still come up. In these cases, you can still enter your password, or just press ENTER to pass over the field.


4.10.2 Supported formats.
Bookshare.org has books in several electronic formats, some titles in more than one format. The BrailleNote PK supports books in brf or txt formats, but not DAISY or HTML formats. If you download a book in an unsupported format, KeyBook will allow you to unpack it, but before the process is complete, it will prompt to say that the format is not available. Books can only be "unpacked" in KeyBook.


4.10.3 Bookshare Favorites.
The Bookshare.org home page is already set up as a favorite in KeyWeb. However if you intend to use Bookshare regularly, it might pay to set up the login page as a favorite instead. For information on how to do this, refer to 11.8.1 Adding a Favorite.


4.10.4 Existing Bookshare books.
If you are already a Bookshare.org member and have packed or unpacked books on your PC, you can simply transfer them to your BrailleNote PK via ActiveSync, and open them in KeyBook. The only difference to the procedures below is that when you open KeyBook, you will have to select a folder or drive in the usual way, as it will not default to the correct location.


4.10.5 How to download a book from Bookshare.
Follow the steps below to use KeyWeb to download a book from Bookshare.org.
1. Go to KeyWeb on your BrailleNote PK by either pressing I in the Main Menu, or BACKSPACEwithENTERwithI anywhere. KeyWeb will prompt you for a URL.
2. Select Bookshare from your favorites. The BrailleNote PK will connect to the web and you will be in the Bookshare homepage.
3. Navigate to the Login page and log in using your member details. You will end up in a personalized welcome page.
4. Locate the book that you wish to read, and download it in a supported format (all books are available as brf; public domain ones are also in txt), and download it to the folder and drive of your choice. For Download instructions refer to 11.11 How to Download a file.


4.10.6 Unpacking the book for reading.
Follow the steps below to unpack your book:
1. Go to KeyBook by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTERwithB.
2. KeyBook will offer you the folder into which you downloaded the book as default. Press ENTER, and it will offer you the book as the default file. If you downloaded several books, it will offer the last one downloaded. To select the book, press ENTER again.
3. KeyBook prompts: "FolderforunpackedBooksharebook?PressENTERforMyBooks." Either press ENTER straight away or select another file location.
4. You will be prompted for your Bookshare.org password. Type it in and press ENTER, or if no password is required, simply press ENTER
5. The book will now unpack. There will be some progress beeps during this time. When complete, KeyBook prompts: "DeletetheoriginalpackedBooksharebook?" Press Y.
Note 1: If the book format is not supported, KeyBook will tell you at this point and return to the main menu.
Note2: If there is not enough memory available to unpack the book, KeyBook will prompt  "CouldnotsaveunpackedBooksharebook.Diskisfull."
6. KeyBook displays the name of the file, including the file extension, for example, "Harry_Po_b_fl.brf". To open it, press ENTER.
7. KeyBook will ask "Reviewtheoptions?" as it does for every book in a nonnative KeySoft format the first time. As the file will have been set up automatically with the correct settings, press ENTER or N.
8. The book is now ready to read. If you exit the book before completing it, KeyBook will bookmark it for you and the next time you open it, it will open to the same place.
Note: If instead of downloading books directly onto your BrailleNote PK from Bookshare, you have transferred them from a PC or they are on a storage card, the same procedure applies. The only difference is that at step 2, you would navigate to the appropriate location, then continue as above.



5 General Functions.
This chapter discusses the functions listed on the Options Menu, which was introduced briefly in 1.17 General Functions. A number of these functions are discussed in other sections of this User Guide as appropriate, and the main purpose of this chapter is to summarize all the Option Menu functions in one place.
The Options Menu comprises general functions that are available wherever you are in KeySoft. You could be using the Word processor, sending or receiving email, using the Calculator, or reading a menu. After using one of these functions, you are returned to the place you were at previously.
To access the Options Menu from anywhere in KeySoft, press SPACE with O, and KeySoft will prompt: "Optionsmenu. You can then review the items by pressing SPACEorADVANCE or BACKorBACKSPACE.
The Options Menu comprises the following items:
Date;
Time Options;
Grade of Braille for Keyboard Entry;
Braille display options;
Keyboard settings;
Review voice;
Connectivity;
Visual display;
Next appointment;
Power and battery status;
User guide;
Insertion;
Spell. Repeat and spell;
Hear punctuation. Repeat with maximum punctuation;
Move to another task; 
Speech settings.
To select an item, move through the menu until the required item is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, from anywhere in the Options menu, press the initial letter of your choice. This does not apply to the speech settings, which are discussed in 1.17.6 Setting Speech Volume Speed and Pitch.
Selecting a menu item takes at least two key combinations, for example, SPACE with O then D to hear the date. For really fast access, many items are also available through quick commands. These are listed in 1.17 General Functions, as well as being mentioned in each relevant section of this chapter..
Some items on the Options Menu will always display the same style of information, for example the time and date functions, while for other options the response will vary depending on where you are in KeySoft when you select the item. An example of this is "CalculatorBrailleLanguage," which is only displayed when the Calculator is in use.
The Connectivity option is discussed in detail in the Connectivity Chapter of this user guide.

5.1 Date.
To display the current day and date, press SPACEwithO, then D.
After the date is displayed, return to your original place in KeySoft by pressing ADVANCE.
The quick key for this function is ENTERwithD.


5.2 Time Options.
There are two time options available  the clock (current time), and the stopwatch.


5.2.1 Current time.
To display the current time, press ENTERwithT. To access the current time through the time menu, press SPACEwithO,thenT, then C for Clock.
After the time is displayed you will be returned to your original place in KeySoft.


5.2.2 Stopwatch.
The stopwatch operates in a similar way to a mechanical stopwatch. It keeps time down to one hundredth of a second, can be stopped, started or returned to zero, and the time display can be copied to the clipboard for pasting into documents or emails.


5.2.2.1 Stopwatch commands.
To access the stopwatch, press ENTERwithW. Or you can press SPACEwithOthenT,thenS for stopwatch. The first time you use it, The stopwatch will be at zero.
There are three settings  stop, start and zero. The zero setting resets the time to zero  however we are not referring to it as reset, as "Reset" has a very different meaning on the BrailleNote PK already!
To zero the time, press BACKSPACEwithdots14.
To start or stop the stopwatch, press SPACE. This is a toggle command.
To stop the stopwatch altogether, first stop it by pressing SPACE then zero it by pressing BACKSPACEwithdots14.
To copy the time to the clipboard, press BACKSPACEwithK. You can do this at any time, even when the stopwatch is running.


5.2.2.2 Running in the Background.
Once it has started, the stopwatch will keep running until you press the stop command, or reset the BrailleNote PK. Even if you switch to another task, or switch the BrailleNote PK off, it will still keep running in the background, although it won't display any times automatically. To check on the elapsing time, simply access the stopwatch by pressing ENTERwithW.
The stopwatch will display the elapsing time.


5.2.2.3 Stopwatch on Display.
The time shows on the Braille display as hours, minutes, and seconds in this format: h:mm:ss
The Braille display updates every second while the stopwatch is running.
When the stopwatch is stopped, the elapsed time displays to the hundredth second like this: h:mm:ss.cc
To the right of the time, the display also shows current status, for example: 1:23:45	Running
or 0:34:21.04	Stopped
When the stopwatch is returned to zero while stopped, the BrailleNote PK displays "Zero" and the display shows "0:00:00.00"


5.2.2.4 Stopwatch Announcements.
The running stopwatch will display the time every minute unless you turn speech off. For example: "7minutes"or"3hours,46minutes"
Any other time, you can hear the elapsing time to the second by pressing SPACEwithR. For example: "1hour,5minutes,48seconds"
To hear the same time repeated, press L.
When the stopwatch is stopped, you can hear the elapsed time by pressing SPACEwithR.


5.3 Grade of Braille for Keyboard Entry.
If you are typing a Braille document in Grade 2 and want to enter something that could be ambiguous, such as a list of last names and initials, you can temporarily select Grade 1 through this item on the Options Menu. After you have entered the word or passage, you can switch back to Grade 2.
Another choice when typing Grade 2 is to switch to computer Braille, perhaps for a file name such as "program.exe" that contains a period, or for an email address. If your preferred Braille grade is Grade 2, KeySoft will occasionally override your preference and force Grade 1.
To find out what Braille grade KeySoft is expecting, or to change the current grade of Braille, press SPACEwithO, then G.
This is the grade of Braille used for prompts, help messages, books and documents. For Grade 1, press A, for Grade 2, press B and for Computer Braille, press C or just press ENTER to return to your original place in KeySoft.
If you want to change the grade of Braille and dont care which grade KeySoft is expecting, use the following quick keys: for Grade 1, BACKSPACEwithA; for Grade 2, BACKSPACEwithB; and for computer Braille, BACKSPACEwithJ.


5.4 Braille Display Options.
To review the Braille Display Options list anywhere in KeySoft, press SPACEwithO, thenB.The list of options presented will depend where you are in KeySoft when you select the Braille Display Options. Experiment at the Main Menu, within a document, and in the Calculator to see how the list of items changes. The complete Braille Display Options list comprises the following items:
Braille On?
Braille Display Mode;
Show new lines in Reading Mode as;
Function of Previous and Next navigation keys;
Cursor shape for standard Braille;
Preferred reading grade;
Text document reading grade;
Braille language;
Calculator Braille code;
Computer Braille code;
Cursor shape for computer Braille;
Display computer Braille using 6 or 8 dots;
Message display time;
navigation key set.
After each item, KeySoft will announce the current setting for that item.
You can move forward or back through the items in the usual way. To leave any option unchanged, just press ENTER. To change any option, enter a new setting and press ENTER.


5.4.1 Turning the Braille Display On and Off.
To turn the Braille display on press Y. To turn it off, press N. You can also turn the Braille display on or off by pressing the NEXT and SPACE keys together. Note that if speech is turned off when the Braille display is off, the Braille display is forced on. This avoids having both Braille and speech off simultaneously.


5.4.2 Braille Display Mode.
This option is available within a document, an email, or within the Planner and allows you to choose the amount of formatting information that is presented on the Braille Display and whether the cursor is displayed. There are four modes; Automatic, Reading, Edit and Layout. You may also cycle through the four modes by pressing PREVIOUS with NEXT.
The Braille Display Modes are discussed more fully in 3.11 Braille Display Modes but briefly:
Automatic mode: press A. The cursor is turned on when you are editing and off when you are reading.
Reading mode: press R. Used for reading. The cursor is never displayed. Only formatting necessary for reading is displayed.
Edit mode: press E. The cursor is always on and all formatting information is displayed.
Layout mode: press L. The document is laid out on the Braille display in the same way as it will appear on paper when it is embossed.


5.4.3 Show New Lines in Reading Mode as.
This option is available within a document, an email, or within the Planner. It determines how the start of a new line or paragraph is shown on the Braille display.
For linear Braille format where the start of a new line is indicated by the Computer Braille dollar sign then p, (dots1246p), press L.
For an indent of one cell, press A.
For an indent of two cells, press B.
For two spaces anywhere they happen to fall on the display, press dots23.
For three spaces anywhere they happen to fall on the display, press dots25.


5.4.4 Function of Previous and Next navigation Keys.
This option is available within a document, an email, or within the Planner. The function of the PREVIOUS and NEXT navigation keys can be defined to suit your personal reading preference.
To have them move Up and Down, press U.
To have them move by Sentence or Line, press S. Whether they move by sentence or line is determined by the reading mode, as set via SPACEwithM.
To have them move by Paragraph or Section, press P. Whether they move by paragraph or section is determined by the cursor movement mode, as set via SPACEwithM. Cursor movement Mode is discussed more fully in 6.8 Cursor Movement Modes.
To save the settings, return to the Main Menu.


5.4.5 Cursor Shape for Standard Braille.
This setting determines which dots are used to indicate the cursor is in a particular cell. The default setting for grade 1 and 2 Braille is dots7and8, but you may also choose to have dot7 only, dot8 only, dots123456, or all 8dotsof the cell.
To select the cursor for both dots 7 and 8, press B. For dot 7 only, press G. For dot 8 only, press H. For a 6 dot cell, press F. For a whole 8 dot cell, press W.


5.4.6 Preferred Reading Grade.
This is the grade used for prompts, help messages, documents, email, etc. The factory default is Grade 2. If you prefer to read in Grade 1, press A. If you prefer to read in Grade 2, press B. If you prefer Computer Braille, press C.


5.4.7 Text Document Reading Grade.
This option is available within a document, an email, or within the Planner. It allows you to select how text documents are displayed on the Braille display. The default setting is the "Preferred reading grade," which is generally Grade 2. Text documents include BrailleNote PK .kwt files, Microsoft Word, ASCII text and other forms of text documents that you may choose to read or edit.
For on the fly translation to your preferred reading grade, press P. For 6 dot computer Braille, press F. For 8 dot computer Braille, press H.


5.4.8 Braille Language.
BrailleNote PK provides a choice of three Grade 1/Grade2 Braille languages, namely USA, UK and Australian Braille.
For USA Braille, press S. For UK Braille, press K. For Australian Braille, press A.
This setting determines the way grade 1 and grade 2 Braille are represented inside the BrailleNote PK and when it is embossed. It also controls how Braille is translated to text, and vice versa. Usually this setting will have already been set for you before you receive your BrailleNote PK. Be careful about changing it because files created in one language will not be read or embossed properly if another language is selected.


5.4.9 Calculator Braille Language.
This option is only available within the Calculator. Calculations are displayed in your preferred Braille grade on the Braille display in either the Nemeth Braille Code for Mathematics or the UK Braille Mathematics Notation.
For Nemeth code, USA, press N. For UK Mathematics Notation, press U.


5.4.10 Computer Braille Language.
The BrailleNote PK is supplied with two Computer Braille tables, namely USA and UK. However, the user may create or install additional Computer Braille tables.
For USA computer Braille, press S. For UK computer Braille, press K. To cycle through all the available Computer Braille tables, press SPACEwithdots34.


5.4.11 Cursor Shape for Computer Braille.
This setting determines which dots are used to indicate the cursor when Computer Braille is being displayed. The setting is independent from the cursor shape used to display standard Braille. The default setting is dot8, but you may also choose to have dot7 only, dots7and8only, dots123456, or all8dots of the cell.
To select the cursor for both dots 7 and 8, press B. For dot 7 only, press G. For dot 8 only, press H. For a 6 dot cell, press F. For a whole 8 dot cell, press W.


5.4.12 Display Computer Braille using 6 or 8 dots.
The default setting is 6 dot Computer Braille, but 8 dot Computer Braille is available for those involved with software programming and other tasks requiring an extended range of characters.
To display Computer Braille in 6 dot format, press F. For 8 dot format, pressH.


5.4.13 Message Display Time.
This sets the time in seconds that messages, such as error messages, will remain on the Braille display before the next prompt is displayed. By setting this to 0, the message will remain until you press a navigation key. The time may be set between 0 and 30 seconds.


5.4.14 Navigation Key Set.
The navigation keys can be set up for lefthanded or righthanded operation. You can also create a custom key set to suit your personal preference. The factory setting is righthanded.
To select the standard righthanded set, press R. The functions of the navigation keys are: N2: BACK,N3: PREVIOUS, N5: ADVANCE, and N6: NEXT.
To select the lefthanded set, press L. The functions of the navigation keys are: N3: NEXT,N2:ADVANCE,N5:BACK, and N6: PREVIOUS.
For a custom set, press C, then ENTER. You must then define the function of each of the navigation keys, starting with the left navigation key. For each navigation key in turn, select its function and press ENTER.
For a navigation key to perform the PREVIOUS function, press P. For a navigation key to perform the BACK function, press B. For a navigation key to perform ADVANCE, press A. For a navigation key to perform NEXT, press N. Alternatively, as the navigation key is announced, press SPACE withdots34 to review the options.
The navigation keys in the custom set are set independently of each other, so there is nothing to stop you from setting all navigation keys to the same function. A good way to check the function of your custom set is to enter the Keyboard Learn mode from the Main Menu. You can then press each navigation key to determine its assigned function.


5.5 Keyboard Settings.
To review the Keyboard settings list anywhere in KeySoft, press SPACEwithO for the Options Menu, then K. Press SPACEwithE to leave the Keyboard settings list and return to your original place in KeySoft.
The quick key for this function is BACKSPACEwithENTERwithK.
A detailed explanation of each KeyBoard Setting option follows:


5.5.1 Setting the Keyboard Voice.
The first of these settings determines how much KeySoft speaks as you type. KeySoft prompts: "Keyboardvoice?CurrentlyWords."
The options are as follows:
To turn off speech altogether, press F followed by ENTER;
To spell words as they are typed, press S followed by ENTER;
To speak whole words, press W followed by ENTER;
To both spell and speak words, press B followed by ENTER;
To cycle through all the items above, press SPACEwithdots34.
Or just press ENTER to leave the selection unchanged.
The suggested setting is "Words." If you are learning to type, you may prefer the "Spell" option or the "Both" option. If you can type quickly, you might select the "Words" option, or turn off speech altogether.
You can press HELP for a reminder of these options.


5.5.2 Preferred Keyboard Braille Grade.
The setting determines the grade of Braille in which you prefer to type. To select Grade 1 Braille, press A; Grade 2 Braille, press B; and to input Computer Braille, press CorJ. To leave this option unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is Grade 2.


5.5.3 Advise when Computer Braille is required.
To be advised when Computer Braille is required, press Y. For no warning, press N. To leave this option unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is Yes.
Using this setting will cause KeySoft to advise whenever Computer Braille input is required, such as in email addresses.


5.5.4 Select 6 or 8 dot Computer Braille.
When you are typing in Computer Braille, this setting determines how you will input dots 7 and 8 if they are required. If you select 6 dot Braille, you must press SPACEwithU before typing any character that requires a dot 7. For example, in US Computer Braille, at sign used in email addresses is written with dots47. If you have chosen 6 dot entry, press SPACEwithU, then dot4, to write this symbol.
If you choose 8 dot Computer Braille, the BACKSPACE key becomes dot7, and ENTER becomes dot8. So in the at sign example, you would press BACKSPACEwithdot4 to write the symbol. To have the BACKSPACE and ENTER keys perform their usual functions, simply press SPACE at the same time. So to perform an ENTER, press ENTERwithSPACE. The BACKSPACE and ENTER keys only act in this way when you are working in Computer Braille.
To select 6 dot Braille, press F. For 8 dot, press H.


5.6 Review Voice.
To examine the Review Voice settings anywhere in KeySoft, press SPACEwithO for the Options Menu, then R. Press SPACEwithE to leave the Review Voice settings and return to your original place in KeySoft.
The quick key for this function is BACKSPACEwithENTERwithR.
There are four items associated with the Review Voice settings. These are:
Whether the speech is On, On Request, or Off;
The level of punctuation spoken by the Review Voice;
The manner in which numbers are displayed;
The volume of the delete and error alert tones.
When you select the Review Voice, you are presented with the first of the four items, and you must either accept or change the setting before moving on to the next item.


5.6.1 Speech On or Off.
This option displays the current speech status; On at all times, On request, or Off. Press ENTER to accept the prompted option, or press the appropriate letter followed by ENTER to select your chosen option.
To have speech on at all times, press N. To have speech only when requested, press R. To turn all speech and sound off, with the exception of alarms, press F. These commands have the same effect as cycling through the speech options by pressing the PREVIOUS navigation key with SPACE, as discussed in 1.17.2 Turning Speech On or Off.
If you select Speech on Request, KeySoft only speaks when you use a command that is a specific speech command. For example, in the word processor, when you move forward word by word using SPACEwithdot5, nothing is spoken. However, if you use the dedicated "SpeakWordunderCursor" command, SPACEwithdots25, the word under the cursor is spoken. You can use:
SPACEwithG to read continuously;
SPACEwithdots2356 to read the current paragraph;
SPACEwithdots25 to read the current word;
SPACEwithdots36 to hear the current character;
SPACEwithR to hear a prompt.
Note that if speech is turned off when the Braille display is off, the Braille display is forced on. This avoids having both Braille and speech off simultaneously.
For details on how to change the settings at start up, refer to 1.17.3 Startup Braille and Speech Mode. 


5.6.2 Speech and Braille shortcuts.
You can easily specify whether you want speech only, Braille only or both, when you switch on the BrailleNote PK. Simply press the C4 key and as soon as it beeps, press one of the following key combinations:
Speech only:	dot2;
Braille only:	dot3;
Speech and Braille:	dots23.


5.6.3 Punctuation level.
To select a different level, press a number between 1 and 5. The Factory setting is 2. To leave this option unchanged, just press ENTER.
The way the 5 levels treat punctuation and format indicators is described below.
Item 1) All punctuation is ignored except for '\'.
Item 2) This is the factory setting. The following punctuation is pronounced: & / > < * + ^ [ ] | \ = % $ #
Item 3) All punctuation is pronounced except for: , . ? ! ; : space, and single quotes within words.
Item 4) All punctuation is pronounced except for single spaces between words and single quotes within words. All special indicators are announced. Spaces nested between the end of a word and a period, comma, semicolon or colon are also announced. Capital letters are indicated by raising the pitch. If the first letter of a word, or all of the word is in capitals, the pitch is raised for the whole word. If a word contains an unusual mixture of capital and noncapital letters, then the pitch is raised even higher as an alert.
Item 5) All text is spelled. This level is not recommended for reviewing text, but it can be of use for other applications. When computer Braille or text is being read, capital letters are spoken by announcing "CAP" before the letter. If the whole word is in capital letters, the spelling of the word is prefixed with the announcement "CAPALL".


5.6.4 Number format.
For digits, press D. For words, press W. To leave this option unchanged, just press ENTER.
The Factory setting is words. For word format, the number 2010 is spoken as twentyten, since it is assumed to be a date. The sequence $20.15 is spoken as "twentydollarsand15cents.
If you select the digits option, the number 2010 is spoken digit by digit. The choice is a matter of personal preference and may depend upon the document with which you are working.


5.6.5 Delete Alert Tone Volume.
The delete tone sounds when characters are deleted with either the BACKSPACE or any delete option. The delete tone does not sound when the speech is turned off To change the volume of the tone, press a number between 0 and 6. 0disables the tone; 6 is loudest. To leave the setting unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is 4.


5.6.6 Error Alert Tone Volume.
The error tone sounds when you press an invalid key combination, or make some other error. The delete tone does not sound when the speech is turned off. To change the volume of the tone, press a number between 0 and 6. O disables the tone; 6 is loudest. To leave the setting unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is 4.


5.6.7 Progress tones.
Progress tones are there to let you know a page is loading or a download is progressing normally. To change the volume of the tone, type a number between 0 and 6. Zero disables the tone, 6 is loudest. To leave the setting unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is 4.


5.7 Connectivity.
As Connectivity is a major area in its own right, it has its own chapter in this user guide. For more information, refer to 12 Connectivity.

5.8 Visual Display.
Using and connecting a visual display is described in 2.8 Using a Remote Visual Display. To select visual display, press SPACEwithO, then V.


5.9 Next Appointment.
To find your next appointment, press SPACEwithO, then N for the "Nextappointment" option.
The appointment details are displayed. When you are finished, press ADVANCE to return to the point at which you selected the Options menu. See also 8.6.2 Checking Your Next Appointment.
The quick key for this function is ENTERwithN.


5.10 Power and Battery Status.
To determine the power and battery status, press SPACEwithO, then P. See also 2.3 Checking Power Status. PK.


5.11 User Guide.
To access the User Guide, press SPACEwithO, then U.
Accessing the User Guide is fully described in 1.24 User Guide.


5.12 Insertion.
The "Insertion" item only appears on the Options menu when you are in a KeySoft function where insertion is possible. For example, if you are in the Main Menu, it will not appear, but it will when in a document in KeyWord.
This item takes you to a menu with several options:
Time,
Date,
Calculator Result,
Unicode Character,
File (only when in KeyMail)
The quick command to go directly to the Insertion Menu is ENTERwithI.


5.12.1 Insert Calculator Result.
To insert the calculator result, press ENTERwithI then C.
You are asked if you want to insert the calculator result or the whole calculation. To insert the result, press R. To insert the whole calculation, press C. For example, if the calculation was 3+4=7, pressing R would enter 7 in the document.
Pressing C would enter 3+4=7 into the document.


5.12.2 Insert Unicode Character.
To insert a Unicode character, press ENTERwithI then U.
After choosing to insert a Unicode character, KeySoft will prompt for the character. Lets assume you want to enter an "e acute." Type "e acute" at the prompt for the Unicode character. KeySoft will respond with the character "cap e acute," so press SPACE to find the next "e acute" character. When the desired character is displayed, press ENTER to insert the character.
The Quick Key for inserting a Unicode character is BACKSPACEwithdots35.
For more information, see also 6.22 Extended Characters.


5.13 Repeat and Spell.
To repeat the prompt with the important parts spelled out, press SPACEwithO, then S for "Spell."
You are returned to your original place in KeySoft. This is like repeating an announcement, but with more detail.
The quick key for this function is ENTERwithS.


5.14 Hear Punctuation.
To reveal the most detail, you can repeat the last prompt with full punctuation and spaces. To do this, press SPACEwithO, then H for "Hearpunctuation."
You are returned to your original place in KeySoft. See also 1.17.5 Repeating an Announcement.
The quick key for this function is ENTERwithH.


5.15 Move to Another Task.
KeySoft allows you to move directly from one KeySoft task to another without returning to the Main Menu. You can switch between the Word processor, Scientific Calculator, Planner, Address List, EMail, etc. For example, if you are writing a document and you need an address, you can switch directly to the Address List, look up the address, and then return to the Word processor. You are placed back at the same point in your document.
The following hot keys are available for switching tasks:
To select the Word processor press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithW;
To select the Scientific Calculator press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithS;
To select the Planner press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithP;
To select the Address List press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithA;
To select the Email system press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithE;
To select the Book Reader press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithB;
To select the Internet browser, press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithI;
To select the Media Player, press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithM.
There is also a Task menu available. To access this, either:
1. Press SPACEwithO for the Options menu then Mfor Move to another task, or
2. PressFunctionwithS.
KeySoft displays: "Taskmenu."
You can make a selection by either:
1. Review the menu items using SPACEorADVANCEand select one by pressingNEXTorENTER. or,
2. Press the initial letter of the task; for example, Wfor Word Processor.
Remember that, if necessary, you can always get back to the Main Menu by pressing SPACEwithdots1to6.



5.16 Change Speech Volume Rate and Pitch.
The Options Menu reminds you how to change the speech volume, rate and pitch. The following commands can be used from anywhere in KeySoft:
To speak louder, press ENTERwithdot4;
To speak softer, press ENTERwithdot1;
To speak faster, press ENTERwithdot6;
To speak slower, press ENTERwithdot3;
To increase speech pitch, press ENTERwithdot5;
To decrease speech pitch, press ENTERwithdot2.
There are 32 volumes, 16 speeds and 16 pitches, and they change one step at each key press.
This is the end of the Options Menu.


5.17 Editing at a Prompt.
When you type in response to a KeySoft prompt, you can edit your input with KeyWord commands. You might read on the Braille display what you have typed before you press ENTER. If you find a mistake, you can use the touch cursor to position the cursor on the character where you want to start editing. You can edit your input with these standard commands:
Delete character before cursor:	BACKSPACE;
Delete character at cursor:	BACKSPACEwithdots36;
Delete word at cursor:	BACKSPACEwithdots25;
Delete word before cursor:	BACKSPACEwithdot2;
Delete to end of entry:	BACKSPACEwithdots14.
You can also use these commands to edit the lastused entry that KeySoft offers at various points. For example, you may have two documents named: "ExpensesQuarter1," and "ExpensesQuarter2." Let's assume you had previously been working with "ExpensesQuarter1." When you go to open the second document, KeySoft prompts: "Documenttoopen?ExpensesQuarter1."
Instead of typing a whole new name, you could use the review and edit commands to change the "1" into "2". Find "1," press the associated touch cursor button, then press BACKSPACEwithdots36 to delete the character at the cursor and press 2. You are done entering the document name. Press ENTER, and the document "ExpensesQuarter2" will be opened.
Note that an existing string can be edited only if your first action is a reading or editing command. If you press even one letter, the whole existing string is replaced by your new entry.
When using speech, you can make use of the SPACEwithdots25 and SPACEwithdots14 commands to review the prompt.



6 Advanced Word Processing.
This chapter describes the advanced features of KeyWord that allow you to create documents with more complex formats, and quickly make extensive changes to a document. It also discusses the inkprinting of Braille documents and handling documents of differing types, such as text or Microsoft Word.
Although the KeyWord functions covered in this chapter are often complex, you will find that often the default format settings will cover your document formatting needs. We suggest that you read the overview presented in the next section, then read only the sections of specific interest to you. As you become more familiar with KeyWord, revisit specific sections to maximize your understanding and use of the BrailleNote PK.


6.1 Overview.
This chapter starts by defining the difference between "Braille" and "print" documents and how the BrailleNote PK handles them. A Braille document is designed to be read either via speech or a Braille display, or embossed and read in Braille. A text, or inkprint, document is primarily for communicating with nonBraille readers, and therefore for printing out.
In this chapter the following terms are used:
Print or inkprint print style text only.
Printing  "ink" printing
Embossing  Braille embossing only.
Text  used in this chapter to refer collectively to both Braille and print. The exception is the term "text document" which refers only to nonBraille, inkprint type documents.
Because the BrailleNote PK is fitted with a Braille style keyboard, we assume that you will primarily be working with Braille documents, therefore Braille documents are covered first. Towards the end of the chapter we look at working with print documents.
First we look at how the format of a Braille document is controlled, covering line layout and page settings.
This is followed by the parameters associated with taking a Braille document and performing the "onthefly" translation of this document to a print document.
Following that is a section on Block commands, looking at the capability to quickly manipulate large blocks of text and generate form letters.
Next are several sections on ways to make it easier to read a document's content, inserting dates, times and calculator results, binding spaces and pasting details from the Address list.
Saving a document to the same or a different disk drive is covered next, along with abandoning the document without saving changes. The procedure to save documents as different document types is also discussed.
KeyWord's ability to create and open print documents is looked at next, together with the "onthefly" translation of these documents into Braille documents.
Finally, there is saving and restoring default format settings for a document and Unicode character support for extended characters.


6.2 Document Types.
It is worth remembering that for a BrailleNote PK, the default factory setting creates all new documents in Braille format. If you dont wish to use this default setting, you have the option of selecting your own desired document type from the Setup Options in the KeyWord menu.
BrailleNote PK can also create and open documents that have other file types. For example, text documents, Microsoft Word, Rich Text Format, ASCII, WordPerfect 5.1 for DOS, and KeySoft Version 2 Braille and print. KeyWord can also save documents to any of these file types. These documents can be reviewed and edited using standard commands. 
Print documents can be opened or created, and reviewed and edited from the BrailleNote PK Braille style keyboard. Print may be input using 6 or 8 dot computer Braille and BrailleNote PK provides computer Braille tables for both the US and British codes.


6.3 Formatting a Braille Document.
The format of a Braille document, that is a document prepared for reading on the BrailleNote PK or embossing, is determined by the settings in the Layout List, Page Settings List, and by individual commands for centering and justifying Braille text.
The settings associated with taking a Braille document and performing the "onthefly" translation of this document to properly formatted print are determined by the items in the Style of Presentation List, and the Inkprint Settings Menu.
The preparation of "Templatedocuments"for use with the address list and print files is controlled from the Template Menu. All of these menus and options are available from the Format menu.


6.3.1 The Format Menu.
Commands and settings to format Braille are grouped under the Format Menu. To access the Format menu while you are editing a document, press SPACEwith"the"sign, which is SPACEwithdots2346.As usual with menus, you can review the menu by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE repeatedly and select an item by pressing ENTERorNEXT, or just press an initial letter. For really fast access, many items are also available through Quick Commands. These are key combinations using SPACE, or BACKSPACE, or ENTER. The Quick Commands for the Format Menu are listed in the Command Summary, Chapter 16.
In the following discussion a paragraph is defined as a group of words that ends with a new line indicator.
The Format menu for a Braille document comprises the following 7 items:
Layout;
Center a line;
Right Justify a line;
Style of presentation;
Inkprint settings;
Page settings;
Template menu.
Each of these items is discussed in detail in this chapter.


6.3.2 Layout of a Braille Document.
The Layout option presents a list of settings that determine the layout of a Braille document, such as the left and right margins. You can change a layout setting at any point in a document. The setting takes effect from the last new line indicator and a new layout indicator appears immediately after the new line indicator to indicate that one or more layout settings have changed at that point. On the Braille display the new layout indicator is shown as dollarsignnl. Thedollarsignsign is the same as the edsign, dots1246.
Remember that this indicator never appears in a finished document; it is there to indicate that the layout changes at this point. It is the effect of the layout change that you will see if you convert the document to print, not the indicator itself. You can always check the layout on the Braille display using the Layout Mode.
The New Layout affects only settings that you actually change. Settings that you do not change continue as they were in the previous paragraph. A change to a setting applies from that point until the end of the document, or until the same setting is changed again. Whether or not a setting has been changed in the current paragraph is indicated by the word "changed" or "unchanged" in the prompt for each setting. For example, if you change the Left Margin, it is displayed in the form:
"LeftMargin12.(changed).
The word "changed" indicates that settings earlier in the document do not affect the left margin of this or subsequent paragraphs. For example, a document has a suggested left margin of 10, and it contains 3 paragraphs. Assume that you change the left margin of the second paragraph to 15, so it is announced as "changed. The left margin for paragraph 1 is 10, and the left margin for paragraphs 2 and 3 is 15.
If you now set the left margin of the first paragraph to 12, the left margins are 12, 15, and 15 for paragraphs 1, 2 and 3 respectively. Notice that the margins of the second and third paragraphs have remained at 15.
Now if you need to change the right margin for the whole document, move to the top of the document and use the Layout List to make the change. The new right margin applies to the whole document. New Layout does not affect it in the second paragraph because only the Left Margin was changed at that point.
To check or change Layout settings, position the cursor anywhere in the paragraph where you require the change and enter the Format menu by pressing SPACEwithdots2346. Select the "Layout" option and KeySoft displays:
"LayoutList.
You can review the settings by pressing SPACE. Make changes by brailling a new value when the current one is displayed, followed by ENTER. If a setting has been changed in a paragraph, you can clear it so that the setting in the preceding paragraph continues to take effect. To do this, use the Clear Field command, SPACEwithdots356.
The Layout List for a Braille document consists of the following items:
Indent first line of paragraph;
Indent rest of paragraph;
Tab stops;
Line Spacing;
Emboss page numbers;
Page number position;
Emboss both sides of the paper;
Left margin;
Right margin;
Word wrap.
The items in the Layout List are now discussed.


6.3.2.1 Indent First Line and Indent Rest of Paragraph.
These settings allow a number of indenting styles to be set up. For example, they can provide the Braille convention of starting each paragraph with two spaces, indent a whole paragraph, or provide a "hangingindent"where the first line of a paragraph starts at the left margin but subsequent lines are indented.
Indent First Line causes just the first line of each paragraph to be indented from the left margin by a chosen number of cells. Indent Rest of Paragraph causes all lines in a paragraph, except the first, to be indented by a chosen number of cells. A whole paragraph can be indented by setting Indent First Line and Indent Rest of Paragraph to the same number of cells. Remember that if these settings are changed, the changes apply for the remainder of the document or until the settings are changed again.
To change a setting, type the required number of cells and press ENTER. A number sign is not required.
The settings for Indent First Line and Indent Rest of Paragraph are entirely independent of the Tab Settings that can also be used to indent a paragraph.
The indent indicator is dollarsigni. Remember the dollarsignsign is the same as the edsign, dots1246.


6.3.2.2 Tabs.
Tabs provide a way of moving the cursor to predetermined positions on the line, and are mainly used to align columns of text. There are 10 tab stops, numbered 1 to 10. The first is measured in cells from the left margin, then each subsequent stop is measured from the previous one. Each tab stop has an initial setting of 3 cells, so the actual positions are 4, 7, 10, 13, etc.
Suppose you are editing and the cursor is at cell 8. Insert a tab indicator by pressing SPACEwithT, and the cursor will move to the next Tab stop, which is cell 10. If you then start typing, the text starts at cell 10. If you do the same on subsequent lines, a column of text is formed, starting at cell 10. The Tab appears on the Braille display as dollarsignt. When the Braille display is in Editing Mode or when the cursor is on a tab indicator the dollarsignt expands to show the tab number, for example dollarsignt#2.If you want to see the effect the tab will have on an embossed version of the document, use the Braille display's Layout Mode.
To review the tab stop settings, enter the Format menu by pressingSPACEwithdots2346and select the Layout option. Press SPACE repeatedly until "Tabstops" is displayed, and press ENTER.You can then review the tab settings by, once again, pressing SPACE repeatedly. To determine which column number a particular tab falls on, you can press SPACEwithwhsign(dots156) while reviewing the tab list.
When setting up tabs, first determine the number of columns you need and the maximum width each column must be. Now set Tab 1 to the width of the first column, Tab 2 to the width of the second column, and so on. If you later need to adjust the width of a particular column, simply change the setting for that particular tab stop. The width of all other columns remains the same, but if you increase a tab setting, check that you have not pushed a highnumbered tab stop off the page. To change a Tab stop, move to the tab stop number that you want, as if you were reviewing the setting, then type the required value and press ENTER; a number sign is not required. Make any other changes you require and then press SPACEwithE.


6.3.2.3 Indenting Tabs.
Any tab stop can be defined as an "IndentingTab. Indenting tabs allow you to inset either a whole paragraph, or all but the first line of a paragraph. They are most often used when creating numbered lists and outlines, where the first line of each paragraph starts with a number followed by a tab and the rest of the paragraph is indented underneath that tab. The indent created by an Indenting Tab applies only to the paragraph containing the Tab. Forcing a new line by pressing ENTER releases the indent and the text continues back at the left margin. This is the main difference between Indenting Tabs and indents created using the settings described in 6.3.2.1 Indent First Line and Indent Rest of Paragraph.
To set any particular Tab stop to be an Indenting Tab, type the letter I before the value. For instance, typing: "lettersign(dots56),I,numbersign(dots3456)5, after the value of Tab 1 is displayed, makes Tab 1 an indent 5 cells in from the left margin. With an indent set in this way, you can inset a paragraph by 5 cells by pressing SPACEwithT once at the start of the paragraph and the entire paragraph is indented 5 cells.
The Indenting Tab indicator is shown on the Braille display as dollarsignt while in Reading Mode. When the Braille display is in Editing Mode or when the cursor is positioned on an Indenting Tab indicator, it expands to dollarsignti#n where n is the indent value.


6.3.2.4 Semicolon Tabs.
Presenting data in columns within the available page width is not always possible in braille. Where this is the case, columns are often denoted by a semicolon and a space. You could do this by simply typing a semicolon after each column entry, but if you also want to translate the document into print with columns instead of semicolons, Tabs must be used. To provide for this, a special Semicolon Tab is available. This appears as a "Tab" in the braille document that always takes up two cells. When the document is embossed, a semicolon and a space are embossed. When the document is translated to a text document, the text is lined up in columns. If you want to use this convention, set each Tab stop by typing the letter S, and no number.
The Semicolon Tab indicator is shown on the Braille display as a semicolon while reading. When the Braille display is in Editing Mode or when the cursor is positioned on an Indenting Tab indicator it expands to dollarsignt; or dollarsign,t,semicolon.

6.3.2.5 Line spacing.
This allows single or double line spacing to be selected. To change the setting, type S for single, or D for Double.


6.3.2.6 Page Number Position.
If you choose to emboss page numbers, they can be placed in one of 6 positions on the page. You can select the top or bottom line by pressing T or B, then select left, center or right by pressing L, C, or R.If there is no top or bottom margin to accommodate the page number, the center position is not available, and a clearance of two spaces is put between the page number and the text when the left and right positions are used.


6.3.2.7 Left Margin.
This is the position of the left edge of the embossing, counted in cells from the extreme left embossing position. A left margin of 0 means that embossing starts as far left as the embosser can go. The left margin is usually set at 0 when a new document is started. No number sign is needed when entering a value.


6.3.2.8 Right Margin.
This is the position of the right edge of the text, counting back from the last cell position on a line. The assumed value is 0. No number sign is needed when entering a value.


6.3.2.9 Word Wrap.
This is the process by which text automatically continues on the next line when there is not enough space for another word on the current line. The initial setting of Word Wrap for a new document is "On" and, unless you plan to write computer programs using KeyWord, you will probably always leave it switched on. Computer programmers may want to switch it off and use a very large Paper Width setting to avoid carriage returns being inserted automatically in their program lines.
If word wrap is switched off, a beep sounds 10 cells before the right margin is reached, and you must decide where to start a new line by pressing ENTER. To change the word wrap setting, press Nto switch it On or Fto switch it Off.
This is the last item in the Layout list. Methods of reverting to initial settings and changing initial values used for new documents are discussed in 6.21 Initial Format Settings in a Document.


6.3.2.10 Layout Indicator.
When you change one or more layout settings, a New Layout indicator appears at the start of the paragraph to indicate that the layout has changed at that point. The new layout indicator was introduced in 3.12 Format Indicators. Remember also that a paragraph is a group of words that ends with a new line indicator. You can locate Layout markers with the Find command, SPACEwithF, using the search string BACKSPACEwithL.A Layout indicator can be deleted like any other character. This has the effect of canceling all changes made by the new layout, leaving all layout settings the same as they were in the previous paragraph.
The layout indicator appears on the braille display as $nl

6.3.3 Page Settings for a Braille document
This group of settings applies to the entire current document. The Page Settings List contains 5 items, as follows:
First page number;
Paper length;
Paper width;
Top margin;
Bottom margin.
You can change the Page Settings at any point in the document, and the change applies to that whole document. Enter the Format Menu by pressing SPACEwithdots2346 and select the "Page settings" option. KeySoft displays:
"PageSettingslist.
This is a list of the current settings for that document. You can review the values by pressing SPACE repeatedly. Make changes by typing a new value when the current one is announced, followed by ENTER. To return to the document, press SPACEwithE. If you have made changes, KeySoft prompts:
"Confirmchanges?"
Press Yto confirm the new settings, or Nto abandon the changes. You are then returned to the document.
The Page Settings List for a Braille document consists of the following 5 items:


6.3.3.1 First Page Number.
This is the number that appears on the first page of the document, if you choose to have your pages numbered. When you create a new document this is set to 1, but if your document was just one chapter of a larger document, you might want to start numbering at a higher number.
Suppose you had typed a large report as two separate documents. The first document might contain pages 1 to 100, and the second, pages 101 onward. The first document would start with a "FirstPageNumber" of 1, the second with 101.


6.3.3.2 Paper Length and Width.
These settings define the length and width of the paper that is used when this document is embossed.
Usually you will use your standard Braille paper when embossing a document. In this case, leave the Paper Length and Width settings in the Page Settings List set to the standard embosser settings. 
If the Paper Length is set to the standard embosser settings when you review the Page Settings list, the following prompt is displayed:
"Paperlength?Usingthestandardembossersettingofx.
If you change the setting here in the Page Settings List, the prompt is:
"Paperlength?l,
where l is the paper length in lines. In this case the embosser setting is being overridden for this document. To reset the paper length or width to match the value in the Embosser Setup list, use the Clear Field command, SPACEwithdots356.


6.3.3.3 Top and Bottom Margins.
These are the number of blank lines left at the top and bottom of the page when embossing. The initial values for a new document are both zero.
These are the last items in the Page Settings list. The method of changing the initial values is discussed in 6.21 Initial Format Settings in a Document.


6.3.3.4 Center a Braille Line.
You can position a line of text midway between the left and right margins. To do this, place the cursor anywhere on the line, and press SPACEwithdots2346 for the Format menu, then Cfor Center. The line of text is centered horizontally. To maintain the centering effect with long lines, text in excess of 90% of the usable page width overflows onto the next line. To indicate centered lines a special indicator dollarsignc appears at the beginning of the line. Centering applies to the whole of a paragraph.


6.3.3.5 Right Justify a Braille Line.
A line of text can be rightjustified so that the last character is positioned on the right margin. To do this, place the cursor anywhere on the line, and press SPACEwithdots2346 for the Format menu, then R for Right Justify. To indicate right justified lines a special indicator dollarsignr appears at the beginning of the line. Right justification applies to the whole of a paragraph. A line cannot be both centered and right justified; it can only be one or the other.


6.4 Formatting a Braille Document for Inkprinting.
When you compose a Braille document, you normally follow Braille layout conventions. However, when you come to translate a Braille document to a print text document as described in Chapter 12, you may want to use different layout conventions for ink print text, especially if you intend to print out the document on a PC. For example, new paragraphs can be indicated differently, attributes such as bold can be used, and even the text itself can be different in places. You could translate the Braille document into a text document, and then use KeyWord to format the text document according to inkprint conventions. However that task would soon become tedious, especially if you then modify the Braille document and have to repeat the entire process. You would also have a Braille and a text version of the same document, and these could easily get out of step if you make modifications.
KeySoft therefore allows you to control the inkprint layout from within the Braille document, so that it can be translated directly from source and is formatted in inkprint completely independently of its Braille formatting. The Format menu contains two items for this, called: "StyleofPresentation, and "Inkprintsettings.


6.4.1 Style of Presentation linked with a Braille Document.
KeySoft allows you to indicate various inkprint styles. These do not affect the layout of the Braille document, but when you translate it to a text document, KeySoft uses the indicated styles to translate the layout from the Braille convention to an inkprint convention. For example, in Braille you might have subheadings on a new line and indented 4 spaces. In inkprint, however, you might want a subheading in bold print with a blank line before and after it.
There are 6 styles of presentation that cover the presentation styles found in most documents. These are as follows:
Paragraph;
Heading;
Subheading;
Outline;
Lines;
Identical to source.
To check or change a style, locate the cursor anywhere in the paragraph and press SPACEwithdots2346 for the Format menu, then S for Style of presentation, or press BACKSPACEwithS. KeySoft displays the style of the current section of text. If you wish to leave the Style unchanged, press ENTER.Alternatively, you can review the available Styles by pressing SPACE repeatedly and choose a new Style by pressing ENTER, or press the initial letter of your choice. Settings apply from the start of the current paragraph following a New Line indicator, and a change is indicated by a "Style" indicator. There are different indicators for each style.
Use the styles by marking the beginning of each part of your document according to its style, whether it is a heading, subheading, paragraphs of text, an outline or numbered list, or just single lines of information, such as the address at the top of a letter. When you then print or translate the document, the styles are used to reformat each part appropriately. While the names represent typical uses, the format produced by each style can be altered to suit your taste or purpose.
Setting styles is best done as you are brailling the document, but you can always go back and set them later. Get into the habit of doing it and you will have perfectly formatted print documents.
The Styles are now described.


6.4.1.1 Paragraph.
This is the initial style for a new document style. While paragraphs in Braille might start on a new line indented by two spaces, paragraphs in a text document might have no indentation, and be separated by a blank line. While this is the formatting convention for paragraphs, the options described in 13.16.9 Reviewing and Setting Back Translation Options, allow you to change it to suit your needs. The paragraph style indicator is $sp.


6.4.1.2 Heading.
Regardless of how a heading is formatted in Braille, in inkprint a blank line is placed both above and below the heading and it is centered and in bold font. If a heading takes up more than one line, each subsequent line is also centered and in bold font. A blank line in Braille produces a blank line in inkprint. The heading style continues until another style indicator changes it, or two or more blank lines are encountered. In the latter case the style reverts to "Paragraph. Once again, this is the suggested formatting convention for headings. It can be changed by altering the options described in 13.16.9 Reviewing and Setting Back Translation Options. The heading style indicator is dollarsignh.


6.4.1.3 Subheading.
In print format, a blank line is left before and after a subheading. The subheading is bold, and starts at the left margin. Subheadings can take up more than one line, but the first blank line returns the style to "Paragraph.
The subheading style indicator is $h#1.

6.4.1.4 Outline.
This style is used where you have numbered paragraphs or an outline. Usually each item starts on a new line, with subsequent lines belonging to that item being indented. This format is retained in inkprint, and a blank line is left between items whether or not there is a blank line in Braille. Another style indicator or two or more blank lines terminates Outline Style, and in the latter case the style reverts to "Paragraph.
The outline style indicator is $ou.

6.4.1.5 Lines.
This style is used to show that the print text is a series of separate lines all starting at the left margin. It might be used for the address at the top of a letter, for example. Each New Line in Braille starts a New Line in print. Each blank line in Braille causes a blank line in print. This style stays in effect until another style indicator is encountered, or two or more blank lines causes the style to revert to "Paragraph.
The line style indicator is $sl.

6.4.1.6 Identical to Source.
You can use this style to preserve the formatting of a section in a Braille document when it is translated. This style continues in effect until another style is encountered.
The Identical to Source style indicator is dollar sign si.
The Identical to Source style indicator is $si.


6.5 InkPrint Settings linked with a Braille Document.
These settings can be used when you are editing a Braille document to control the format of the document when it is translated to a text document. To access the Inkprint settings menu when you are editing a Braille document, press SPACEwithdots2346 for the Format menu, then I for Inkprint settings. You can review the list and select an item in the same way as all KeySoft menus. The Inkprint settings menu contains the following 6 items:
Layout;
Inclusion;
Start inkprint exclusion;
End inkprint exclusion;
Translation options;
Page settings.
These items are discussed now.


6.5.1 Inkprint only Inclusion.
You may want to include text or formatting commands in the print version that are not required in the Braille version. For example, you could add an explanatory note, underline a word, or force a new page. To do this, either select the "Inclusion" option in the Inkprint Settings Menu, or press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithC. KeySoft prompts: "Inkprintonlyinclusion?"
In response to this prompt, type the text that you want to appear in the print version and press ENTER. You can also include the following formatting commands:
New line:	press SPACEwithensign,dots26;
New page:	press SPACEwithP;
Tab:	press SPACEwithT;
Center line:	press ENTERwithC;
Right justify line:	press ENTERwithR;
Underline:	press ENTERwithU;
Font:	press ENTERwithF.
There is a description of the last two items, Underline and Font, in 6.20.2 Underlining and 6.20.3 Font.
You can review the document for inclusion markers, and delete them like any other character. To review or edit the text of an inclusion, position the cursor on the inclusion marker and select the Inclusion option again.


6.5.2 Inkprint Exclusion.
Conversely, there may be text or formatting commands in the Braille document, such as the description of a table layout, which you may want to exclude from the print version. This is done by marking the start and end of the text or formatting commands you want excluded, as follows: With the cursor at the required point, either select "Startinkprintexclusion" from the Inkprint settings menu or press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithdots34. KeyWord marks the position with a special "Startinkprintexclusion" indicator $xis.Now type the text or formatting commands that you do not want to appear in the print version, and either select "Endinkprintexclusion" from the Inkprint Settings Menu or press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithdots26. KeyWord marks the position with a special "Endinkprintexclusion"indicator $xie.
Note that you can also add these markers to existing text, if you wish.


6.5.3 Translation Options.
This group of 9 settings affects the way in which the current Braille document is reformatted when it is translated to a text document. . Settings apply from the start of the current paragraph, and can be changed at chosen points throughout the document. The initial values are covered in 13.16.9 Reviewing and Setting Back Translation Options, as well as other translation settings that are not available while editing.
To access the print translation options, either select the "Translationoptions" from the Inkprint Settings Menu, or press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithO. The settings are as follows:
What type of paragraph boundary is used in the source document?
Interpret larger boundaries as paragraphs also?
New Line translation option?
Convert Braille italics to italics font?
Include two spaces between sentences?
Suppress New Page markers?
Include a blank line between items in outline style?
Revert to Paragraph Style After How Many Blank Lines?
Translation find and replace.
The last item allows you to replace a particular formatting sequence with another, as part of the translation process. For example, the Braille document might use 3 spaces anywhere on a line to indicate the start of a new paragraph, and New Line indicators in the text document could replace these.
To set up this sequence, at the Find? prompt press the binding space command ENTERwithB, three times, followed by ENTER.
This sets up the "Find?" string of 3 spaces, then at the Replacementfor3spaces? prompt type:
SPACEwithdots26 followed by ENTER.
This sets up the "Replacement?" string of one New Line.


6.5.4 InkPrint Page Settings.
When you translate a Braille document to a text document, a group of page settings is used for the entire text document. To access the Inkprint Page Settings, select "PageSettings" from the Inkprint Settings Menu. KeySoft displays:
"InkPrintPagesettingslist."
This is a similar group of settings to the Braille list, comprising first page number, paper size, and top and bottom margins. The initial top and bottom margins are 6 lines, or one inch, suitable for print. The Inkprint Page Settings indicator is positioned at the top of the document.
Values that you set here are used in the translated versions of your Braille document.


6.6 Inkprint Layout.
The settings for a Braille document, such as left and right margin, are accessed from the Format menu by selecting Layout. In contrast, when you are preparing a Braille document for printing or translation, you may need to check or change the settings that are used for inkprint. These can be accessed from the Format menu by selecting Inkprint Settings, and then Layout, or by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTERwithL.
The Inkprint Layout list contains a similar group of settings to the Braille list, including indents, left and right margins, tabs, page number enabling, line spacing and word wrap, but the values are for print. The initial values for new documents are Left and Right Margins of 10 columns, or one inch, and Tab Stops of Indent 5.
An additional setting in the Inkprint Layout list is Justification. This style is used in most printed newspapers and magazines, and spreads the words out so the last character of each line is at the right margin. It gives the text a tidy appearance, with both sides of the text being straight, but spacing between some words is increased. It is a matter of preference which way you set this option. The initial setting is off. To change the setting, press N for On or F for Off.
Values that you set in the Inkprint Layout are used when your Braille document is translated to a text document. They do not affect the layout of the Braille document. 


6.7 Block Commands.
The ability to manipulate blocks of text is an invaluable editing aid because it lets you mark a passage and delete it, move it, or copy it. This saves typing time and avoids the introduction of new typing errors. Blocks can be moved from one location to another within a document, copied repeatedly throughout a document, or transferred from one document to another. A block can be copied from one KeySoft task to another. For example, you can copy text between the Word Processor, Planner, Email and Address List.
A "block" of text means any continuous section of text. A block can be any size from a single character, a few words, a sentence, a couple of paragraphs, all the way up to an entire document. You define a block of text by marking one end and then moving the cursor to the other end of the block. If you want to keep the block marked for future reference you can insert markers at each end of the block. You can then move or copy the marked block in a threestep procedure:
1. Move or copy the block to the clipboard;
2. Move to where you want to insert the block;
3. Paste the clipboard to the required place in the text.
The clipboard is simply a temporary storage place for the block of text. It is provided automatically when you use a command that requires the clipboard. The word "paste"comes from the old practice of cutting out a section of printed text from its page and pasting it back in a different place.


6.7.1 Block Commands Menu.
This menu provides all the commands needed to mark a block and manipulate it. These Block Commands are accessed through the Block Commands Menu, which you can enter by pressing SPACEwithB. There are 13 items in the menu, in order as follows:
Append block to clipboard;
Copy block to clipboard;
Delete block;
Insert file;
Move block to clipboard;
Paste clipboard;
Read block;
Store block;
Top marker insertion;
Bottom marker insertion;
Erase file and exit Keyword;
Zap, erase the block markers;
Grade. Correct Braille grade of block.
Items on the menu can be selected in either of the usual ways.


6.7.2 Marking a Block.
Before performing any block operation, you must define the block. Marking the top and bottom of the text you wish to manipulate does this, or alternatively you can mark one end of the block of text and move the cursor to the other. Follow these steps to mark a block:
1. Move the cursor onto the first character you want included in the block.
2.  Enter the Block Commands Menu by pressing SPACEwithB
3. Select the "Topmarkerinsertion" option. You are returned to the document and a marker appears in the document to indicate the top of the block. The marker is $blt.
4. Now move the cursor just past the last character you want included in the block. You are now ready to enter the Block Commands Menu and move, copy, or delete the block of text. Alternatively, you can enter a bottom block marker, so that the chosen block remains defined. The marker is $blb.
Another way of marking a block is with a Quick Mark command. These commands automatically mark a character, word, sentence, line, paragraph or section. Just position the cursor, select the Block Menu and use the following commands:
Mark character under cursor,	press SPACEwithdots36;
Mark word under cursor,	press SPACEwithdots25;
Mark sentence under cursor,	press SPACEwithdots14;
Mark paragraph under cursor,	press SPACEwithdots2356.
The selection of sentences and paragraphs can be changed to lines and sections by the Reading Mode, as described in 6.8 Cursor Movement Modes.
Although it is called "TopofBlock" it does not matter which way around you mark a block of text. Only one block can be marked within a document at a time. To move the block marker, just mark a different position. You can check the position of the block marker by reviewing the text with commands such as reading forward a word using SPACEwithdot5.You can perform other editing functions without affecting the block marker. It is even saved with a document.


6.7.3 Read Block.
You can have KeySoft speak a block of text to check that you have marked it correctly. To read a block, press SPACEwithB, for the Block Menu, then R,for "Read.KeySoft says, "Blockread,speaks the text in the block and returns you to the Block Menu. Like the other reading commands, you can press BACKSPACEwithENTER at any time to stop the cursor at that point, or press SPACEwithE to abandon the reading and move the cursor to its final position.


6.7.4 Copy Block to Clipboard.
This command allows you to copy a block of text to the clipboard. To do this, first mark the block of text you wish to copy. Then enter the Block Commands Menu, select the "Copyblocktoclipboard" option and the marked block of text is copied into the clipboard replacing any text already in there. The original text and the cursor position remain unchanged.
Block commands can take a few seconds if a large block of text is involved.


6.7.5 Append Block to Clipboard.
This command is similar to "CopyBlocktoClipboard. The difference is that the marked block of text is added to, or appended to, the current contents of the clipboard instead of replacing it. This allows you to build up a phrase or a list of items in the clipboard. To append a block to the clipboard, first mark a block of text. Then enter the Block Commands Menu, select "Appendblocktoclipboard, and the marked block of text is copied into the clipboard and placed after any existing contents. The original text, including the block markers and the position of the cursor remains unchanged.


6.7.6 Move Block to Clipboard.
This command allows you to remove or cut a block of text from its place in the document, and put it into the clipboard. To do this, first mark the block you wish to move. Then, enter the Block Commands Menu, select"Moveblocktoclipboard"and the marked block of text is removed from the document and placed in the clipboard replacing any text already there.


6.7.7 Paste Clipboard.
This command allows you to copy the contents of the clipboard into a document. Before using the "Paste"command, you should have copied or moved the required block of text into the clipboard. To paste the clipboard, position the cursor at the exact spot that the first character of the text in the clipboard should appear. This can be in the original document, or you can exit the original document and select another.
Enter the Block Commands Menu, select "Pasteblock, and the text in the clipboard is inserted at the cursor position. The cursor is on the first character of the pasted block, and the word under the cursor is spoken. There is no block marker in the pasted text.
The original text and the cursor position remain unchanged by the pasting operation. This allows you to paste the same block of text to various places without needing to copy or move the block to the clipboard again.
The contents of the clipboard are preserved while you carry out any other functions with the BrailleNote PK. For example, you can copy a passage to the clipboard, select the Planner, then return to the Word Processor and the clipboard contents are unchanged.
If necessary, the contents of the clipboard are translated to suit the type of document it is being pasted into. This means that you can directly paste a section of a text document into a Braille document, for example, and the text is translated into Braille of the grade in use at the insertion point.


6.7.8 Delete Block.
This function completely removes a marked block from your document. It is useful for deleting large amounts of text. To delete a block, first mark the block of text you wish to delete. Then enter the Block Commands Menu and select "Deleteblock. KeySoft prompts: "Deleteblock.Sure?To confirm the deletion, press Y, or, if you decide not to delete the block, pressN.


6.7.9 Changes to Text Format.
When you paste a passage into an existing document, make sure that any spaces at the beginning or end are correct. The most common problems are too few spaces at the beginning, or too many at the end. The marked block can contain formatting indicators like New Page indicators, and these are copied or moved and pasted with the block. The exceptions are indicators such as Line Break and Page Break, which are only relevant to the original document. After doing a Block Move, Copy, Delete, or File Insert, you should check the document layout to ensure that it has not been upset by the block manipulation.


6.7.10 Store Block.
This command allows you to store a block of text in another file, instead of in the clipboard. The other file may already exist, or you can create it as part of the Store Block process. To store a block, first mark the block of text you wish to store. Then press SPACEwithB for the Block menu, followed by S, for "Store. KeySoft prompts for the drive, folder and name of the file to store the block in. Select these in the usual way.
If you are storing the block in an existing file, you are offered the options of appending the block to the bottom of the file, or replacing the complete file.
You can store a block of text directly to a file of another type if you wish. This might be a text document when you are editing a Braille one, or it could be a Microsoft Word document, for example. To create a file of another type press BACKSPACEwithX repeatedly at the file name prompt until the type of file you are looking for is displayed. To select an existing file, type its name or use the list of files to find it. In the list of files you can change the type of the file displayed by pressing SPACEwithX repeatedly. To change between Braille and computer Braille entry at the file name prompt, press BACKSPACEwithX repeatedly. Braille is suitable for entry of KeyWord document names and computer Braille is suitable for entering the name of any file.
If you need information about the selection of a directory or file name, you can find this in 13.13 Creating Renaming and Erasing SubDirectories. When storing to an ASCII file, KeySoft uses the options in the ASCII Translation Set Up List, as described in 13.16.8 Reviewing and Setting ASCII Translation Options.
The process of storing a block does not remove that block from the current document.


6.7.11 Insert File.
The Insert File command allows you to insert the complete contents of another document into your existing document at the current cursor position. This feature is useful if you wish to send the same letter to a number of different people, as described in the next section. To insert a file, position the cursor at the point where you want the first character of the inserted file to appear, select the Block Menu, and then press I, for "Insert. KeySoft prompts for the drive, folder and name of the file to insert. Select these in the usual way.
As well as inserting KeyWord documents you can insert a file of any type supported by KeySoft, for example, a Microsoft Word document. If you need information about the selection of a directory or file name, you can find this in 13.13 Creating Renaming and Erasing SubDirectories. When inserting an ASCII file, KeySoft uses the options setup in the ASCII Translation Set Up List, as described in 13.16.8 Reviewing and Setting ASCII Translation Options.
After the file insert, the cursor is positioned immediately after the inserted text. That is, the file is inserted as though it had just been typed.


6.7.12 Merging Documents.
The Insert File feature is useful for merging a form letter into a number of letters, each addressed to a different person or company. In fact, this feature makes the preparation of any document that contains some standardized text and layout much easier. Follow these steps to generate personalized memos:
1. Prepare a document containing the text that is common to all recipients;
2. Open another document for the first memo. Type the first person's name and any personal text;
3. Now insert the common text in the memo by positioning the cursor at the appropriate point and pressing SPACEwithB, then I.Follow the procedure outlined in the previous section to select the document containing the common text. Then save this memo, and open another document for the next memo.


6.7.13 Erase File.
This option provides a convenient method of completely removing a file and its contents. If you are unsure as to whether you wish to delete a particular file you can open the file, and after determining it is no longer needed, delete it using the Erase File option on the Block menu. This saves you from having to exit the file and delete it using the File Manager. KeySoft will request confirmation before removing the file.


6.7.14 Zap Block Markers.
If required, the Block Markers can be removed after a block function has been completed. To erase, or "zap, the block markers, enter the Block menu by pressing SPACEwithB, and select the "Zap" option. The cursor position remains unaltered.


6.7.15 Correct Grade of Block.
This menu item allows you to change the Braille grade assigned to a block of text after you have already typed it. Imagine you want to type an email address in the middle of a document. You change to computer Braille to do this, but forget to change the setting back to contracted Braille. Everything is fine on the Braille display, but on review with speech, or emailing the text, the text that KeySoft recognizes as computer Braille but is actually contracted Braille comes out looking very strange indeed.
To use this function, first mark the block of text. Go to the Block Commands menu by pressing SPACEwithB, then press G. KeySoft will prompt you for the Braille grade you wish to assign to the block. Select your Braille grade using A for grade 1, Bfor grade 2, or C for computer Braille. You will then be returned to the document, where the block is now in the correct Braille grade.


6.8 Cursor Movement Modes.
KeySoft has a range of specific moving commands designed to make moving around a document quick and accurate. These were listed in. When you are reading text organized in sentences and paragraphs, then commands to move the cursor by sentence or paragraph are very useful. For example:
SPACEwithdot4 moves the cursor to the beginning of the next sentence;
SPACEwithdots56 moves the cursor to the beginning of the next paragraph.
However when working with poetry or lists, it would be more convenient to move by a line at a time than by sentence. To allow the most efficient cursor movement for the text you are working with, KeySoft provides 3 cursor movement modes; sentence and paragraph, line and sentence, and column. When you change the cursor movement mode, the moving commands themselves don't change, just the way in which they direct the cursor to move around the text.
To change the cursor movement mode while in a document, press SPACEwithM repeatedly, until you get to the one you want. These affect the operation of the SPACEwithdot1,SPACEwithdot4,SPACEwithdots23and SPACEwithdots56 reading commands. They also affect what is spoken by these commands and by the BACKSPACEwithdots2356and BACKSPACEwithdots14commands.
The default cursor movement mode is Sentence and Paragraph. When in Line and Sentence Mode:
SPACEwithdot4 reads the next line; SPACEwithdots23 reads the next section. Likewise, SPACEwithdot1reads the previous line and SPACEwithdots23reads the previous section.
In Line Mode, the word "section" has a specific meaning. The Current Section starts at the last blank line before the cursor, and continues until the first blank line after the cursor. Similarly, the Next Sectionstarts at the first blank line after the cursor, and continues until the following blank line. Line Mode is useful when you are concerned with the layout of the document. Among other purposes, it's a good way of checking for blank lines.
The third Reading Mode is called Column Mode, and acts as follows:
SPACEwithdot4moves the cursor down a line but keeping it in the same column. It reads the current word on this line;
SPACEwithdots56, reads the next section.
Column Mode is effective for reviewing text that is laid out in a table. It allows you to move up or down a column in a table, reading entries one at a time.
Although we have only given two examples, the current cursor movement mode affects all reading commands that relate to sentences and paragraphs. This is also true for deletion commands. For instance, in Sentence and Paragraph mode, BACKSPACEwithdots14 deletes to the end of the sentence, but in Line Mode it deletes to the end of the line. The cursor movement mode also affects the Quick Mark commands in the Block Menu.


6.9 Moving to the Start of the Next Line.
It is possible to move the cursor to the first position on the next line without inserting a New Line in the document. To do this, press: SPACEwithdots45.
KeySoft will move the cursor to the next Tab position and display the word under the cursor.
If speech is on KeySoft says "NewLine, or "LineBreak, followed by the first word on the next line.


6.10 Moving to the Next Tab.
It is possible to move the cursor to the next tab position without inserting a tab into the document. To do this, press: BACKSPACEwithT.
Note that this command jumps to the next tab position, regardless of whether there is actually a tab indicator in the text.


6.11 Inserting the Time, Date or Calculator Result.
You can insert the time, date or calculator result directly into a document instead of typing them. With the cursor in the appropriate place in your current document, press ENTERwithI. In the Insert Menu select Date, Time, or Calculator result as required.
If you select the date, KeySoft prompts:
"Inserttoday'sdateorprintingdate?"
If you press T, KeySoft inserts today's date. If you press P, KeySoft puts in a special "Insertdate"indicator $dtp,and the current date is substituted whenever the document is translated to another file format, or when it is used as a template file.
If you choose to insert from the Calculator, KeyPlus prompts:
"Insertresultorwholecalculation?"
Press R to insert the Result or C to insert the whole calculation.
The most recent result from the calculator is inserted into the document, which saves you having to remember and retype it. If you select C, the whole calculation is entered, for example 3+7=10.
There is one additional item on the "InsertionMenu, named "Unicodecharacter.This allows the insertion of extended characters from the Unicode character tables. See also 6.22.1 Inserting Extended Characters.

6.12 Binding Spaces.
A binding space is simply a space that binds the words on either side of it to each other in a way that a normal space cannot.
You can use a binding space to keep two words together on the same line, so that they cannot be split apart by the text breaking at the end of the line at a normal space. For example, it would be undesirable for a first initial and a last name, such as T. Brown, to appear on separate lines.
The other place where binding spaces are useful is in the search function when searching for an email  you need to use binding spaces instead of normal spaces in a string of words to be searched for. In other contexts of search and/or replace, this is not necessary.
PressingENTERwithBproduces a "bindingspace. It is shown as $bsp on the Braille display.


6.13 Pasting an Address.
A person's name and address, or other details, can be copied from an address list and inserted into your current document. Refer to 9.8.1 Copying to a Text or Braille Document.


6.14 Working with Documents on other Drives.
While you will usually work with documents on the Flash Disk, KeyWord allows documents to be created or opened directly from any drive available on the BrailleNote PK. If you want to open or create a document on a different drive, follow these steps:
From the KeyWord Menu, select Open a Document or Create a Document. At the "Foldername? prompt, press BACKSPACE. KeySoft prompts: "Drive?(FlashDisk).
Either type the name of the required drive, press SPACE repeatedly to review the list of available drives and press ENTER to select one, or press the hotkey for the drive you want. KeySoft returns to the "Foldername?" prompt. You can now follow the prompts to select the required folder and document name in the usual manner. When editing a document on a removable disk or storage card, do not remove the disk or card containing the document until after you return to the KeyWord Menu or the Main Menu.
If you change to a drive other than the Flash Disk, KeySoft reminds you that you are not using the default drive each time you create or open a file. It does this by prompting for the drive, in addition to the folder and document name prompts.
It is not recommended that you create or save important files on the KeySoft System disk, because the contents of this drive will be lost if the BrailleNote PK is reset with dots456 held down, or if the battery goes completely flat. This drive should only be used for temporary storage.


6.15 Saving a Document.
Changes to a document are saved automatically when you finish editing it and return to the KeyWord menu or Main Menu, or when switching to another document with the command SPACEwithdots1256. However, it is good practice to save a document regularly while you are editing it, especially if you are editing the document for a long period of time. For example, you might delete a significant passage by accident. You can recover by quitting without saving, as described in the next section, and then opening the document again. This puts you back to the last version that you saved.
To save the current document, press SPACEwithS.If the document has not been changed since the last time it was saved, KeySoft displays: "Documenthasnotbeenmodified"
If this message is displayed and you do not wish to continue saving the document, you can return to the Word Processor by pressing SPACEwithE.If the document has been changed, no such message is given.
KeySoft then prompts: "Documentname?(name)"
where (name)is the name of the current document. You can either overwrite the original document by pressing ENTER then Y for Yes, or write the changed document to a new name by typing a new document name and pressing ENTER.If you choose the first option, the new one replaces the old document. If you choose the second option, a new copy of the document is created under the new name, and the old document remains unchanged.
If you wish to save the document to a different folder, press BACKSPACE at the "Documentname" prompt and you will be asked for the Folder name, which can be selected as usual.
You can also change the type of document at this point. For example, if you are editing a Braille document you can save a copy as a text document or as a Microsoft Word document and so on. To save a document as another file type, press SPACEwithX at the "Documentname?" prompt. Repeat the SPACEwithX command until you hear the file format you wish to save in.
If you save the document using a different name or file type, KeySoft gives you the option of opening the saved document or continuing to edit the original document. This is convenient if you want to make copies of the document with different formats without having to reopen the original document.
If you have a large number of documents and the Flash Diskis almost full, there may be insufficient space available to save the current document. In this case you will be given the option of saving to theKeySoft System Disk or a storage Card, or deleting documents in the Flash Disk to make room.


6.16 Quitting a Document.
Changes to a document are saved when you press SPACEwithS, or automatically as you return to the KeyWord menu or Main Menu, or when switching to another document. Sometimes you may need to quit the Word Processor without saving the changes made since the document was last saved. For example, you may have made some incorrect alterations and want to abandon your changes.
To do this, press BACKSPACEwithQ, for Quit. If changes have been made, KeySoft prompts: "Losechanges.Sure?"
If you really wish to quit without saving the document, press Y. To cancel the command and return to the Word Processor, press N.


6.17 Creating Other Document Types.
To create a different type of document, select "CreateaDocument" from the KeyWord Menu in the normal manner. Press repeatedly at the file name prompt until the document type you wish to create is displayed.
Successive presses of BACKSPACEwithX at the file name prompt cycle through the document types you can create. These are:
Braille (Keyword format);
Text (Keyword format);
ASCII Text;
Microsoft Word;
Rich text format;
WordPerfect 5.1 for DOS;
KeySoft version 2 Braille;
KeySoft version 2 text;
KeyList Definition file;
Computer Braille Table.
For further information on document and file types, refer to 13.14 File Translation
You can also change the default document type; this is discussed in 6.2 Document Types.


6.18 Text Documents.
So far, we have assumed that our base document is a Braille document, written in grade 1 or grade 2 Braille, and having about 40 characters per line and 25 lines on a page. The alternative is a text document written in computer Braille and formatted for print, having around 66 print characters per line and 55 lines on a page, suitable for printing on letter or A4 size paper.
Braille and print documents can be stored in the same folder, so you review all document names when you review the contents of a folder. Remember that you can check the type of document by pressing SPACEwithI when its name is displayed.


6.18.1 Creating a Text Document.
To create a text document, press SPACEwithX repeatedly at the"Documenttocreate?" prompt, until the prompt "Createatextdocument" is displayed. Type the document name, and press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "Thisisatextdocument.ComputerBrailleisrequired.Topofdocument.Blank"
You may then enter your text into the file using computer Braille. Choose the appropriate US or British computer table from the Braille display options in the Options Menu. If you are unfamiliar with computer Braille, a brief overview is provided in 6.19 Computer Braille.


6.18.2 Opening Text Documents.
When you receive a document, such as an email or a Microsoft Word document (as an email attachment perhaps) you may find it easier to read and even edit the document as a text document. The advantages of leaving the document as a text document rather than translating the document into Braille are:
It saves initial translation time and effort;
It avoids translation errors;
It eliminates any loss of formatting during translation.
This is especially true if the document is to be exported from the system as a text document, for instance by emailing it to sighted people.
 When a text document is opened, the Braille display displays it in your preferred Braille grade. KeySoft translates from the underlying document as required without altering the document, so you have the advantage of being able to read the document in grade 2 Braille. However, if you need to edit the document, you must use computer Braille.
On the BrailleNote PK, whether in editing or automatic mode, if you move to a word it is displayed in computer Braille, regardless of where the cursor is. If you route the cursor to a word, no matter where in the word, it appears under the first character, and the word appears in computer Braille. You can then route it to any other character as desired. In this way you are able to view the exact keystrokes that make up the word.


6.19 Computer Braille.
If you choose to open or create a text document, KeySoft advises: "Thisisatextdocument.ComputerBrailleisrequired.
If you don't know computer Braille, don't be put off, because it's not as bad as it sounds. Computer Braille signs for the lower case letters are exactly the same as grade 1. We'll come back to capitals shortly.
Numbers in computer Braille are similar to grade 1 and 2, except that the dots are lowered by one row and no number sign is used. For example, number 1 becomes dot2, and number 2 is dots23. Punctuation marks are certainly different from grade 1 or grade 2. For example, to obtain a period in US computer Braille, press dots46. In UK computer Braille a period is dots256.A full list of Computer Braille characters for both the US and United Kingdom conventions is contained in Appendix D.


6.19.1 6dot or 8dot Computer Braille.
There are two sorts of computer Braille: 6dot and 8dot. In 6dot, a capital letter is obtained by pressing SPACEwithU before the letter. If you press SPACEwithU twice, capitals continue until you turn them off by pressing SPACEwithU again.
Alternatively, you can employ 8dot Braille. The two keys that we have been calling BACKSPACE and ENTER are used in 8dot Braille for dot 7 and dot 8 respectively. These two dots are the bottom two of the 4 by 2 dot cell used for 8dot Braille. There is no separate capital sign. Instead, you get upper case by adding dot7 to each letter sign. For instance, capital A is dots17.Since dots7and8are used for characters in 8dot Braille, the ENTERand BACKSPACE functions have to be obtained in a different way:
For ENTER, press SPACEwith ENTER, and for BACKSPACE, press SPACEwithBACKSPACE.
In all KeySoft commands that use BACKSPACE or ENTER, you must add SPACE if you are using 8dot Braille. For example, the command to delete the current word is usually BACKSPACEwithdots25.When you are using 8dot Braille, however, you must press SPACEwithBACKSPACEwithdots25 to delete the current word.
You can choose 6 or 8dot computer Braille through the Options menu. Press SPACEwithO, then K for Keyboard Settings. Press SPACE repeatedly until KeySoft asks: "Use6or8dotcomputerBraille?"
Enter 6 or 8 without a number sign.
The last prompt in this list asks you for the computer Braille language you wish to use. The choices are "USAcomputerBraille, or "UKcomputerBraille" and this setting applies to both 6 and 8 dots computer Braille. While the dot combinations for the letters of the alphabet are the same in both languages, the dot combinations for numbers and most punctuation characters is different. For example, an asterisk is obtained in USA computer Braille by pressing dots16.In UK computer Braille an asterisk is dots35.Appendix D lists the computer Braille codes for both languages.


6.19.2 Computer Braille Cursor.
In chapter 4 we discussed the review cursor in relation to reading a book with KeyBook. We explained that for grade 1 or grade 2 Braille, the standard cursor is both dots7and8.For computer Braille the cursor is dot8 only.
KeyWord requires text documents to be edited in computer Braille, regardless of what reading grade you have set for the Braille display. If you place the cursor on any character in a word, the display of the word reverts to computer Braille. This gives you a onetoone correspondence between the underlying text and the Braille display. It expands contractions as you review a word character by character and the cursor changes to reflect that.
When the cursor is under a format indicator, the cursor spans all of the cells of the indicator.


6.19.3 Instant Translation.
KeyWord, like KeyBook, can translate text into your preferred reading grade instantly, as you read. For example, if your preferred reading grade is grade 2 Braille, KeyWord automatically translates the book into grade 2 as you read. The underlying text is still in its original form, however, and you can examine it in computer Braille, at any time, should you wish.
You can choose the Braille grade for viewing text files from the Braille Display options off the Options Menu while in a text file. The factory default is set to PreferredReadingGrade, which in turn is set to grade 2. For more information, refer to 5.4.7 Text Document Reading Grade.


6.20 Formatting a Text Document.
The format of a text document, that is an inkprint style document, is determined by the settings in the Layout List, the Page Settings List, and by individual commands for centering, justifying, underlining, and changing font types.
The settings associated with taking a text document, and performing the "onthefly" translation of this document to create a Braille document that will emboss properly, are determined by the items in the Style of Presentation List, and the Braille Settings Menu.
The preparation of "Templatedocuments" for use with the address list and text files is controlled from the Template Menu.
The Format Menu that is presented while you are working on a text document is similar to that for a Braille document but there are some differences because text documents are formatted for printing on an inkprinter.
In the same way as you can include inkprint formatting information in a Braille document that is used when the document is translated, Braille formatting information can be included in a text document.
The Format menu for a text document contains the following items:
Layout; refer to 6.20.1 Layout of a Text Document.
Underlining; refer to 6.20.2 Underlining.
Font; refer to 6.20.3 Font.
Center a line; This item centers a line or paragraph. It operates in the same way as the format item for centering a line of Braille described in 6.3.3.4 Center a Braille Line.
Right justify a line; This item aligns a line or paragraph so that each line ends at the right margin. It operates in the same way as the format item for right justifying a line of Braille described in 6.3.3.5 Right Justify a Braille Line.
Style of presentation; Styles of presentation are used when a text document is translated and reformatted into a Braille document, for example, before being embossed. They allow you to control the way paragraphs, headings, etc. are formatted in the Braille document independently of the text document's formatting. They are described in 6.20.4 Style of Presentation linked to a Text Document.
Braille settings; This item allows you to review and change options that affect the way a text document is translated or reformatted as a Braille document. It is described in 6.20.5 Braille Settings linked with a Text Document.
Page settings; This item allows you to review or change the page layout of the text document. It contains the same options as the Page settings for Braille documents described in 6.3.3 Page Settings for a Braille document.
Template menu; This item contains options that are used when preparing a Template Document for use with the Address List. This is described in 9.7 Templates.


6.20.1 Layout of a Text Document.
Layout allows you to review and change options that control the layout or formatting of the text document, such as tabs, indents, page numbering, etc.
The items in the Layout List for a text document have initial values that are appropriate for inkprinting. The Left and Right Margins are both set to 10, and the Tab Stops are set to Indent 5. A justification option is included. Justification is explained in 6.6 Inkprint Layout.
The Layout List for a text document, together with the factory default settings, is as follows:
Indent first line of paragraph.	Default setting 0;
Indent rest of paragraph.	Default setting 0;
Tab stops.	Default setting Indent 5;
Line Spacing.	Default setting single;
Print page numbers.	Default setting No;
Page number position.	Default setting Bottom Center;
Justification.	Default setting Off;
Left margin.	Default setting 10;
Right margin.	Default setting 10;
Word wrap.	Default setting On.


6.20.2 Underlining.
Underlining can be switched on or off at any point in the text. When switched on, it continues until an "UnderlineOff" command is encountered.
To check or change the underline status at any point, either press SPACEwithdots2346,for the Format menu, and U for Underlining, or press ENTERwithU. KeySoft prompts: "Underlineisoff"
Press ENTER to leave it off, N to turn it on, or F to turn it off. You can underline as you type, by turning it on, typing the word or passage, and then turning it off. Alternatively, you can place the cursor at appropriate points in existing text and turn underlining on or off.
The Underline Start indicator is placed in the text at the point where you turn underlining on, and similarly an Underline End indicator is placed at the point where the underlining is turned off. The Underline start indicator appears as $fsu (font, start, underline)on the Braille display and the Underline End indicator appears as $feu (font, end, underline).
To remove underlining, use the Search command with the search string ENTERwithU,Nto position the cursor at the Underline On indicator. Press BACKSPACEwithdots36, to delete the indicator. Repeat the action using the search string ENTERwithU,F to remove the Underline Off indicator.
If underlining is on, KeySoft displays: "Underlineon"
each time you press ENTER to start a new line, to avoid large sections of text being underlined unintentionally.


6.20.3 Font.
Most printers can produce special fonts, such as italics, bold, elongated, compressed, and subscripts, to enhance the appearance of a printed document. KeySoft allows fonts to be changed within a text document. A single letter is used to select each font. For instance, I signifies italics, B for bold, E for elongated. The full listing of fonts for any printer is contained in a document for the selected printer, which can be found in the "Printers" folder on the KeySoft System disk.
Before using the Font commands you should select the driver appropriate to your printer from the Printer Setup in the KeyWord menu. If the driver is not installed, you will not hear the font type. For example "FontB" would be spoken, rather than "Bold.
To check or change the font at any point, either press SPACEwithdots2346 for the Format menu, and F for Font, or press ENTERwithF. KeySoft prompts: "Font"
Type a letter to select the required font. KeySoft prompts: "Font(p)isoff"
where (p) is the letter designating the chosen font. KeySoft describes the font, if it is implemented by the current printer type, as selected in the Printer Setup list.
To turn the font on, press N. To turn it off, press F.To leave the font unchanged, press ENTER.
More than one font can apply to a passage of text. Font commands are announced in the text when the cursor passes over them, and can be deleted like any other character.
The Font Start indicator is shown on the Braille display as dollarsignfsn where n is the type style letter. The Font End indicator is shown on the Braille display as dollarsignfenwhere n is the type style letter.


6.20.4 Style of Presentation linked to a Text Document.
You can attach a style to a section of a text document, and this has an effect only when you translate the document to a Braille document. This is the converse of the Styles of Presentation described in 6.4.1 Style of Presentation linked with a Braille Document. The same 6 style names are available, but their actions are suited to formatting a Braille document.
To check or change a style, locate the cursor anywhere in the paragraph and press SPACEwithdots2346 for the Format menu, then S for Style of presentation. KeySoft displays the style of the current section of text. If you wish to leave the Style unchanged, press ENTER. Alternatively, you can review the available Styles by pressing SPACE repeatedly and choose a new Style by pressing ENTER, or press the initial letter of your choice. Settings apply from the start of the current paragraph following a New Line indicator, and a Style indicator indicates a change.
These styles are as follows:

6.20.4.1 Paragraph.
This is the initial style for new documents. A section with the "Paragraph" style starts in Braille with a new line and an indent of 2 spaces. Blank lines in print are ignored in Braille. The Paragraph Style indicator is shown on the Braille display as $sp.


6.20.4.2 Heading.
A blank line is placed above and below a heading. Each new print line starts a new Braille line. A blank line in a heading causes a blank line in Braille. Two or more blank lines in a heading cause the style to revert to "Paragraph."
A heading is centered in Braille. A print line can produce more than one Braille line, so a centered heading could fill the page width. This would destroy the centering effect, so lines longer than 90% of the page width overflow onto the next line. The Heading indicator is shown on the Braille display as $h.


6.20.4.3 Subheading.
This style starts in Braille with a new line and an indent of 4 spaces. A subheading may contain more than one line, but a single blank line terminates the style and revert to "Paragraph" style.

The Subheading indicator is shown on the Braille display as$h#nwhere n is the level of the subheading. For example, the first level subheading would be indicated by $h#1,the second level by $h#2 etc.


6.20.4.4 Outline.
This style is used for simple numbered lists or more complex outlines and produces a first line that starts at the left margin, with the rest of the text indented. Blank lines in the text are suppressed in Braille and two or more blank lines cause the style to revert to "Paragraph. The Outline indicator is placed in the document


6.20.4.5 Lines.
This style is for a series of separate lines all starting at the left margin. Any overflow onto the following line is indented by 2 spaces. The "Lines" style might be used to format the address at the top of a letter, for example. Two or more blank lines causes the style to revert to "Paragraph.The lines style indicator is placed in the document


6.20.4.6 Identical to Source.
Use this style to preserve the layout of a section in a text document when its corresponding Braille document. This style continues in effect until another style is set. The Identical to Source indicator is placed in the document


6.20.5 Braille Settings linked with a Text Document.
When you are working with a text document, you may want to put in formatting that only has effect when the document is translated to a Braille document. This is the purpose of the Braille Settings option in the Format Menu.
To access the Braille settings menu when you are editing a text document, press SPACEwithdots2346 for the Format menu, then B for Braille settings. You can review the list and select an item in the same way as all KeySoft menus.
The Braille settings menu contains the following 8 items:
Layout.
Inclusion.
Start Braille exclusion.
End Braille exclusion.
Braille Grade.
Page Settings;
Translation options;
Control Translation.
These items are the counterparts of the Inkprint settings available for a Braille document. Most of them are similar to the Inkprint settings discussed in 6.5 InkPrint Settings linked with a Braille Document. Please refer to that section for a description of the Layout, Inclusion, and Exclusion options. Bear in mind, that because the settings now relate to a Braille page, the values presented are those for braille layout. The initial values for new documents are; Left and Right Margins 0 cells, and Tab Stops of 3.
Remember, values that you set in the Braille Layout are used when your text document is translated to a Braille document. They do not affect the layout of the text document. A change to the Braille layout is shown in a print document by an indicator $nlb.


6.20.5.1 Braille Grade.
When a text document is translated into a Braille document, your preferred reading grade setting is used. This setting is in the Braille Display Options of the Options Menu. However, you may need to override this grade for a particular passage, for example, if your document contains an email address, you will want computer Braille used for the email address when the document is translated into Braille.
To have a word or passage appear in a different grade, select the Braille grade option, select the required grade, type the relevant passage, and then repeat the procedure to restore the grade. This option can also be used to change the grade into which a passage of existing text is translated. The Braille grade setting appears on the Braille display as $g#n where n is the grade: 0, 1, or 2.


6.20.5.2 Braille Translation Options.
This group of 11 settings affects the way in which a particular presentation style in a text document appears in the corresponding Braille version. Settings apply from the start of the current paragraph, and can be changed at chosen points throughout the document. The initial values are covered in Chapter 12, as well as other translation settings that are not available while editing.
To access the Braille translation options in a text document, press SPACEwithdots2346for the Format menu, then B then T, or just press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithO. KeySoft displays: "Brailletranslationoptionslist.
The settings are as follows:
What type of paragraph boundary is used in the source document?
Interpret larger boundaries as paragraphs also?
New line translation option?
Convert italics font to Braille italics?
Suppress multiple spaces?
Suppress New Page markers?
Ignore Tabs?
Include capital signs?
Suppress blank lines in Outline style?
Revert to paragraph style after how many blank lines?
Translation find and replace.
The last item allows you to replace a particular formatting sequence with another, as part of the translation process. For example, the text document might use two New Line markers to separate paragraphs, and these could be replaced by 3 spaces in Braille. The Braille Translation Options indicator is dollarsigntxb. To set up this sequence, at the Find? prompt type:
SPACEwithdots26, two times, followed by ENTER.
this sets up the "Find?" string of 2 new line markers, then at the Replacementfor2newlines? prompt type:
ENTERwithB,3times followed by ENTER.
this sets up the "Replacement?" string of 3 Spaces.


6.20.5.3 Control Translation.
This option provides control over how fractions, Roman numerals, dates, and math appearing in the text document are treated in the corresponding Braille version.
To access the Control translation options in a text document, press SPACEwithdots2346for the Format menu, then B for Braille settings, and C for Control Translator options. KeySoft displays: "TranslatorControloption.
To step through the available options press SPACEwithdots34 and press ENTER to select an option. The available options are:
Fractions On/Off;
Roman Numerals On/Off;
Date On/Off;
Math On/Off.


6.21 Initial Format Settings in a Document.
If you have changed one or more settings in a Layout list, you can reach a point in the document where you want the settings to revert to their initial values. That is, the value they were at the start of the document. To do this, ensure that the cursor is at the appropriate place, and from anywhere in the Layout list, press BACKSPACEwithR, for Revert. This causes all the settings in the Layout list to revert to the values that they had at the start of the document.
The initial settings that KeySoft uses when you create a new document have been chosen to suit most situations, but you can set up different initial settings if you wish. For example, you may decide that you want a right margin of 8 columns in all the text documents you create from now on. To do this, open or create a text document, and change the right margin setting in the Layout list. Then, from anywhere in the Layout list, press BACKSPACEwithS. This saves all the current values including the new right margin, as the initial settings that are used when you create a Braille document.
To change the initial Page Settings, alter the required setting and then from anywhere in the Page Settings list, press BACKSPACEwithS.Remember that there are separate initial settings for Braille and text documents, which you can change by opening the appropriate document and carrying out this procedure.


6.22 Extended Characters.
The text characters represented, in the standard 63 dot combination Braille set, or for that matter on the typical QWERTY keyboard, only represent a tiny proportion of the total characters available. These include currency indicators like pounds and euros, accented letters like e acute and c cedilla, character sets for other languages such as Arabic and Japanese and a whole range of specialist characters for use in sciences, math, phonetics etc. totaling around 35,000. Those characters not represented in your standard character set are referred to as the extended character set.
As a way of managing this enormous character set, a standard called Unicode exists. Unicode assigns a unique numeric code to every character. This allows for use in coding and programming, formatting, and an easy way to enter characters once you know the character code. For more information on Unicode Tables, have a look at www.unicode.org.
Extended characters are useful in a wide range of situations.
For studying languages, economics, math, just about any subject with its own symbols or characters.
For commercial use, inserting copyright or trademark symbols etc.
For everyday use of words borrowed from other languages, people and place names, correspondence with friends.
You may use certain characters frequently, or just occasionally, and there are various ways you can set up your use of characters depending on the level of usage.
Use of extended characters is not confined to documents. You may also use them in email addresses, file names, and within the address list etc.


6.22.1 Inserting Extended Characters.
Unicode characters only work in text documents. If you wish to use an extended character in a Grade 2 document, you will need to change to computer Braille.
There are three different ways of inserting an extended character, that are suitable for different levels of use:
a. Searching and selecting the character from the Unicode tables  For the first or only time you look up a character and if you don't know its code, you will need to do this to search for it. There are two methods of doing this detailed later in this section.
b. Typing in the character code  This is quick and easy for characters you use occasionally and can remember the code for.
c. Setting up a key combination  assigning a dot combination to the character. This is a good way to manage frequently used characters.


6.22.1.1 Insertion By Name.
This search is based on the name of the character, for example "eacute" or "Eurocurrencysign.
Follow these steps to insert an extended character using the name search:
1. When the cursor is at the place where you wish to enter the character, press BACKSPACEwithdots35. KeySoft will prompt for the Unicode character. If you have used this function before, it will offer the previously selected character. If you want to select it, press ENTER. If not, continue to Step 2.
2. Type in the name, or part of the name, of the character, then press ENTER.
3. KeySoft will respond with a selection, either the character you want or the first one to fit your search criteria. If it is the one you want, press ENTER. If not, view the next search match by pressing SPACEwithNrepeatedly until you do find it and then press ENTER. This will insert the character.


An Example:
Let's assume you want to enter the word "resume" with the letter "e" showing as "eacute, but you don't know the character code for "eacute.
Type the letter "r, then press BACKSPACEwithdots35. KeySoft will prompt for the Unicode character. We know that we want to enter an "eacute, so type in "eacute, then press ENTER. KeySoft will respond with "Capeacute,and using this as your starting point you can search for all members of the "eacute" character family by pressing SPACEwithN. In this instance "eacute"will be the next character prompted. Press ENTER, and the extended character for "eacute" will be entered into your document.
Continue typing "sum, then press BACKSPACEwithdots35 again to enter the last "e acute. KeySoft will prompt the previously chosen extended character, which in this instance happens to be "eacute, so you just have to press ENTER, followed by SPACE to complete the word.


6.22.2 Browsing Unicode Tables.
Unicode characters are grouped into tables according to type. For example, there is a Unicode table for Greek characters, for General Punctuation, for Superscripts etc. You have the choice of searching for a table then for a character within it. This is useful if you are not sure which character you want but you are aware of its general type.
Follow the steps below to browse for a character using the Unicode tables.
1. When the cursor is at the place where you wish to enter the character, press BACKSPACEwithdots35. KeySoft will prompt for a Unicode character.
2. To browse the list of Unicode tables, press SPACE repeatedly, or BACKSPACE to go back, or type the initial letter of a table name to narrow down the selection and browse from there.
3. When you locate the table you wish to browse, select it by pressing ENTER.
4. At this point you can either browse the whole table by pressing SPACE or BACKSPACE repeatedly, or type the initial letter of a character name to narrow down the selection and browse from there.
Note: While reviewing a table, you can display the numeric code of the character you are currently viewing by pressing SPACEwithI.
If you are already within the Unicode tables and wish to search for a Unicode character by name, press SPACEwithF and you will then return to the "Unicodecharacter?" prompt. To search again for the next matching Unicode character description for within the Unicode tables, press SPACEwithN. If there are no more matches you will remain on the current Unicode character. Once you have completed your search, press ENTER to select the Unicode character.


6.22.3 Inserting Characters Using Unicode Codes.
This method is easy if you already know the character code i.e. the numeric code assigned to it.
Follow the steps below to search for a character using the Unicode tables.
1. When the cursor is at the place where you wish to enter the character, press BACKSPACEwithdots35. KeySoft will prompt for a Unicode character.
2. Type the numeric code, and press ENTER.The character will be inserted into the document. (You can, if you prefer, use the hexadecimal value of the code in the form "0x.").


6.22.4 Assigning Key Combinations to a Unicode Character.
KeySoft allows you to assign a key combination to a Unicode character. This is an excellent idea for characters you use frequently.
While you may assign any key combination including any of the 63 combinations currently available, it stands to reason that those already representing characters are not such a great choice. For example, if you assign dots14 to eacute, you will no longer have a lower case c! To avoid this happening, we suggest you press SPACEwithU at the beginning of each key combination. This shift function accesses a greater range of key combinations using all 8 dots. The examples given below assume you have chosen to do this.
The assignation function is called a macro, and the following steps outline how to define or change a macro for a Unicode character:
You are either working in a text/computer Braille document or you need to swap to computer Braille using SPACEwithOthen Gthen C.
1. Enter the Unicode Tables with BACKSPACEwithdots35, and locate the Unicode character you wish to assign a key combination to using one of the browse and search methods above, only don't press ENTER.
2. When the character is displayed, press SPACEwithK. If there is no key combination assigned, it will display, "(Character)isunassigned.Option"where character in brackets is the actual name of the character.
3. If a key combination is already assigned, it will display, "(Character)isassignedto(keycombination).Option" For example, "EacuteisassignedtoSPACEwithUthendots1,5,7.Option."
4. Press A. The prompt, "Assign,keycombinationtoassignto(Character)?" will display. Press the key combination you wish to assign to the character, and press ENTER.
KeyWord prompts, "Assign(keycombination)to(character)?" For example, "AssignSpacewithUandDots1,5,7toeacute?" Press Y for Yes or N for No. If you press N, you will be returned to the beginning of this step. If you press Y, you will be returned to the same place in the Unicode tables. From there you can select another character or exit by pressing SPACEwithE.
Note: A Unicode character can have more than one key combination assigned to it. To toggle through all the currently assigned key combinations, press SPACE.


6.22.4.1 Changing a Macro.
If the Unicode character has already been assigned, at the "Option?" prompt you may press U to unassign or remove it altogether, or R to reassign or change the key combination.
To use either of these functions, follow steps 1 and 2 above. Then:
To Remove or unassign the key combination, press Uat this point. KeyWord prompts, "Unassign(Character)from(keystrokes),sure?". Press Y for Yes or N for No. If you press N, you will be returned to the beginning of this step. If you press Y, you will be returned to the same place in the Unicode tables. From there you can select another character or exit by pressing SPACEwithE.
To change the key combination, press Rat this point. KeyWord prompts, "Reassign,MacrotoreassigntoCharacter?" where character is the name of the character. Type the new key combination and press ENTER. KeyWord prompts, "Reassign(keystroke)to(character)?". For example, "ReassignSPACEwithUwithdots1,5,7toeacute?" Press Y for Yes or N for No. If you press N, you will be returned to the beginning of this step. If you press Y, you will be returned to the same place in the Unicode tables. From there you can select another character or exit by pressing SPACEwithE.


6.22.5 How to use Unicode Key Combinations.
Once you have created a key combination as above, you will then no doubt wish to use it in a document, a file name, address listing etc.
To use it, at the point where you wish to insert the Unicode character, press the key combination you assigned to it. Continue Brailling as normal.


6.22.6 Appearance of Unicode Characters in Computer Braille.
You may assign a computer Braille dot combination to any extended character so that when the document is translated to computer Braille, that dot combination will be used.
Assigning a dot combination follows a similar pattern to assigning a key combination:
Search the Unicode tables for the character to which you wish to assign a dot pattern and when you locate it, press SPACEwithD.Press A to assign a computer Braille dot combination. If the Unicode character has already been assigned you may press R to reassign a dot combination, leaving the original dot combination free. Assigned dot combinations can be removed by selecting U. Upon selecting A (assign) or R (reassign) you will be asked to enter the dot combination to assign to the selected Unicode character. Finally, you will be asked to confirm your dot combination selection. To confirm the selection, press Y.
Note that multiple Unicode characters can be assigned to one dot combination. This may be useful if, for example, you use e acute, e breve, and e macron, you could assign a dot combination that for you means "ewithanaccent, or you might assign the same combination to all vowels that have umlauts. You can use this feature any way you see fit.
As soon as a "dotpattern" is assigned to a Unicode character, a "Custom" Computer Braille table is automatically added in the "Dictionary" folder. This file is used in place of the previously selected Computer Braille file.


6.22.7 Interpreting the Braille Display.
If you are reading a text document using Grade 2 translation display, whether you have or haven't assigned a computer Braille dot display combination, you will see the same thing.
Using the word cafe as an example: You will observe the letters "caf" on the display, followed by "dot4, and the letter"e.The "dot4" is the Grade 2 indication for an extended character.
If you are reading a text document using Computer Braille to display, you will see a blank cell if the character is unassigned, or the dot combination you assigned to the character in computer Braille.
On any computer Braille character you can find out the name of the character by pressing the "ReadcurrentCharacter"command SPACEwithdots36, twice.
The Braille display will expand to display the name of the full character. For example if you are on an e acute, press SPACEwithdots36 twice and the word e acute will be the only word to appear on the display, starting on the far left. To return to the text press the ADVANCE navigation key.



7 Scientific Calculator (Nemeth Code).
The Scientific Calculator, KeyPlus, can be used for straightforward sums such as addition or division, but is also capable of many more complex operations.
Both the UK Braille Mathematics Notation and the Nemeth Braille Code for Mathematics are supported for the entry and display of calculations. The correct code for your country is automatically selected when you set up your Braille language as described in 5.4.9 Calculator Braille Language. This chapter describes the operation of the calculator when set to Nemeth Code. 
As well as being displayed in Braille you can have your calculations and results spoken. The result of a calculation, or a whole calculation, can also be inserted into a document.
Remember that you can press SPACEwithH for Help at any point.



7.1 Entering KeyPlus.
You can enter KeyPlus from the Main Menu by pressing Sfor Scientific Calculator, or from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTERwithS. Your BrailleNote PK restores the display to what it was when you last left the calculator. This might be the result of a calculation or part of one you were entering. Continue entering the calculation or, if a result is displayed, starting a new calculation clears the calculator. To clear the calculator to zero, press SPACEwithdots356. Note that this is SPACE with the Nemeth code for zero.


7.2 Entering a Calculation.
A calculation is entered in the same order as it would be typed or spoken, without any spaces. Numbers are entered using the letters A to J. You do not need to type a number sign, one is automatically entered for you as soon as you start entering a number. The four basic operators are represented as follows:
For PLUS, press dots 235.
For MINUS, press HYPHEN, which is dots36.
For MULTIPLY, press dots16. The MULTIPLY sign is displayed as dot 4, followed by dots16;
For DIVIDE, press dots256. The DIVIDE sign is displayed as dots46 followed by dots 256.
For example, to add the numbers 3 and 5, and then subtract 2, you type:
Press ENTER, for "Equals", and KeyPlus displays the answer, which in this case is: 6.
Note that this is displayed in standard Braille. You can review the calculation by pressing the PREVIOUS and NEXT navigation keys together. The Braille display will show 3+52=6, in Nemeth. Pressing the PREVIOUS and NEXT navigation keys again will return to just displaying the answer. If the speech is on, the speech will mirror the content on the Braille display. 3+52
Try some simple calculations to get the feel of the calculator. If you type in a long sequence such as:
	3*2+5*6+9
remember that the answer will not be determined until you have typed in the complete calculation and pressed ENTER.
To enter a decimal point, press dot2.
The Calculator Help gives a complete list of key combinations. To get help, press SPACEwithH. You can also check key combinations with the "Key Announce" mode, by pressing SPACEwithW. In this mode, pressing a particular key combination causes the resulting function to be displayed.
To return to the normal calculator function, press SPACEwithE.
Remember that the order for entering numbers and operators is just as you would write them.


7.2.1 Reviewing the Calculation.
If you are not sure that you have entered a calculation correctly, you can review the calculation before pressing ENTER.
To hear the whole calculation, press SPACEwithdots14. 
To hear the last number or operator entered, press SPACEwithdots25.
Pressing the PREVIOUS navigation key moves the Braille display back, that is to the left, one cell at a time. Pressing the NEXT navigation key moves the Braille display forward, that is to the right, one cell at a time.
After pressing ENTER to complete the calculation, pressing the PREVIOUSand NEXT navigation keys together toggles between displaying the result and the details of the calculation.


7.2.2 Editing the Calculation.
While entering a calculation you can backspace to delete entries one by one by pressing BACKSPACE one or more times. If the current calculation started with the result of the previous one, BACKSPACE does not delete that number, because it was calculated rather than typed. Entering a new calculation clears the last result.


7.2.3 Calculation Entry Errors.
When you type a calculation, KeyPlus beeps if you make a mistake, such as: 3+*
To find the reason, press SPACEwithH. In this case, KeyPlus displays:
"Value expected."
Other messages indicate different errors. You may want to review the calculation after an incorrect entry, by pressing SPACEwithdots14, to find out where you are.


7.2.4 Setting the Calculation Precision.
The maximum number of decimal places that are displayed can be set from 0 to 9. This is done by pressing SPACEwithdot2, followed by the desired number of digits. This does not affect the internal precision of calculations, but only the number of digits that are displayed.
For example, to set the number of decimal places to 4, first press SPACEwithdot2. KeyPlus prompts:
"Decimal places currently (current setting)."
Type 4 and press ENTER. If you are checking the precision, just press ENTER to leave the current setting unchanged.


7.3 Basic Operations.
The basic operations provided are:
Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division,
Negation, Percent and Parenthesis.


7.3.1 Addition Subtraction Multiplication and Division.
These operations have the normal order of precedence. This means that expressions inside brackets are evaluated first, and then division and multiplication are performed, followed by addition and subtraction.


7.3.2 Parentheses.
Parentheses, or brackets, are used to change the order in which an equation is evaluated. For example, the equation:
3 + 4 * 5 is evaluated by adding 3 to the product of 4 and 5. The answer is 23.
If you want the addition of 3 and 4 to occur first and the result to be multiplied by 5, insert parentheses around the 3 + 4, as follows: ( 3 + 4 ) ? 5 = 35.
To enter a left parenthesis, press dots126.
To enter a right parenthesis, press dots345.
Parentheses can be placed wherever a number can occur. You can use up to 6 levels. If you try to open more than 6 levels, or close more than are open, KeyPlus beeps.


7.3.3 Negation.
The negation operator is used to enter negative numbers. It is represented by SPACEwithHYPHEN, which is SPACEwithdots36. For example, to calculate 5divided by negative 2, type:
5/SPACEwithHYPHEN2followed by ENTER. Note that the negation operator is not the same as the subtraction operator, which is just HYPHEN.


7.3.4 Percent.
The percent operator is used to calculate percentage markup or markdown. It is a special operator that automatically evaluates the calculation without the need to press ENTER. To enter the percent operator, press P, that is dots 1234. For example, 
To calculate a 20% markup on 56, type:
56+20% 	which gives the result 67.2.
To calculate a 10% markdown on 45, type:
4510% 	which gives the result 40.5.
To calculate what percentage 17 is of 20, type:
17 / 20% 	which gives the result 85.
That is, 17 is 85% of 20.
To calculate 30% of 180, type:
180 ? 30%,	 which gives the result 54.


7.4 Memory Operations.
There are 10 separate memories for storing conversion factors, partial results, etc. They are numbered 0 to 9. The commands for memory number 1, for example, are as follows:
Clear memory 1:	press SPACEwithK,then1.
Store number in memory 1:	press SPACEwithS,then1.
Add to memory 1:		press SPACEwithA,then1.
Recall contents of memory 1:	press SPACEwithMthen1.
Display contents of memory, 
but do not use in calculation:	press M,then1.
These commands is now discussed in more detail.


7.4.1 Clear Memory.
This operation clears the particular memory immediately. For example, to clear memory 5, press SPACEwithK, then 5. KeyPlus displays 5 on the Braille display and it announces:
"Clear memory." "Clear which memory?" "5."


7.4.2 Store Memory.
This completes the current calculation and stores the result in a memory. For example, to calculate the result of 3 + 5 and store it in Memory 4, type :
3+5SPACEwithS4.
When you press SPACEwithS,the letter S is displayed on the Braille display and "Store memory" is spoken.
The resulting value of 8 is stored in memory number 4.


7.4.3 Add to Memory.
This completes the current calculation and adds the result to the existing contents of a memory. For instance, after the previous example, Memory 4 contains 8. Now to calculate 9 divided by 5, and to add the result to Memory 4, press :
95SPACEwithA4.
When you press SPACEwithA, the letter A is displayed on the Braille display and "Accumulate memory" is spoken.
The calculation is evaluated, resulting in 1.8. This is then added to Memory 4, to give a value in Memory 4 of 9.8.


7.4.4 Recall Memory.
This is used to recall the value in a memory and insert it into the calculation. For example, to divide the contents of Memory 4 by 4, and store the result in Memory 1, press:
SPACEwithM44SPACEwithS1.
When you press SPACEwithM, the letter M is displayed on the Braille display and "Recall memory" is spoken.
This calculates 9.84=2.45, which is stored in Memory 1.


7.4.5 display Memory.
This is used to display the value in a memory at any time without affecting the current calculation. For example, if you press: M4
KeyPlus displays "Memory 4: 9.8" on the braille display and announces; "displayMemory,""displaywhichmemory?""4,memory4,ninepointeight."
but this does not affect any calculation in progress, which can continue. To return the display to the calculation, press ADVANCE or continue entering it.


7.5 Scientific Operations.
Trigonometric, logarithmic and exponential functions are available, as well as squares, square roots, powers and roots.


7.5.1 Trigonometric Functions.
The trigonometric functions can be calculated in either degrees or radians. To select degrees press SPACEwithD, to select radians press SPACEwithR. A setting stays in effect until it is superseded by the another.
A twocharacter sequence is used to select a trig function. Sine, cos and tan are preceded by T, and the inverse functions are preceded by SPACEwithT. The following list gives for each function, the name 
For sine:	pressT,thenS. This is displayed as dots 1246, S.
For cosine:	pressT,thenC. This is displayed as dots 1246, C.
For tangent:	pressT,thenT. This is displayed as dots 1246, T.
For arc sine:	press SPACEwithT,thenS. This is displayed as 
dots 1246, dot 4, S.
For arc cosine:	press SPACEwithT,thenC. This is displayed as dots 1246, dot 4, C.
For arc tangent:	press SPACEwithT,thenT. This is displayed as dots 1246, dot 4, T.
For PI:	press Y. This is displayed as dots 4 6 followed by P.
For example, to calculate the sine of 30 degrees, type:
SPACEwithDTS30
followed by ENTER. The result "0.5" is displayed.
Note that the function applies only to the number immediately following. If you wanted to find the sine of the sum of two 15 degree angles, for example, you must put brackets around the addition as follows:
SPACEwithDTS(15+15)ENTER
The result "0.5" is displayed.
To calculate the Arc Tangent of 2, type:
SPACEwithTT2
followed by ENTER. The result "63.43495" is displayed.
To calculate the cosine of PI radians divided by 3, type:
SPACEwithRTC(Y ? 3)
followed by ENTER. The result "0.5" is displayed.


7.5.2 Square Roots and Squares.
For "square root", press dots 146.
For "squared" symbol is dots 23. It is displayed on the braille display as 
dots 346, dots 23, followed by a SPACE.
To calculate the square root of the sum of 3 squared plus 4 squared, type:
dots 146(3dots 23+4dots 23) followed by ENTER. The result 5 is displayed. The square root operator precedes its number, while the squared operator occurs after its number, following the written form.


7.5.3 Decimal Exponent.
Very large or very small numbers are often expressed in scientific notation as a power of 10. For example, the number 4000 is equal to 4 ? 1000, which may be written as 4 ? 10 to the power of 3. This number could be entered into a calculation by pressing 4X3.
This appears as 4 e 3 on the braille display. Similarly, the number 0.05 could be entered by pressing 5XSPACEwithHYPHEN2.
This appears as 5 e  2 on the braille display.


7.5.4 Powers and Roots.
These functions are assigned as follows:
x to the power of y:	dots346.
This is displayed as dots 346 on the Braille display. KeyPlus automatically adds in the index termination sign, which is dots 12456, to show when the calculation returns to the base level.
x to the power of 1/y:	press SPACEwithdots346.
This is displayed on the Braille display as dots 356, number sign, dot 1, dots 256 or "to the power of", "1", "divided by". Once again KeyPlus automatically adds in the index termination sign, which is dots 12456, to show when the calculation returns to the base level.
Parentheses can be used where y is a compound expression. For example, to calculate 2 to the power of 6 + 8, type: 
2dots346(6+8)
followed by ENTER. The result "16,384" is displayed.
For example, to calculate 3 to the power of 4, type:
3dots3464
followed by ENTER. The result "81" is displayed.
To calculate the cube root of 27, type:
27SPACEwithdots346,3
followed by ENTER. The result "3" is displayed.


7.5.5 Logarithmic Functions.
The following log functions are provided:
For log to base e, or natural log:	press N. This is displayed as dots 1246 LN.
For e to the power of:	press SPACEwithN. This is displayed as e dots 146.
For log to base 10:	press L.dots1246L.
For 10 to the power of:	press SPACEwithL.
This is displayed as dots1246,dot4,L.
To calculate the log to base e of 10, and save the result in Memory 2, type:
N10SPACEwithS2
followed by ENTER. The result "2.302585" is displayed.
Now to calculate e to the power of 2.302585, type:
SPACEwithNSPACEwithM2
followed by ENTER. The result "10" is displayed.


7.6 Inserting a Result or a Calculation.
Suppose that you are writing a report, and you want to do a calculation and include the result in the report. How would you do that?
You could do the calculation before starting the letter. Alternatively, you could begin the letter and then use the Task menu to switch from the Word Processor to the calculator, do the sum and then switch back to the letter.
When you get to the point in the letter where you want to include the result of your calculation, press SPACEwithO for the options menu, then I for Insert field, and R to insert the Result or C to insert the whole Calculator. KeyPlus prompts:
"Insertresultorwholecalculation?"
The most recent result or calculation from the calculator is inserted into the document, which saves you having to remember and retype it.



8 Planner.
KeyPlan is a pageperday planner, which allows you to make notes and reminders for each day of the year. You can also enter appointments for particular times, reschedule them, and include an audible alarm with any appointment. Appointments can be single events or recurring right out until the year 9999. And all of this information can be shared with Microsoft Outlook's calendar via a synchronization function we call KeySync, which is discussed in detail in 12.14 KeySync.
The commands you use with the planner are similar to those used in KeyWord. Planner pages are formatted as Braille documents, and you can use grade 1, grade 2, or Computer Braille as you wish.


8.1 Entering the Planner.
To enter the Planner, select it from the Main Menu by pressing P.This will take you to the KeyPlan Menu. Or you can open the Planner directly from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTERwithP.


8.2 The KeyPlan Menu.
When you select the Planner from the Main Menu, your BrailleNote PK displays "KeyPlanMenu."
Open planner;
Setup options.
If you want to make entries in the planner or review its contents, choose "Openplanner."This option is described first. If you enter the Planner by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTERwithP, you will go directly to the "Open Planner" option.


8.3 Selecting a Date.
When you select the "Open" option, KeyPlan displays: "Day?PressENTERfor(today'sdate)."
where today's date is the actual date. Before pressing ENTER, you can choose a different date by either typing it in as described in the next section, or by moving around the calendar, as follows:
By day back or forward, use	SPACEwithdot3ordot6;
By week, use	SPACEwithdots2or5;
By month, use	SPACEwithdots1or4;
By year, use	SPACEwithdots23or56.
When the required date is displayed, press ENTER to select it.


8.3.1 Entering the Date.
Instead of moving around the calendar to find the required date, you can Braille a date as:
25dec04, or
dec2504.
To avoid ambiguity, precede each group of numbers with the number sign as shown, which is dots3456.
You can use a 3letter abbreviation for the month, such as:
25dec04.
Or you can type the month name in full:
25december04
december2504
You can also use numbers separated by a number sign in the form:
251204.or
122504,depending on the KeySoft date format you have set.
If you omit the year, then the current year is assumed.
When you have selected or Brailled the date, press ENTER and you are placed in the required planner page. If you have selected today's date, the cursor is placed at the beginning of the next appointment for today, if one exists. This allows you to check your next appointment very quickly. For other dates, the cursor will be at the top of the page, ahead of any existing entries.


8.3.1.1 Going to Today's date.
There is a quick way of going directly to today's date from anywhere in the planner. Whatever day you are currently on, if in the Planner itself, return to the calendar by pressing SPACEwithE. At the prompt "KeyPlanCalendar.Date?PressENTERfor(date)", type "today" and press ENTER. This will take you directly to today's planner page.


8.3.2 Page Layout.
The planner is laid out as a pageperday desk planner. Each day starts on a new page. The date appears on the first line. On the next line are any general notes or reminders that can use as many lines as required. These are called "allday events" and are not associated with any particular time.
The scheduled appointments then follow. Each of these starts on a new line, and begins with a time. The appointment details follow on the same line.
Here is an example:
"Friday January 23 2005
All day: Mike's Birthday.
All day: Sarah in interviews all day
Don't forget to clear her voicemail.
10:0011:00 am Team meeting
12:301:15 pm Lunch with Bob
7:3011:00 pm Movies Return of the King
 Reading 2, meeting in foyer.
When an appointment is scheduled or rescheduled, it is placed on the correct page, and is sorted into time order with other entries.


8.3.3 Making Notes on a Particular Day.
Notes are recorded as allday events and KeyPlan precedes them with the words "allday:". They are not associated with any particular time during that day.
To make notes on any page of the planner, first select the date. The cursor is placed ahead of any text that may already be on the page. If the page is blank, then just start typing. If there is already text on the page, check that the cursor is in the right place before typing. As soon as you start typing, KeyPlan will automatically schedule an allday event for you. You can move the cursor to a different point in the text by using the cursor movement commands. These are similar to KeyWord commands.
When you have finished typing an entry, you do not need to press ENTER unless you require a new line.
If you have selected today's date, the cursor is placed on a scheduled appointment, if one exists. You can use the cursor movement commands to move the cursor, or you can go to the top of the page by pressing SPACEwithdots123.


8.3.4 Scheduling an AllDay Event.
You can set up an allday event with the properties of an appointment, such as recurrence, or being marked as busy or out of office. Please note that the default setting for AllDay appointments is set to "free" as it is in MS Outlook. This is because typically people use this function for events such as travelling, birthdays or other anniversaries, and reminders rather than actual appointments where they will be busy. Remember that AllDay means midnight to midnight, not just 8am to 5pm.
If you have already set up the allday event, put the cursor into the text. Select Review or Modify this appointment by pressing SPACEwithdots34thenR. This will give you all of the scheduling options.
If you are setting the appointment up from scratch, when scheduling the appointment, specify an appointment time of L for allday. From there continue as normal. Full directions on scheduling an appointment are in the next section of this user guide.


8.4 Scheduling Appointments.
An appointment is made up of a group of settings that the user defines. These include date, start time, end time, title, location etc. The process of scheduling an appointment is basically going through the list of these settings and defining each setting.
You don't have to go through all the settings to make an appointment, in fact they are ordered so that you cover the mandatory settings first and can exit and save by pressing SPACEwithE at any point after you have set the date, time, and title. Like all lists in KeySoft, you can move back and forward by pressing BACKorBACKSPACE and SPACEorADVANCE. However, if you follow the procedure below, you will see that KeyPlan steps you through the settings logically and easily. If you wish to change any setting you have made before exiting and saving, use the back and forward commands to return to the setting and make the change.
KeyPlan assumes you wish to schedule the appointment on the date of the planner page you are currently in, and so jumps directly to the time setting.
To schedule an appointment in KeyPlan, follow this procedure:
1. From any planner page, select Schedule an appointment by pressing SPACEwithdots26.
2. KeyPlan prompts: "Appointmenttime?"
The way you enter appointment times should agree with the setting of 12 or 24 hour format, which is displayed when you press SPACEwithH.You can enter a time without using number signs, in the form:
hh:mmwhere "hh" is hours and "mm" is minutes, separated by a colon. You can abbreviate an entry with fewer digits or no colon if it is unambiguous. In 12 hour format, follow the minutes by a space and then aor p, to denote a.m. and p.m. Note that if you use an abbreviated form for an a.m. time, for example 7a for 7:00 am, type a letter sign before the a or it will be read as a 1. And if you forget to type a or p, KeySoft will prompt you to do so. For an allday event, type L instead of a time.
Before you enter a time, you can change the day or date of your appointment by pressing BACKSPACE.
KeySoft prompts: "AppointmentDay?PressENTERfor(currentdayanddate)"
A calendar is being presented. If the offered date is correct, just press ENTER. Otherwise, move around the calendar to the required date, or type it, and then press ENTER.
3. KeySoft prompts: "Endtimeorlength?PressENTERfor(time)30minutes."where (time) is the time 30 minutes after the appointment time. The default length is 30 minutes, but you can change this. You can type a number by itself for minutes, or follow the number with h for a number of hours, d for days or w for weeks. For h and d, put a letter sign or space between the number  this is not necessary for m and w. To enter a finishing time, type the time in the same format as the appointment time.
Press ENTER to go to the next field. Note: If you want to set a different end date, you can either press BACKSPACE as soon as you hear the End Time or length prompt, or set the end time and then press BACKSPACE twice.
4. KeySoft prompts: "Appointmenttitle?"
Type the reason for this appointment and press ENTER.If necessary, you can add more notes about this appointment after you have finished scheduling it.
5. KeySoft then prompts: "Location?"
This is not a mandatory field. Either type the location and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
6. KeySoft prompts: "Recurrence?PressENTERforonce"
For a one off appointment, press ENTER. For more information on recurring appointments, refer to 8.5 Recurring Appointments.
7. KeySoft prompts: "Setanalarmonthisappointment?PressENTERforN"
If you do not, press N.If you want to set an alarm, press Y, and KeySoft prompts: "Warningtime?PressENTERforn(time),"
where "n" is the suggested interval of time (for example 30 minutes) and (time) is the actual time at which it would ring (for example 7:30pm). To change the setting, type either a time in the usual format, or a number of minutes, or a number followed by h for hours, d for days or w for weeks. For h and d, put a letter sign or space before the letter  this is not necessary for m and w. Press ENTER.
8. KeySoft then prompts: "Showtimeas?PressENTERforbusy"
The options are free =f, tentative =t, busy = b and out of office =o. These settings let you know the level of availability you will have with this appointment. If you select "free", you will be able to schedule an overlapping appointment without any reminders from KeySoft. For the other options, KeySoft will remind you at the time setting and at the point of saving the appointment, but it won't prevent you from scheduling it.
9. KeySoft then prompts: "MarkasPrivate?PressENTERforNo". To mark as Private, press Y.
10. KeySoft prompts: "EndofList". At this point, to schedule the appointment, press SPACEwithE. KeySoft prompts: "Schedulethisappointment?" Press Y or N. KeySoft displays: "Appointmentscheduled."
The time is inserted in the planner page, on a new line, followed by the title and location. The appointment is sorted into the correct time order for the current date, and the cursor is placed just after the new entry.


8.4.1 Making Notes on an Appointment.
You can make notes on any appointment at any time by placing the cursor in the time and title line and pressing ENTER. From there, simply type your notes. If you have only just scheduled the appointment, the cursor will already be in the time and title line.
When the notes are complete, you will exit when you press SPACEwithE, which will take you to the top of the day, or perform any other command such as Scheduling another appointment, using any "go to" or "move" commands etc.


8.4.2 Making another entry.
To make another entry, press SPACEwithdots26 again. The new entry is sorted into order with existing entries. You can set as many appointments as you wish.


8.5 Recurring Appointments.
A recurring appointment is one that is repeated in a regular pattern of times determined by the user. You can schedule your appointment according to dates, or patterns of days, weeks, months or years  for example an event may be on the 25th of every month, or on the third Thursday of every month, or every 25th of March, or every day at 9am, etc. There is a pattern of recurrence to cover just about every type of recurring event you could think of.
For the sake of clarity, we will refer to any use of calendar days as dates  for example the 6th or the 23rd, and we will use the word "pattern" to describe other intervals such as the third Friday in the month, or the last Thursday in November.


8.5.1 Recurring patterns.
Apart from "once" which of course is not recurring at all, the options for a recurring event are: Daily, Weekly, Monthly or Yearly. Each of these is described and relevant instructions given below.


8.5.1.1 Daily.
Daily means any pattern based on a number of days. This could be every day, or every second day, every 5 days etc.
At the promptDaysbetweenoccurrences?PressENTERfor1day(s)", The default setting is 1 day. To change this, type the number of days of your choice. For example, for every second day, type 2.


8.5.1.2 Weekly.
Weekly means any recurring event that happens weekly, or in a weekly pattern. For example, every Monday, every week day, or every second week on a Thursday.
At the prompt Recuronwhichdays?PressENTERforxyz"where x y z are any days you require, type any of the following, with a space between if more than one (and in any order):
Sunday = Su; Monday = Mo; Tuesday =Tu; Wednesday =We; Thursday =Th; Friday =Fr; Saturday =Sa; every day = v; weekdays =d (Monday through Friday) and weekend days =e (Saturday and Sunday).
For example, if your appointment is every Monday, Tuesday and Thursday, you would type "Mo Tu Th". If it were every Saturday and Sunday, type "e" for weekend days.
Note: you can type initial letters only for Monday, Wednesday or Friday as they are the only day names starting with M, W or F. You can also type more or all of the name of a day, for example, Thurs or Thursday.
At the prompt Weeksbetweenoccurrences?PressENTERforn type the number of weeks if different from the default n. For example if it occurs weekly, type 1, if fortnightly, type 2 etc.


8.5.1.3 Monthly.
Monthly recurrence includes dates, or patterns of days or weeks scheduled on a monthly basis.
For example, every 20th of the month, or every third Thursday, or the second week, or even the last weekend day, are all monthly events.
1. When you select Monthly, KeyPlan prompts: "Recurondayxofthemonth?" where x is the date you originally selected. To choose this option press Y for Yes then go to step 4, otherwise press N and go to step 2.
2. KeyPlan prompts: Weekofrecurrence?PressENTERforx.
where x is the correct week for the original date selected. The options are: first, second, third, fourth, last. Either press ENTER, or cycle through the options using SPACEwithdots34, or press the hotkey for your choice. These are: first = 1; second = 2; third = 3; fourth = 4; last = l. No number sign required. Press ENTER.
1. KeyPlan prompts: Dayofrecurrence?PressENTERforx where x is the day of the week of the original date selected. Options are the days of the week, weekday, weekend day, or day (refer to note above). To make a selection, cycle through by pressing SPACEwithdots34 then ENTER.
2. KeySoft then prompts Monthsbetweenoccurrences?PressENTERforn where n is 1 by default. Either press ENTER or type the new number and then press ENTER.


8.5.1.4 Yearly
When setting a yearly recurring event, you have a choice of a date, or a month based pattern.
You already selected a date when setting up the appointment initially, for example every 8 February. KeyPlan prompts: "RecuronFebruary8eachyear?PressENTERforYes"
For Yes, press ENTER as stated.
If you want to schedule a pattern, press Nfor No. KeyPlan assumes you have scheduled the correct month in the beginning. KeyPlan prompts: Weekofrecurrence?PressENTERforx.
The options are: first, second, third, fourth, last. Either press ENTER, or cycle through the options using SPACEwithdots34, or press the hotkey for your choice. These are: first = 1; second = 2; third = 3; fourth = 4; last = l. No number sign required. Press ENTER.
KeySoft prompts: Dayofrecurrence?PressENTERforx
where x is the day of the selected appointment date. Options are the days of the week, weekday, weekend day, or day. To make a selection, cycle through by pressing SPACEwithdots34 then ENTER.


8.5.2 Number of Recurrences.
Having set up the pattern, KeyPlan now wishes to know how many times the event will recur. You have four choices: Endofrecurrence?PressENTERfornone,
"None"  With this option, the event will recur right out until the end of 9999.
# occurrences  with this option, type the number of times the event recurs in digits, the maximum being 999.
date With this option, type in the date when you wish the last recurring event to occur, or to occur before, in usual date format. If the date you select does not fall in the recurring pattern, the last appointment will be the one immediately before it. For example, if your appointment is always on the second Tuesday of the month, but you specify the 31 December 2005 as the end date, the last recurrence will be the second Tuesday of December 2005, which is the 13th.
"length"  You can specify the length of time by a number of days or weeks. To do this, type the number and then D or M, for example 6 weeks is 6w and 15 days is 15d. Or, you can press the relevant hotkey as many times as the number. The hotkeys are: Days = SPACEwithdot6; Weeks = SPACEwithdot5; Months = SPACEwithdot4; Years = SPACEwithdot56. For example, for six months, press SPACEwithdot4 six times. Press ENTER.
At this point you will be back into the normal Scheduling appointment procedure.


8.5.3 Recurring Appointments scheduled in Outlook.
If you are using KeySync to synchronize your calendar with MS Outlook's, you will find that recurring appointments that "come across" from Outlook will take exactly the same form as above, and you can modify and change them as you wish in KeyPlan.


8.5.4 Moving between Recurring Appointments.
It is very likely that you will want to move through the occurrences of a recurring appointment, and there are commands to do this that work when the cursor is in the time and title line of an instance of the appointment.
To move to the next occurrence of the appointment, press SPACEwithdots356. To move to the previous occurrence, press SPACEwithdots236.


8.5.5 Notes on Recurring Appointments.
These notes explain how recurring appointments behave differently to ordinary appointments in the following circumstances:


8.5.5.1 Alarm Warning Time.
In a recurring appointment, the alarm warning time must be shorter than the interval between occurrence. For example  recurring appointment is 5pm daily, a warning time of 25 hours would have the alarm sound before the previous occurrence of the recurring appointment.


8.5.5.2 Modifications and Exceptions.
If you modify just one instance of a recurring appointment in any way at all, it creates an exception. If later you then modify the date, start or end time, and/or recurrence interval of all recurrences of that same appointment, the exception will be overwritten by a normal instance.


8.5.5.3 Privacy Setting.
When reviewing or modifying just one instance of a recurring appointment, the privacy setting is not offered for modification. This is because Outlook doesn't allow exceptions to this setting. However when reviewing or modifying all occurrences, then you can change it.


8.6 Reviewing the Appointments.
8.6.1 The Review Commands.
Most KeySoft review commands are available in the planner, but two groups of commands are unique:
To read all planner entries for the:
Previous day:	SPACEwithdots23;
Current day:	SPACEwithdots2356;
Next day:	SPACEwithdots56.
To read the planner entries within a particular day:
Previous entry:	SPACEwithdot1;
Current entry:	SPACEwithdots14;
Next entry:	SPACEwithdot4.
These actions will read one complete appointment, or allday event. The previous and next commands will move the cursor to the beginning of the new appointment or line.
Repeated use of the previous or next commands will move the cursor through the planner. A beep will indicate that there are no more entries to read in the calendar. Note: The calendar goes out to the year 9999, so it might pay to put an end time on recurring appointments if you ever want to hear that beep! Note however that if the cursor is in the notes of an appointment, these commands will take you to the next, previous or current sentence or line, as they do in KeyWord.
To move the cursor to the top or the bottom of the current day, press SPACEwithdots123, or SPACEwithdots456.
Likewise, when in the notes of an appointment, these commands will take you to the top or bottom of the notes.
To speak continuously, press SPACEwithG.
To stop the BrailleNote PK speaking at any time, press BACKSPACEwithENTER.
To confirm the date of the current planner page, and how many days away from today's date, press SPACEwithwhsign(dots156).
Press this command again to get the interval of time stated in weeks and days.


8.6.2 Checking Your Next Appointment.
You can check the details of your next appointment from any point in KeySoft, without losing your place in your current activity. To do this, press ENTERwithN. This command recognizes appointments showing their time as busy, out of office or tentative, but not those marked as free. KeyPlan will tell you whether you have any, any more, no, or no more appointments for the day, if you are in a current appointment time, when the next appointment is and on what date and time, and when the next alarm is scheduled for if it is not associated with the next appointment.
When you are finished you are returned to the same place in your original activity.
The other way of checking just your current or next appointment for the current day is to enter the planner and select today's date in the calendar. This places you at the current or next appointment of the day, if there is one.


8.6.3 Overlapping Appointments.
Overlapping appointments occur when two appointments are scheduled with an overlapping start or end time. KeyPlan only recognizes appointments as overlapping if neither are set to show their time as free. As mentioned before, KeyPlan will warn you that you are about to schedule an overlapping appointment but won't stop you from doing so. And of course the synchronization process may also cause overlapping appointments. This is discussed fully in 12.14.7.1 Overlapping Appointments.
While in the planner, you can find the next or previous occurrence of an overlapping appointment. The commands are:
Go to next overlapping appointment: SPACEwithdots3456.
Go to previous overlapping appointment: SPACEwithdots1236.
When you go to the overlapping appointment, KeyPlan will display its date, time, title and location. To hear the appointment with which it is overlapping, press SPACEwithdots3456 again. The same command will take you to the earlier of the next pair of overlapping appointments.
To resolve an overlapping appointment situation, simply modify one or both appointments in the usual way, as described in 8.7.3 Modifying an Appointment.


8.6.4 Calendar or Appointment Information.
There are two quick ways to get information about either a day in the calendar or a specific appointment. These are by using the information command SPACEwithI, and SPACEwithwhsign(dots156).
When the cursor is in the date line of a calendar page, you can access the following information:
Press SPACEwithI for the number of appointments and number of allday events, when the first appointment starts and the last appointment finishes.
Press SPACEwithwhsign(dots156) for the date and how many days away from the current date. Press the command again for the interval of time stated in weeks and days.
When the cursor is in an appointment, you can access the following information:
Press SPACEwithI for a summary of recurrences and alarm status.
Press SPACEwithwhsign(dots156) for the date and time of the appointment and how many days away from the current date. Press the command again for the interval of time stated in weeks and days.


8.6.5 Finding an Appointment.
You may need to find an appointment whose date you have forgotten. If you remember a word, name or phrase in the text, then you can use the Find command, SPACEwithF, to find it. If the text is found, you can read the details by pressing SPACEwithdots14, and you can query the date by pressing SPACEwithwhsign(dots156).
The text can appear more than once in the planner, so you may not find the required appointment on the first try. To continue the search, press SPACEwithN.


8.7 Changing an Existing Appointment.
After you have created an appointment or allday event, you can edit the text of its notes, review or modify its time, date or other properties, or cancel it altogether. These functions are all outlined in this section.


8.7.1 Editing an Appointment.
After you have made an entry in the planner, you can edit, delete, move or change the layout of its text. Most of the KeySoft editing commands are available in KeyPlan. These can be used to make changes to the text of an appointment, but not to change the time and date of an appointment itself. In the case of recurring appointments, changes made this way will only affect the appointment you are in; to change all recurrences you need to use the "Review or Modify Appointment" option.
As with the review commands, there are some minor differences to the edit commands. For example, BACKSPACEwithdots14, which in the Word Processor is "deletetoendofsentence," or "deletetoendofline," depending on the Reading Mode, cancels the appointment if the cursor is in the subject line, or deletes to the end of the line or sentence if the cursor is in a note.


8.7.2 Cutting, Pasting and Deleting using block commands.
The marking, cutting and pasting operations that are available elsewhere in KeySoft also work in KeyPlan. Because the Planner is not just a document, however, these operations behave a little differently.
You can copy, cut and paste the title or notes from one appointment to another, but you can't use this method to move an appointment in total. However you can copy a whole appointment and paste it into an email or word document.
You can also mark an entire appointment or block of appointments and delete it using the SPACEwithBthen D Delete block command. It is wise to note, however, that if you use this function to delete a recurring appointment, it will only delete that one instance of the appointment. Doing this will use more storage space than leaving the recurring appointment in the planner.
You can mark a block and change its language (for multilingual users) and/or Braille grade as elsewhere in KeySoft, but only one appointment at a time.
The Block Commands are detailed in 6.7.1 Block Commands Menu and 16.2.7 Block Commands.


8.7.3 Modifying an Appointment.
This option allows you to reschedule the date or time, change the recurring pattern, alarm status, location etc of any appointment. Position the cursor anywhere in the appointment you wish to modify, and press SPACEwithdots34thenR.
If the appointment is a recurring one, you will now be asked if you wish to modify just this one, or all instances. For just this one, pressJ, for all instances, press A. You will be presented with the same prompts and steps as for creating an appointment, the difference being that you will be offered the current appointment's options as defaults at each prompt. Simply change the ones you wish to change and pass over the others by pressing ENTER.


8.7.4 Canceling an Appointment.
To cancel an appointment, position the cursor in the appointment you wish to cancel and press BACKSPACEwithdots14, or enter the Appointment menu by pressing SPACEwithdots34, and select"Cancel thisappointment."
KeySoft prompts: "Cancelthisappointment(title).Sure?" To cancel, press Y, to abort, press N. If the appointment is part of a recurring pattern, KeySoft will then prompt: "Cancelalloccurrencesorjustthisone?" For all, press A, for just the currently selected instance, press J.


8.8 Selecting Another Date.
There are two ways to select another date. Assuming you are already in the planner, you can return to the Calendar Day selection prompt by pressing SPACEwithE, and then select or Braille the required date, or you can move forwards or backwards to a different date by using the "Goto" command, SPACEwithdots126.When you press SPACEwithdots126KeySoft prompts: "Gowhere?"
Press F for forwards, or B for back. Follow this with D,W, MorY, to move a day, week, month or year, and then press ENTER.You can also put a number and space before the D,W, MorY.For example, to move forward 3 days, use the following:
SPACEwithdots126,f,3,SPACE,D,ENTER.
To find where the cursor is currently located, press SPACEwithwhsign(dots156).
Today's date and day of the week can be checked from any point in KeySoft by pressing ENTERwithD.


8.9 Alarms.
8.9.1 When Alarms Sound.
An alarm rings at its programmed time, even if the BrailleNote PK is switched off. When the BrailleNote PK is on standby; that is, turned off by pressing C4, the alarm turns the BrailleNote PK back on, and it stays on until you turn it off. If the BrailleNote PK is turned off by pressing C1 and C4, the alarm will not sound at all.
The speaker and the headphones sound the alarm. Unlike speech, the speaker sounds the alarm even if the headphones are plugged in.
If not acknowledged, the alarm continues ringing for a length of time called the "Alarmringingtime." It is then silent until:
the "Alarmrepeattime"has elapsed, OR;
a key is pressed.
The maximum number of times an alarm can cycle is set to 10. This is to prevent an alarm causing unnecessary battery drain.


8.9.2 Setting an Alarm.
When you schedule an appointment, setting an alarm is one of the steps you go through. You can set an alarm on an appointment that is already set up through modifying an appointment.


8.9.3 Acknowledging an Alarm.
If the BrailleNote PK was on standby when the alarm sounds, it turns itself on and brings up the alarm options menu:
To cancel the alarm:	pressC;
To read and hear appointment details without canceling:	pressR;
To postpone the alarm for 10 minutes:	pressSPACE.
If the BrailleNote PK is on when the alarm sounds, first acknowledge it by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTER together. You are then automatically placed in the Alarm options menu.


8.9.4 Alarm Set Up.
The ringing and repeat times have the same values for all alarms. To review or change the values, first move to the KeyPlan menu. In the KeyPlan Menu select "Setupoptions" and KeySoft enters the "KeyPlansetuplist."
The first item on the list is alarm volume. KeyPlan displays: "Alarmvolume?24."
To change the alarm volume, type a new value between 5 and 32 where 5 is quietest and 32 is loudest, and press ENTER.To test the volume, go back to the alarm volume item and press SPACEwithT.
The next item on the list is the alarm ringing time. KeyPlan displays: "Alarmringingtime?30seconds."
This is the length of time an alarm sounds before it turns itself off. To change the value, type the required duration in seconds and press ENTER.The value can be between 5 and 600. A number sign is optional.
The second item in the list is: "Alarmrepeatperiod?5minutes."
This is the period of time for which an unacknowledged alarm will be silent before it sounds again. To change the value, type the required duration in minutes and press ENTER.The value can be between 1 and 60.



9 Address List.
KeyList is an address list manager. It allows you to enter addresses, phone numbers and other data against a person's name. You can review and edit the information, sort it, and copy it to the word processor, KeyWord or the planner, KeyPlan. It is also possible to synchronize your Address List with an MS Outlook Contacts list  see KeySync. 12.14 KeySync.
To enter the Address List from the Main Menu, use the SPACEand BACKSPACE keys to review the items in the menu, until "AddressList" is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, you can select the Address List from the Main Menu by pressing A.
You can switch directly to the Address List from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTERwithA. If you leave the Address List by switching directly to another application, such as the Word Processor, then pressing BACKSPACEwithENTERwithA will return you to the same point in the Address List.
BrailleNote PK displays "KeyListMenu".This menu comprises 4 options as follows:
Add address.
Look up address.
Copy addresses.
Select KeyList file.
The following chapter describes these options. If you are using KeyList for the first time, the address list is empty until you have added some addresses.


9.1 Adding an Address.
This option allows you to enter contact details; last name, first name, and a list of other information. Each item of information, such as a phone number, is called a "field". Up to 25 fields can be associated with a last name to form a contact "record".
At the KeyList menu, select "Addaddress".KeyList displays: "EntrylistforAddressList".
Move to the first item in the list by pressing SPACEorADVANCE, and KeyList prompts you for a Last name. Type a last name and press ENTER.
You are then prompted for text to enter into the following fields. For any field other than the last name field, you can enter text or skip the field by pressing SPACE. The complete list of fields for an address record is as follows:
Last Name
First name
Middle Name
Title
Home Phone
Business Phone
Cell Phone
Home Email
Business Email
Home Fax
Business Fax
Street Address
Street Address Line 2
Street Address Line 3
City
State or County
Zip or Postcode
Home Country
Business Title
Company Name
Department
Business Street Address
Business Street Address Line 2
Business Street Address Line 3
Business City
Business State or County
Business Zip or Postcode
Business Country
Web Page
Notes
For each field, type the information and press ENTER. You are then asked for the next field. When you come to the Notes field, press ENTER to select it. You can then write, edit or read the notes, and return to the list by pressing SPACEwithE.


In general, you can use your Preferred Braille Grade, as set up through the Options menu, for reading or adding list items. However where your grade is not appropriate, KeyList assumes a lower grade. For example, for entering the "Zip or Post Code" field, grade 1 is assumed. Email addresses must be entered in Computer Braille. For details about entering email addresses, refer to 9.1 Adding an Address.
Remember that names and addresses may be copied to a document at some stage, so it is good practice to use capital signs as appropriate. KeySoft will put one in if you don't.
If you enter a telephone number, a number sign isn't needed.
All fields except Last name are optional, so if you wish to skip a field, just press SPACE to move to the next one.
You can review the list by pressing BACKSPACEorBACK to move back, and SPACE or ADVANCE to move forward. When you are satisfied, add the new record by pressing SPACEwithdots26.
KeyList displays, "Recordadded", and you are returned to the KeyList menu. If you wish to add another record, press A and repeat the previous procedure.


9.2 Looking Up an Address.
9.2.1 Searching by Surname.
At the KeyList menu, select "LookupAddress".KeyList displays: "SelectionlistforAddressList".
Move to the first item in the list by pressing SPACEorADVANCE, and KeyList prompts: "Lastname?"
You are being asked for data which is used to find matching records. We deal with a simple case, and return to more complex searches later.
For example, you may want to review the records of all people called "Smith". In this case, type "smith" at the last name prompt, and press ENTER. The first name and last name of the first person in the address list called "Smith" is displayed. You can move through the list of "Smiths" by pressing SPACEwithdots56. Each press displays his or her first name, followed by the last name, in this case "Smith". Only records which match the selection list are displayed. A beep indicates when there are no more matching last names.
To review the other fields in a particular record, press SPACEorADVANCErepeatedly. Only fields containing an entry are displayed. The format of each item comprises the name of the field, such as "Company name", followed by the entry, such as "Yoyodyne Inc." The movement commands are as follows:
To move to the previous record:	SPACEwithdots23orPREVIOUS.
To move to the next record: 	SPACEwithdots56orNEXT.
To move to the previous field:	BACKSPACEorSPACEwithdot1orBACK.
To move to the next field: 	SPACEorSPACEwithdot4orADVANCE.
To jump to any field:	Press the first letter of the field name.
For example, H for Home phone number, Home email address or Home fax number.
When reviewing using speech you can use the following commands:
To hear the current record:	SPACEwithdots2356.
To read the next record:	SPACEwithdots56.
To read the previous record:	SPACEwithdots23.
To hear the next field:	SPACEwithdot4.
To hear the current field:	SPACEwithdots14.
To hear the previous field:	SPACEwithdot1.
To hear the next word:	SPACEwithdot5.
To hear the current word:	SPACEwithdots25
(Press twice to spell current word.)
To hear the previous word:	SPACEwithdot2.
When you have finished listening to a selection, you can return to the selection list by pressing SPACEwithE. You are asked for another Last name. If you have finished searching, you can return to the KeyList menu by pressing SPACEwithE again.


9.2.2 Record Matching.
The information which you enter into the Lookup Selection List is used to find matching records. You may include as much or as little data in the List as you wish.
For example, when looking up a telephone number, you might specify just the person's last name. To start the search, press ENTER and the first person with that last name is displayed. If necessary, move through the other entries for that last name by pressing SPACEwithdots56, until you locate the one with the required first name. Then press either H or B to move to the home phone number field or business phone number field.
You need only type the first few characters in a field rather than the whole field. For example, if you just type S in the Surname field, you are able to access the records of all people whose surnames begin with S.
You can search for all people who work for a particular company. At the lookup selection list, don't specify a surname, but press SPACE repeatedly until the prompt: "Companyname?"is displayedand then type the company name and press ENTER. You can then use SPACEwithdots56orNEXT to move through all the people who work for that company.


9.2.3 Wildcard search.
You can also search for a name fragment within a field, using the multicharacter wild card for the unknown first part. For example, you may remember a company as: "Something and Fox, Incorporated". If you press SPACEwithdots35, followed by "fox" in the company name field, you should have a very short list of records to review.
When setting up the Lookup Selection List, you can move forward and backward through the entries without changing their values. Press SPACE or BACKSPACE to do this. To change an entry, just type the required setting. When the Selection List is to your satisfaction, start the lookup by pressing ENTER and the first match is displayed.
For example, you may wish to display all entries in your address list with a last name of Smith that live in the city of Seattle. To do this type Smith in the last name field, then press SPACE until the City field is displayed. Type Seattle, and press ENTER. All records matching your search criteria will be presented.


9.2.4 Clearing a Field.
Any fields used in a Lookup will be offered as a suggestion for the next search, unless you exit to the KeyList Menu between searches. You may want to blank out a previouslyused field so it is not used in the next search. To do this, move to the required field using SPACEwithO and press the Clear Field command, SPACEwithdots356.


9.3 Changing a Field or Adding More Information.
First we will look at changing an existing field, as would be the case, for example, if you wished to change a person's phone number. From the "Lookup address" option, select the person's record you wish to modify, then move to the field to be changed. Press BACKSPACEwithdots25, and you are asked for a new entry for this field. There are three options here:
1. Type a new entry and press ENTER.
2. Edit the old field which is offered as the suggestion, as described in 5.17 Editing at a Prompt.
3. Clear the field by pressing SPACEwithdots356, followed by ENTER.
This puts you in an entry list so you can modify or add to any other field as well. You have the same three options for all the fields and you can change any other field in the record.
The second scenario is where you wish to add an additional field to an existing record. From the "Lookup address" option, select the person's record you wish to add to, then press BACKSPACEwithdots25. KeySoft will prompt: "Lastname?Currently(name)"
Press ENTER to accept the name, then use SPACE to move through the list of fields until you hear the field you wish to add. Type in the required information and press ENTER. When you are satisfied press SPACEwithdots26 and the modified record will be stored.


9.4 Deleting a Record.
To delete a record, comprising a last name and all its associated fields, use the "Lookup" option. Move to any field in the record and press BACKSPACEwithdots2356.
You are prompted to make sure, so press Y, and the record is deleted from the address list.


9.5 Duplicating a Record.
You may want to create a new record which is similar to an existing one. There is often less to type if you duplicate an existing record, and then make the required changes. You might do this, for example, if two people work for the same company and many of their details are the same. There is a useful function called "Retrieve last record", which can help here.
Assume that you have just added a new record for someone who works for a particular company, and you want to add another similar record for someone else. Select the Add Address option and when you get as far as the Last name prompt, select the Block Commands Menu by pressing SPACEwithB.
Note that this is a different menu to the Block Commands menu in KeyWord. Press SPACE and KeyList displays: "Retrievelastrecord".
KeyList is offering to retrieve the last record you added, so press ENTER. KeyList prompts, "Lastname?CurrentlySmith".You now have two identical records, so you should change the fields that are to be different, such as Last name, First Name, and Title. When you have made the changes, add the new record by pressing SPACEwithdots26.
If you need to add other similar records, continue using the retrieve last record command as necessary. If you want to duplicate an old record, just look it up first, since the retrieve last record command retrieves the last record which was looked up, added or copied.


9.6 Inserting an Address into a Document.
You may wish to insert a name and address, from KeyList into a letter you are typing with KeyWord. This can be done in two steps as follows:
1. Copy the address to the clipboard.
2. Paste the clipboard into the document.
These steps are now described. Select KeyList and from the KeyList menu, press L for Lookup, and locate the person's address. At any field in this record, select the Block Commands Menu by pressing SPACEwithB. There is only one item in this menu, and if you press SPACE the following message is displayed, "Copyrecordtoclipboard".This is the action you require, so press ENTER.
KeyList then prompts, "Templatename?"for the name of the template that determines which fields in the record should be copied, and in which order. You can create your own templates as described later. For the moment, select an existing one by pressing SPACE repeatedly until "Letterheadtemplate"is displayed and press ENTER.
The record which you just looked up is copied to the clipboard. KeyList displays, "Recordcopiedtoclipboard", and you are returned to your place in the record. The fields which have been copied to the clipboard are formatted in a letterhead style.
Now use KeyWord to create the letter which requires an address. Place the cursor where you want the address to be inserted and paste the clipboard by pressing SPACEwithB,thenP. If you review this document, you will find the selected person's name and address in a letterhead layout.


9.7 Templates.
Templates are used for copying address list information into a document following a specified format. You can use the templates as they are supplied, or you can modify them, or create new ones.


9.7.1 Braille and Text Templates.
It is important to note that a template can be either a Braille or a text document, and the right one must be used for the purpose. If you want to insert into a Braille document, then a Braille template is required. Conversely, if you want to insert into a text document, then a text template is required.


9.7.2 Creating a Template.
Suppose that you wish to copy records from an address list into some business letters. You might want a template which puts your own address at the head of the letter, followed by the date, and then the recipient's name and address. We will assume that the letters will be Braille documents, which could be subsequently be saved to a print format. In this case you will need a Braille template.
From the KeyWord menu, press C to create a new document. At the "Foldername?"prompt, select "KeyList", which is the folder where templates are kept. At the prompt: "Documenttocreate?" type a suitable name such as: "Business template". Unless you specify otherwise a Braille template is created. If you had wanted a text template, press BACKSPACEwithX at the promptfor "Documenttocreate?"until "CreateaBrailledocument" is displayed.
Now compose this document in the way you want the record to be formatted. The layout is for a business letter, so first type your own address, followed by a blank line.
Next, insert the date by pressing SPACEwithO, followed by I,thenD. KeySoft prompts, "Inserttoday'sdateorprintingdate?"Select the Printing Date option by pressing *P*. This causes the date to be updated each time you use the template to copy Address List records. The Today's Date option inserts today's actual date, that is the date you created the template document.
The text you have typed so far will be reproduced each time you use this template. Now we want to copy a recipient's first name from the address list. Place the cursor where you want the name to go, and select the list of available field names as follows:
Select the Template menu by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTERwithdots2346, and then select the Insert Field option.
KeySoft prompts, "Insertfieldfromwhichdatabase?"Select "KeyList'sAddresslist"by pressing A. You are then presented with the "Fieldselectionlist". This is a list of all the field names in an address list. Press SPACEorBACKSPACE repeatedly to review this list and find the field you want, which in this case is: "Firstname".Press ENTER to select it. You are returned to the document, a "First name field" marker is inserted, and the cursor is placed just after it. Now when a record is copied into a document using this template, a person's First Name appears in the marked position.
To put a space after the first name, press SPACE. To include the last name next, follow the same procedure which you used to select the first name, but select the "Lastname"field instead. This places a "Last name field" marker after the space.
Start a new line by pressing ENTER, and continue to compose the recipient's address, using field names from the list. A template may include whatever punctuation, formatting commands or text that you wish, and these are included with the fields that are specified by the template. The field indicator is shown on the Braille display as $fld followed by the field name.
Other layout rules to remember are:
1. When using a template, KeyList filters out lines which only contain blank fields. For example, the original record may have a blank "Country" field. If your template contains a "Country" field name on a line by itself, a blank line will not be generated.
2. If you want a blank line to be generated when it contains only blank fields, start the line in the template with a marker to indicate "Force Inclusion of Line", by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTERwithdots2346,thenF.
3. Part of a line in a template can be marked with suppression markers. If the field or fields between the markers are blank, everything between the markers is suppressed when the template is used. To insert these markers, press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithdots2346,for the Template menu, and choose Start or End Conditional Suppression. For an example of the use of suppression markers, see the "Letterhead Template" in the KeyList directory.
4. To put a comment line in a template, start the line with a comment marker. To do this, press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithdots2346for the Template menu, and choose: "Mark comment line". The contents of the comment line are not included when the template is used.
5. Records can be laid out to fill the page, in a layout suitable for a phone list. Alternatively, they can be laid out one per page, to suit form letters. In the latter case, a "New Page" marker is required at the end of the template.
When you have finished the template, you can review it as you would review any other KeyWord document. Markers are spoken with character or word review commands.
In the template, fields appears to have a particular length, but the actual field lengths are substituted when you use the template. For example, the "First name" field appears to be 13 characters long in the template, but only 4 characters result if the address list field contains the name "John".
If you create a new template, or modify an existing one, you should check the resulting layout to ensure that it is what you intended. You can do this by copying a record into the clipboard, using the new template, and pasting the clipboard into a blank document. You can then review the layout.


9.8 Copying Addresses.
KeyList allows you to copy a subset of the address list, such as all people who work for Fox Corporation, into a chosen file. At the KeyList menu select "Copyaddresses".KeyList displays: "Copyaddressestoadocumentoranaddresslist?"
You have the option of copying the addresses to a KeyWord document, or to another address list file used by KeyList or KeyMail.


9.8.1 Copying to a Text or Braille Document.
To copy to a document, press D, and you hear prompts for a destination folder name and document name. Select an existing Braille or text document, or create a new one.
When you have entered the destination documentname, you are prompted, "Templatename?"This determines the fields to be copied and their format on the page. The offered template is either a Braille or a text document, to match the type of destination document you have chosen. To accept the suggested template, press ENTER, or press SPACE repeatedly to review the list of available templates, and choose one by pressing ENTER.
You are then placed in the KeyList Lookup function, at the prompt: "SelectionlistforAddressNotebook". If you want to copy every record, press ENTER. However, you also have the opportunity to select just those addresses you want to copy, if they have something in common. For example, in the "Organization" field you might type "Fox Corporation." When you have set up the required search field or fields, start the lookup by pressing ENTER. KeyList displays the number of selected records, and prompts, "Copyallselectedrecords?" To do this, press Y.
All the selected records are copied to the destination document, and you are returned to the KeyList menu. Alternatively, you have a further opportunity to choose from the selected addresses. To do this, press N, and you are presented with the first matching record. If you press ENTER this record is added to the document. If you do not want to include this record, use SPACEwithdots56 to scan the list, and press ENTER for each record you wish to include.


9.8.2 Copying to an Address List File.
You can also copy addresses to another address list file, rather than to a document as just described. At the KeyList menu select "Copyaddresses". Your BrailleNote PK prompts: "Copyaddressestoadocumentoranaddresslist?"
To copy to an address list file, press A, and your BrailleNote PK prompts for a destination folder name and file name.Select an existing address list. If you need to select a different drive or folder, press BACKSPACE.
There are now two possibilities; either the source and the destination files have the same number of fields and the same field names, or there are differences.
The first case applies when you are copying records to a file with an identical structure to the source file. KeySoft advises, "Allfieldsmatch.Reviewfieldmappinglist?"You would normally press N here, and you are placed at the Selection List, from where you may select the required records, as described in the previous section about copying to a document.
Alternatively, if the source and destination structures are different, KeySoft tells you how many field names match, and queries, "Reviewfieldmappinglist?"If you press N at this point, KeySoft copies only those fields which have matching field names in the destination file.
However, if you want to specify how each field in the source file is mapped to the destination file, press Y. KeySoft presents a "Field Mapping List" containing pairs of field names. The first of each pair is a field name from the source file, and the second is a matching field name in the destination file, if a match exists. To change a mapping, review the field mapping list by pressing SPACEor BACKSPACE repeatedly and select a source field name by pressing ENTER. You are presented with a field selection list containing all the field names in a destination record. Review this list and pick the corresponding field name by pressing ENTER. You can then continue to review the field mapping list, making changes as required. To prevent a field being copied, use the Clear Field command, SPACEwithdots356, when the field name is displayed. When the field mapping list is to your satisfaction, press SPACEwithE and you can proceed to select the required records to copy, as described previously.


9.9 Selecting an Address List.
KeySoft is installed with a blank address file called: "AddressList".Its name is displayed when you select, "Addaddress", or "Lookupaddress".However there is no reason why you can't have multiple address lists, instead of one, and use them for other purposes than storing addresses. For simple, step by step instructions on how to set up a database using an address list file, refer to 9.11.1 Setting Up a Database. You should also read the following section on Creating an Address List before proceeding.
To select a different address list, or to verify which address list is currently selected, select the "SelectKeyListfile"option in the KeyList Menu. You are prompted for a folder and file name. Select the folder and file in any of the usual ways. The selected file remains current until deliberately changed. If the file selected is not of the Address List type then you are prompted to verify the selection when you enter KeyList.


9.10 Creating an Address List.
For easy to follow step by step instructions on how to create a database, refer to 9.11.1 Setting Up a Database.
Each address list has an associated KeyList definition file that defines the fields that are contained in an address record. The definition file for the standard "Address List" may be found in the KeyList folder and is named "Address List.klt".
When you first enter details into the Address List, an associated database volume is created within the "Keylist.cdb" file that is stored in the KeyList folder on the Flash Disk. The entries you place in the Address List are stored within this database file.
We recommend caution in working with database definition files. If you think that you have the necessary skills and wish to experiment with creating your own variant of the "AddressList", we suggest that you first make a copy of the existing Address List definitions file and that you modify this copied file. In this way you will always have the original Address List definition file intact.
From the File Manager, copy the file named "Address List" from the KeyList folder on the Flash Disk to the General folder on the Flash Disk.
Use Keyword to open the Address List file you have copied into the General Folder. We suggest you set KeyWord to line reading mode, by pressing SPACEwithM until "line reading mode" is displayed.
We'll now consider the task of modifying this file so that the associated database is named "Phone List", and the definition file only contains fields for "Last Name", "First name", and "Phone". Now, let's take a closer look at the original address list definitions file that we have just opened.
You will find that the file contains some 33 lines of information. The syntax of each line determines its function.
The first line of the file contains the word "database", followed by the words "Address List". We want to create a definition file called "Phone List", so replace "Address List" with "Phone List", leaving the word "database" at the start of the line.
The second line contains the number "24". Leave this unchanged.
The next 27 lines define each field as it appears in the Address List. Each line starts with a unique number, but the order in which the fields appear in the database is determined by their relative line position, not the number used to identify the line.
Delete the lines starting with "16420" and "16419". These lines represent the fields "Middle Name" and "Title" in the original definition file.
Position the cursor at the start of the line numbered "14856" and place a "Top of Block" marker. Next position the cursor to the start of the line numbered "24594", enter the Block Menu and select "Delete Block".
You should now be left with a file that contains 9 lines. Modify the line starting with "14857" so that the text between the quotes is "Phone" rather than the original "Home phone number". It is important that the word "Phone" is placed inside quotation marks.
The final form of your modified file should be:
database Phone List
24
14865, name, autocap, "Last name"
14854, name autocap, "First name"
14857, phone, autonum, "Phone"
24594, concat, "14865, 14854"
24595, concat, "14854, 14865"
announcement order 14854, 14865
sort order 24594, 24595
Once you are happy with the contents of the modified file, exit the file, and from the File Command Menu, rename it to "Phone List". Ignore the message that there is no database associated with the file. Copy the "Phone List" definition file back into the KeyList folder.
All you have to do now is go to the Address List menu and select the "Phone List" file as your address file. You can then add entries to your new phone list. When you first try to add an entry to the phone list, you will be asked to confirm the creation of the associated database within the "Keylist.cdb" file.


9.11 Using KeyList to Manipulate Databases.
KeyList is not restricted to looking up or adding to an address list. It can also be used to manipulate any of the databases in the KeyList folder. To do this, select the folder and name of the required database using the "SelectKeyListfile" option in the KeyList menu as described in 9.9 Selecting an Address List.
You can now use KeyList to Lookup or Add to the selected database in the usual way, as if it were an address list.
When you have finished reviewing or updating a database, remember to reselect the Address List in the KeyList folder for future use.


9.11.1 Setting Up a Database.
This section gives simple step by step instructions on how to create your own database, using the address list database as a starting point. As a safety precaution we strongly recommend you back up your address list database before experimenting with other databases. Please note that because these steps require some manipulation of a copy of our existing address list file, and that because individually created databases will vary significantly, Humanware's technical support team does not currently provide support in the creation or implementation of any usercreated database, or possible restoration of any corruption to the original address list file.
1. Open the Word Processor.
2. Go to Create a document.
3. Choose the KeyList folder.
4. Press BACKSPACEwithX to cycle through the types of documents that can be created, until you get to "CreateaKeyListdefinitionfile".
5. Input the name of your new database and press ENTER. For example, if you are creating a credit card database, you might call it credit cards.
6. Now you are at the top of a blank document, where you see computer Braille is required.
7. From here, we want to insert the KeyList definition file called address list. Open the Block commands menu by pressing SPACEwithB.
8. Press I for "insertfile." You are prompted, "insertdocumentfromdrive?" Select the Flash Disk.
9. At the folder prompt, select the KeyList folder. Press SPACEwithX until you arrive at the list of all files in KeyList.
10. Now, move down through this list of files in your KeyList folder until you get to "addresslist." Press ENTER. This inserts the file into your newly created word processing document, and places you at the bottom of the file. Go to the top by pressing SPACEwithdots123.
11. You will then see "databaseAddresslist", followed by $(dollar sign) P. Remember, dollar sign in computer Braille is dots1246.
12. Delete the words, "Addresslist", and replace them with the name of your desired database, i.e. credit cards. Be sure to initial cap the first letter of the first word of your new database name.
13. Now, as you read through the file, you will see that each line begins with a number followed by a comma, then the field name followed by a comma, then the field type followed by a comma, then the field label in quotation marks.
14. Delete the fields you do not want by deleting the line from the number to just past the new paragraph marker, dollar sign p.
15. Leaving a number at the beginning of each new line, change the words in quotes (the field labels) to text that will reflect your database needs. Be sure to leave only one new paragraph marker, dollar sign p, between each line. Each new line must begin with a number, and end with a dollar sign p.
For example, If you want to change the field name of "Lastname" to "Creditcardname", simply move to the L of the words "lastname" and delete the word Last, and type in the words "creditcard".Remember, the field label must always be in quotes, with initial caps on the first word of the field label only.
16. Once all editing is done, exit the file by returning to the Main Menu.
17. Move to the address list database. Select your newly created definition file by pressing SPACE, moving you down through the list of definition files, just as you do in any other folder or file list. Once you arrive at the newly created definition file, press ENTER.
18. Now, you are in the familiar KeyList menu.
19. Select add address. It will tell you that your database does not exist and ask if you want to create it. Press Y.
20. Now it is time to start filling in those fields you have created, just as you do in your address list database.



10 Email.
This chapter introduces KeyMail, the BrailleNote PK's userfriendly email package that lets you send, receive and manage your email.
If you are new to the world of electronic telecommunications you may wonder what email is. That is, apart from being short for electronic mail. Essentially email is just the electronic equivalent of paper mail, but it is faster and cheaper than ordinary mail. It takes minutes or hours rather than days to reach its destination even when the destination is on the other side of the world.
In order to send and receive email, computers need to have a set of rules, or protocol, which determines how the information is sent. BrailleNote PK's email program, KeyMail, uses the popular POP (Post Office Protocol) email format. This protocol has become the "industry standard" which ensures easy connection to the majority of Internet Service Providers.
We commence this chapter by describing, in general terms, what KeyMail can do. We then take an overview of the KeyMail package, and follow this with getting started with KeyMail from a first time perspective. Following this is a fuller description of KeyMail and its component parts.


10.1 What Can KeyMail Do.
The KeyMail email program enables you to access mainstream email services and communicate with email users worldwide.
KeyMail provides you with the following capabilities:
KeyMail enables you to communicate with people using many different popular email programs like Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express, Eudora, and Lotus cc:Mail.
KeyMail guides you through the steps of addressing and composing an email message, connecting to an email service provider, sending email and receiving email.
KeyMail helps you organize your email messages so you can find them easily using electronic folders, and it enables you to set up your preferred email options.
KeyMail handles attachments to email. It understands Microsoft Word document formats so you can read Word documents attached to your email. You can also attach files of any format to your outgoing email.
KeyMail eliminates the routine task of appending your name and email address, and facilitates responding to an email message. Replying to a message automatically creates a new message with the address and subject line filled in, and the message area contains the text of the original message.
With a range of connectivity configurations available and the KeyMail software, BrailleNote PK provides everything you need to join the connected world of email.


10.2 KeyMail Menu.
You can access KeyMail by typing E from the Main Menu, or by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTERwithE. This takes you to the KeyMail Menu, which contains 4 items. These are:
Write an email;
Read email;
Connect to send and receive email;
Set up options.


10.2.1 Write Email.
Choose "Writeanemail" when you wish to send a new message to one or more people. You can enter their email addresses manually, or more conveniently, choose them from your KeyList address list. KeyMail steps you painlessly through the various options that include the following items:
main recipient or recipients;
carbon copy recipient or recipients;
blind carbon copy recipient or recipients;
subject; and,
whether you wish to send any file attachments.
You can then create, review, spell check, and edit the text of your email message using the same friendly commands used in KeyWord. At this point you may choose to send your email, with or without saving a copy, or save it as a Draft, so that you can return to it at a later time.


10.2.2 Reading Email.
To read email stored on your system, choose "ReadEmail.You can check for new messages before you start, or read messages stored from previous sessions. KeyMail uses a series of folders to organize your mail, and you can add folders of your own to streamline the filing of your mail. KeyMail guides you through selecting the desired folder, and provides tools for replying to and forwarding email, with and without the original text and/or attachments included.
Emails can be marked for further action, such as moving or copying to another folder, or sending to the Trash folder.


10.2.3 Checking for Email.
To check for new email, choose "Connecttosendandreceiveemail. KeyMail prompts you through the necessary steps, and provides feedback about the status of the connection and mail download. If you have any unsent mail, it is also sent at this time.


10.2.4 Setup Options.
The purpose of the"Setupoptions"is to define the details of your email accounts. You can set up as many accounts as you wish. Using the Receive options you can choose not to delete messages from your service provider after they have been downloaded, leaving them available to be downloaded to another computer. A size limit can also be set on emails to be downloaded, and if exceeded, an alert will be given. You can set these larger emails to be stored on a storage card instead of the flash disk if you prefer. The Address list set up allows you to define which address list to use, if you have more than one, and to tell it your own name and email address so these can be included in email you send.
Each of the Set up Options is detailed in.
Setting up access to the internet itself is handled separately. For more information, refer to 12.3 The Connectivity Menu.


10.2.5 Disconnecting.
When KeyMail connects in order to send or receive email, at the end of the process it will prompt:"Remainconnected?" At this point you can press Yto stay connected to the internet, or Nto disconnect. The reason you have this choice is because you may wish to do other email activities, or switch to KeyWeb, during the same session. When you choose to remain connected, KeySoft returns to the Main Menu. When you disconnect, KeySoft returns to the KeyMail Menu.


10.3 Before You Start.
Before you can send and receive email, you need to set up an email account with an Internet Service Provider, or ISP for short. If you already have an email account, you can configure KeyMail to work with it in most cases. For those unfamiliar with Internet Service Providers, your ISP can be thought of as providing a similar service to telephone banking, only instead of shuffling money, your ISP handles your email.
First you have to choose a Service Provider (ISP) and establish with them what your email address and log on password will be, and the address of their send and receive mail boxes. A typical example of these various items may be:
User Name: Murray_Thorn;
Password: Cheeky;
Pop Server address: pop.clear.net.nz;
SMTP Server address: smtp.clear.net.nz.
In some cases you may require other information such as a DNS address. Either ask your Service Provider for details on setting up a Windows CE machine, or contact your BrailleNote PK dealer.
If using a dialup connection, you will also require a telephone number from them. Some Service Providers also require a User Name and Password for the initial connection, as well as those required to access your actual EMail account.
Some people have email accounts with separate providers, but may only access them using one ISP connection to the Internet. Others may have several accounts and several different ways to get connected. Others will have just one email account through one ISP. This chapter covers the setting up of an email account and the handling of email. For information on how to set up the connection to the internet, refer to the Connectivity Chapter.


10.4 Correcting Input Errors.
Unless you are extremely accurate, it is highly likely that you will input an incorrect keystroke or two while you are filling in the various details. KeySoft has a number of editing and review commands that make it easy to correct such problems. Get into the habit of frequently using KeySoft Help, SPACEwithH.It often provides a valuable source of information relevant to what you are trying to do.
If you notice a mistake while typing in, use BACKSPACE to take out the last character. To review an email address, you can display it by pressingSPACEwithdots25. Pressing this combination again causes the address to be spelt. You can move forwards and back through an entry using SPACEwithdot3 or SPACEwithdot6.
Alternatively, you can locate the character you wish to position the cursor at on the Braille Display, and press the Touch Cursor associated with that cell to route the cursor to that character.


10.5 Writing an Email Message.
KeyMail provides most of the important functions of the popular email programs available today. If you have used any of these programs you have a head start because you already understand what you are doing. KeyMail guides you through the process of addressing, writing an email message and attaching files to email.
There is some essential detail that you must provide, like who you want to send the email to, but there is also much detail that is optional. The following discussion guides you through all of the available options.
When addressing email using KeyMail you may select addresses from an address list. KeyMail provides a way of setting up your own personal address details that are used specifically by KeyMail. This information is needed so that KeyMail can add your details to your outgoing email. Then your email correspondents have a return address for their reply.
Remember that if you need help with your available options at any point, press SPACEwithH.
1. From anywhere in KeySoft, press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithE, or go to the Main Menu and press E. From the KeyMail menu, select "WriteanEmail"
2. KeySoft prompts:"Sendto?"Type in the address and press ENTER. Or, if the address you want to use is in your address book, press the first few letters, or the whole name, of the person you want to send the email to and press ENTER. KeySoft looks for entries in the address list with matching first names. If it finds a match, it displays the first name and surname of the matching record. KeySoft continues at Step 3.
If two or more records are found, it reports "Xrecordsselected."where X is the number of records, and queries "Sendtoallselectedaddresses?"If yes, press Y. KeySoft continues at Step 4.
If you don't want to send to all of them, press N. KeySoft confirms "No"and displays the first name and surname of the first matching record. To send to this person, press ENTER. To skip this person and go to the next, press SPACEwithdots56,and so on until KeySoft displays your choice, then press ENTER. KeySoft will confirm your selection with the message: "Addressadded".
If KeySoft fails to find a match, it reports "Cannotfindnameintheaddresslist,"where name is the name you typed. You can edit the name and try again.
A person may have more than one email address, in which case you get to choose which address to use.
Other options available when entering an email address are:
Type in the email address, rather than the persons name.
Look up the person in the address list by pressing BACKSPACEwithL. This takes you to the selection list for the Address List.
3. KeySoft now prompts, "Alsosendto? The same options as are discussed in step 2 are available. To skip adding another address here, press ENTER.
4. A prompt: "Copyto?" is displayed. Type a name as discussed in step 2 or press ENTER to skip.
5. A prompt: "Blindcopyto?" is displayed. Again you can type a name as discussed in step 2 or press ENTER to skip.
You may be wondering what blind copy is? It is a copy of an email that is sent without being marked with all "sendto" and "copyto" addresses. Consequently the recipient does not know that anyone else has been sent a copy.
6. KeySoft prompts: Subject?". Type a word or phrase that encapsulates the topic of your email and press ENTER. You can quickly move to the Subject field from any of the previous field by pressing SPACEwithdots56. This saves you having to"passthrough"all the intervening fields if you do not wish to enter any addresses.
7. KeySoft then queries "Attachafiletothisemail?" If no press ENTER or press N and KeySoft continues at the next step. If yes please refer to section 10.6 Attaching a file to an email.
8. The prompts"Emailmessage,"Topofdocument"and "Blank" are presented. You are placed at the top of a new document in KeyWord where you can type, review and edit your email message. When you are happy with it, pressSPACEwithE to exit KeyWord. 
9. Now the prompt "Readytosendthisemail?" is displayed. If not press N and you will be returned to the "sendto" prompt. You may review the details you previously entered by pressing SPACE. If you are ready to send the email, press Y. KeySoft now prompts "Saveacopy?" PressN to send the email without retaining a copy. Press Y to send the email and to save a copy of the email message. KeySoft queries which folder to use. Select the folder from existing ones or create a new folder in the usual way. KeySoft returns to the KeyMail menu.

There are 2 other options available at the "Readytosendthisemail?"prompt:
To save the email as a Draft, press D. This saves the email in the "Draft" folder, where it can be retrieved at a later time.
To abandon this email without sending, press SPACEwithE.
KeySoft saves your outgoing email in a special folder, called the "Outbox. When you exit the KeyMail menu, KeySoft will prompt if there are any unsent messages in the Outbox, and ask if you want to send them. Pressing N leaves the email in the Outbox to be sent at some other time. If you press Y KeySoft will prompt for an email account and connection configuration, and send the email. KeySoft does not check for newly received email at this time.
If you know that you have email to send and also wish to check for new received email, choose the "Connecttosendandreceiveemail" option on the KeyMail menu.


10.6 Attaching a file to an email.
To attach a file to an email, follow these steps.
1. When KeySoft queries "Attachafiletothisemail?" press Y. KeySoft displays "Foldername?General."
Select a drive, folder, and file in the usual way.
2. You are now asked "Filetoattach?" Press SPACE to access the file list. KeySoft prompts"Listofallfilesin(foldername)folder."Review the list and select the file you want.
3. KeySoft now queries whether you want to attach the file in its current format. For example, KeySoft might query "AttachthisKeyWorddocumentinadifferentfiletype?" If you press Y for Yes, KeySoft queries, "Attachaswhichfiletype?MicrosoftWordfile? Press ENTER to accept this option. To choose a different file type, press SPACEwithdots34. The available file types are: Microsoft Word, ASCII text, Plain Braille file, Rich Text Format (RTF), WordPerfect 5.1, and same file type as the source.
4. KeySoft now prompts, "Attachanotherfile?You can now attach another file by typing Y for yes. KeySoft continues at the beginning of this step.
5. When you have finished attaching files, pressN. Continue with the email writing procedure.
Note: When sending a document as an attachment, it pays to consider the reading equipment available to the recipient. For example, a plain Braille file is no use to someone without a Braille reading device. Remember also that you can attach files off the Network, even those whose file type is incompatible with the BrailleNote PK.


10.7 Read Email.
The "ReadEMail" option on the KeyMail menu is likely to be the most frequently used feature of the BrailleNote PK's email system. Using this option you can download new email, read email stored in the KeyMail filing system, including those sent by yourself, organize your email into folders, and send unwanted email to the trash folder.
KeyMail guides you through processes such as reading or detaching email file attachments and moving or copying email to other folders. It provides options for replying to, and forwarding email. KeyMail allows you to perform these options one at a time, or you can mark individual email for later action.
Next we discuss the philosophy behind KeyMail's "ReadEmail" design, then we take a detailed look at each of the available features.


10.7.1 Email Folders.
KeyMail organizes your messages by sorting them into folders. These folders are located within the KeyMail system, and are not part of the normal folder structure of KeySoft. Initially, KeyMail provides 7 internal folders. These are Inbox, Outbox, Sent, Received, All, Draft and Trash. It is highly recommended that you create at least 2 folders of your own. Your folders could simply be called MailIn and Mailout.
Incoming mail is automatically placed in the Inbox. When you have read an email, KeyMail will prompt you to move the email to another folder. This folder must be one that you have created, or the "Trash" folder, and could for example be your MailIn folder. Items moved from the Inbox also appear in the Received folder. A link to this email also appears in the All folder. It is important to understand that if an email stays in the Inbox, it does not appear in either the Received or All folders.
The Outbox stores your outgoing email messages until they have been sent. At the point where you are about to send your email message, KeyMail asks if you wish to save a copy. If you answer yes, you are prompted for the folder into which to save the email. Again, this must be a folder you have created, and could be your Mailout folder. Email saved in a folder prior to sending will also appear in the Sent folder. A link to this email is also placed in the All folder. It is important to realize that sent emails only appear in the Sent and All folders if you have saved them to one of your folders.
The Drafts folder is used to hold messages that have been started, but are not ready to be sent, and the Trash folder stores any emails deleted from the system.
New mail is automatically placed in the Inbox and is stored in the order it is received. If you choose to read the Inbox, KeyMail asks whether you wish to check for new mail before placing you in the Inbox at the last item received.
KeyMail encourages you to organize your email as you read. Once a message has been read from the Inbox, you are prompted to move the message from the Inbox to another folder. In this way you keep the number of items in your Inbox to a manageable number, and you are able to organize your email under useful categories. Email within a folder can be marked, either on an individual basis, or alternatively all items can be marked. This handy feature allows you to move, copy or delete marked emails as a group without having to repeat the procedure for each email.
Reading or detaching file attachments received with email is easy with KeyMail. Document attachments can be read without detaching, or they may be detached and saved in the normal KeySoft folders so that they can be accessed from KeyWord.
The EmailActionMenu" can be invoked from within any KeyMail folder, or while reading an email, and provides tools for replying to email, forwarding an email to another person or group of people, moving, copying, and deleting email.


10.7.2 Receiving incoming Email.
The following steps are required to read your incoming email.
1. Select KeyMail by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTERwithE.
2. KeySoft displays "KeyMailMenu. Select "ReadEmail" from the KeyMail menu.
3. KeySoft prompts "Connectusingwhichconfiguration?PressENTERfor(name).where (name) is the name of a connection configuration you have set up in the Connectivity menu. To use the offered configuration, just press ENTER.If the correct configuration was not prompted, press SPACE repeatedly to find the required configuration. When you have found it, pressENTER.
4. KeySoft prompts: "Usewhichemailaccount?PressENTERfor(account)" To select the offered email account, press ENTER, otherwise press SPACE repeatedly to find the required account. When you have found it, pressENTER.
Note: If you typically use the same email account and the same connection configuration every time, you can simply cut these two prompts short by pressing ENTER, because the offered option is always the last option used.
5. If using a dialup modem to access your email, read this. If not, skip to the next step. KeySoft displays the message dialing, and you should hear the dialing process followed by whistling noises as your modem connects with the modem at your Service Provider. Before the sequence of messages listed in the next step, you will first hear these:
Dialing;
Connected;
Logging On;
Logon Successful;
Connected;
...and at the end of the sequence below, you will get this message:
Remain connected to the modem? (Press Y or N)
6. KeySoft reports the progress of the mail checking sequence by displaying the appropriate message as each significant stage of the operation is completed. The typical sequence of messages, assuming you have one new message to receive and no outgoing email to send, is:
There is 1 email on Server;
Checking for new messages;
There is 1 new email;
Receiving 1;
There is no email to send.


10.7.3 Reading New EMail.
When new email appears in the Inbox, you will be presented with the first new email to read:
1. To review the fields associated with the Email press SPACE to advance through the fields, or BACKSPACE to move back through the fields.
Each email entry in a folder consists of a number of fields, depending on whether the email has any attachments, and how many there are. The first field presented is the Subject, followed by the sender. Next the date and time the message was received is given, followed by a field for each attachment, if they are present. Finally, a list of whom the email was to be copied to, followed by the date and time the message was sent in the time zone it was sent from.
File attachments are discussed in 10.7.5 Received Attachments.
2. To read the email, press ENTERat any field other than an attachment field.
3. KeySoft prompts TopofDocument, and you are placed at the top of the email message. Use the normal KeyWord commands to read and review the message. When you have finished reading, press SPACEwithE to exit the document.
4. KeySoft prompts "Movethisemailtowhichfolder?"To hear the existing options, press SPACE. These are Trash and My Email. You can create a new folder by typing its name and pressing Yat the prompt. KeySoft will advise that one email has been moved. If you want to leave the email in the Inbox press SPACEwithE. You are then returned to the Inbox, where you can review and read your next email.
The following section provides instructions on how to move around the email within the "Inbox, or any folder. 10.7.6 Folder Management discusses Folder Management, folders you have created, and how you may either rename or delete them from the KeyMail folder system.


10.7.4 Reviewing Email.
When you enter any folder, the focus is on the last item entered in that folder. You can move up and down the items in a folder, and read the key fields associated with each item. If desired, you can also read the email message, and if present, any attachment.
KeyMail provides the following commands to review email within a folder:
To read the selected email, press ENTER.
To exit the email message, press SPACEwithE.
To move to the next field, press SPACE.
To move back to the previous field, press BACKSPACE.
To move to the next email, press SPACEwithdots56.
To move back to the previous email, press SPACEwithdots23.
To move this email to the trash folder, press BACKSPACEwithdots2356.
To mark an email for further action, press SPACEwithM.
To search for a subject, name or contents, press SPACEwithF, then S, or N or C; remember that you can add spaces to a search string by using the binding space command. It is shown as $bsp on the Braille display.
To select the Email Action Menu, press SPACEwithdots26.
To move forward or back a day, press BACKSPACEwithdot6ordot3.
To move forward or back a week, press BACKSPACEwithdot5ordot2.
To move forward or back a month, press BACKSPACEwithdot4ordot1.
To move forward or back a year, press BACKSPACEwithdots56ordots23.
To move to the first email in a folder, press SPACEwithdots123.
To move to the last email in a folder, press SPACEwithdots456.
To determine the number of emails in the folder press SPACEwithI.


10.7.5 Received Attachments.
If the email being reviewed has one or more attachments, these appear as fields in the email entry. Move forward or back through the fields with the SPACEand BACKSPACE keys. KeySoft displays "Attachment1name,"Attachment2name,and so on, depending on the number of attachments.
Press ENTERon the desired Attachment, and KeySoft asks you to confirm whether you wish to detach or read the file. To read the attachment, press R. To detach, press D.
Choosing Read, places you at the top of the attached document. KeySoft's normal review commands may then be used to read the file. Press SPACEwithE to exit the attachment, and you are returned to the folder from which you opened the attachment.
Choosing the Detachoption, causes KeySoft to prompt the attachment file type, and ask whether you wish to detach the file as a KeyWord document.
For example, if the attachment were a Microsoft Word document, KeySoft would prompt: "AttachmentisaMicrosoftWordfile.DetachasaKeyWorddocument?"
To have the file converted to a KeyWord Text Document, press Y. To leave the attachment as a Microsoft Word file, press N. To have the file converted to a KeyWord Braille Document, press B.
KeySoft will then prompt: "Deletethisattachmentfromtheemail?"
Now that you have saved a copy of the attachment, you can save storage space by deleting the attachment from the email. To delete the attachment from the email, press Y, to leave the attachment unchanged, press N.


10.7.6 Folder Management.
Email folders are different to the other kinds on the Flash Disk. They are held in a database, called Email folders.cdb, found in the KeyList folder of the FlashDisk. You cannot access this database any other way than KeyMail, but we hope that by understanding this, it will make the folder management process easier to understand. It also explains why, in order to make more room for emails, the option is called "Free Database Space". For more information on this option, please refer to 10.10.3 Free Database Space.
Organizing your email requires that you give some thought to what folders you need to efficiently categorize your email. New folders can easily be created at any prompt to name a folder, by simply typing in a new folder name. If the folder doesn't already exist you will be prompted to confirm the creation of a new folder.
The following options are available at the FolderName"prompt:
To select the suggested folder press ENTER.
To move forward or back through the list of existing folders, press SPACE, or BACKSPACE.
In the "list of folders, the following commands are available:
To delete a folder, press BACKSPACEwithdots2356;
To rename a folder, press BACKSPACEwithR;
To determine the number of emails in the folder, press SPACEwithF;
To jump to folders starting with a particular letter, press that letter.


10.7.7 Marking Email.
Email within a folder may be marked for future action. The marking can either be applied to all email in the folder, or on an individual basis. Email marking is extremely useful when you are organizing your email, as it allows you to perform common actions on a number of files. For example, if you decide, while reading your new emails, that a number of them can be deleted, these emails may be marked. Before exiting the folder you can move all the marked emails to the Trash folder by pressing BACKSPACEwithdots2356.
To mark individual emails, press SPACEwithM.To mark all files in the folder, press SPACEwithdots26 to open the EmailActionMenu, and choose the mark all files option.
Email marking only applies while you are in the folder. When you exit the folder the marking is turned off.


10.7.8 Email Action Menu.
The Email Action Menu is available when you are reviewing email within a folder, and is entered by pressing SPACEwithdots26.The options available from the menu depend on the folder you are reviewing.
Invoking the Email Action Menu within the Inbox presents the following options:
Reply:	Used to send an answer to the person who sent you the message. Choosing this option presents further choices, and after you have chosen the appropriate action, KeyMail creates a new message with the address and subject line filled in. The additional options available after choosing Reply are:
Replytosenderonly:
If you receive a message that has been sent to a group of people you can send a reply to all members of the group as well as the sender, or just to the sender of the message. Answering Y to this option restricts your reply to the sender.
Moveemailtoanotherfolder:
Choose this option to move the selected email to the folder of your choice. Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Copyemailtoanotherfolder:
Choose this option to copy the selected email to the folder of your choice. This leaves the original in the current folder. Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Deleteemailfromthisfolder:
Choose this option to delete the selected email from the current folder. The deleted email is moved to the Trash folder.
Markallemail:
This is a useful feature if you want to perform an action on all email within the current folder. For example you may wish to copy the contents of the folder to another folder. If you wanted to do this, first "Markallemail, then choose the "Copyemailtoanotherfolderoption" from the Email Action Menu.
Invoking the Email Action Menu within, for example, the Sent folder, causes the Reply" andDeleteemailfromthisfolder"options to be suppressed. A new item, "MovetoTrash" will appear on the menu in addition to the other standard items.
Includecopyoforiginalemail:
Answering Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to include a copy of the original email text in the message area. 
Includeoriginalemailattachments:
Answering Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to include a copy of the original email attachments with the reply. 
Forward:	Used to send an email message you have received to another person or group. Choosing this option presents further choices and input fields to be entered. After you have done the appropriate action, KeyMail creates a new message with the subject line filled in, and the message area will contain the forwarded email. You can then enter your message ahead of the forwarded email. The additional option available after choosing Forward is:
Includetheoriginalemailsattachments:
Answering Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to include a copy of the original email attachments with the forwarded message.
You are then presented with the standard prompts for writing an email, such as: Sendto?AlsoSendto?,Copyto?, and so on. From this point, proceed on as if you were preparing and sending a standard email message.
Moveemailtoanotherfolder:
Choose this option to move the selected email to the folder of your choice. Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Copyemailtoanotherfolder:
Choose this option to copy the selected email to the folder of your choice. This leaves the original in the current folder. Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Deleteemailfromthisfolder:
Choose this option to delete the selected email from the current folder. The deleted email is moved to the Trash folder.
Markallemail:
This is a useful feature if you want to perform an action on all email within the current folder. For example you may wish to copy the contents of the folder to another folder. If you wanted to do this, first "Markallemail, then choose the "Copyemailtoanotherfolderoption" from the Email Action Menu.
Invoking the Email Action Menu within, for example, the Sent folder, causes the Reply" andDeleteemailfromthisfolder"options to be suppressed. A new item, "MovetoTrash" will appear on the menu in addition to the other standard items.


10.7.9 Trash Folder.
The Trash folder is used as a temporary storage folder for emails deleted from any of the KeyMail folders. When you exit KeyMail and return to the Main Menu, KeySoft advises if there are any email in the Trash folder and asks if you want to empty the trash.
Typing N at the prompt to "emptytrash?" returns you to the Main Menu, and leaves the items in the "Trash" folder.
To empty the trash, press Y. To Review the Trash Folder, press R. Pressing Y permanently deletes all email from the Trash folder. Typing R allows you to review the items. The following options are then available:
To review each email by moving through the fields, press SPACE to move to the next field. To move back to the previous field, press BACKSPACE.
To move to the next email, press SPACEwithdots56.To move back to the previous email, press SPACEwithdots23.
To delete the email being reviewed, press BACKSPACEwithdots2356.
To restore emails in the Trash folder to their original folders, press SPACEwithdots26to enter the 'TrashFolderMenu.From this menu you may choose the option to "Restorethisemailtooriginalfolder.The other option in this menu is "EmptytheTrashFolder.


10.8 Connect to Send and Receive Email.
Connect to Send and Receive Email checks for new email, and sends any emails in the "Outbox. You are prompted through the steps required, and feedback is provided as to the status of the connection and mail download. If you have any unsent mail, this is also sent at this time.
1. From the KeyMail menu select "Connecttosendandreceiveemail.
2. KeySoft prompts "Connectusingwhichconfiguration?PressENTERfor(name).where (name) is the name of a connection configuration you have set up in the Connectivity menu. To use the offered configuration, just press ENTER.If the correct configuration was not prompted, press SPACE repeatedly to find the required configuration. When you have found it, pressENTER.
3. KeySoft prompts: "Usewhichemailaccount?PressENTERfor(account)" To select the offered email account, press ENTER, otherwise press SPACE repeatedly to find the required account. When you have found it, pressENTER.
Note: If you typically use the same email account and the same connection configuration every time, you can simply cut these two prompts short by pressing ENTER, because the offered option is always the last option used.
4. If using a dialup modem to access your email, read this. If not, skip to the next step. KeySoft displays the message dialing, and you should hear the dialing process followed by whistling noises as your modem connects with the modem at your Service Provider. Before the sequence of messages listed in the next step, you will first hear these:
Dialing;
Connected;
Logging On;
Logon Successful;
Connected;
...and at the end of the sequence below, you will get this message:
Remain connected to the modem? (Press Y or N)
5. KeySoft reports the progress of the mail checking sequence by displaying the appropriate message as each significant stage of the operation is completed. The typical sequence of messages, assuming you have one new message to receive and no outgoing email to send, is:
There is 1 email on Server;
Checking for new messages;
There is 1 new email;
Receiving 1;
There is no email to send.
For details on the options available while downloading email, during the download options, refer to the following section.
During the sending and receiving process BrailleNote PK beeps once every few seconds indicating it is busy.
When using a dialup connection, at completion of sending your messages, KeySoft displays "Remainconnectedtomodem?" To disconnect and return to the KeyMail Menu, press N. To remain connected and return to the Main Menu, press Y.
If you wish to terminate the email session at any time, press SPACEwithE. If using a dialup connection, KeySoft will prompt, "Abandon email session after current operation or hangup immediately?". To allow KeySoft to compete its current operation before hanging up, press N for no. To hang up immediately, press I for immediately.


10.8.1 Download status.
You can press ENTER at any time during the download process to hear the status of the download. During this process the BrailleNote PK beeps once every few seconds indicating it is busy.
Download status displays the percentage complete, the size of the email currently being downloaded and the percentage complete of the total emails waiting to be downloaded. It is useful to check the status during downloads of long messages, as it provides an indication that the download is progressing satisfactorily.
The maximum size for any email to download, without prompting for User intervention, is initially set to 50K or approximately 50,000 characters. Any email bigger than this setting causes KeySoft to prompt: "Thisemailislargerthanthemaximumsizeallowed.Option?"
The following options are available at this point:
Continue to download:	press ENTER;
Skip this email:	press S;
Delete this email from server:	press D;
Hear information about the email:	press I;
This displays the sender and the subject.
Download only the first 10 lines,
but leave all on the server:	press T;
Download 10 lines and delete
from server:	press A.
Change the size limit:	press L.


10.9 Saving Emails to print or emboss from a PC.
If you wish to print out or emboss an email, you will need to transfer it to a PC via ActiveSync or Networking. For this to be possible, you can first save it as a separate KeyWord document on your BrailleNote PK. Remember that the original is in an inaccessible database, and you cannot locate it in the File Manager.
To save an email as a separate document, follow these steps:
1. From the KeyMail menu, select Read Email. KeySoft prompts: "Readfromwhichfolder?PressENTERfor(foldername)." If folder name is not the one you want, select a folder by pressing SPACE until you find the one you want, and press ENTER.
2. Select the email from the folder. To review the list of emails in the folder by subject, press SPACEwithdots56. When you find the one you want, press ENTER.
3. In the body of the email itself, press SPACEwithS. KeySoft will prompt: "Documenthasnotbeenmodified.Filename?PressENTERforwptemp.txt" Press BACKSPACE.
4. KeySoft will prompt: "Foldername?PressENTERfornone" Press BACKSPACE again to access the list of drives. Select a drive and then a folder, for example Flashdisk then KeyMail.
5. KeySoft prompts: "Filename?" For an alternative file format to kwt, press SPACEwithX at this point and select one from the list. Type a file name and press ENTER.
6. KeySoft prompts: "Openthenewdocumentaftersaving?" Press Yfor Yes or N for No.
The resulting document can then be exported into another format for printing or embossing. If you saved the document as a PC compatible format such as doc, txt or rtf, it is ready to go.


10.10 Setup Options.
Selecting Setup Options from the KeyMail menu presents the KeyMail Setup Menu which provides 4 options;"DirectoryofEmailAccounts,"ReceiveOptions, "FreeDatabaseSpace" and "Changeemailstoragelocation?"
"DirectoryofEmailAccounts" allows you to define account details for email using a particular Service Provider, and provides options for both adding a new account and looking up and modifying an existing account. For details refer to 10.10.1 Directory of Email Accounts.
"ReceiveOptions" allows you to choose whether or not your email is deleted from your mail box at the Service Provider after you have downloaded it to the BrailleNote PK. It also allows you to set the size limit for automatic download. Refer to 10.10.2 Receive Options.
"FreeDatabaseSpace" allows you to reclaim space in the email database that had been taken up by unwanted emails. Refer to 10.10.3 Free Database Space.
"Changingemailstoragelocation" allows you to save emails and their attachments over the size limit to a storage card. Refer to 10.10.4 Changing email storage location.



10.10.1 Directory of Email Accounts.
To select "DirectoryofEMailAccounts, first select KeyMail from the Main Menu, then select Setup Options. You are presented with the KeyMail Setup Menu and "DirectoryofEmailAccounts" is the first item on this menu.
There are two options on this menu; "AddanEmailAccount, and "LookupanEmailAccount.
"AddanEmailAccount" is used to set up the details of a new email account.
"LookupanEmailAccount" allows you to review the details for an existing email account, and modify individual fields as appropriate.
Information relating to a particular email account is stored in a record, and each record has a number of fields that contain the details for that record. KeySoft provides commands for moving between records and reviewing the fields within them. To move to the next record, pressSPACEwithdots56.To move back to the previous record, press SPACEwithdots23.Within a record you can use the SPACE and BACKSPACE keys to move forward or back through the list of fields.
The next two sections provide detailed information on "AddinganEmailAccount" and "LookingupanEmailAccount.


10.10.1.1 Add an Email Account.
To send and receive email you need access to an email Service Provider. When you open an account with a Service Provider you need to obtain details of the service such as the POP server and SMTP addresses, and these details must be loaded into KeyMail before you can use that email account.
Note: Details of the actual internet connection are listed separately. This is because it is not uncommon for users to access the internet in multiple ways, via a different setup to the default one, and this arrangement saves double entering account details or connection configurations.
To add an email account, follow these steps:
1. Select Email from the Main Menu, or press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithE, anywhere.
2. KeySoft displays "KeyMailMenu. Select Set Up Options from the KeyMail menu. KeySoft displays "KeyMailSetUpMenu." Select Directory of Email accounts.
3. KeySoft displays "DirectoryofEmailAccounts. Select Add an account. KeySoft displays "EntryListforDirectoryofEmailaccounts.
4. KeySoft now steps you through a list of details of the service so that you can enter details for each item. KeySoft queries AccountName?Enter the name you wish this account to be called and press ENTER.Typically you would use the name of your provider, for example, "Earthlink.
5. KeySoft prompts "UserName? Enter the user name, for example Murray_Thorn. Typically this is the part of your email address that precedes the @ sign.
6. KeySoft prompts Password?" For greater security, you can leave this blank and you will be prompted for the password each time you connect. Alternatively, type your password. The password is displayed as you enter it. You can review it before pressing ENTER. After pressing ENTER it displays as 5 asterisks. Remember that passwords are often case sensitive, so it is important that you enter the password exactly as you have chosen or been given.
7. You are then prompted for "YourName?"and reminded that computer Braille is required. This is the name that will appear in the From: field when the recipient reads email from you.
8. KeySoft prompts "YourEmailaddress?" Type your full email address for this provider, for example: Murray_Thorn@earthlink.net.
9. KeySoft now queries "POPServer?" Enter the POP server address. For example a POP server address might be "pop.humanware.com. The POP server address defines the path via which you receive mail from your email account provider.
10. Next KeySoft queries "SMTPServer?" Enter the SMTP server address. For example a SMTP server address might be "smtp.humanware.com. The SMTP server address defines the path via which you send mail to your email account provider.
11. Finally, KeySoft displays, "SMTPauthenticationrequired?"Increasingly, email providers expect users to verify their user name and address on the SMTP server before allowing them to proceed. The BrailleNote PK is set up to automatically provide your username and password if you have turned this feature on. The default is No. Press Y to turn on.
12.  You can review your list of entries with the BACKSPACE and SPACE keys. When you are happy with the entries, press SPACEwithEto exit the list and KeySoft prompts "Addthisrecord?"Press Y to save this record in the list of email accounts. KeySoft confirms your choice with the message "Yes,"Recordadded" and returns to the Directory of Email Accounts Menu.
If you have more than one email account that you wish to access on the BrailleNote PK, simply add another record in the same way. Each account will have its own POP and SMTP server addresses, which you can get from the email account provider.


10.10.1.2 Look up an Email Account.
To check or modify details of a particular account, select "LookupanEmailAccount". To do this, follow these steps:
1. Select Email from the Main Menu, or press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithE, anywhere.
2. KeySoft displays "KeyMailMenu. Select Set Up Options from the KeyMail menu. KeySoft displays "KeyMailSetUpMenu." Select Directory of Email accounts.
3. KeySoft displays "DirectoryofEmailAccounts. Select Look Up an account. KeySoft queries "AccounttoLookUp?"
4.  To lookup all account records, press ENTER. To move to the next account record, press SPACEwithdots56, and to move to the previous account record, press SPACEwithdots23. Alternatively type part or the entire email account name, then press ENTER. If your entry matches more than one account name, KeySoft displays the number of matches and places you at the first matching account name. To move to the next match, press SPACEwithdots56, or to move back, SPACEwithdots23. Make a selection by pressing ENTER.
5.  KeySoft steps you through the fields of the nominated account so that you can check the details of each item. If you want to change a field, press BACKSPACEwithdots14 anywhere in the list. This takes you into an entry mode where all fields are presented and you can enter or change any field. Press ENTER when you have finished modifying a field and the next field will be presented. SPACEwithE takes you back to the review option.
To make a duplicate copy of an email account record, you can use the same technique as discussed in 9.5 Duplicating a Record, for duplicating address list records. This provides a quick and convenient way of duplicating a record, and then modifying a field.
The account record list comprises the following items:
Account Name;
User Name;
Password;
Your Name;
Email address;
POP Server;
SMTP Server;
SMTP Authentication Required?
6. When you are happy with the entries, press SPACEwithE to exit the record, and if you changed any details KeySoft prompts "Addthisrecord?" Press Yto save this record in the list of services or Nif you do not want to save your changes.
If you want to delete an account record, select the account you wish to remove, and press BACKSPACEwithdots2356.


10.10.2 Receive Options.
Receive Options allows you to choose whether you want to delete email from the email service after uploading it to your BrailleNote PK, and to put a size limit on incoming emails.
To select Receive Options, first select KeyMail from the Main Menu, and then select Setup Options. You are presented with the KeyMail Setup Menu and Receive Options is the second item on this menu.
Selecting Receive Options places you in the Email Receive Options Setup List, which contains two items.
1. "Deleteemailfromserviceafterreceiving?currentlyYesorNo"
For the usual option of having each email deleted from your service account after it has been successfully received, press Y.To leave it on the service so that, for example, you can also download it to your PC, press N. This feature can be useful if you wish to keep a complete record of your received email on your PC, and are using your BrailleNote PK to download your messages while you are traveling.
2. "Sizelimitforautomaticdownloadofemail?Currently50K"
If an email is larger than this setting, KeySoft will prompt you with a number of options before downloading it. These options were discussed in 10.8.1 Download status. To change the value, enter the maximum size in kilobytes and press ENTER. For example, to set the limit at 60 kilobytes, enter 60, followed by ENTER. The default setting is 50K, or approximately 50,000 characters.
To exit the Receive Options list, press SPACEwithE and you are returned to the KeyMail Setup Menu.


10.10.3 Free Database Space.
Email folders are held in a database. One of the peculiarities of databases is that when you delete items from them, they don't automatically shrink back down again. Because of this, simply deleting your unwanted emails does not free up more space. The "Freedatabasespace" software shrinks the database back to the smallest size capable of storing the emails remaining in the database.
To use this utility, simply go to the email setup menu, and select the item "Freedatabasespace". After running, the utility will report how much space has been freed.


10.10.4 Changing email storage location.
This option allows you to store attachments and emails larger than the size minimum configurable in the Receive Options, on a PC card. The default size is 50k, as described in 10.10.2 Receive Options. Please note that this option only works with cards inserted into the PC Card slot  either a PC Card or a CompactFlash card in a PC Card adapter. 
To set this option up, place the PC card you wish to use in the card slot. From the Setup Options menu, press C for Change. KeyMail prompts: "StoreEmailonstoragecard?CurrentlyY/N". To activate, press Y, to save to FlashDisk press N, or to exit without saving, press SPACEwithE. If the card is not present when you do this, nothing will be changed to the current storage location.
When an email is received over the size limit, KeyMail will let you know. At this point if you press ENTER, the email will be saved to the PC card. If the card is not present when you do this, KeySoft will prompt you to insert it. If you do not insert the card within 3 minutes, it will revert to the standard Flash Disk storage location. There will be some progress beeps during the download of the email, as usual. 
When at a later stage you wish to read any emails that have been saved on the PC Card, the card needs to be present in the card slot for this to be possible. If not, the process will fail with an error message.


11 Web Browser.
KeyWeb has all the same basic features as Internet Explorer. You can browse the web, use a search engine, download files or read a page online and work through forms. KeyWeb can also be used to open and read locally stored html files, such as a saved web page.
This chapter is designed to demonstrate the features and commands of KeyWeb, and the ways it makes the Internet accessible for users of the BrailleNote family of products. To learn more about how the Internet works, we suggest that you investigate the various tutorials available that are designed to aid persons who are blind or visually impaired in learning to use the Internet and all its accompanying features.


11.1 Connecting to the World Wide Web.
As with KeyMail, in order to use KeyWeb, you will need to set up at least one connection configuration. The connection configuration makes it possible to connect to an Internet service provider and therefore to the world wide web. There are many different setups you can use to do this, and the ones that you choose will depend on what technology you have available and where you want to be when you browse the web.
Here are some examples of available connection configurations:
Use a Bluetooth connection to a Bluetooth enabled mobile phone to access your ISP and surf the web while out and about.
Use a card modem in your BrailleNote PK and plug into a dialup connection.
ActiveSync your BrailleNote PK to a PC via USB specifying ethernet connection type, and when your PC is online, your BrailleNote PK can be too.

Using a WiFi card in your BrailleNote PK, access any available WiFi network, at home, school, work, or even out shopping.


11.2 Changing to another Part of KeySoft.
As is standard in KeySoft, you can jump in and out of KeyWeb to go to other applications such as KeyMail, KeyWord etc. The hot key combination for changing to KeyWeb is BACKSPACEwithENTERwithI. For more information on the Task list, see 1.18 Switching Between Tasks.
If you are using a phone line connection and jump to another task, KeyWeb will ask if you wish to stay connected. If you jump into KeyMail while still connected, you can then use the same connection to check your email. Likewise if you wish to return to KeyWeb from KeyMail, you can continue to use the same connection.
If you jump to another task, perhaps to paste new contact information into the Address list, you will also stay connected, and you can return to KeyWeb when you have finished, using BACKSPACEwithENTERwithI. You will be returned to the same page you left.
When using a USB, wireless, network or Bluetooth connection, you will automatically stay connected until you choose to disconnect.


11.2.1 Disconnecting from outside KeyWeb.
While using a dialup connection, if you have left KeyWeb while still connected to the Internet, and you decide that you dont wish to return to either KeyWeb or KeyMail, you can disconnect from right where you are. Simply press SPACEwithO to access the Options Menu, select Connectivity Menu, and from this menu, select Disconnect. This option only displays in the Connectivity Menu when you are connected to the Internet, and using a dialup connection.


11.3 Logging on.
A URL is the location address of a web page; for example, www.humanware.com, or Flash Disk\My Favorites\pulse.
The first prompt displayed when you select KeyWeb from the Main Menu is a request for a URL. At this point you have several options. You can either:
Select the home page, which is the URL offered;
Type a URL;
Select a URL from your favorites (For more information refer to 11.8.2 Selecting a Favorite);
Select a URL from the history list (For more information refer to 11.9.1 History Records);
Select an HTML file from a folder (For more information refer to 11.7 Application Management);
Having made a selection, press ENTER. KeySoft prompts for a connection configuration. If you only have one set up, this one will be offered. If you have several configurations, it will offer the last one used. To change service provider, press SPACE at the prompt and select another one in the usual way.
During the page loading process, you may hear a series of beeps unless you have turned them off; these are progress tones, designed to let you know something is happening while the page is loading. You can also find out what percentage of the page has loaded by pressing SPACEwithH. When the page has completed loading, KeyWeb will display the words in the top line of the page.


11.3.1 Progress tones.
Progress tones are there to let you know a page is loading or a download is progressing normally. You can control their volume or turn them off altogether. To do this, go to the Options Menu, Review Voice by pressing SPACEwithOthenR. Press SPACE repeatedly to reach the Progress Tone Volume option. Type a number between 0 and 6. Zero disables the tone, 6 is loudest. To leave the setting unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is 4.


11.4 Navigation.
11.4.1 Moving around a Page.
Apart from the "moveby" commands outlined below, KeyWeb uses the same commands as the Book Reader for moving through a page. These commands are in the Command Summary and are also covered in 4.5 Additional Reading Commands.
There are different ways you can review or move across a web page:
You can read it, using the standard KeySoft Read commands.
You can skip across it from hyperlink to hyperlink, referred to in KeyWeb as simply links;
You can move through it reviewing another page element such as input controls, headings or frames.
Or you can combine these in any way that works for you. In this chapter, we refer to links, frames, headings and input controls collectively as pageelements.


11.4.1.1 Moving with keys.
You can use the NEXT and PREVIOUS navigation keys to move around all the input controls and links on the page in whatever order they appear. So with each press you may move from, for example, link to button to text field to link, to link etc. This is different to the other page navigations as they only move by one specified element type, whereas this one includes all types of input controls and links. If you have surfed the Web on a PC before, this is the equivalent of using Tab and Shift Tab.


11.4.1.2 Moving by text.
This function allows you to move from section to section of nonlinked text. You can set a minimum number of characters for KeyWeb to search for.
For example, if the minimum size is 50, KeyWeb will find the next section of text that is 50 or more characters long, and skip to the beginning of it ready for you to read. The larger the minimum number, the larger the section KeyWeb will skip to.
This is useful when reviewing news or magazine sites, research sites, or anywhere where you just want to get to the information.
The key commands are:
Move to next section of text: ENTERwithdots56,
Move to previous section of text: ENTERwithdots23.
Note: These commands are similar to move by paragraph but use ENTER instead of SPACE.
To set the minimum size of the section of text, there is an option in the display settings.To get to this setting, press ENTERwithM then D for Display Settings, then select "Textsectionsize?"Enter the number and press ENTER. The factory setting is 50.


11.4.2 Links.
Links will take you to another place, either in the same page or website, or somewhere else entirely. They also can lead to downloads, documents, etc. Moving from link to link is a very useful way to review or use many types of sites. Great for reviewing search results on a search engine, a menu page or frame, the home page of a large site, etc.
Links appear on the Braille display like this: dots 246 name of link dots 135.

11.4.2.1 Moving by Link.
Moving by Link is always available to you in KeyWeb; so you can use it in conjunction with moving by another type of page element.
To move from link to link, use BACKSPACE to move backwards and SPACE to move forwards. Alternatively, press the initial letter of the link to move directly to it, or to an alphabetized list that you can SPACE through quickly to get to it. If you have speech on, you will notice that links are identified by a small beep just before the name of the link.


11.4.2.2 Selecting a Link.
You can follow the link you are on by pressing ENTER, or the touch cursor anywhere above the link on the Braille display.
It is also possible to place the cursor on a character within a link as opposed to following it, perhaps to copy and paste the link into a document or email. When you are on the link, press and hold down the PREVIOUS navigation key, then press and release the touch cursor.


11.4.3 Other Page Elements.
The other three types of page elements you can use to move around the page are Input control, Heading or Frame. You can toggle through these types of page elements using the commands listed below. The default setting is input control. Because these page elements share a separate set of movement commands to links, you can use whichever one you have selected in conjunction with links. You can select links in the same manner as well; the command is included in the list below.
What follows is a brief description of each page element and how it is used.
Input control: Input controls are fields where you can type in text, or some other form of entry is required. They include text form fields, check boxes, radio buttons, buttons, and selection lists. Almost all forms are made up of a combination of these types of fields. Handling forms is discussed in 11.6.1 Handling Forms.
Heading: Headings usually cover the topics on a page and are a good way of finding out what the page is about.
Frame: Many web pages are divided into frames. They are basically windows within the page, usually dividing the page into subjects or groups of links etc. This is a high level search and a good way of skipping around a page quickly to get a sense of what it is about.


11.4.4 Commands for Moving by Element.
These are the commands used to move around the page by element:
Move to next element: SPACEwithdots46;
Move to previous element: SPACEwithdots13;
Current element: SPACEwithdots1346;
Change move type: SPACEwithT;
Link: L;
Input Control: I;
Heading: H;
Frame: F.
Once you are on an element, you can read from that point. For example, having moved by frame to Frame 2, you can then press SPACEwithG for a speech readout, or N1andN4,thetwotopnavigationbuttons. to scroll your Braille display to read the contents of that frame. If ever in doubt, press SPACEwithH.


11.5 Moving from Page to Page or Site to Site.
For pages and sites previously visited in the same session, you can use the forward and back commands ENTERwithF and ENTERwithB to move between them.
If you wish to move on to a new site at any point, simply press ENTERwithO. KeyWeb will prompt: Address?PressENTERfor(currentURL)
At this point you have five options (these are the same as when first logging on):
1. To select the current URL, press ENTER.
2. Type in a new URL or favorite name and press ENTER.
3. Go to list of favorites by pressing SPACE.
4. Go to a saved web page by either typing the \pathname with a back slash in front of it, or pressing SPACE and then SPACEwithT to go into directory mode, and locate it that way. Even if you make a selection that is not online, your Internet connection will stay connected.
5. Go to your history by pressing ENTERwithdots236. For more information on History, refer to 11.9 History.


11.6 Page Management.
11.6.1 Handling Forms.
To fill out forms you need to be in "movebyinputcontrol" mode, as forms are made up of input controls such as form fields, combo or list boxes, check boxes, buttons, and radio buttons.
When on an input control, it is not always clear what needs to be input. There are two ways to deal with this:
1. Set the Automaticallyreadinputcontrolprompts to on. This mode will display most of the prompts, or labels, that explain the purpose of the input control. NOTE: Some prompts may be coded in such a way that they cannot be read at all.
2. The alternative way is for when you are working with the Automatically read inputcontrolprompts mode set to "off." Simply press SPACEwithR to read the prompt.


11.6.1.1 Filling in text fields.
To fill in a text field, type the information in computer Braille, e.g. user name, search criteria etc. Any existing text can be deleted by pressing BACKSPACEwithdots14. You can edit or delete what you have written in the usual way. Once you are happy with your input, press ENTER, and your text will be submitted. Note that you have to press ENTER before your input will be accepted. If you change your mind and dont wish to submit the contents of the field after all, you can either delete it all by pressing BACKSPACEwithdots14, or if there is a reset button, move to it using SPACEwithdots46 and press ENTER there. If the form has more than one text field, you may need to move between them using SPACEwithdots46 instead.


11.6.1.2 Selecting from selection lists.
In KeyWeb, selection list is the term used for combo boxes and list boxes. These are the input fields that allow you to make a selection from a list, and sometimes to type in your own entry if none of the list items is appropriate.
Once you are in the selection list field, you can select an item by pressing SPACE and BACKSPACE to go down and up the list. Alternatively, in some selection lists you can type the initial letter and press it repeatedly until you find your preferred selection. This is useful in lists of countries or states, for example, where you know the item you are looking for.
Having selected an item, simply use SPACEwithdots13 or SPACEwithdots46 to move on, and your selection will be entered.


11.6.1.3 Selecting Check boxes and buttons.
To click on a button, check a box or select a radio button, press ENTER. KeyWeb will display "click" or "check" or "pressed"respectively. You can also use the touch cursor, by pressing the touch cursor above the cell showing the check/uncheck symbol for the box or button as explained in the next section.


11.6.1.4 Input controls on Braille Display.
The symbols that appear on the Braille display for each input control element are:
Text Start: 	(&)dots12346;
Text End: 	(y)dots13456;
Radio button, checked: 	dots2456,dots123456,dots1235;
Radio button unchecked: 	dots2456,dots36,dots1235;
Check box, checked: 	dots123,dots123456,dots123;
Check box, unchecked: 	dots123,dots36,dots123;
Button: 	dollarsignbtdots1246,dots12,dots2345;
Selection list: 	dollarsignlsdots1246,dots123,dots234;
Multiselection field (where you can select more than one item):
dollarsignls1246,123,234+Checkbox.


11.7 Application Management.
Most application management happens from the Internet Options menu. This is accessible when you are in KeyWeb, either on a web page or a locally stored document, by pressing ENTERwithM. These are the available options:
* Open HTML file;
* Set current page as home page;
* Go to home page.
* Internet file management:
* Clear cookies;
* Delete temporary files;
* Erase browser history.
* Display settings;
* Hide images without descriptions;
* Automatically read input control prompts;
* Default language for web pages;
Here is each of these options in more detail:


11.7.1 Open HTML files.
For opening a locally stored document, such as a saved web page.


11.7.2 Set Current Page to Home Page.
Your home page is the one that is always presented at the URL prompt. When you first enter KeyWeb, the home page is set to www.humanware.com\keyweb. To change this to a home page of your choice, go to that page in the usual manner, and then select this option off the menu.


11.7.3 Go to home page.
No matter where you are on the internet, when you select this option you will go straight to your home page.


11.7.4 Internet File Management.
The three items on this submenu all involve managing cached files i.e. files that save themselves to your BrailleNote PK:


11.7.4.1 Clear Cookies.
Cookies are small files that are uploaded to your computer or BrailleNote PK by web pages. They serve a wide range of functions, but they can build up and from time to time, it pays to delete them all. Select this option to do so.


11.7.4.2 Delete temporary files.
Same as with cookies, web pages upload various files to your BrailleNote PK and they build up over time. Select this option to delete them all.


11.7.4.3 Erase browser history.
This clears all of the URL's and files that are listed in KeyWeb's history. Very useful for teachers and students or other people who share equipment, or simply if you end up with a lot of URL's you will never look at again.


11.7.5 Display Settings.
These settings determine the extra information that will display as you read a web page.


11.7.5.1 Hide images without descriptions Y/N
Visual images may have a label called an alt tag, which describes in words what the image portrays e.g. Child playing with Dog, back view of BrailleNote PK, etc. Images without these alt tags are not a lot of use and in this option you can choose Y to ignore them altogether. The default setting is N. The exception is when an image is used as a link, in which case it will be treated as a link and not an image, regardless of how this setting is set.


11.7.5.2 Automatically read input control prompts Y/N
When this is set to Y for yes, KeyWeb displays the label associated with each of the input controls as it reads them, such as text boxes, radio buttons, check boxes, tables, etc. To turn this feature off, press N.


11.7.5.3 Default language for web pages.
If a page is written in a foreign language such as French or German, it may have a hidden HTML code that indicates this. If this is the case, and you have that language on your BrailleNote PK, KeyWeb will automatically read the page in that language. If the page does not have a code marker, you can listen to it and read it using the English setting, or change it to another language in the usual way, again assuming you have that language on your BrailleNote PK.


11.7.5.4 Text Section Size.
This was described in 11.4.1.2 Moving by text. Type a minimum number of characters for the "Move by Text Size" function. Factory setting is 50.

11.8 Favorites.
You can type in the name of a favorite and, assuming that the favorite exists, that page will be loaded.
Pressing SPACE when at the address prompt takes you to a folder / file prompt layer where you can choose an existing favorite to load.


11.8.1 Adding a Favorite.
To add a favorite to your favorites folder, you have to be on the page, online. Go to the Favorites Menu by pressing ENTERwithdots235, and press SPACEuntil you get toAddtoFavorites? Press ENTER.
KeyWeb will ask you to confirm the name and offer the URL. At this point you can rename your favorite to something shorter, such aspulsefor www.pulsedata.com or yahoo for www.mail.yahoo.com. If you wish to do this, type in the name of your choice before pressing ENTER. When you next review your Favorites list, the page will display as the name you chose.


11.8.2 Selecting a Favorite.
The simple way to do this is to press the SPACE bar at the URL prompt. This will take you to the List of Favorites in your Favorites folder. You can either review them by pressing SPACE repeatedly and pressing ENTER to select one, or simply type the initial letter of the name and press ENTER when it is displayed.


11.8.3 Organizing Favorites.
You can organize your Favorites in exactly the same way as you would normally organize files and subdirectories in KeySoft, as discussed in Chapter 12. Move, change, rename or delete favorites just as you would any other files. The difference is that instead of KeyWord file format files being the default file type, it is HTML. This means that while in My Favorites, KeyWeb will only display URL's unless you use the SPACEwithX command, in which case you can then also choose between txt and html file types.


11.9 History.
History is a record of all the web addresses or local file paths (referred to as URLs) you have accessed using the browser, with an upper limit of 300.
To access the history, press ENTERwithdots236.
To go to the history list, press SPACEwithdots56.
To navigate to a page listed in the history, select it from the history list using SPACE and BACKSPACE, then press ENTER. Alternatively, use the SPACEwithF find command to locate the history item in the list then press ENTER.


11.9.1 History Records.
Each history record consists of the following information:
Date when last visited  self explanatory;
URL  the whole address path for the page e.g. http://www.pulsedata.com/index.cfm/8,html;
Title  the title given to a particular page;
Domain  the base web address for a page, e.g. www.pulsedata.com.


11.9.2 Sorting history records.
You can change the way in which a history is presented by sorting by day or by domain.
A search by day will sort all the fields in a record by date and time order, then by domain. A search by domain will sort all fields by domain, then date and time.
To toggle the sort mode press SPACEwithS. The factory setting is by day, and if you change it, the system will always default to the setting you last made, whichever it is.


11.9.3 Reviewing history.
Having established a sorting order for the history records, you may then want to review them. You can do this in two ways  by record or by field. Reviewing by record will take you from record to record in the order defined by the sort. Use SPACEwithdots56 to review forwards and SPACEwithdots23 to review back.
Review fields within a record by using SPACE for forwards and BACKSPACE for back.
Other commands for reviewing history records are:
Next History record:	SPACEwithdots56.
Previous History record: 	SPACEwithdots23.
Forward one Day:	BACKSPACEwithdot6.
Back one Day:	BACKSPACEwithdot3.
Forward one week:	BACKSPACEwithdot5.
Back one week:	BACKSPACEwithdot2.
Previous Domain name:	BACKSPACEwithdot4.
Next Domain name:	BACKSPACEwithdot1.
Newest History record:	SPACEwithdots123.
Oldest History record:	SPACEwithdots456.
Sort by domain/day:	SPACEwithS.
Note: history is presented alphabetically for day or domain.


11.9.4 Pop Up Dialog Boxes.
KeyWeb is sitting on Internet Explorer, and from time to time, Internet Explorer will open a dialog box. You will know this because KeyWeb will display its title and the fact that it is a dialog box. Wherever possible, the same navigation keystrokes are used as for the rest of KeyWeb. The difference is that at every text input field, you need to press ENTER to submit your input. You then move to the next one using SPACE.
The final entry will almost always be a button control with a label such as YES,NO, OK,orCANCEL. Move to the appropriate button and press ENTER to click on it. Where you end up from there will depend on what the dialog box was for.


11.10 Saving and Refreshing Web Pages.
Downloading files to the BrailleNote PK is easy.
You can use this feature to download:
Software upgrades directly onto your BrailleNote PK;
Books;
Bank Statements;
MP3 files;
and other files that you may wish to use on your BrailleNote PK, assuming they are compatible. You can also download files for moving to a PC later. However, please heed the following warning before making any downloads.
WARNING: Only Humanware's proprietary software can run on the BrailleNote PK. KeyWeb does not limit the type of file you can download, but we strongly advise you not to try and run executables on your BrailleNote PK, including those designed to run on Windows CE. Doing this could cause irreparable damage to your BrailleNote PK and to KeySoft, and you do so at your own risk.


11.11 How to Download a file.
Follow these steps to download a file off an internet site.
1. When you are on the download link or button, press ENTER.KeySoft will prompt: "Downloadfileintowhichfolder?"
2. Select a folder in the usual way, either on the BrailleNote PK itself or on an external drive or storage card.
3. KeySoft will prompt: "Downloadfilename?PressENTERfor(filename)" where the file name is the current name of the file to download. Press ENTER, or to change the name of the file at this point, type a new name (without a file extension, which is automatically added) and press ENTER.
When the download is complete, you will be returned to a blank page. You can then use the go back or forward commands to return to the web page you were previously in, or press ENTERwithO to choose another page.
Note: Please remember that the entire available memory of the FlashDisk is 14MB at most. If you attempt to download a file that is too big for the BrailleNote PK to receive, you can abort the download by pressing SPACEwithE during the download process. To find out the status of a download at any time, press SPACEwithH. And remember, you can download large files to a storage card instead of the Flash Disk.
General Caution: While copying or moving any files onto your FlashDisk from any location, never perform a reset. This can cause your Flashdisk to disappear and can cause corruption.


11.12 Tables.
Tables are a common occurrence on web pages, and are used for everything from setting out items for sale to laying out records in online banking.
KeyWeb has a Table Mode just for navigating tables.
To get into Table mode, you need to be in a table. On the display, a table is marked as:
"dollarsigntb"ordots1246,dots2345,dots12.
Press SPACEwithM to get into table mode. While in table mode, you can find out what cell you are in. Press SPACEwithwhsign(dots156) and KeyWeb will display your row and column coordinates.
The cursor moves through a table by row or by column. On the display there will be one space between each column, and two spaces between each row.
While in Table mode the following navigation commands apply.
Move forward one cell along a row: SPACEwithdot4.
To hear the current cell in a row: SPACEwithdots2356.
Move back one cell along a row: SPACEwithdot1.
Move down one cell in a column: SPACEwithdots56.
To hear the current cell in a column: SPACEwithdots14.
Move down one cell in a column: SPACEwithdots23.



12 Connectivity
This chapter looks at all the different ways the BrailleNote PK can connect to other forms of technology. From cables to cableless, there is bound to be a connection configuration that will suit your requirements.
These connection configurations allow you to access:
The World Wide Web;
Email;
Local Area Network;
A Qwerty style computer keyboard;
Your PC via ActiveSync.
Bluetooth makes it possible to access the web and your email anywhere, any time, by pairing with a bluetooth cellphone. You can also pair with a bluetooth qwerty keyboard.
With wireless networking you can also access the web and your email anywhere where there is an available wireless network. Use it to view the network on your BrailleNote PK and even manage network files
LAN networking makes the same things possible, using a cable to connect to the network.
USB client allows you to connect to your PC with ActiveSync and access your email or the web via your PC's internet connection, be it dial up or networked.
Serial connection allows you to dialup the internet via a modem, or view your BrailleNote PK on your PC using ActiveSync.
This chapter assumes that you have a basic understanding of networking and already have a network available. Not all the options discussed require a network however, so don't be put off if this is not something you wish to get into!
The heart of setting up connectivity on your BrailleNote PK is the Connectivity Menu. This is available from the Options Menu.






12.1 Understanding Connectivity Concepts.
The world of connectivity is a world of communication between, or among, devices of all kinds. Just as in the world of human beings, where there are those who speak our language and those who don't, not all devices can talk to all other devices, they have to share a method of communication. And again, just as sometimes people don't like what each other are saying, or don't agree, or misunderstand; in the world of connectivity, even when devices share the same methods of connecting, they don't always manage to connect the first time.
Why is this? Firstly, because electronic and computerized devices are "dumb". They only know what they know, and if a device offers another device a setting even slightly different to what it is expecting, it will ignore it. And while there are industry standards, with so many different companies manufacturing devices that are trying to talk to each other, there is bound to be the odd miscommunication, where theory collides with practice. Then there is the business of which device initiates the connection.
With cableless connectivity options such as wireless networking, this gets even more interesting again. When you use cables, you actually plug the cable in between two devices, so there is no ambiguity as to which devices are supposed to be communicating. However, cableless devices have to broadcast their availability to all other devices within range, and then there is a stage of identifying which device goes with which, not to mention security levels etc., before anything else can happen.
In the face of all these possibilities, initiating a connection can take some patience, some tweaking, but most of all, following the instructions.
The BrailleNote PK has been designed to make this as straightforward as possible. There is just one important rule to remember  that the BrailleNote PK initiates all connections. A special case among tens of millions of PC's, laptops and PDA's, it knows best what it needs from other devices, and is set up to initiate connections.

12.2 Connection Configurations.
A connection configuration is a record of the settings required in order to be able to use a particular type of connectivity, such as wireless networking or a phoneline, with a particular device. Because each type of connectivity is different, their configuration needs to be different.
You may also find that you will need to set up different configurations for the same kind of connectivity, such as a network configuration for work, and one for home.
The same connection configuration can be available for a range of uses, such as email, browsing the web, and local network access.
In this section we discuss the devices available to connect your BrailleNote PK with other devices.


12.3 The Connectivity Menu.
The connectivity menu is the heart of the connectivity options available on the BrailleNote PK.
The Connectivity Menu is off the Options Menu. It has the following items:
Create a New Dialup or LAN connection: Select this option to set up a new dial up, or LAN connection i.e. using an ethernet card. Refer to 12.5.1 Creating a New Dialup or LAN connection.
Disconnect Dialup connection: Only displays when the BrailleNote PK is online using a dialup connection. Refer to 12.5.4 Disconnect Dialup connection.
Active Connection Details (Name): This option gives you information on any connection that is currently active. Refer to 12.6 Active Connection Details.
BlueTooth: Select this option to turn Bluetooth on or off. Refer to 12.11 Bluetooth.
Wireless Ethernet: Select this option to turn WiFi on or off. Refer to 12.4 Using a Wireless Connection.
Review an existing connection configuration: This option allows you to make changes to a configuration. Refer to 12.7 Review an existing connection configuration.
Setup Options: When you select this option, KeySoft prompts: Computer name? Currently BrailleNote PK. You can change the name of the BrailleNote PK to something unique. This is the name that a network will use to identify your BrailleNote PK as a networked device. This is particularly important if any other network users are using a BrailleNote PK.


12.4 Using a Wireless Connection.
Wireless networking is just a different form of computer networking that doesn't require cables. It is also sometimes referred to as WiFi or 802.11, but they are all the same thing.
To use the BrailleNote PK with a wireless network, you will need a wireless network card. This is a card that fits into the PCMCIA card slot on the BrailleNote PK. Humanware supports the Cisco Aironet 340/350 wireless card and cannot guarantee that any other card will work with the BrailleNote PK.
You will also need access to a wireless network. This may be in your home, workplace or school, or in an airport, caf or library. There are two ways in which to access a wireless network  through setting up a connection configuration, and through scanning for and picking up a wireless network. Which method you use will depend on the circumstances.
Although there has been much talk over the past few years about wireless security, or lack of it, most workplaces or institutions will have proper security measures in place on their wireless networks. These comprise a range of settings, passwords and codes that are only made available to legitimate users. In the case of public wireless networks such as in libraries and airports, the network itself will provide most of the settings automatically because they are set up to let you log in, not to prevent you. However, before trying to connect your BrailleNote PK to any nonpublic wireless network, be aware that you will need to have some advance information about the wireless network, usually via the network administrator.
To find out how to:
Create a new wireless networking configuration, refer to 12.4.1 Creating a new Wireless Configuration.
Scan for a new wireless network and logging on, refer to 12.4.3 Scanning for a Wireless Network.
Connect to wireless network after it is set up, refer to 12.4.4 Reconnecting to a Wireless Network.
Organize the wireless network configurations already set up, refer to 12.4.2 Wireless Configuration Options.


12.4.1 Creating a new Wireless Configuration.
When you have a wireless connection available to you on a regular basis, you should set up a dedicated configuration for it. It may be, for example, on your college campus or in your workplace. All wireless networks have an SSID (Service Set Identifier). The SSID is just the name given to the network. For added security, networks not intended for access by the general public may hide their SSID, so it can not be displayed when you scan for visible networks. In this case, the network administrator needs to tell you what the SSID for the network is, and any other applicable settings such a WEP.
To create a connection configuration for a wireless connection, go to the Wireless Network option of the connectivity Menu. Ensure the wireless network card is inserted into the BrailleNote PK's card slot, as without it this procedure is not possible:
1. Insert your Cisco Aironet 340/350 series wireless card into the PC card slot on the side of the BrailleNote.
2. Press the reset button. This allows the BrailleNote to recognize the wireless card.
3. From the Options menu, select Connectivity by pressing C, then Wireless Ethernet, by pressing W.
4. KeySoft prompts, "Wirelesson?CurrentlyNo." Press Y for Yes.
5. You are at the Wireless Ethernet Menu. Select "ConfigureaNewWirelessConnection"and press ENTER. KeySoft presents you with the Entry List for Connection configuration. You can move down the list by pressing SPACE.
6. The first item is Name. Enter any name you like, something that is meaningful to you, and press ENTER.
7. KeySoft prompts, "SSID?" This is the name of the network as determined by the network administrator. Type in the SSID and press ENTER.
8. Next are "UseInfrastructureMode?"and "UseSharedAuthentication?", which both require a Y or Nvalue.The values you need to assign will be given to you by the network administrator.
9. Next is "UseWEP?" If you answer Y,the next item you see on the list is a WEPKey entry field. Type in the WEPkey and press ENTER.
10. Next is 802.1x Authentication. This is also a code. Type it in and press ENTER.
11. The rest of the fields are standard network settings and again, the values will come from the network administrator. The fields are: "ObtainanIPAddressAutomatically?","IPAddress","SubnetMask,DefaultGateway,PrimaryDNS,SecondaryDNS,PrimaryWINS,and SecondaryWINS. Any fields that don't need changing, just pass over them by pressing SPACE.
12. KeySoft prompts, Useaproxyserverforthisconnection? If Nfor No, you will go to the end of the list. If Yfor Yes, you will need to fill in two more fields  "proxyservername" and "proxyserverport."
13. To save and close the record, press SPACEwithE. KeySoft prompts, "AddthisRecord?" Press Y for Yes or Nfor No.
This configuration is now available for use as described in 12.4.4 Reconnecting to a Wireless Network.
To make changes to, or to delete a wireless configuration, use the Reviewanexistingconnectionconfiguration function as described in 12.7 Review an existing connection configuration.


12.4.2 Wireless Configuration Options.
The Wireless configuration options allow you to set some parameters on how wireless operates on the BrailleNote PK. To review the list items, press SPACEorADVANCE to go down the list, or BACK or BACKSPACE to go up.
To get to the Wireless Ethernet Options List, select it from the Wireless Ethernet Menu.
The three options and their purposes are:
1. Notifywhennewnetworksareavailable(currentlyyes/no) When this option is set to yes, a message displays when the device is not yet connected to a wireless network and a network is sensed by the wireless card.
2. AutomaticallyConnecttoNonpreferredNetworks(currentlyyes/no). This option allows the wireless card to try to establish a connection to a network that is not part of the existing configurations database.
3. TypesofNetworkstoAccess(CurrentlyAccessPointsonly). When trying to connect, this option filters out the wireless devices using a different Infrastructure. The default is Access points only with H as its hotkey. This setting detects only network access points. For AdHoc only, press H. This filters out access points and detects only peer to peer devices. For all types of network, press A, this allows any type of network to be accessed.


12.4.3 Scanning for a Wireless Network.
An alternative way to log into a wireless network is to scan for it. Wireless networks that have the public display of their SSID disabled will be invisible to a scan, so scanning is not an appropriate way to try to log into those networks. However wireless networks with low, or no security, such as are found in libraries, airports and cafs etc., are set up through scanning. This is because when selected the first time, they then typically transfer most of the settings required in a connection configuration automatically to your BrailleNote PK. This connection configuration is then available to use to log on automatically in the future.
1. To scan for a new wireless network, from the Wireless Ethernet menu, select ScanforWirelessNetworks and press ENTER.
2. KeySoft prompts, "Listofavailableconnections." The connections listed will depend on how many wireless networks are displaying themselves in your vicinity. To review the list, press SPACE. Each network will announce its name, for example:
1.SSID:Vodaphone
2.SSID:Tsunami
3.SSID:AirAmerica
3. Make a selection by pressing ENTER.
4. KeySoft prompts, "EntryListforConnectionConfigurations." Press SPACE. The first field is the connection configuration name. Give it a name and press ENTER. In most cases, the rest of the fields will be correctly configured by the connection itself, however this will vary depending on how the wireless network is set up. In some cases, the venue will provide you with a code to enter, in others the whole configuration is provided. Once completed, exit the configuration using SPACEwithE and press Ywhen asked if you wish to save it.
5. KeySoft displays the name of the network, e.g. "1.SSID:Vodaphone,Active" You are now on the Wireless network.
The next time you scan for this network, it will show up with its configuration listed just before its name. For example, if the connection configuration is called VP, you would hear or read, "VPSSID:Vodaphone.Active."Just press ENTER on this option and you will be connected.


12.4.4 Reconnecting to a Wireless Network.
This option makes it really easy to connect to a wireless network that you use repeatedly. If you only use one wireless network, this option automatically reconnects to it. If you use more than one, a list of configurations is formed. As the BrailleNote PK can only pick up a wireless network that is in the vicinity, this option will always pick up the one that you want. In the unusual situation that you have two wireless networks with configurations in the same vicinity or two configurations for the same wireless network, so that there is a chance it may pick up the wrong one, you can change the order of the list so that the preferred configuration will get picked up first.
To reconnect to a wireless network; from the Connectivity Menu, select ReconnectusingexistingConfigurations and press ENTER. KeySoft will announce, "PleaseWait,connectingto(config)" there will be progress beeps as it locates the network, then "PleaseWait,connectedto(config)."You are now connected to the wireless network.
Of course in order to reconnect, you will need to have your wireless card inserted. If you have performed a reset since the last time it was inserted, insert the card and press reset. This allows the BrailleNote PK to recognize the presence of the wireless card.


12.4.4.1 Changing preferred order.
Wireless network connection configurations will order themselves with the first created at the top. As discussed in the previous section, if this doesn't work for you, you can change the order of the list.
To change the order of the list, follow these steps:
1. From the Wireless Ethernet Menu, select Order Connection Preferences.
2. KeySoft prompts: "Listofconfigurationsinpreferredorder." To review the list, press SPACEorADVANCE. The list will be something like:
1. work
2. home
3. home2
3. When you are on the item you wish to move, press SPACEwithdots26. This will take you to the Preference Order Action Menu. The options are:
Top: Move to the top of the list,
Up: Move up one position in the list,
Down: Move down one position in the list, and
Bottom: Move to the bottom of the list.
4. Select a move from the list and the order will change accordingly.
For example: I want to move "home2" above "home", as it is the one I use most often. I go to "3. home2" and press SPACEwithdots26. I press SPACE twice to get to "Up: Move up one position in the list," and press ENTER. KeySoft displays, "2. home2," confirming that "home2" has moved to position 2. I press SPACEwithE.


12.5 Dial up and LAN Connections.
These two kinds of connection are quite different in the way they operate, but have some things in common in how you set them up. This is because both are used to access the internet, and both require cables. Even if you are using a LAN network connection to access a network, instead of just using the internet, the setting up of the network connection configuration is the same.
This section explains how to set up a dial up or LAN connection, and how to use it once you have done so.


12.5.1 Creating a New Dialup or LAN connection.
Use this option to set up a Dial up or LAN connection, as the name suggests. You can also enter a wireless configuration this way but it is preferable to do so via the "Wireless" Menu item.
Before following this procedure, please refer to either 12.5.3 Using a Dialup Connection or 12.5.2 Using a LAN connection, whichever applies to what you want to do. They provide essential information about devices and settings that are needed to complete the procedure.
1. Configurations are kept in a database, and the first time you go to enter a configuration, you will be prompted to create a database in which to do it. KeySoft prompts:
"Thedatabaseforconnectionconfigurationsdoesnotexist.Createadatabasecalledconnectionconfigurations?"
Press Y for yes and this happens automatically. After the first time you won't hear this prompt again.
2. KeySoft prompts: "Entrylistforconnectionconfigurations." To go to the first field, press SPACE.
3. "Connectionconfigurationname?" Enter a name for the record that is meaningful to you, then press ENTER.
4. "Devicetouse?(name)" Dial up only; if using networking, go directly to step 9. This is where you specify the device through which you are making the connection, such as a type of modem. Select the device you want by pressing ENTER. To cycle through the list, press SPACEwithdots34 and make a selection by pressing ENTER..
5. "PhoneNumber?" For dialup connections only. If using in a work environment, remember to add any dialout prefix to the number.
6. "ServiceUsername?" This is the user name you use to get onto the internet via your ISP. Type it here. Likewise the "ServicePassword?"
7. For the rest of the prompts, leave them set to their default unless otherwise stated in 12.5.3 Using a Dialup Connection or 12.5.2 Using a LAN connection.
8. For dialup connections only: When you are happy with all the settings, add this configuration by either pressing SPACEwithdots26, or SPACEwithE then Y at the "Savethisrecord?" prompt. The rest of this procedure applies to networking configurations only.
9. The rest of the fields relate to networking using a LAN. As discussed in 12.5.2 Using a LAN connection, you may not need to fill in all, or even any of them, depending on the way in which the network is set up.
IP Address  This identifies the BrailleNote PK as a part of the network. 
Subnet Mask  The part of the IP address that is common to all of the IP addresses in the domain.
Default Gateway  Default connection to the Internet through another piece of hardware or software that provides address translation and/or security.
Primary DNS  Domain Name Server  translates network names into IP addresses.
Secondary DNS"  
Primary WINS  
Secondary WINS 
Proxy Settings:
Use a proxy server for this connection?" Y/N
proxy server name
proxy server port
End Of List	


12.5.2 Using a LAN connection.
LAN is an acronym for Local Area Network. We use the term in this user guide to refer to networking via an ethernet card and cable as opposed to wireless networking, which uses a wireless network card that doesn't need cables. Wireless networking is discussed separately in 12.4 Using a Wireless Connection.
To establish a LAN connection for your BrailleNote PK, you will need an Ethernet Card (type Socket Low Power Ethernet (LPE) EA2902139, CF+ R/LP  E)  which has a ruggedized, i.e. connected, cable.
You will also need access to a working ethernet computer network, via a network capable PC, server, hub/switch/router or DSL modem.
When configuring the connection, use these specific settings:
At the "DevicetoUse?" prompt, select Ethernet Network.
At the "ObtainanIPaddressautomatically?"setting, ensure it is set to yes, unless the network uses static IP addresses as in scenarios a and b below, where it is necessary to enter the IP address manually. When set to Yes, this setting allows the network to fill in the rest of the fields automatically except the proxy server fields.
The scenarios below cover most of the common network configurations found at work, school or at home. In a work or school scenario, you may need to involve the network administrator in this task.
a. Home Network: If you have one PC and only intend to connect to the BrailleNote PK, such as in a home user situation (i.e. No DHCP server, no WINS, maybe gateway), set an IP address in the same range as the PC's IP address. For example, if the PC's is 10.0.0.1, make the BrailleNote PK's 10.0.0.2. If the PC acts as a gateway, add a gateway address. If you use a router, the address is likely to start with 192.168.0.n where n is a number that uniquely identifies your BrailleNote PK.
Note: If another computer is subsequently attached to the network, it MAY take the IP address that the BN has. If this happens, one of the addresses will need to be changed, and setup run again.
b. Local Network with static IP addresses: If the network uses static IP addresses i.e. not automatically assigned, set an IP address on the BrailleNote PK in the range of acceptable addresses. Add a gateway address if available.
c. Local Network with DHCP: This kind of network automatically assigns IP addresses. When creating the new dialup or LAN connection, set the "ObtainanIPaddressautomatically?" setting to Yes. It will pick up the DNS and WINS from the DHCP.


12.5.3 Using a Dialup Connection.
There are three typical scenarios for using the BrailleNote PK with a dialup connection, all requiring modems, of course. You will need to read this section before trying to set up a connection configuration for your modem as it outlines the specific settings required for configuring your modem type.
1. Using an external modem connected via serial port: If you are using this combination, connect the modem to the BrailleNote PK using the serial to serial cable. Ensure the modem is on and plugged into a phone line. The device name to choose when configuring the connection is HayesCompatibleModemonCOM1.
2. Using a card modem in the CF card slot: Insert the modem card before setting up a configuration for it, and it will appear on the device list as the name given to it by the manufacturer.
3. Using a Bluetooth cellphone as a modem: Before creating a connection configuration, you will need to pair up the cellphone and the BrailleNote PK successfully. This is explained in 12.11.3 Pairing with another Bluetooth device. Also, the cellphone itself may need some setting up to function as a modem, but if this is the case, the information will be included in its documentation. The device name to choose when configuring the connection is defined by the phone itself.


12.5.4 Disconnect Dialup connection.
This option only displays when you are online with a dialup connection. It allows you to hang up without having to be in either KeyMail or KeyWeb at the time.
To disconnect from the dialup connection, select this option off the Connectivity Menu and press Y for Yes. To exit without disconnecting, press N for No.


12.6 Active Connection Details.
This option off the Connectivity menu lists out information on a currently active wireless connection.
The items listed are:
Name:
Status: connected to (name of network)
Signal strength:
IP Address:
DNS address:
Test current connection. This last option is a "ping" function. Although KeySoft prompts you for the IP address, you can also enter a URL such as www.pulsedata.com.


12.7 Review an existing connection configuration.
This option allows you to access connection configurations that you have already created, and view and/or edit the information in them. This applies to all configurations including wireless ones.
From the Connectivity Menu, select "Reviewanexistingconnectionconfiguration". Using SPACE, then SPACEwithdots56orNEXT to move from one to the next, find the configuration record that you wish to review. At this point you can review the different fields in the record by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE and BACK or BACKSPACE.
If you wish to make a change to any field, follow these steps:
1. Move to the field to be changed. Press BACKSPACEwithdots25, and you are asked for a new entry for this field. There are three options here:
a) Type a new entry and press ENTER.
b) Edit the old field which is offered as the suggestion, as described in 5.17 Editing at a Prompt.
c) Clear the field by pressing SPACEwithdots356, followed by ENTER.
2. This puts you in an entry list so you can modify or add to any other field as well. You have the same three options for all the fields, and you can change any other field in the record.
If you want to fill in a field that is blank, simply navigate to it and type in the new entry.


12.7.1 Duplicating a Connection Configuration.
Being able to duplicate a connection configuration is highly useful when you wish to make slight variations to the configuration, such as adding a dial out prefix to a phone number for use at work. It is better, and far simpler, to create two configurations than to keep changing the setting in the one configuration. By duplicating the entire configuration and renaming it, all you then have to do is adjust the settings that need it, and you have a second configuration.
To create a duplicate configuration, follow these steps:
1. From the Connectivity Menu, select "Reviewanexistingconnectionconfiguration". Using SPACE, then SPACEwithdots56orNEXT to move from one to the next, find the configuration you wish to duplicate, go to name field by pressing SPACE, then exit with SPACEwithE.
2. Select the "CreateanewDialuporLANConnection" option and when you get as far as the "Connectionconfigurationname?" prompt, select the Block Commands Menu by pressing SPACEwithB. Note that this is a different menu to the Block Commands menu in KeyWord.
3. Press SPACE and KeyList displays: "Retrievelastrecord?".This is the configuration you accessed in step 1, so press ENTER.
4. KeyList prompts, "Connectionconfigurationname?Currently(name)".You now have two identical configurations. Change the name, and any other fields necessary, then press SPACEwithE.
5. When prompted to save the record, press Yfor Yes.


12.8 Glossary of terms:
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
WINS: Windows Internet Naming Service  Microsoft specific Name.
Number protocol (similar to DNS, but for NetBIOS)
Gateway: Connection to the Internet through another piece of hardware or software that provides address translation and/or security.
IP Address: Identifier on a Network.
DNS: Domain Name Server, translates network names into IP addresses.
WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy, encryption protocol on wireless networks providing a security level similar to a wired connection.
802.1x: Authentication protocol in use on wireless networks.
Subnet mask: A mask used to determine what subnet an IP address belongs to.
LAN: Local Area Network.
Access Point: Device connected to a network that allows other wireless devices to enter this network.
Infrastructure: Type of wireless connection (using an access point or in Ad Hoc mode).
Ad Hoc: Wireless direct (Peer to peer) connection between devices.


12.9 Troubleshooting.
1. "Card not recognized" message on inserting Ethernet card into the BrailleNote PK:
Is the card the correct type? Many network cards do not work reliably with Windows CE  the Socket Communications LPE card specified above has been tested and approved by Humanware, and is the only one that should be used.
2. BrailleNote PK doesn't acknowledge your wireless card:
Is it a Cisco Aironet 340/350 series PC type wireless card? This is the only card approved by Humanware.
Did you reset after inserting the card? This is important as it enables the BrailleNote PK to recognize the presence of the wireless card.
3. Connection to ActiveSync over Ethernet fails, however, Internet connection (mail, browser etc) via DSL or Cable Modem works:
Is there a firewall program (such as Zone Labs ZoneAlarm, or Norton Personal Firewall) on the PC? If so, have the appropriate ports been opened?
Has "Allow network (Ethernet) and Remote Access Service (RAS) server connection with this desktop computer." been checked in the ActiveSync Connection Settings dialog?
If you have any troubles with ActiveSync once you have set it up, try deleting the partnership and creating a new one. This allows you to reset all the settings in ActiveSync. Alternatively, try a reset on the BrailleNote PK with no keys held down.


12.10 Firewalls.
If there is a firewall in use on your network, disable any firewall blocking for the IP address of the BrailleNote PK. This may require setting a static IP address for the BrailleNote PK, depending on the firewall in use on the network.


12.11 Bluetooth.
Bluetooth is not a dental condition as the name implies, it is a cable replacement technology. Simply put, it allows devices to connect to one another without the need for cables. Sound familiar? An infrared connection does the same thing. However, the advantages of Bluetooth are that there is no need for sight lines, the capture area is far greater (about 10 meters), and Bluetooth is available in a wider range of products and services.
Here are some examples:
Establish a Bluetooth connection with your cell phone for Internet access anywhere your mobile network has coverage. The cell phone can be in your pocket or briefcase while this is happening as there is no need for a clear space between the items.
ActiveSync with Bluetooth and you can keep in sync without your BrailleNote PK and PC ever having to be physically connected. You can also use ActiveSync to access the Internet.
Use a Bluetooth keyboard with your BrailleNote PK, and you have the choice of either Braille input on the BrailleNote PK itself, or QWERTY input on the Bluetooth keyboard.
The BrailleNote PK does not currently offer any services itself, but can use other devices and their services.


12.11.1 How Bluetooth works; Pairing.
A Bluetooth device contains a radio transceiver that takes the information normally carried by a cable, and transmits it at a special frequency to a Bluetooth transceiver in the receiving device, which will then pass the information to that device. When two Bluetooth enabled devices link up like this, it is called "pairing."
Every Bluetooth device has one or more services that it offers. These are functions that it has available to share with another Bluetooth device. In Bluetoothspeak, offering a service is called exposing a service. For example, a keyboard can only expose keyboard as a service, as that is all it can do. A PC however, may expose a range of services, such as "modem", "network", or "headset". This is complicated slightly by the fact that devices expose all of the services they can potentially support, whether or not the device transmitting a request to pair can actually use those services.
Bluetooth is a relatively new technology and has some interesting idiosyncrasies such as the one just mentioned. However with patience it usually all works in the end!
Most Bluetooth device pairings involve an authentication code. This code is sometimes known by other names, but it's the same thing. When initially setting up the pairing, you enter the same code into each device, and in subsequent pairings, this is used by the devices to recognize one another. Not all pairings require a code, even if they ask for one, so a certain amount of experimentation might be worthwhile.
If you want to learn more about Bluetooth and what it is for, can do, and will be able to do in the future, and why, the World Wide Web has plenty of sites dedicated to these subjects.


12.11.2 BrailleNote PK Supported Services
The BrailleNote PK can pair with a Bluetooth keyboard, the modem functionality of a Bluetooth cellphone, and the ActiveSync and modem services exposed by a Bluetooth enabled PC. We do advise that you get recommendations of makes and models of these devices that work with the BrailleNote PK successfully, or test this yourself before purchasing any Bluetooth device.
To use any of these services, you first need to establish a pairing between the BrailleNote PK and the other device. This is akin to plugging the two devices into one another before being able to actually do anything. This is discussed in the following section 12.11.3 Pairing with another Bluetooth device.


12.11.3 Pairing with another Bluetooth device.
The procedure for pairing the BrailleNote PK with another device is fairly consistent regardless of what the device is. Using ActiveSync involves a few more steps so it is documented separately in context in 12.13.7 ActiveSync using Bluetooth.
1. Go to the Options Menu by pressing SPACEwithO, then C for the Connectivity Menu.
2. Select Bluetooth and press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "Bluetoothon?CurrentlyYes/No." Press Y.
3. KeySoft prompts: "SearchforBluetoothdevices?" Press Y. KeySoft displays, "SearchingforBluetoothdevices,pleasewait..." This may take a few seconds during which you will hear progress beeps.
4. When the search is complete, KeySoft will display: "ListofBluetoothdevices." Unless you have a number of bluetooth devices or work in an area where others do, it will be a very short list! 
5. Review the list with SPACE and select the device with which you want to pair by pressing ENTERwhen it is displayed. Single service devices such as a keyboard, will offer pairing when selected and you can start using them straight away, although in many cases you will be asked to type in an authentication code. This code is the same on both sides, and you will need to enter it twice. The BrailleNote PK will cue you through this process. Pairing with a PC to use ActiveSync is slightly different so refer to 12.13.7 ActiveSync using Bluetooth.
Once you have established a pairing, the BrailleNote PK keeps a record of it and the authentication code, so it is easy to reconnect next time.

12.11.4 Setting up Bluetooth on your PC.
If your PC is not already Bluetooth enabled, you can turn your PC into a Bluetooth device by purchasing a Bluetooth USB dongle or a Bluetooth CF card from an electronics retailer. These plug into the USB port or card reader on your PC and come with the necessary software on CD. As with any new soft or hardware, first ensure that your PC meets the system requirements.
The PC may offer services including ActiveSync (if ActiveSync is installed) and a modem, if it has one. 



12.12 Accessing the Network through your BrailleNote PK.
As well as accessing the internet, you can also use a connection between the BrailleNote PK and a network to access the rest of the network on your BrailleNote PK. This means that you can browse to folders and files on the network, allowing you to open compatible files and/or attach any kind of file to your emails. Open an MS Word file from a network folder, make changes and close it again. Email an Excel spreadsheet using your BrailleNote PK or, if you receive one, move it onto the network where you can open it from a PC. Transfer files quickly and easily onto the network.
This is possible when a LAN or wireless connection is set up without ActiveSync (which has the opposite effect of allowing you to browse the BrailleNote PK file structure on your PC). If you don't already have a connection configuration set up for using with LAN or wireless networking, follow the connection set up instructions in 12.5.1 Creating a New Dialup or LAN connection or 12.4.1 Creating a new Wireless Configuration.
The network appears as Network on the Drive list when there is a Network available.


12.12.1 Network terminology.
There are several key terms and concepts that are important to understand in order to access a network confidently.
Network Client: A network client is a device that requests and receives data over the network. When connected to a network, the BrailleNote PK is a client device.
Domain: A domain is a group of computers and devices on a network that are administered as a unit. A network may have only one domain, or multiple domains, depending on the way it has been designed. The domain is the highest point available when searching and you need to know the name of the domain in order to do so. Please note that if a network is a workgroup and doesn't have a domain, you won't be able to search by domain.
Server: A server is basically a computer on which the network, or part of the network, resides. There may be one or several servers in a domain. If you wish to access a specific server on the network, you will need to know its name. Otherwise you can search the domain and locate it that way.
Network Folders: We are using this term to cover all of the shared folders and directories or resources on a network. Resources that are not available for use with the BrailleNote PK, such as printers, will not show up at all.
Network Place: The BrailleNote PK allows you to map any frequently used network folders to a list of network places, making it quick and easy to access them. The list of Network Places is the first thing to appear once you select Network Drive. For more information, refer to 12.12.4 Network Places.


12.12.2 How to access Network the first time.
This topic explains how to set up access to a network's servers and folders via your BrailleNote PK. 
The first time you access the network, there are no defaults set up as it is previously unchartered territory. However on subsequent uses, you will find that most of the prompts will offer your previous choice as a default, for example, "Network server? Press enter for server1." There are other short cuts for future use that are discussed as they come up.
Before starting this procedure, you will need to know the exact name and spelling of either the domain, if there is one, or the server or servers that you wish to access. You will also need to have a wireless or LAN card plugged in and in the case of a wireless card, be connected. In both cases, you will need of course to have a connection configuration set up to access this particular network using either method. Lastly you will need to know your username and password for logging onto the network, if the network requires this.
From anywhere in Keysoft where you are prompted to select a Drive from the Drive list (for example, FileManager, Directory):
1. Select Network from the Drive list by pressing N. 
2. KeySoft prompts, "NetworkPlace?" Ignore this prompt for now and press SPACE twice. 
3. KeySoft prompts, "BrowseentireNetwork." Press ENTER. 
4. At this point you have two choices; NetworkServer, or press SPACE to choose DomaintoSearch? The one you choose will depend on what information you have available. If you know the name and exact spelling of the server you wish to access on the network, type it at the NetworkServer prompt and press ENTER. If you know the name and exact spelling of the domain and wish to search for a network folder that way, type it in at the DomaintoSearch? prompt and press ENTER. 
5. Regardless of which option you chose, if you have to log into this network, at this point you will be prompted for your network server user name. Type it in Computer Braille and press ENTER. 
6. At the password prompt, type your password and press ENTER. 
7. Press SPACEwithE. This extracts you from the login fields. the BrailleNote PK will ask you to verify your choice to save username and password with a Y or N.
8. KeySoft prompts: "Updatethedefaultlogininformation?" This prompt relates to whether you wish to save your login details on the BrailleNote PK. If you type Y for yes, you will hear a warning about the risks of saving it. However if you do save it, you won't need to log in manually again. If you type N for no, you won't run the risk of someone using your BrailleNote PK to gain access to the network with your login, but you will have to reenter your username and password every time.
9. If you chose the Network Server name, skip this step. If you chose the domain search, at this point you will be presented with all of the servers on the network. You can review them all by pressing SPACE, or press the initial letter of the server you are looking for, repeatedly if necessary, until you find it. Press ENTER.
10. KeySoft prompts: "NetworkFolder?" Either type the exact name, review all the folders by pressing SPACE, or press the initial letter of the folder you are looking for until you find it. Press ENTER.
11. KeySoft prompts: "NetworkPlacenameforthisfolder?Pressenterfor(foldername)." Type another name or press ENTER. Network Places are explained in 12.12.4 Network Places.
12. From here on, it is the same as reviewing the folder structure in the BrailleNote PK.
Note: If you turn off the BrailleNote PK by pressing C1 and C4, the BrailleNote PK will ask you to enter your network server user name and password as soon as you select Network from the Drive List. 

12.12.3 How to access the Network after the first time.
Once you have been onto the network at least once and set up a network place or places, accessing the network becomes a lot more straightforward. The procedure is almost the same as the first time, but now you have some shortcuts in the Network Places list, possibly a saved login, and default options at each prompt to make the process quicker.
1. Select Network from the Drive list by pressing N.
2. KeySoft prompts, "NetworkPlace?PressENTERfor(name)" where (name) is the last network place visited. Either press ENTER, or go to the list of network places by pressing SPACE,select one, and pressENTER.
3. If you saved your username and password, or do not have one, from here on, it is the same as reviewing the folder structure in the BrailleNote PK. If you didn't save your username and password, you will be prompted here to enter them.
4. Press SPACEwithE. This extracts you from the login fields.
5. From here on, it is the same as reviewing the folder structure in the BrailleNote PK.
Note: After a reset of the BrailleNote PK, there will be no defaults set up as they are all wiped. If you turn off the BrailleNote PK by pressing C1 and C4 together, all your settings will be lost and you will need to start again as described in 12.12.2 How to access Network the first time.


12.12.4 Network Places.
The BrailleNote PK maps network folders to a list of network places, making it quick and easy to access them. The list of Network Places is the first thing to appear once you select Network Drive, so you can go directly to them instead of having to search down through the domain or review all the servers to find the shared folder that you want.
Every time you open a new network folder, KeySoft will ask you to map it to a network place. You can give the network place any name you like, but as it is the convention, KeySoft offers the folder's name as the default. You can accept it by pressing ENTER, or type an alternative name then press ENTER.
Because you may not want to keep a network place for the future, you can delete it. To do this, select the network place from the list of network places, but do not press ENTER. Instead, to delete, press BACKSPACEwithdots14. KeySoft will ask you to confirm this by typing Y for yes, or N for No.
You can also rename a network place by pressing BACKSPACEwithR.
It is not possible to map the same network folder to two different network places, nor is it possible to have two network places with the same name.


12.13 ActiveSync.
The ActiveSync option in the Utilities Menu allows the BrailleNote PK file structure to be viewed on a PC with Windows Explorer.
This feature allows you to manage your BrailleNote PK files from the PC. You can copy, move, or delete Files and Folders, just as you would on the normal PC drives. You can quickly transfer files to and from the BrailleNote PK using this option. To get to the file structure of the BrailleNote PK, Select Explorer from the File menu in the ActiveSync window on your PC. From the Windows Explorer window, select My Handheld PC.
Using ActiveSync, it is also possible to synchronize files between your PC and your BrailleNote PK.
ActiveSync can also redirect internet access via your PC's internet connection when the PC and BrailleNote PK are connected via USB cable or network.
Before any ActiveSync connection can be made, you will need to install the ActiveSync program on the PC. This program is provided on the CDROM supplied with the BrailleNote PK.


12.13.1 Serial, USB, Bluetooth and Ethernet Connection Types.
The BrailleNote PK may be connected to the PC via either the serial port, Bluetooth, USB, or via Ethernet connection, wireless or LAN. Assuming you have access to a suitable PC, you have everything you need to set up the cable connections required for Serial or USB. PC's that are not Bluetooth and/or network enabled require extra PC hardware and associated software drivers before these can be used.
Here are some things you should know about each connection type:
Serial Port: This is the slowest connection type but it has the advantage of not requiring any extra equipment, and is simple to set up and use. Only works with ActiveSync. Refer to 12.13.3 ActiveSync using Serial.
LAN connection: Fastest of all the connections, you have the option of accessing the internet as well as the usual ActiveSync activities. Requires an ethernet card and some configuring at the PC end. For information on setting up LAN, refer to 12.5 Dial up and LAN Connections. For ActiveSync connection set up, refer to 12.13.6 ActiveSync using LAN	.
Wireless Ethernet connection: As fast as LAN, with the same capabilities, this type requires that there is a wireless network available to you. BrailleNote PK requires a wireless network card. For more information on setting up a wireless connection, refer to 12.4 Using a Wireless Connection. ActiveSync connection set up is very much the same as the LAN connection explained in 12.13.6 ActiveSync using LAN.
Please note that while you can access the internet using LAN and Wireless with ActiveSync, you can also do so without ActiveSync. 
Bluetooth: This wireless connection type is faster than serial. To use Bluetooth, you need to set up your PC with a Bluetooth accessory such as a dongle or card. Only works with ActiveSync. For more information on Bluetooth, refer to 12.11 Bluetooth. For how to set up an Activesync connection, refer to 12.13.7 ActiveSync using Bluetooth.
USB: This connection is faster than serial and as long as your PC has a USB port, it will work fine. You can use this connection type to use ActiveSync in the usual ways, but also to gain internet access on your BrailleNote PK via the PC, whether this be network access or dialup. This is discussed further in 12.13.5 ActiveSync using USB.



12.13.2 Installing ActiveSync on your PC.
Before you can use ActiveSync with the BrailleNote PK, it must be installed on the PC. This program is provided on the CDROM supplied with the BrailleNote PK. The current version of ActiveSync is 3.7.1.
To install ActiveSync 3.7.1, follow these steps:
1. Insert the CDROM provided into your PC CDROM drive. Wait a few seconds, and a window will display with 6 buttons. The top button says "Install ActiveSync". Click on this button.
2. Give the installation file a few seconds to automatically extract and copy files. When this is complete, the first window of a SetUp wizard will display. Although the wizard gives instructions on what to do, the procedure is slightly different than it states, so please follow these instructions carefully. You can now close down the CD installation window by clicking on the Exit button if you wish. Click on the Next button.
3. The Select Installation Folder window displays. ActiveSync offers a default filepath that you can use. Click on the Next button.
4. At completion of this process, you could click on the Exit button and ActiveSync is now installed. However, until a connection is established, the Get Connected wizard will keep appearing on your PC when you try to set connection types in the Connection Settings window of ActiveSync. To get around this, we suggest you make your first connection USB or Serial as they are the easiest to set up. All you have to do is to follow the instructions in section 12.13.5 ActiveSync using USB or 12.13.3 ActiveSync using Serial, with the only difference being that instead when you go to the Connection Settings, the Wizard will come up. At this point, press ENTER on the BrailleNote PK straight away. 
If for any reason you cannot use the CDRom, you can also download ActiveSync from the Internet. It is free and readily available. A search engine search for "ActiveSync 3.7.1 download" will bring up several download sites.

12.13.3 ActiveSync using Serial.
Follow these steps to make an ActiveSync connection using the serial port.
Once ActiveSync is installed on your PC, as per directions in 12.13.2 Installing ActiveSync on your PC, follow these steps:
1. Connect the BrailleNote PK to the PC with the serial cable provided. 
2. Go to the Utilities Menu from the Main Menu, and select Miscellaneous Options. Press SPACE once to get to ActiveSync Connection. Type Sfor Serial and press ENTER.
3. Return to the Utilities Menu by pressing SPACEwithE. Press C or SPACE once to get to "ConnecttoActiveSync". Do not press ENTER yet.
4. On the PC, make sure the connection type is also set to Serial. To do this, in the ActiveSync window on your PC, from the File Menu, select Connection Settings. Check the option "AllowSerialcableorInfraredconnectiontothisport" and click on OK. If it is your first ever connection on the PC, the Get Connected Wizard may pop up instead, in which case just carry on to step 5.
5. Now on your BrailleNote PK, press ENTER. Note: If the connection does not happen within 10 seconds, reset the BrailleNote PK by holding down C3 and C4 until you hear a beep, and the connection should come up straight away.
6. If the connection was successful, after about 10 seconds you will hear a chime followed by a slight shriek from the BrailleNote PK. This can happen even if the BrailleNote PK gives an error message about the port not being available. If you don't hear the chime at all, try again. All you need to do is click on the Next button of the wizard screen that comes up, and the Get Connected window will display again. If not using the wizard, try a reset by holding down C3 and C4 until you hear a beep.
7. When connected, a "NewPartnership" dialogue box appears. There are two choices, "Yes" or "No". If you are simply going to use ActiveSync to manage files, you could click on "No". If you are going to set up a network connection after this or wish to synchronize files, select "Yes". Click on OK. 


12.13.4 Trouble Shooting ActiveSync.
To establish a successful connection with ActiveSync, a number of independent factors must be satisfied. Be prepared to spend time to understand the connection procedure. With patience you will soon be connecting quickly and reliably.
Difficulties usually center around making a successful connection. Make sure you follow the recommended connection procedures outlined in the previous sections.
Factors to check if you cannot make a connection are:
* If you have been using the BrailleNote PK serial port for ActiveSyncing as well as to drive a remote display, you need to release the port for ActiveSync. Do this by selecting the Visual Display from the Options Menu, then pressing F and ENTER to turn off the connection.
* Similarly, at the PC end, if another program has been using the serial port, it is necessary to close the program, or if the program provides facilities to do so, release the port.
* Connection setting in ActiveSync is set to incorrect port type (applies only after successful connection has been previously established)  To check this, in the ActiveSync window, go to the File Menu and select Connection Settings. Check the box that refers to your connection type. Click on OK and try connecting again.
* Check that the cables are plugged in correctly and firmly at both ends.
* With USB connections, try another USB port. We have noticed that when establishing an initial connection, the USB ports on the front of the PC unit do not work, only those on the back do. If your PC has more than one USB port, try them all.
* Check that the correct port type is set on the BrailleNote PK in Miscellaneous Options off the Utilities Menu.
* If still unsuccessful, reset the BrailleNote PK by holding C3 and C4 down until you hear a beep. If that doesn't work, uncheck all connections in the ActiveSync Connection Settings, click on OK, then go back in and recheck. Reset the BrailleNote PK again.
* With a Bluetooth connection, make sure the authentication code is correct. 


12.13.5 ActiveSync using USB.
ActiveSync using a USB connection allows you to do all the usual activities of managing the files and folders on your BrailleNote PK in Windows Explorer. It also allows you to access the internet by redirecting internet access from your PC to the BrailleNote PK. This section covers the basic setup of ActiveSync on your PC, and what else you need to do to use the internet. USB is a good connection type to start off with, as it is simple and allows you to set up a partnership for future LAN or wireless connections.
To make a connection between your BrailleNote PK and a PC, follow these steps:
1. Plug the smaller end of the USB cable into your BrailleNote PK, and the larger end into a USB port on your PC.
2. On the BrailleNote PK, ensure the ActiveSync connection type is set to USB. To do this, go to the Main menu, then Utilities Menu, then Miscellaneous Options, press SPACE, and then Ufor USB. Exit by pressing SPACEwithE. 
3. Return to the Utilities Menu by pressing SPACEwithE. Press C or SPACE once to get to "ConnecttoActiveSync". Do not press ENTER yet.
4. On the PC, make sure the connection type is also set to USB. To do this, in the ActiveSync window on your PC, from the File Menu, select Connection Settings. Check the option AllowUSBconnection... and click on OK. If it is your first ever connection on the PC, the Get Connected Wizard may pop up instead, in which case just carry on to step 5.
5. Now on your BrailleNote PK, press ENTER. Note: If the connection does not happen within 10 seconds, reset the BrailleNote PK by holding down C3 and C4 until you her a beep, and the connection should come up straight away.
To use this connection to access the Internet, there are a few more simple steps:
1. Enter the Options Menu by pressing SPACE with O. Press Cfor Connectivity then SPACE to get to "CreateaNewDialuporLANConnection". Press ENTER.
2. KeySoft prompts: "Connectionconfigurationname?" Type a name that is meaningful to you and press ENTER.
3. KeySoft prompts: "Devicetouse?" Cycle through the options to Ethernet Network Connection and press ENTER. 
4. Press SPACEwithE and at the prompt, "Savethisconfiguration?" press Yfor Yes. This configuration is the one you will need to access the internet.
Now return to the main menu and select Internet. When asked which configuration to use, select the one you have just set up. You can now access the world wide web. Likewise with email  when asked in KeyMail for a configuration, select the one you have just set up. As long as you have an email account set up, this will work fine.

12.13.6 ActiveSync using LAN.
Using ActiveSync with a LAN allows you to access the internet. Of course if you have network capability on your PC, you can also do this using the Network Client approach, as discussed in 12.12 Accessing the Network through your BrailleNote PK, but there are different benefits for each. Using ActiveSync means that you can use Windows Explorer on your PC to view and manage the directory system of the BrailleNote PK, whereas with Network client, you can view and manage the files on your network on the BrailleNote PK. Also, if your primary goal is to access the internet, this approach means you don't have to go through quite so much rigmarole to set up the connection configuration.
1. This first step is necessary so that the BrailleNote PK recognizes your PC. Using a serial or USB connection, connect to ActiveSync, and in the PC popup, say "yes" to establish a partnership.
2. In the ActiveSync window, go to the File Menu and select Connection Settings. Ensure that "Allownetwork(Ethernet)andRemoteAccessService(RAS)serverconnectionwiththisdesktopcomputer." Checkbox is checked.
Technical note for systems administrators: ActiveSync uses ports 990, 999, 5678, and 5679 to communicate with the BrailleNote PK. It also uses the Netbios TCP and UDP ports 137 (naming service), 138 (netbios datagram service) and 139 (netbios session service) to communicate with your BrailleNote PK. If a DNS is used, it will use port 53 for name resolution.
3. Perform a simple reset.
4. From the Main menu, go to Utilities, then the Miscellaneous Options Setup List, and at the ActiveSync Connection option, select E for Ethernet. You are now ready to connect your BrailleNote PK using Ethernet.
5. Having gone through this set up process once, you don't have to go through it again. While ActiveSync connection is set to "Ethernet", and as long as you are connected via the Ethernet cable, everything will behave as normal.
To use this connection to access the Internet, there are a few more simple steps:
1. Enter the Options Menu by pressing SPACE with O. Press Cfor Connectivity then SPACE to get to "CreateaNewDialuporLANConnection". Press ENTER.
2. KeySoft prompts: "Connectionconfigurationname?" Type a name that is meaningful to you and press ENTER.
3. KeySoft prompts: "Devicetouse?" Cycle through the options to Ethernet Network Connection and press ENTER. 
4. Press SPACEwithE and at the prompt, "Savethisconfiguration?" press Yfor Yes. This configuration is the one you will need to access the internet.
Now return to the main menu and select Internet. When asked which configuration to use, select the one you have just set up. You can now access the world wide web. Likewise with email  when asked in KeyMail for a configuration, select the one you have just set up. As long as you have an email account set up, this will work fine.


12.13.7 ActiveSync using Bluetooth.
Before setting up a pairing between the BrailleNote PK and your PC's Bluetooth function, ensure that both ActiveSync and Bluetooth are set up on your PC. For more information on these, refer to 12.13.2 Installing ActiveSync on your PC and 12.11.4 Setting up Bluetooth on your PC. You will also need to know which COM Port Bluetooth has assigned to itself on the PC. You can view this by going to My Bluetooth Places then the Bluetooth menu, choose the Advanced Configuration option, then the Local Services Tab. Look for the Bluetooth Serial Port in the list of services, and which COM Port it is assigned to is in the right hand column. Why is it called a Serial Port when it isn't? Don't worry, "serial port" is simply the default name used by the PC for any connection using one of its COM Ports.
The user interface for the PC Bluetooth service may vary from the one described above. Nevertheless, the COM port information will still be available somewhere. 
Now we know the number, it is a fairly straightforward procedure to set up and connect to ActiveSync:
1. On your PC, open ActiveSync. From the File menu, select Connection Settings.
2. Tick the checkbox called "AllowserialcableorinfraredconnectiontothisCOMPort" and in the drop down list directly after it, select the COM port assigned to Bluetooth that you looked up in the beginning. Click on OK.
3. On your BrailleNote PK, in the Utilities Menu, press Mfor Miscellaneous Options, and go to ActiveSync Connection by pressing SPACE.
4. Select Bluetooth by pressing B then ENTER.Bluetooth is now the connection type of choice. Now you need to set up Bluetooth on the BrailleNote PK.
5. Go to the Options Menu by pressing SPACEwithO, then C for the Connectivity Menu.
6. Select Bluetooth and press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "Bluetoothon?CurrentlyYes/No." Press Y.
7. KeySoft prompts: "SearchforBluetoothdevices?" Press Y. KeySoft displays, "SearchingforBluetoothdevices,pleasewait..." This may take a few seconds during which you will hear progress beeps.
8. When the search is complete, KeySoft will display: "ListofBluetoothdevices." Unless you have a number of bluetooth devices or work in an area where others do, it will be a very short list! 
9. Your PC will appear on the list by the name you gave it during Bluetooth set up. Select it by pressing ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "Listofservicesfor(devicename)?" Review the list, and select "ActiveSync".
10. KeySoft prompts: "Pairwith(devicename)andactivateActiveSync?" Press Y.
11. On your BrailleNote PK, KeySoft will prompt: "Authenticationcode?" Type a password that you can remember, in letters or numbers.
12. On your PC, there will be a dialog box requesting an authentication code. Type the same password here and click OK.
You are now connected to ActiveSync via Bluetooth.


12.13.8 Connecting via ActiveSync.
Assuming you have carried out the steps in 12.13.2 Installing ActiveSync on your PC, and set up a connection via Serial, USB, Bluetooth, or LAN successfully, follow these steps to reconnect in the future. Note: Your PC will need to be switched on for this to work.
1. Connect the BrailleNote PK to the PC with your chosen connection type.
2. On the BrailleNote PK, go to the "UtilitiesMenu,"and press C to select "ConnecttoActiveSync" option.
3. The ActiveSync window on the PC should indicate that the PC is "Connecting" to the BrailleNote PK. This process normally takes about 5 to 10 seconds. When connected, the "NewPartnership" dialogue box may appear. If you followed the steps in the last section, a partnership was established, so this dialog shouldn't appear. Select Yes or No and click on OK.
And that's it!


12.13.9 Freeing the Ports.
To disconnect from ActiveSync, unplug the relevant cable from either the PC or BrailleNote PK. For a bluetooth connection, there should be a "disconnect" option somewhere in the PC application that goes with the Bluetooth capability.
If you need to use the PC's serial port for another function, go to the File Menu of the ActiveSync menu bar, select "ConnectionSettings" and uncheck the "AllowserialcableorinfraredconnectiontothisCommPort" option. Remember that next time you connect, you have to "recheck" this option.


12.14 KeySync.
12.14.1 What is Synchronization.
Synchronization is the act of making two things work in unison. In the world of planners and address lists and files, it specifically means being able to keep the records on two different systems in unison with each other, in this case a PC and a BrailleNote PK. When you synchronize, the information goes back and forth between the two systems in such a way that both sides end up the same, with a little help from you occasionally. So, if you enter a friend's name or an appointment on the BrailleNote PK, you can ensure that by synchronizing, they will end up recorded in MS Outlook as well.
ActiveSync is a Microsoft tool designed to allow PC's and hand held Pocket devices to talk to one another and to synchronize with each other, which is why it has "Sync" in its name. KeySync does not replace ActiveSync. KeySync still uses ActiveSync as an electronic connection, but it does the job of synchronizing KeySoft records such as addresses, appointments and alarms, with MS Outlook's contacts and planner, and vice versa. So, instead of having to enter or update all your contacts and appointments into two systems separately, you can do them at one end and let the synchronization process copy them, update changes or make deletions, for you.
There is one kind of BrailleNote PK to PC synchronization that uses ActiveSync without KeySync, and that is file synchronization. This is discussed in detail in 12.14.8 File Synchronization.
One way to imagine how synchronization works is to think of a pair of scales. Put some sand in one scale, and to balance, or synchronize, the other side, we would add to it the same amount of sand. If we take some or all out of one side, we can synchronize it by either putting the sand back, or taking the same amount off the other side. If we add sand to one side, we can either take it off again, or add the same amount to the other side. If we change the amount of sand on both sides, we can choose which side we like best and change the other one to match it. And all of this is balanced through the center point of the scale. KeySync is like a pair of scales, with one side being MS Outlook and the other being KeySoft. The center point is a database that sits in your PC and keeps a record of all of the pairs of synchronized files, so it can tell if any changes have been made to either side. With KeySync, you get to make the calls about which side to adjust if there is a change, so you are always in control.
This section begins with general information and instructions on KeySync and how to set it up, followed by a section on synchronizing KeyList, and another on KeyPlan.


12.14.2 Getting the best out of Synchronization.
Like so many tools, the efficiency of synchronization is as much in the way you use it as in the design. Synchronization is designed to keep both copies of a record the same. While it is possible to temporarily override the process on a record by record basis, the ultimate objective of synchronizing is to allow you to keep accurate, matched records, and if that is not what you want to do, perhaps synchronizing is not the way to go.
Synchronizing works best when you do it often, rather than leave the records to build up. If you do it often, there won't be so many opportunities for conflicts and duplicates, and so it will work quickly without you having to make lots of judgment calls.
The first time you synchronize records, any records that are unique to either KeySoft or Outlook will copy themselves to the other system. Duplicate records will need user intervention, and the length of time this takes will be determined by how many you have. However, it will never be such a large job again, especially if, as we mentioned before, you synchronize regularly.


12.14.2.1 KeySyncing for the first time.
If you have a sizeable number of records on either or both your PC and BrailleNote PK, the first synchronization could be quite a mission! KeySync will automatically update records unique to one system, but if you have a lot of duplicate or overlapping records already, it may take some time. Duplicate records are discussed in 12.14.5 Duplicates.


12.14.3 Setting up KeySync on your PC.
The software required to set up KeySync on your PC is available on the CD Rom that came with your BrailleNote PK, or by downloading it from the internet, or by installing it off the PC Software CD available from your SMA distributor. Instructions on how to download it from the internet, and from where, are in the readme file which is in the General folder of the FlashDisk. Please note that you can only synchronize the Planner and Address List of your BrailleNote PK with one PC.
1. Put the CD into the CD drive of your PC.
2. A window will appear with 6 buttons. Click on the second button, labeled "Install KeySync PC Software".
3. The KeySync Setup window appears. Read the information on it then click on Next.
4. The Destination Folder window appears. In this window there is a filepath field, in which the filepath C:\Program Files\Pulse Data\KeySync is specified. Click on Next. Note: if reinstalling KeySync, at this point you will get a dialog box saying "You've specified a folder that already exists" Click on Yes.
5. Your PC is now ready to install KeySync. In the window that appears, click on Next.
6. After a short period of installing activity, a dialog box displays asking if you want to run KeySync at every start up. Click on Yes.
7. The Installation Complete window displays. Click on the Finish button.
8. If you are downloading from a CD, the original 6 button window will appear again. You can either try another option, or click on Exit.
KeySync has put an icon in your system tray, but otherwise as KeySync is driven from your BrailleNote PK, there is very little you need to do with it on the PC.
Important Note: If for some reason you wish to reinstall the KeySync PC Software, do not remove the original version of the software, just install over it. This is because the removal process also deletes all the files in the same folder, including the database that keeps a record of the synchronized pairs.


12.14.3.1 Installation of ActiveSync.
Because you are transferring data to and from your BrailleNote PK and PC, you will need to use ActiveSync to set up a connection with a partnership. This can be a serial, USB or Ethernet connection. The ActiveSync software is on the BrailleNote Family CDROM supplied with your BrailleNote PK, and there is more information on how to install and use it in 12.13.3 ActiveSync using Serial.
If you have a partnership set up already, you don't need to do it again. If you don't, follow these steps to set one up.
1. Connect to ActiveSync, and select "Yes" to a partnership.
If you are presented with the "Select number of Partnerships" screen, check the box for "Yes, I want to synchronize with only this computer" unless you use the file synchronization facility (see 12.14.8 File Synchronization) on more than one PC, in which case choose the other option.
1. The Select Synchronization Settings window will display. If you are using file synchronization, check the files synchronization option. Otherwise, ensure that none of the options are checked.
2. A dialog box will appear. Click on Finish.


12.14.3.2 How to Synchronize for the first time.
Having set up the synchronization at both ends, you can now synchronize your contacts and appointments.
Follow the steps below to set up and perform a KeySync synchronization.
1. Connect to ActiveSync using your preferred connection type.
2. If you are not already connected with a partnership via ActiveSync, do so now.
3. From the Main Menu, choose Utilities Menu, then S for Synchronization.
4. KeySoft prompts: "KeySyncMenu".There are two menu items. Select the second option, "Optionsforsynchronization".
5. KeySoft prompts: "KeySyncOptionsList". SPACE down to the option "Synchronizecontacts?Currently(y/n)".Type Y for Yes or N for No and then press ENTER.
6. KeySoft prompts: "SynchronizePlanner?Currently(y/n)" Type Y for Yes or N for No and then press ENTER.
If you answered yes, KeySoft prompts: "SynchronizeAllappointments?Currently(y/n)" This option allows you to specify a period of weeks, past or future, that you wish to synchronize. If you want all past and future appointments synchronized, type Yfor Yes and go to step 9. If you wish to specify a period of time, type N for No and then press ENTER.
7. KeySoft prompts: "Pastweeksofappointmentstosync?CurrentlyAll." The values you can enter are, L for All, or a number between 0999, which specifies the number of weeks. If you don't want to synchronize any past weeks, type 0. No number signs required. Type a value and press ENTER.
8. KeySoft prompts: "Futureweeksofappointmentstosync?CurrentlyAll." The same values are valid as for the past. Type a value and press ENTER. Note: In the case of both past and future time frames, all the instances of any new recurring appointments starting in the time frame will synchronize through, even if they extend beyond the time frame specified.
9. You are now set up to synchronize as much or as little as you wish to. The values that you have selected become the defaults until you change them again. To get back to the KeySync menu, press SPACEwithE.
10. From the KeySync menu, select "Synchronizenow". This will activate the synchronization process.


12.14.3.3 Synchronizing after the first time.
Once you have set up all the options as described in the previous section, from then on initializing synchronization is a threestep procedure.
1. Connect to ActiveSync using your preferred connection types.
2. From the Main Menu, choose Utilities Menu, then S for Synchronization.
3. From the KeySync menu, select "Synchronizenow".


12.14.3.4 What happens next.
You may have gathered from the previous sections that synchronization is not a completely automatic process; it requires you to provide your judgment and intervention at times to produce the results you want.
This section covers what to do with any conflicts, duplicates, etc.. While conflicts and duplicates may be defined differently for the Address List and the Planner, the process is pretty much the same. The main difference is in the prompts. For address records, the First and Last names of the contact are used as an identifier. For appointments, the date, time and title are used as an identifier. In the procedure below, these identifiers will be represented by the word (identifier) in brackets.
This procedure starts at the point where you have pressed Synchronize now, step 11 of the procedure in 12.14.3.2 How to Synchronize for the first time.
Follow these steps:
1. KeySync displays: "ConnectingSyncingcontacts/planner,pleasewait".Some beeps may follow. Then there are three prompts, either one, some, all or none of which may come up, in the following order:
a) Aconflictexistsfor(identifier).Option?". To choose the KeySoft version, press K. To choose the PC version, press P. To leave both copies unchanged and ask again next time, press L. For more information on conflict resolution, go to 12.14.4 Resolving conflicts.
b) "(Identifier)hasbeendeletedfromthe(PC/BrailleNote).Option?" where PC/BrailleNote is either one or the other. Select one of the options outlined in 12.14.5.2 Restoring and deleting records, then go to Step 2.
c) "Thereappearstobeaduplicatefor(identifier).Option?" Select one of the options outlined in 12.14.5 Duplicates, then go to Step 2.
2. KeySync has now presented all the relevant prompts and you have chosen options for them. The first time you synchronize, a dialog box will pop up on the PC, asking if you wish to synchronize with this particular BrailleNote PK, with an accompanying announcement from the BrailleNote PK saying "PleaseconfirmonthePCthatitisOKtosyncdata." To answer yes, press Enter on your PC. If you are not using Office XP or 2000 with the security pack installed, go to step 4.
3. If you are using MS Office XP or 2000 with the security pack installed, a second dialog box may display on your PC. It is a feature that is meant to stop viruses from polling your Outlook records, and warns that a program is trying to get into your contacts list. If you are not using a screen reader, it may seem like the process has hung, but it is a simple routine on the PC to get around the dialog box:
a) Tab to the check box labeled "Allowaccess".
b) Press the space bar to check the box, then Tab to go to a combo box that has a range of times up to ten minutes.
c) Use the arrow keys to select a time from the dropdown list.
d) Tab to the Yes button and press Enter. You can then proceed. Unless you have hundreds of contacts to synchronize, ten minutes should be enough time. If it is not, the dialog box will reappear allowing you to specify another ten minutes in the same way.
4. KeySync will now display: "Syncing(contacts/planner),pleasewait" then proceed to synchronize. During this process, KeySync will let you know what is going on with a series of "Percentage complete" prompts. When it is complete, KeySync will display some or all of this prompt: "Finishedsyncing(contacts/planner).xPCitemsupdated.xKeySoftitemsupdated.xKeySoftitemsdeleted"
5. If you are synchronizing both contacts and planner applications, at this point KeySync will return to step 1 and go through the process again for the other application. Note: Once the synchronization begins, do not interrupt it.
6. When all the syncing is complete, KeySync will display: "Syncingcomplete.KeySyncmenu."


12.14.4 Resolving conflicts.
Conflicts arise when changes have been made to both the KeySoft and Outlook copies of a record since the last synchronization, even if the changes are identical on both systems. KeySync gives a variety of ways with which you can manage conflicts, either automatically, or on a case by case basis. The conflict resolution procedure is the same for both Contacts and Planner records.
Follow these steps to set up what happens when there is a conflict.
1. From the Main Menu, choose Utilities Menu, then S for Synchronization.
2. KeySoft prompts: "KeySyncMenu". There are two menu items, "Synchronizenow", and "Optionsforsynchronization". Select "Optionsforsynchronization" and the KeySync Options List is presented.
From the list, select "ActionifsomethinghaschangedonboththePCandinKeySoft?currently(option)" where (option) is one of the options listed and explained below. These options define what will always happen at a conflict.
To change the setting, press the hotkey for the option of your choice.
These are the options followed by their hotkeys:
* "Asktheusertochoose"A. Choose this option if you wish to make a judgment call on every conflict individually.
* "ChooseKeySoftscopy"K. Choose this option if you trust the KeySoft records completely over Outlook.
* "ChoosethePCscopy"P. Choose this option if you trust the Outlook records completely over KeySoft.
* "Leavebothunchanged"L. Choose this option if you don't wish to synchronize either side at this stage.
KeySync identifies conflicts before processing them, and if you have selected "Asktheusertochoose", KeySync will query all the conflicts first and then do the processing. At this point, KeySync offers the other three options to you  "ChooseKeySoftscopy", "ChoosethePCscopy", and "Leavebothunchanged"; to select one, press its hotkey. The affected record is identified but not the actual cause of the conflict. If you are sure which copy is the version you wish to keep, select one of the Choose Copy options. If you are unsure of the cause of the conflict, select "Leavebothunchanged", so you can review the two copies later and with that information, rerun KeySync and choose the appropriate copy when prompted again.


12.14.5 Duplicates.
Duplicates are records that KeySync recognizes as possibly being the same as each other, but that have not previously been synchronized. In the Address list, duplicates occur when there is an address record on Outlook and one on KeyList with exactly the same first and last name. In the Planner, duplicates occur where Outlook and KeyPlan have either exactly the same title and start time, or start time and duration. While they may be defined differently, KeySoft handles Planner and Address List duplicates the same way.
When you first synchronize, if you have been double entering contacts or appointments, you may have many duplicates, but once these are resolved, a duplicate will only occur when you enter duplicate records separately onto the BrailleNote PK and your PC.
For example, you know two people called Joseph Brown, and so the address records are not duplicates at all, bearing in mind that the only data that is compared are the first and last names. However if they are the same person, you can choose one record or the other from which to make both copies. Or in KeyPlan, you set up a recurring appointment for a meeting at 10am on Mondays, and the meeting chairperson sets a recurring appointment up for all attendees in Outlook for the same time. As they have the same start time and duration, KeySync will recognize them as duplicates.
Resolving duplicates is handled quite differently to conflicts, because they occur so differently  predictably you may have a lot of duplicates the very first time you synchronize, but hardly any after that, as opposed to conflicts, which only show up once you get into the synchronizing habit. For example, there are no global settings for what happens to a duplicate; instead you have a selection of actions available when one shows up.


12.14.5.1 How to resolve a duplicate.
You have started the synchronization process as described more fully in 12.14.3.2 How to Synchronize for the first time. In the prompts quoted in the procedure below, the word (identifier) in brackets is a placeholder for the First and Last name of an address record or the date, time and title of an appointment.
KeySync displays: "Thereappearstobeaduplicatefor(identifier).Option?"
* These are the available options followed by their hotkeys:
* "ChooseKeySoftscopy"K. Choose this option if you trust the KeySoft record completely over Outlook.
* "ChoosethePCscopy"P. Choose this option if you trust the Outlook record completely over KeySoft.
* "Keepbothcopies"B. Choose this option to keep both copies as they are if a) you know the two records are not meant to be the same, or b) they are supposed to be the same but you are not sure which one you wish to choose as the master record.
* "UpdateallduplicatesfromKeySoftcopies"S. Choose this option if, during this synchronization session, you will want this and any subsequent duplicates to be updated on both sides from KeyList or KeyPlan.
* "UpdateallduplicatesfromPCcopies"C. Choose this option if, during this synchronization session, you will want this and any subsequent duplicates to be updated on both sides from Outlook.
* "Keepbothcopiesforallduplicates"A. Choose this option if, during this synchronization session, you will want both copies of this and any subsequent duplicates to stay as they are.
* Options B and A, both of which are for keeping copies as they are, behave differently to the conflict option L for "leavebothcopiesunchanged". Once you select either B or A, KeySync assumes that they are not duplicates but unrelated records, and therefore won't ask you next time. So, if you chose these options in order to review the copies and decide which one to keep as the synchronized copy, you will have to delete the other copy manually. The next time you run synchronization, the remaining copy will be synchronized across to the other system.


12.14.5.2 Restoring and deleting records.
If you delete one copy of a pair of synchronized records, during the synchronization process, you will have the opportunity to restore or delete it. However if both copies are deleted, they are both gone for good.
In the prompts quoted in the procedure below, the word (identifier) in brackets is a placeholder for the First and Last name of an address record or the date, time and title of an appointment.
At the delete prompt: "(identifier)hasbeendeletedfromthe(PC/BrailleNotePK).Option?" you can choose from the following options:
Restore this item. R
Delete this item D.
Always restore deleted items A.
Always delete deleted items E.
Options R and D apply only to the currently mentioned item. Options A and E apply to all of the items deleted since the last synchronization. Only select A or E if you are sure that all the changes to that device, be it the BrailleNote PK or the PC, are the accurate ones.
Because by choosing to delete items, they are then unrecoverable, there are safety messages that appear after you choose options D or E:
For D  deleting one item, the message reads, "Youareabouttodelete(identifier).Areyousure?"
For E  deleting several items, the message reads, "Youareabouttodelete(x)items.Areyousure?" where x is the number of items.
Press Y for Yes, or N for No. If you select Y, the synchronization process continues. Select N and you will return to the deletion options prompt.


12.14.5.3 Editing Considerations.
This information applies to the Notes field in an Address List record, and to the Location, Title and Notes fields of an Appointment in the Planner.
In order for KeySoft and MS Outlook to speak to each other, they need a common language, and that is text. This means that if you use contracted Braille entry on your BrailleNote PK in one of the fields mentioned above, you may notice a slight change to an entry after synchronizing if that entry has been changed at the Outlook end. This is because the contracted Braille you originally typed for this entry has been replaced with the text from Outlook, but if you are using contracted Braille as your preferred reading grade, it should appear the same because of the BrailleNote PK's onthefly translation.
There are two implications of this process  firstly there may be changes to the way the contracted Braille appears, caused by back and forward translating from Braille to text to Braille, and secondly when editing any fields. Instead of editing in contracted Braille, you will need to use computer Braille.


12.14.6 Synchronizing the Address List.
KeySync works by pairing Outlook and KeyList records with each other. It initially identifies pairs of records by looking for identical first and last name fields on each side, and creates copies of single records to make them into a pair. After that, any changes to the pairs are updated when you synchronize. KeySync works with the whole KeyList address database on the BrailleNote PK, and on Outlook the main Contacts folder, not including any subfolders or renamed contacts folders or any group or distribution lists set up on Outlook.
KeySync carries out the following functions:
When you add a new address record to either KeyList or Outlook, KeySync will add the record to the other system.
When you delete an address record in either KeyList or Outlook, KeySync will ask whether you want to delete it from the other system, or restore it.
Note: When you delete both copies of a record, they are gone for good.
When you make a change to an existing address record in either KeyList or Outlook, KeySync will update the other system with the changes.
When you make changes to the same record on both sides, KeySync will detect the conflict and ask you what you want it to do.
Here are some examples:
1. Initially, your friend Andie is in your BrailleNote PK as Andie Brown, but in Outlook as Andrea Brown. Both records are synchronized across as the names are not identical, and you can delete whichever one you don't wish to keep at both ends.
2. You update Kyle Jones' email address on the BrailleNote PK but not on your PC. When you run KeySync, it automatically updates Outlook with the new email address.
3. You update a customer's mobile phone number on Outlook, but when you try to ring her while out of the office, you find it is incorrect. You get the correct number and enter it into KeyList as you have your BrailleNote PK with you. When you run KeySync, the conflict will be detected and as you have set KeySync to always ask you about a conflict, you tell it to use the KeySoft copy.
4. On Outlook, you delete the contact record for a supplier that you no longer use. When you synchronize, KeySync asks if you wish to delete it off KeyList, or restore it to Outlook. You select the delete option and wipe it completely.


12.14.6.1 Fields.
Because there are a lot more fields in an Outlook Contacts record than in a KeyList address record, and they have different names, only the fields that are in both systems are synchronized. The pairs in order of KeyList then Outlook are:
Last Name	Name, Last
First name	Name, First
Middle Name	Name, Middle
Title	Name, Title
Home Phone	Home, Phone
Business Phone 	Business, Phone
Cell Phone	Home, Mobile
Home Email	Email Address
Business Email	Email Address 2
Home Fax 	Home Fax
Business Fax 	Business Fax
Street Address	Home Address
Street Address Line 2	Home Address
Street Address Line 3	Home Address
City	Home Address City
State or County	Home Address State
Zip or Postcode	Home Address Zip
Home Country	Home Country
Business Title	Job Title
Company Name	Company
Department	Department
Business Street Address	Business Address
Business Street Address Line 2	Business Address
Business Street Address Line 3	Business Address
Business City	Business Address City
Business State or County	Business Address State
Business Zip or Postcode	Business Address Zip
Business Country	Business Country
Web Page	Web Page
Notes	Notes


12.14.6.2 Unused Fields in Outlook.
The fields in an Outlook record that are not synchronized by KeySync are not generally affected by the synchronizing process. However, if you delete a previously synchronized record off KeySoft, and during synchronization choose to delete the Outlook record as well, the entire Outlook record will be deleted, including the unused fields.


12.14.6.3 Note on Area Codes.
It is a characteristic of Outlook that if you do not put an area code onto a phone number, it fills in the default country and area code for you, regardless of whether it is correct or not, and while you can change them, you cannot delete these codes entirely, so you have to have these codes even if the number is local. The phone number fields in KeyList do not do this, however; they simply take whatever numeric combination you type into them. This means that if a number in a KeyList record without a country and area code synchronizes to Outlook, Outlook will add the default one at the Outlook end. And the next time you synchronize, those codes will synchronize back to KeyList. However if you type a country and area code in KeyList, using a space between each code, Outlook will recognize these and sort them into the appropriate fields. For example, the number +1 415 8206820 in KeyList will synchronize accurately into Outlook.


12.14.6.4 Notes on Refreshing Outlook.
If you happen to be displaying an individual contact record when you synchronize, the display does not automatically refresh itself with the new information. It will however refresh once you close it.


12.14.7 Synchronizing the Planner.
12.14.7.1 Overlapping Appointments.
Overlapping appointments happen when two appointments are scheduled in all or partly the same timeframe, for example one for 10am  11am and one for 10.30am  12noon on the same day. Both MS Outlook and KeyPlan will allow you to schedule these appointments, although you will get a notification message from either system. However in this section we are just going to look at the BrailleNote PK end of the process and overlapping appointments that occur when synchronizing with Outlook.
When synchronizing, there is a greater chance of getting unwanted overlapping appointments caused by scheduling on both systems. If you are synchronizing regularly, however, your current schedule will be fairly up to date in both systems, so overlapping appointments will be fairly uncommon. But just in case, KeySync will notify you of any overlaps caused as a result of the synchronization process, when the syncing is finished. This is different to conflicts and duplicates, which come up before the actual synchronization has taken place. The overlapping appointment announcement will only come up for instances occurring in the next 365 days.
The following procedure starts where the Synchronization procedure ends at step 10, 12.14.3.2 How to Synchronize for the first time.
1. After any conflicts or duplicates have been resolved, and the syncing is 100% complete, KeySync displays: "Finished Syncing Planner, x KeySoft items updated, x PC items updated" where x is a number.
2. If there are any new overlapping appointments, KeySync will display: "There are overlapping appointments, review them now?" To ignore them, press N. Unlike unreviewed conflicts and duplicates, these will not be displayed again. If you wish to review them straight away, press Y.
3. KeySoft returns you to the planner at this point, to the first overlapping appointment resulting from the synchronization. Once in the Planner, you can review any or all overlapping appointments using the two commands:
Go to next overlapping appointment: SPACEwithdots3456, and
Go to previous overlapping appointment: SPACEwithdots1236.


12.14.8 File Synchronization.
It is also possible to synchronize files between the BrailleNote PK and a PC. This means you can, effectively, keep copies of files on both your BrailleNote PK and PC at the same time, with a choice of having them updated automatically in either direction, or only when you choose to update them. For example, if you have a report that you may wish to work on while traveling to work, then on your PC, then on your way home, simply put it into the Synchronized Files folder on either your BrailleNote PK or PC, and when you ActiveSync, both versions will synchronize to the latest version.
File synchronization is not a KeySync function, but works with ActiveSync alone. So, even if you don't want to synchronize your planner or address list, you can still take advantage of this tool, and you don't need to install the KeySync PC software. Also unlike KeySync synchronization, you can synchronize files with more than one PC.


12.14.8.1 How to Set Up File Synchronization.
Follow these steps to set up file synchronization between your BrailleNote PK and your PC.
1. Connect to ActiveSync and say "Yes" to a partnership. Note: If you already have a partnership set up, in the ActiveSync window on your desktop, go to Tools then Options, and skip to step 3.
2. If you are presented with the "SelectnumberofPartnerships" screen and only want to sync with this computer, check the box for "Yes,Iwanttosynchronizewithonlythiscomputer". If you synchronize with more than one PC, however, it is fine to check the other box.
3. The Select Synchronization Settings window will display. Ensure that the Files option is checked, no others. Note: KeySync will still function if Files is checked.
4. A dialog box will appear telling you that a synchronized files folder will be set up on your desktop. Click on the OK button.
5. You are back in the Select Synchronization Settings window. Click on OK and a window called Set Up Complete appears. Click on the Finish button.
6. ActiveSync will set up a folder in My Documents called "BrailleNote PK Synchronized Files", for storing synchronized files. Likewise, it creates a folder called "Synchronized Files on the KeySoft System Disk of your BrailleNote PK. It is only the files you put into either of these folders that will be synchronized.
7. At this stage you can select how you want the synchronization to operate. From the Tools menu, select Options, then the Sync Mode tab. You have three choices; they are: Continuous, only at connection, and manually. Select the one that you prefer. Stay in this window for the next step.
8. Lastly, you need to turn off the Convert Files function (see Tip 2 in the next section for exceptions). This function is set up for handheld PC users, and converts files to formats such as Pocket Word and Excel. Select the Rules tab in the Options window, and click the Conversion Settings button. Select the "General" Tab and then uncheck the "Convert Files when" check box. Then click on OK.
Your File Synchronization is now set up.


12.14.8.2 Tips on File Synchronization.
1. The Synchronization folder on your BrailleNote PK will set itself up on the KeySoft System disk. Because of this, during a dots456 reset, any files in this folder will get erased. While the copies on the PC will still be available, if you synchronize again, these too will be deleted. So, if you wish to restore the PC copies to your BrailleNote PK, before connecting to the PC with ActiveSync, move the files out of the Synchronization folder on your PC and into another folder, connect, and then move them back. They will then be restored to the BrailleNote PK synchronization folder. However none of this can restore any changes made to the BrailleNote PK copy of the files since the past synchronization.
2. While the instructions for file synchronization say to turn off the converter function, if the file on your PC is a Microsoft 2000 or XP document, you may wish to leave the converter function turned on, and convert the file to Pocket Word. Alternatively, save the Word document as a rich text format file before transferring to the synchronize folder.



13 File Manager.
A file is the name given to any organized information stored in an electronic form. File types stored by the BrailleNote PK are word processor documents, email attachments, address lists, dictionaries, and so on. The File Manager provides tools for manipulating and organizing files using folders and a directory structure
To select the File Manager, go to the Main Menu and press F. KeySoft displays: "FileManagermenu."
As always you can review the options in the menu by pressing the ADVANCE and BACK navigation keys or SPACE and BACKSPACE, followed by NEXT or ENTER to select an item, or just press an initial letter. The File Manager comprises the following items:
1. Directory: To check all the files in a folder;
2. Copy File: To copy a file;
3. Erase File: To erase any file;
4. Rename File: To change the name of a file;
5. Move File: To move a file from one location to another;
6. Protection: To protect or unprotect any file. Once a file is protected, it cannot be accidentally erased or altered without first unprotecting it;
7. Translate File: Firstly, to translate a Braille file to a text file, or vice versa. The discussion about file translation starts at 13.14 File Translation.
Secondly, to import a file that is in some other format  ASCII or Microsoft Word for example, into the BrailleNote PK and convert it to a Keyword format. The file may be on a disk or storage card or brought in through the serial port.
Thirdly, to export a document from BrailleNote PK's KeySoft format into some other format; for example, ASCII or Microsoft Word format. The file may be written to a disk or storage card or sent out through the serial port;
8. Folder Manager: To create, rename or erase a folder or subdirectory.
General Caution: While in the process of copying or moving any files onto your FlashDisk from any location, never perform a reset. This can cause your Flashdisk to disappear and can cause corruption.


13.1 Selecting Files Folders and Drives.
Documents, folders and drives were discussed in 3.4 Documents Folders and Drives. Remember documents are just particular types of files and they are handled in the same way as far as the File Manager is concerned.
When you choose an option from the File Manager menu, such as Copy File, you are first asked to select the drive. The selection of a drive was discussed in 4.8.1 Selecting a Drive. The selection of a folder and file follows the same procedure as discussed in 3.5 Opening a Document.
There is another way of selecting a drive in KeySoft generally, which is not restricted to the File Manager. If you are at a prompt for a file name or folder name, and you have not had the opportunity to select a drive, then press BACKSPACE. KeySoft prompts: "Drive?(Lastdriveused),"
You can choose a drive, and then follow the prompts to select a folder and file.


13.2 Checking the Spelling of Folder or File Names.
Folder or file names are easy to check. When KeySoft displays the name of a file or folder, you can repeat the name by pressing SPACEwithR. Any punctuation and spaces within the name are not usually spoken. If you wish to hear the file or folder name spoken with punctuation and spaces included, press SPACEwithO, then H. To check the exact spelling of a file or folder name, press SPACEwithO, thenS.


13.3 The Directory Option.
To obtain information about a file, folder or drive, use the Directory option. From the File Manager menu, press D for Directory and KeySoft displays: "Drive?(Lastdriveused),"
You can select the drive and then the folder as usual. KeySoft then displays a list of files in the selected folder. Review the list in the usual way. Let us say that you are reviewing the files in a folder, and the file name "Frank"is displayed. If you press SPACEwithI, KeySoft provides information about the file. That might typically be as follows: "Brailledocument.Size:945.Lastmodified:Saturday24May2004,at8:21PM.Unprotected."
At the point where KeySoft displays "Listoffolders" on a particular drive, you can request information about the selected drive by pressing SPACEwithI.
This might typically be as follows: "Diskname:(name).(number)charactersfree.Disksize:(number)characters."
Similarly, you can obtain details as to when a folder was created by stepping through the list of folders presented after the "Listoffolders" prompt is displayed until your desired folder is presented, and then pressing SPACEwithI.
For details on how to view subdirectories, see 13.13 Creating Renaming and Erasing SubDirectories.


13.4 Folder Manager.
The Folder Manager allows you to create, rename or delete folders and subdirectories. From the File Manager menu press F, for Folder Manager. You can review the options in the usual way. You can also select an option in the usual way by pressing NEXT or just press the initial letter of the option name.


13.4.1 Creating a Folder.
From the Folder Manager menu, press C, for Create a Folder. KeySoft prompts: "Createfolderonwhichdrive?FlashDisk."
Select the required drive, and KeySoft prompts: "Newfoldername?"
Type the new name, of up to 250 characters and press ENTER. A new, empty folder is created, and you are returned to the Folder Manager menu.
Note that this is not the only place you can create a folder. You can create a folder at most "foldername"prompts just by typing a new name.
For instructions on how to create a subdirectory, see 13.13.1 Creating a SubDirectory.


13.4.2 Renaming a Folder.
From the Folder Manager menu, press R, for Rename. KeySoft prompts: "Renamefolderonwhichdrive?(Suggesteddrive)"
Select the drive, and then the folder you wish to rename. KeySoft prompts: "Newnamefor(originalname)?"
Type in the new name and press ENTER, or use the prompt editing commands as discussed in 5.17 Editing at a Prompt. to modify the original name, and press ENTER. The name is changed and you are returned to the Folder Manager menu.
For instructions on how to rename a subdirectory, see 13.13.2 Renaming a SubDirectory.


13.4.3 Erasing a Folder.
You can erase a folder and its contents, including unprotected, protected or hidden files and subdirectories, in one operation. Therefore it is important to check before erasure that there is nothing in the folder that you wish to keep before proceeding.
1. From the Main Menu, press F for File Manager and then F for Folder Manager.
2. Press E for Erase a folder, then select a drive.
3. At the FoldertoErase? prompt, press SPACE and locate the folder you wish to erase.
4. When you have found it, press SPACEwithdots56. KeySoft will prompt:Foldertoerase?PressENTERforfoldernamewhere foldername is the selected folder. Press ENTER. 
5. KeySoft prompts: "Erasefolderandallcontainedfilesandfolders.Sure?" Press Y and the erasure begins. 
6. If any files are protected, KeySoft prompts: "filenameisprotected.Eraseanyway?". Press Y, or A for All, if you suspect there may be others that you also wish to erase. If you wish to save the protected file, press N and the erasure of the other files will continue, however the actual folder will not be erased.
7. KeySoft displays the number of files and subfolders erased, then returns to the Folder Manager menu. 
Note that you can also erase a folder by pressing BACKSPACEwithdots14. 

13.5 Document and File Types.
When giving information about a file, KeySoft displays the file type in addition to the size and date, etc. The file type indicates what type of information the file contains and whether it is a Braille document, a Microsoft Word document, an address list and so on. It determines how the information contained in a file is to be interpreted by KeySoft. KeyWord, for example, recognizes certain file types and interprets these file types to extract meaningful information. In the BrailleNote PK file system, files can contain information that be interpreted in all manner of different ways. In KeySoft, files which contain text or Braille are called documents.
The following document or file types are supported by KeySoft:
Braille Document: A document type where the contents are interpreted as Braille characters and symbols;
Microsoft Word: The Microsoft Word, word processor document format;
Rich text format: A standard word processor format that converts formatting to instructions that other programs, including compatible Microsoft programs, can read and interpret;
Word Perfect 5.1: A file type used by the Word Perfect 5.1 DOS word processor;
KeySoft version 2 Braille: This is the Braille document format of version two of KeySoft, the version used by the Braille Companion;
KeySoft version 2 text: This is the text document format of version two of KeySoft, the version used by the DOS versions of KeySoft Companion, the KeyNote Companion and the Braille Companion;
ASCII text. An ASCII text document contains only ASCII characters. It allows only very simple formatting using, for example tab characters;
UNICODE text. A standard character encoding format that supports international languages;
Plain Braille. A standard form of Braille.
When reviewing a folder in the File Manager, KeySoft's default setting only displays files that are likely to contain text. This prevents system files from "cluttering" the list of files and limits the accidental deletion of system files.
KeySoft also provides the option to view all files in the folder. To select this option press SPACEwithX when the prompt "Listoffilesin(foldername)"is displayed. There are two additional file views available. These are: "Listofall,includinghidden,files and "ListofKeySoftfiles"
Each time you repeat the SPACEwithX key sequence a different type of file view is presented.


13.6 Copying a File.
This option allows any file to be copied to another folder or drive. You can also copy within a folder.
A file is often copied so it can be used as the basis for a similar document or as a template. You might also copy an important file to another disk for security.
Copying is a process of duplication, it does not remove the original file. If you wish to do this, refer to 13.7 Erasing a File. During the process, prompts use the terms "Source" and "Destination," which refer to the original file and its copy, respectively.
To copy a file, start from the File Manager menu and press C. KeySoft prompts: "Sourcedrive?(suggesteddrive),
Follow the procedure as previously described; select the required drive, and answer the subsequent prompts for folder and file name. The file is initially assumed to be a KeySoft type meaning that it may only be in Braille. To type the name of any file, remembering you must type the name in computer Braille, press SPACEwithX. The first time you press SPACEwithX, KeySoft displays the current entry type. The second and subsequent times, KeySoft changes the entry type. In the list of files, SPACEwithX can be used to narrow or widen the list of options as described in 13.5 Document and File Types.
After a source file name has been selected, KeySoft prompts: "Destinationdrive?(suggesteddrive)"
The choices of destination drive and folder are made in exactly the same way as in choosing the Source File name.
The destination file name is the same as the source file name except if a file is copied within the same folder. Then the words "Copyof"are put in front of the file name to differentiate it from the original file. You can, of course, rename file as described in 13.8 Renaming a File.
When a selection has been made, copying commences and after a few seconds you are returned to the File Manager menu.
If the chosen Destination File name already exists in the destination folder, KeySoft prompts: "(Filename)alreadyexists.Replace?"
KeySoft is asking if you want to replace the existing file. Remember that it cannot be recovered later if you change your mind. If you do want to replace it, press Y. Pressing N returns you to the File Manager menu without the file being copied.


13.7 Erasing a File.
To conserve disk space, or to make file management easier, you may wish to erase files you no longer need. The Erase File option accomplishes this.
From the File Manager menu, press E to select the Erase File option. KeySoft prompts: "ErasefilefromDrive?(suggesteddrive)"
Choose a disk, folder name, and file name in the same way you would choose a file to copy, as described in the previous section. When a file has been chosen for erasing, KeySoft prompts: "Erase(filename).Sure?"
This is your last chance to abandon this destructive process. Press Yto erase the file, or N to abandon the operation.
NOTE: Protected files cannot be erased until they are first "unprotected," as described in 13.10 Protecting a File.


13.8 Renaming a File.
The names of files often have to be changed as their contents alter with editing, or to avoid confusion with other files. This can be done using the Rename File option. From the File Manager menu, press R, for Rename. KeySoft prompts: "RenameFileonwhichDrive?(suggesteddrive),"
Select the drive, and follow the prompts for folder and file. Once a file has been selected, KeySoft prompts: "Newnamefor(filename)?"
Type the new filename or edit the existing filename and press ENTER. Editing the existing filename is the same as editing at a prompt as discussed in 5.17 Editing at a Prompt. Providing the file is not protected, the name is changed, and you are returned to the File Manager menu.


13.9 Moving a File.
With this option you can move a file from one folder/directory/drive to another in one action. This is different to the Copy file option in that it does not leave a copy of the file in the source folder. Otherwise it is almost the same procedure.
To select the Move File option, start from the File Manager menu and press M. KeySoft will display: SourceDrive?PressENTERfor(suggesteddrive)
Locate and select the file you wish to move in the usual way. When you select the file, KeySoft will display: DestinationDrive?PressENTERfor(suggesteddrive)
Locate the destination folder or directory. When you select it, KeySoft will display: Onefilemoved.FileManagermenu
As the prompt says, you are back in the File Manager menu.
You can also move a file by selecting it in the usual way and pressing BACKSPACE with M.


13.10 Protecting a File.
Files can be protected against accidental erasure. Once a file is protected, it cannot generally be changed, erased, or copied over with a new file without first removing the protection. It can however, be erased if it is in a folder you are erasing. In this instance, you would be prompted about the presence of a protected file. For more information on erasing folders, refer to 13.4.3 Erasing a Folder.
To select the Protect File option, start from the File Manager menu and press P. KeySoft prompts: "ProtectFileonwhichDrive?(suggesteddrive)"
Select the file to protect in the same way as choosing a file to copy, erase or rename. Once a file has been selected, KeySoft prompts: "(Filename)isunprotected,"or protected, as appropriate. Press P to protect, or U to unprotect, and you are returned to the File Manager menu.


13.11 Groups of Files and Wild Cards.
Often you may want to copy a group of related files, such as all letters to a particular company. You could do this one file at a time, but it is slow if there are more than 2 or 3 files.
To speed things up, KeySoft allows the use of two "wildcard" characters to specify a group of files with related names.
Any single character can specified by SPACEwithdots236. For example, the file name:
NOTES, followed by SPACEwithdots236,
would select all the following files:
NOTES1;
NOTES2;
NOTES3.
You can use the single character wild card more than once. For example, the file name:
NOTES, followed by SPACEwithdots236, twice,
would select NOTES13 and NOTES24, but would ignore NOTES7.
The second wild card is SPACEwithdots35. This is the multicharacter wild card, used to represent any group of characters. For example, the file name:
SCIENCE, followed by SPACEwithdots35 would select all the following files:
SCIENCENOTESJAN;
SCIENCE;
SCIENCE3.
To Copy, Erase, or Protect a group of related files, include the appropriate wild card characters in the file name that you enter at a "Filename?" or "Documentname"prompt. Use Help, SPACEwithH to remind you of the commands.
To select every file in a folder, use just the multicharacter wild card, SPACEwithdots35, as the file name. You might do this to copy the entire contents of one folder to another folder. If you save the copies in the same directory, KeySoft prefixes "Copyof" to the file name of each copy.
When using wildcards KeySoft gives the opportunity to confirm each file individually or to let KeySoft operate on all files without interruption. KeySoft prompts: "Confirmeachfile?"
You can select Y to confirm each file individually, or N to for KeySoft to perform the operation without interruption. If you select "confirmeachfile," KeySoft requests confirmation for each file before completing the operation and moving onto the next file.
For example, when using wildcards to erase files, KeySoft prompts: "(Number)fileswereselected.Confirmeachfile?"
where number is the number of files. If you press Y, KeySoft prompts for each file: "OKtoerase(filename)"
where file name is a matching file name. Y confirms the action for this file, N cancels the action for this file and A confirms the action for this and all the other matching files.


13.12 What is a Directory.
The idea of folders was introduced very early on in this user guide because this provides a convenient way to organize documents. When used in one layer only, we call them folders. However when folders are organized in a tree structure with any number of levels, we refer to them as directories. The distinction is not in what they are but in how they are used. It might help to think in terms of being in foldermode i.e. one layer, ordirectorymodei.e. several layers. Folder mode is the standard folder management mode in which the BrailleNote PK operates. The reason for having two modes is to make management simpler. If you never intend to use the directory structure, folder mode saves having to type slashes at prompts. If you do have a directory tree of several layers, folder mode will give you the topmost layer of directories only. You can then swap to directory structure to work in the subdirectories of the selected directory.
The directory structure is particularly relevant when importing or exporting files. For instance, you might want to import a file from a storage card. The card might be organized as a directory tree with several subdirectories.
If you find yourself comparing this with how MS Windows Explorer works, it pays to be aware that you cannot view the subdirectories and files in a directory in the same list. For example, if you are listing the subdirectories in a directory, no files will be listed. If you list the files in the directory, no subdirectories will be listed.
When in directory mode, a folder becomes a directory and this is indicated by a slash character /,appearing before the folder name. This initial slash represents the "root" directory, which contains all the other directories on this drive. The root is called the "parent" of the directories beneath it.
A typical directory name starts with the slash, followed by a directory name followed by one or more subdirectory names separated by "/." For example, a directory name on a PC card might be: "/storagecard/mydocuments/correspondence." Or a directory on the FlashDisk might be /flashdisk/general/letters.
What does this mean? The name can be broken down into the following parts:
The first slash which is the root.
"flashdisk" is a subdirectory of the root directory. In this case it is the FlashDisk drive.
The next "slash" is just a separator.
"General" is the name of a subdirectory of the "FlashDisk" directory. Its parent is "FlashDisk."
The next "slash" is another separator.
"letters" is the name of a subdirectory of the "general" directory. Its parent is "general."
This naming convention allows us to find a document or file in any directory structure.


13.12.1 Switching to a Directory Structure.
You can choose to use directories at any prompt for a folder name, not just in the File Manager. For example, from the File Manager Menu select Copy File and then select a drive such as the Flash Disk. KeySoft prompts: "Sourcefoldername?(Lastusedfolder)"
If you now press SPACEwithT, KeySoft replies, for example: "Sourcedirectoryname?/(Lastusedfolder)"
where "/(Lastusedfolder),"is the last used directory.
You can select directories in exactly the same way when using the File Manager, Directory option.


13.12.2 Accessing Files in Another Directory.
Following on from the previous section, there are two basic ways to choose a different directory at this point. You could type the full name, including slashes, etc., but this can be rather prone to errors, especially if you are not sure of the arrangement of the directories.
Alternatively, you can browse the directory structure to find what you want. This is rather like using KeySoft's menus. You can move "down" by selecting a subdirectory from a list, or move "up" by selecting the parent. 
You can review any list of available directories in several ways: To navigate down a list, press SPACEwithdot4,SPACEorADVANCE. To navigate up the list again, press SPACEwithdot1, or BACKorBACKSPACE. To go back up a level in the directory structure, press SPACEwithdots23. To make a selection, press NEXTorENTER. If you know that you are not in a low enough level directory to find the folder you want, you can bypass the "Directoryname?PressENTERfor/name"prompts at each level by pressing SPACEwithdots56 instead of ENTER.
Let's see how this works. For the purposes of this example, we will assume that we are currently in the "/General" directory on the Flash disk and we wish to go to the "/KeyMail/Attachments" directory. You could be at any"Foldername?"prompt on KeySoft, although the exact prompts will vary. The example is taken from the Open a Document function in KeyWord. At the prompt, pressSPACEwithT.
1. At the "Directoryname?PressENTERfor/General"prompt, navigate up to the parent directory by pressing SPACEwithdots23. KeySoft displays: "Directoryname?PressENTERfor/".This is a list of subdirectories of the Flash Disk.
2. Navigate down through the list until "KeyMail" is displayed. Either press SPACEwithdots56, or do the following: 
1. Press ENTER to select Keymail, and KeySoft displays: "Directoryname?PressENTERfor/KeyMail". 
2. Press SPACE repeatedly to see the subdirectories within the Keymail directory.
Regardless of which method you chose, KeySoft now displays "SubdirectoriesofFlashDisk/KeyMail."
3. Using one of the methods descried in Step 2, navigate to the "Attachments" directory.
4. Press ENTER. You have reached your goal. See what happens when you review this directory. There are no more subdirectories. Navigate back up to the "attachments" subdirectory. You can press ENTER, putting you at the familiar "Document/FiletoOpen?" prompt. You might now review this directory for files.
Directories are one of the most demanding concepts to master. Finding files in a complex directory structure can be difficult. Remember to change to directories when prompted for a folder name. Remember also that you can move back and forward through directories and up and down lists of available directories using the commands covered in this section. And of course, if in doubt, you can press SPACE with H at any time.

13.12.3 Relationship Between Folders and Directories.
All folders are directories in the root directory of a drive, with the exception of the folder called "None," which is the root directory itself. Subdirectories below this level are not accessible in folder mode.


13.13 Creating Renaming and Erasing SubDirectories.
It is possible to create, rename and erase any subdirectories using a variation on the same processes for creating, renaming and erasing folders. This is because, as discussed before, they are basically one and the same, only used in a different way. It is important to know how to do this if you find that you cannot erase a seemingly empty folder, as it almost definitely contains subdirectories that are not visible in that folder.
Three procedures are listed below in a step by step format. You may notice that the prompts refer to both folders and directories, but it still works! Please note also that if you wish to create a subdirectory that is deeper than root level, for example /general/recipes/brownies, this whole branch will be displayed at prompts that include "/foldername."


13.13.1 Creating a SubDirectory.
1. From the Main Menu, press F for File Manager and then F for Folder Manager.
2. Press C for Create a folder, then select a drive.
3. At the NewFoldername? prompt, press SPACEwithT. The New Folder prompt will repeat.
4. Press SPACE and search through the subdirectories (folders) until you find the one in which you want to set up the subdirectory. KeySoft will prompt NewFoldername?PressENTERfor/foldernamewhere folder name is the name of the currently selected directory.
5. Type the name you wish to give the subdirectory without a / before it, and press ENTER. KeySoft will prompt Directorydoesnotexist.Createnewdirectory?
6. Press Y for Yes. KeySoft displays: Foldercreated.FolderManagermenuYou are back in the folder manager menu.


13.13.2 Renaming a SubDirectory.
1. From the Main Menu, press F for File Manager and then F for Folder Manager.
2. Press Rfor Rename a folder, then select a drive.
3. At the FoldertoRename? prompt, press SPACEwithT. The Rename Folder prompt will repeat.
4. Press SPACE and search through the subdirectories (folders) until you find the one that contains the subdirectory you wish to rename; and select it by pressing ENTER. KeySoft will prompt FoldertoRename?PressENTERfor/foldernamewhere folder name is the name of the currently selected directory. Press SPACE to move through the list of subdirectories until you find the one you want then press ENTER. If there are any more layers of subdirectories, Repeat this procedure until you reach the one you wish to rename.
5. KeySoft will prompt, "Newnamefor/directoryname?" where the name is the directory you wish to rename. Press ENTER.
6. KeySoft will prompt NewNamefor/directoryname?where directoryname is actually the parent directory of the one you have selected. Type the new subdirectory name and it will update that, not the parent directory.
7. Press ENTER to complete the renaming. KeySoft will return you to the Folder Manager menu.


13.13.3 Erasing a SubDirectory.
Just as with erasing folders, you can erase a subdirectory and its contents, including unprotected, protected or hidden files and subdirectories, in one operation. Therefore it is important to check before erasure that there is nothing in the folder that you wish to keep before proceeding.
1. From the Main Menu, press F for File Manager and then F for Folder Manager.
2. Press E for Erase a folder, then select a drive.
3. At the FoldertoErase? prompt, press SPACEwithT. KeySoft will promptDirectorytoErase?
4. Press SPACE and locate the directory containing the subdirectory you wish to erase.
5. When you have found it, press SPACEwithdots56. KeySoft will prompt:Directorytoerase?PressENTERfor/directorynamewhere directoryname is the selected directory. Repeat this if necessary 
6. Press SPACE until you reach the subdirectory you wish to delete and press ENTER. KeySoft will prompt, "Directorytoerase?PressENTERfor/directoryname" where directoryname is the selected subdirectory. Press ENTER. 
7. If any files are protected, KeySoft prompts: "filenameisprotected.Eraseanyway?". Press Y, or A for All, if you suspect there may be others that you also wish to erase. If you wish to save the protected file, press N and the erasure of the other files will continue, however the actual subdirectpry will not be erased. 
Note that you can also erase a subdirectory by pressing BACKSPACEwithdots14. 


13.14 File Translation.
As well as creating and reading your own documents and books, you may want to exchange information with other people, especially via email. KeyWord can directly open a file of any of the supported types listed in 13.5 Document and File Types. KeyWord can also save a file as any of the supported types. The supported types include Microsoft Word format; the de facto standard for Word Processor document exchange. The following sections of this chapter are needed only when you specifically want to convert a file without going into KeyWord.
The Translate File option of the File Manager Menu allows you to take a file in ASCII, or Microsoft Word, or WordPerfect 5.1 and others and translate it so that it can be read or edited on your BrailleNote PK. This process of converting a file into KeyWord format is called "importing." Braille files created by another Braille system can also be imported into KeySoft.
The Translate File option also works in the other direction as well. You can take a KeySoft document and translate it to the format used by Microsoft Word, or WordPerfect 5.1, or to ASCII format and other formats. This is called "exporting." KeySoft documents can also be exported as Braille files for use by other Braille systems.
The Translate File option also translates KeySoft Braille documents into text documents, and vice versa.
Apart from an ASCII setup list, which specifies how documents are translated between KeySoft format and ASCII format, there are also setup lists for Braille to text, and text to Braille translation. These provide a lot of layout flexibility in the translated document if required, but you may not need to change any settings because the default settings have been chosen for typical usage.


13.15 Translation Menu.
To use the Translation Menu, start from the Main Menu, select the File Manager, and then the "Translatefile" option. The Translation Menu consists of the following items:
Import file;
Export document;
Translate between Braille and text;
ASCII translation options;
Back translation options, Braille to text;
Forward translation options, text to Braille.
Note that the ASCII translation options apply in the case of ASCII imports and exports including those to or from the serial port. The serial port options are included in the ASCII translation options.
The Translation Menu items are now discussed.


13.16 Importing Files.
To import a file, follow these steps.
1. From the Translation Menu, press I, for import a file. KeySoft prompts: "Importfromwhichdevice?PressENTERforfile"
2. The options are:
1. If the file is stored on a Compact Flash, SD or PC card, press Fto import from a File.
2. If you want to import from a host using the serial cable provided with your BrailleNote PK press Sfor Serial port.


13.16.1 Importing from a File.
After selecting "File" as the device to import from, KeySoft prompts: "Importfilefromwhichdrive?(Suggesteddrive)."
Select the drive. KeySoft then prompts: "Directoryname?(Suggesteddirectory).ComputerBrailleisrequired."
The slash character is used to separate the different parts of the directory path name. For a description of directory path name, refer to 13.12.2 Accessing Files in Another Directory.
You can accept the suggested directory, or type a new directory path name using computer Braille, or edit the old name. Alternatively you can press SPACE to review a list of subdirectories of the suggested directory. Next select the desired file to import when KeySoft prompts: "Filetoimport?ComputerBrailleisrequired."
Remember that you can press SPACEorADVANCEto list all files in the selected directory. If the file is of a type unknown to KeySoft, possibly a plain text file, you are asked, "IsthisaBrailleortextfile?" If you know that the file is a Braille file, press B. If it is an ASCII text, press T and KeySoft then asks if you want to translate the file into Braille. Press Y if yes or N if you want to leave the file in text format. When you have selected the file KeySoft prompts: "Destinationfoldername?(Suggestedfolder)".Select a folder.
KeySoft displays: "Text(orBraille)documentname?"
Next type the name of the destination file and press ENTER.If the file already exists you are asked if you want to append to it or replace it? Press A to append or R to replace. KeySoft imports the file or document and saves it as the destination file in the selected folder. KeySoft then returns to the Translation Menu.


13.16.2 Importing from the Serial Port.
After selecting "Serial"as the device to import from, KeySoft prompts: "Serial.IsthisaBrailleortextfile?"
If you are importing a text file KeySoft queries: "TranslateintoBraille?"
If you press Y to translate a text file into Braille, the file is converted into Braille when it is received. If you press N the file is left as a text document. Specify the destination folder name and file name in the usual way. When you have done that, KeySoft queries: "Hostreadytotransmit?"
Check that the host is ready to transmit, and press ENTER orY on the BrailleNote PK keyboard. On the host's keyboard, type any commands required to start transmitting the file. You should hear a periodic beep as the file is transferred. When the beeps stop, wait a few seconds and then press SPACEwithE.If the host stops transmitting or does not start KeySoft displays: "Hosthasnotsentanycharactersforsometime.ToexitpressSPACEwithE."
If you do exit KeySoft displays: "Fileimportcomplete."
You are returned to the Translation Menu.


13.16.3 Importing a Foreign Braille File.
Note that while you can import files that are in either North American Braille Computer Code format or in United Kingdom Braille Computer Code format, the importation process does not convert the Braille language of the file. If your BrailleNote PK is set to USA Braille and you import a file in UK Braille format, for example, the contents of the file appear strange when you read it with KeyWord. To read an imported file that is in another Braille language, you can temporarily change the language that your BrailleNote PK uses, then change it back again when you have finished. The Braille language your BrailleNote PK uses can be changed using the Braille display Options in the Options Menu as described in 5.4 Braille Display Options.


13.16.4 Exporting a Document.
To export a document press E, in the Translation Menu. You can export the document as one of the following document formats:
Plain Braille file;
Microsoft Word file;
Rich text format file;
Word Perfect file;
KeySoft version two Braille document;
KeySoft version two text document;
ASCII text file;
The original document remains unchanged.
1. Select the drive in the usual way when prompted. KeySoft then prompts:
"Exportdocumentfromwhichfolder?(Suggestedfolder)"
2. When you have selected the folder KeySoft prompts:
"Documentname?(Suggestedfilename)."
3. Select the document to export. KeySoft prompts:
"Exporttowhichdevice?PressENTERforfile"
The options are:
To export from a File press F.
To export from the Serial port press S.


13.16.5 Exporting to a File.
After selecting "File" as the device to export to, KeySoft prompts: "ExportasanASCIItextfile?"
1. To export as an ASCII text file press ENTER.To select another file type, press SPACEwithdots34 repeatedly to step through the list of file types that you can export. The available file types were listed in 13.5 Document and File Types.
2. When you have selected the file type, select the destination drive. KeySoft then prompts:
"Directoryname?(suggesteddirectory).ComputerBrailleisrequired."
3. Select the suggested directory, find the one you want in the usual way, or type the path name of the desired directory. Remember that the slash character, dots34, is used to separate the different parts of the directory.
4. After the file is exported you are returned to the Translation Menu.
To find out how to access files in another directory, see 13.12.2 Accessing Files in Another Directory.


13.16.6 Exporting to the Serial Port.
If you select "Serial" as the device to export to, KeySoft will display: "SerialcableonCOM1."
"COM1" is the 9 pin male connector at the left of the rear panel. A serial cable is provided with your BrailleNote PK. Of course you must connect one end of the cable to COM1 and the other end to a mating connector of a host; most likely a PC. Both ends of the cable are the same. The connectors are discussed in 2.6.1 Serial Port. The Serial Port settings are listed in the ASCII translation options list, which is discussed in 13.16.8 Reviewing and Setting ASCII Translation Options. Remember that the BrailleNote PK and host serial port must be set exactly the same to transfer a document.
When you have selected a device KeySoft prompts: "ExportasaBrailleortextfile?"
Press B for Braille or T for a text file. When you have selected the file type KeySoft queries: "Hostreadytoreceive?"
Prepare the host to receive the file and when it is ready press ENTER or press Y.You hear a periodic beep as the document is transferred. When the transfer is finished, you are returned to the Translation Menu.


13.16.7 Translating between Braille and Text.
To translate a document from Braille to text or vice versa, select Translate between Braille and Text from the Translation Menu. This is useful if, for example, you have written a Braille document which you now intend to save to a print format, but before doing this, you want to check out the inkprint formatting. You can translate it into a text document and have it reviewed.
KeySoft guides you through the translation procedure. Select the source folder name when prompted by KeySoft. Either type a folder name and press ENTER, or press SPACE to review the List of Folders. Alternatively to select a path name, press SPACEwithT.
To change the current drive, press BACKSPACE. For the Flash Disk, press F.For the KeySoft System Disk, press K.If you have a PC card installed you can press S for the Storage Card. To review the list of drives, press SPACE.
After you have selected the drive and folder, select the source file. Either type a file name or select it in the usual way.
Follow the same procedure to select the destination folder name and enter the destination file name.
If you type a document name that does not exist, KeySoft asks if you want to create a new document. Conversely, if the document already exists, you are asked if you want to append the translated document to the end of the existing one, or replace it entirely.
When you have entered the destination file name, the source document is translated to its complementary format. That is, a Braille document is translated to text, or vice versa. The source document remains in its original format, and you are returned to the Translation Menu.


13.16.8 Reviewing and Setting ASCII Translation Options.
The ASCII translation options are used by KeySoft when translating between KeyWord and ASCII formats including when exporting documents to the Serial Port.
To review and set ASCII translation options, select ASCII Translation Options from the Translation Menu. Press SPACE to display the ASCII Translation Options list. Each item in the list is discussed below. When you have reviewed the list, you can use BACKSPACEto move back through the list to check the settings. The current setting is displayed for each item. Remember that you must press ENTER after you have changed the setting. Press SPACEwithEto exit when you are satisfied with your settings.


13.16.8.1 Use line or paragraph format.
Press P for Paragraph, or L for Line. Press ENTER to complete the entry. This option determines the way that lines are terminated during document exporting or file importing. During document exporting, if the Line option has been selected, a carriage return is added at the end of each line. If the Paragraph option is selected, a carriage return is added only at the end of each paragraph, giving a line that is as long as the paragraph. The Line option is usually best when exporting to a communications program. The Paragraph option is most suitable when exporting a document to a word processor because it allows the text to be reformatted after it is received.
The Line or Paragraph format option also determines how KeySoft treats each incoming line of text during file importing. If the Line format option is selected, KeySoft leaves the text unaltered. In the Paragraph option, KeySoft removes single carriage returns. Where there are two or more carriage returns, or a carriage return followed by an indent to indicate a new paragraph, no change is made.
If you go into KeyWord and insert any hard carriage returns to format the file contents, these will be retained next time the file is opened in the BrailleNote PK.
When importing an ASCII file, for example a Braille book, that has a single space in front of each line, the left margin is automatically stripped out so that KeySoft doesn't interpret it as if every line is the start of a new paragraph.


13.16.8.2 Extended ASCII character.
The options are:
To convert extended ASCII characters to standard ASCII characters, press C. This options removes the high order bit. It is useful in situations where this bit may be inadvertently set.
To ignore ASCII characters, press I.This option removes characters with the high order bit set. It is useful where graphical symbols have been used extensively. For example, when boxes have been drawn around text.
To retain ASCII characters as extended ASCII characters, press R.Extended ASCII characters are 8 bit characters such as characters in foreign languages or graphical symbols. In most cases KeySoft can name or use the character. In other cases the character will be referred to as "charactern" where n is the ASCII value of the character.


13.16.8.3 Use of end of file character.
The options are N to turn on the use of an end of file character, or F to turn off and ignore the use of an end of file character. This option determines whether an ASCII end of file character (1AH or ^Z) is appended to a document being exported after the end of the text. In most cases this will cause a communications program to stop receiving text and save it on disk.


13.16.8.4 Use of line feed character.
Press N to turn on the appending of a line feed character after a carriage return character is exported. Press F to turn off appending a line feed character. Appending a line feed character may be required when exporting to a communication program depending on the program.


13.16.8.5 Baud Rate.
The baud rate is the speed at which data is transferred between serial devices. Type a new baud rate value if you know the standard values or press SPACEwithdots34 to cycle through the list of available values.


13.16.8.6 Parity.
Press N,E or O, for None, Even or Odd parity respectively. If you are unsure which setting is correct select none; this is usually preferred for short cables.


13.16.8.7 Number of data bits.
Press 7 or 8 for the number of data bits and press ENTER. Standard ASCII characters use only 7 data bits while extended ASCII characters have 8 bits.


13.16.8.8 Handshaking.
The options are S for Software or H for Hardware. Handshaking determines how the BrailleNote PK and a host computer control the flow of data from each other. Handshaking is needed if the BrailleNote PK or host computer cannot keep up with the flow of data when a high baud rate is selected. BrailleNote PK supports both types of handshaking. You know when it is needed because large blocks of data are lost when exporting documents or importing files. Try the software option first if information about the host computer is limited.


13.16.8.9 Transmit delay.
This is the delay between each character when exporting a document. It should be zero when using a communications program on the host. Where a document is being exported directly into a word processor or other program, a value from 1 to 5 may be used to allow the word processor to keep up. Use the smallest value which does not cause characters to be lost.
This is the end of the ASCII Translation Options list.


13.16.9 Reviewing and Setting Back Translation Options.
These are the general settings which are used during the translation of a KeySoft Braille document to a KeySoft text document. These settings are used throughout KeySoft whenever a document is back translated. For example, when exporting a Braille document. The first 6 items and the last item may be overridden in a document by changing the Inkprint Translation Options, as described in 6.5 InkPrint Settings linked with a Braille Document.
To review and change Back Translation Options from Braille to Text, select Back Translation Options from the Translation Menu. Press SPACE to display the Braille to Text Translation Set Up List. Each item in the list is discussed below. When you have reviewed the list, you can use BACKSPACE to move back through the list to check the settings. The current setting is displayed for each item. Note that you must press ENTER after you selected a new setting. Press SPACEwithE to exit when you are satisfied with your settings.


13.16.9.1 Type of paragraph boundary used in the source document.
The way paragraphs are formatted in Braille is usually different from the way the are formatted in inkprint. For example, paragraphs in Braille are commonly indented two spaces whereas paragraphs in inkprint are commonly separated by one or more blank lines. This option tells KeySoft how to recognize a paragraph in a Braille document so that it can be formatted correctly in the text document.
KeySoft needs to know what type of paragraph boundary is used in the source document. It needs to know this in order to correctly interpret where one paragraph ends and the next starts in the Braille document. There are 3 options, as follows:
1. For an Indented line, or one or more blank lines, press I. This is the suggested setting. For a new paragraph to be started in the destination document, the source document must have either a New Line followed by an indented line, or a blank line. Single New Line markers which are not followed by an indented line are not taken as the start of a new paragraph and therefore are not passed over into the text document.
2. For one or more New line markers, press N. This setting causes every New Line marker to indicate the end of a paragraph.
3. For one or more Blank lines, press B. Use this option if every line in the source document ends with a New Line marker and paragraphs are indicated by blank lines.
The way paragraphs are formatted in the resulting text document is not affected by this setting but is determined by the "Paragraphformat?" setting below.
This setting is also used by KeyWord to determine the paragraph boundary when the paragraph reading commands are used.


13.16.9.2 New line translation option.
This applies to Heading, Subheading and Lines styles of presentation and determines how New Line markers in a Braille document are translated.
To leave the line formatting Unchanged, press U.
To remove New Line markers and thereby Join lines together, press J.
To expand single New Lines into Blank lines, press B. This is the suggested setting.


13.16.9.3 Convert Braille Italics to Italics Font.
To have Braille italics converted to italics font press Y. To have italics ignored press N.


13.16.9.4 Include two spaces between sentences.
In Braille, sentences are usually ended by a period followed by a single space whereas in inkprint sentences are usually ended with a period followed by two spaces. To have a space after a period in a Braille document converted to two spaces after the period, press Y. To leave as a single space press N.


13.16.9.5 Suppress new page markers.
The places where you have forced a new page in a Braille document by pressing SPACEwithP are often not the correct places to force a new page in inkprint. This option excludes New Page markers in the Braille document from the text document. You can force new pages in the text document by using the Inkprint Inclusion option in the Braille document as described in 6.5.2 Inkprint Exclusion.


13.16.9.6 Include a blank line between items in outline style.
To save space in Braille, items in an outline may start on the next line, rather than after a blank line. If this is the case and you want a blank line left in the text document, press Y to turn this option on. Press N to turn it off.


13.16.9.7 Blank lines before and after a heading.
This sets the number of blank lines which are left in the text document before and after a section of text which has the Heading presentation style. The factory setting is 2 and 1. To change the setting, type the new number of blank lines before a heading, a comma and then the new number of blank lines after a heading. Number signs are not needed. For example "1,2."


13.16.9.8 Heading format.
This sets the format indicators to be inserted at the beginning of each line in a heading in a text document. These format indicators are: center the line, right justify the line, insert tab, fonts, underline, space, or force new line or new page. Entering format indicators here is the same as when searching for them. Refer to 3.12.3 Searching for Format Indicators for details. The factory setting for the heading format is: "Centerline,""Boldon."


13.16.9.9 Blank lines before and after a subheading.
This sets the number of blank lines which will be left in the document before and after a section of text which has the Subheading presentation style. The factory setting is 1 and 1. The same procedure as discussed in Item 7 above is used to change the setting.


13.16.9.10 Subheading format.
You can enter the commands to be inserted in the text document at the beginning of each line in the Subheading presentation style. You can use the same format indicators as listed in the Heading Format item above. There is no factory setting for this item.


13.16.9.11 Paragraph Format.
This item determines the format indicators that are inserted between paragraphs in the text document. You can enter a combination of New Lines, spaces and tabs. To enter a New Line press SPACEwithdots26. The default is 2 New Line format indicators.


13.16.9.12 Revert to paragraph style after how many blank lines.
When either the heading, subheading, outline or line styles of presentation are used, the style will continue in effect until another style is selected or the number of blank lines set here are encountered.
This is the end of the Braille to text translation setup list.


13.16.10 Reviewing and Setting Forward Translation Options.
These are the general settings which are used during translation from a KeySoft text document to a KeySoft Braille document. These options are used throughout KeySoft wherever a document must be translated into Braille. The items are generally similar to those for back translation, but there are differences to cater for the direction of translation. The first 8 items may be overridden from within a text document by using the Braille Translation Options, as described in 6.20.5.2 Braille Translation Options.
To review or change the settings in the Forward Translation Options list, select Forward translation options, from the Translation Menu. The 15 items in the list are as follows:


13.16.10.1 Types of paragraph boundary used in the source document.
KeySoft needs to know this in order to correctly interpret where one paragraph ends and the next starts in the text document. The options here are the same as for Item 1 in the Back Translation Options. Refer to 13.16.9 Reviewing and Setting Back Translation Options above for details.


13.16.10.2 New line translation.
This applies to Heading, Subheading and Lines styles of presentation and determines how New Line markers in a text document are translated into Braille. There are four options:
To leave the line formatting unchanged, press U.
To remove New Line markers and thereby Join lines together, press J.
To replace New Line markers with two Spaces, press S.
To have new lines in the text document start new lines in the Braille document but remove any blank lines, press B. This is the factory setting.


13.16.10.3 Convert italics font to Braille italics.
To have italics font converted to Braille italics press Y. To have italics ignored press N.


13.16.10.4 Suppress multiple spaces.
Multiple spaces may be used in a text document between sentences or for visual formatting. This option can be used to remove these from the Braille document during translation, leaving only one space.


13.16.10.5 Suppress new page markers.
The places where a new page has been forced in text are often not the correct places to force a new page in the Braille document. This option excludes New Page markers in the Braille document from the text document.


13.16.10.6 Ignore tabs.
If the text document uses tabs extensively for visual formatting, you can have these replaced by a space in the Braille document using this option.


13.16.10.7 Include capital signs.
Usually you would want capital signs included in Braille document, but if you are translating a text document where every word is in capitals, for example, then this option will become very useful.


13.16.10.8 Suppress blank lines in outline style.
This option enables you to save space in Braille by eliminating blank lines left between items in an outline.


13.16.10.9 Blank lines before and after a heading.
This sets the number of blank lines which are left in the Braille document before and after a section of text which has the Heading presentation style. The factory setting is one before and one line after.


13.16.10.10 Blank lines before and after a subheading.
This sets the number of blank lines which will be left in the document before and after a section of text which has the Subheading presentation style. The factory setting is 1 and 1. The same procedure as discussed in Item 7 above is used to change the setting.


13.16.10.11 Heading format.
You can enter the format indicators to be inserted in the Braille document at the beginning of each line in the Heading presentation style. You can include format indicators to center the line, right justify the line, insert tabs, and spaces, or force new lines or new pages. For details, refer to 3.12.3 Searching for Format Indicators. The factory setting is: "Centerline."
This sets the number of blank lines which are left in the Braille document before and after a section which has the Subheading presentation style. The factory setting is one and zero.


13.16.10.12 Subheading format.
You can enter the format indicators to be inserted in the Braille document at the beginning of each line in the Subheading presentation style. You can use the same indicators as listed in the Heading Format item above. The factory setting is 4 spaces. To enter a space as the first character in the Subheading, press ENTERwithB.


13.16.10.13 Paragraph format new line (two spaces)
This item determines the format indicators which are inserted between paragraphs in the Braille document. You can enter a combination of New Lines, spaces and tabs. To enter a New Line press SPACEwithdots26. The factory setting is a New Line followed by 2 spaces.


13.16.10.14 Revert to paragraph style after how many blank lines.
When either the heading, subheading, outline or line styles of presentation are used, the style continues in effect until another style is selected or the number of blank lines set here are encountered. The factory setting is two.


13.16.10.15 Size of indent for wrapped lines in the lines and outline styles.
Often a line of text in inkprint takes up more than one line in Braille. Sometimes this makes it difficult to find an item in a list or an outline when reading an embossed copy. This option does not affect the first line of each item in Braille, but if more than one line has to be used for an item, the second and subsequent lines will be indented by this number of cells. The factory setting is two.
This is the end of the Text to Braille options list.



14 Utilities Menu.
The Utilities Menu provides a number of generalpurpose functions. This chapter covers most of the functions available from the Utilities menu.
To enter it, select the "Utilities" option in the Main Menu. The available operations are as follows:
* Connect to ActiveSync. ActiveSync is discussed fully in 12.13 ActiveSync.
* Synchronization. This is discussed fully in 12.14 KeySync.
* Backup or Restore Files, which allows all working files to be backed up or restored to a backup drive.
* Pronunciation Dictionary, which corrects the pronunciation of unusual words.
* Date and Time Set, used to reset the internal clock.
* Application Program, which runs optional KeySoft software.
* Miscellaneous Options, which allows you to select a connection type for ActiveSync.
* Key Management  for keeping track of separately purchased KeySoft products.
You can select an item by reviewing the list and pressing ENTER, or by pressing the initial letter of the required item.


14.1 Backup or Restore Files.
You can use the Backup Options in the Utilities Menu to save and restore all KeySoft working files, including word processor and email documents, planner files and address lists. By default, KeySoft stores these files on the Flash Disk.
It is good housekeeping to backup your files to an external drive. This could be a storage card, an external memory drive, or a PC or network. This safeguards your information against loss caused by accidental overwriting or deletion of files and other mishaps. You may use the Restore option to restore your working documents or files in the event of a problem, or to return to an older version.


14.1.1 Backing Up.
From the Utilities menu, select the "BackuporRestorefiles" option. KeySoft prompts: "DoyouwishtoBackuporRestorefiles?"
If you want to backup your working files, press B, for Backup. KeySoft prompts: "Backupwhichdrive?PressENTERforFlashDisk."
Press ENTER to backup the Flash Disk. KeySoft prompts: "Backupwhichfolder?All"
KeySoft assumes you want to backup "All" folders. You would normally do a complete backup of all folders on the Flash Disk together with their contents. Alternatively you can backup a folder at a time if you wish. To backup all folders, press ENTER, or to backup one folder at a time, press SPACE to review the list of folders and press ENTER to select the desired folder. KeySoft prompts: "Makebackuponwhichdrive?PressENTERfor(suggesteddrive)."
Backups are normally done to a storage card, an external memory drive, or to a Network.
Select the appropriate drive from the drive list, then press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "MakeBackupinwhichFolder?PressENTERfor(suggestedfolder)."
The suggested folder name is based on the current date, and is in the form"June10,2005backup."Press ENTER to accept the suggested folder, or press SPACE to review the list of folders on the backup drive. Alternatively you can type in the name of a folder. If the folder does not already exist you will be asked to confirm creation of the new folder; press Y to do this.
The time taken for the backup process depends on the number of files being backed up, and BrailleNote PK continues to beep about once per second during the process. At the completion of the backup KeySoft confirms the number of files copied to the backup disk, and you are returned to the Utilities menu.
To speed up the backup process you can perform an incremental backup, which only copies files modified since the last backup. This procedure is described in the next section.


14.1.2 Incremental Backup.
Incremental Backup can be used to reduce the time taken to copy the files to the backup drive. Only those files changed since the last backup are copied. You should back up your files into the same folder used for the previous backup.
From the Utilities menu, select the "BackuporRestorefiles" option. KeySoft prompts: "DoyouwishtoBackuporRestorefiles?"
Press B for backup; then press I, for Incremental Backup. KeySoft prompts: "Backupwhichdrive?PressENTERforFlashDisk."
Press ENTER to backup the Flash Disk.
From this point on, the procedure is as outlined in 14.1.1 Backing Up.
Given that you are performing an incremental back up to an existing folder, KeySoft requests confirmation before backing up files modified since the previous backup. Even if you have only created one new file, you will be asked to confirm the replacement of the KeySoft.ksd file that resides in the Dictionaries folder. Press Y to confirm that you want this system file to be updated.


14.1.3 Restoring Files.
From the Utilities menu, press Bto select Backup Options. KeySoft prompts: "DoyouwishtoBackuporRestorefiles?"
To restore files that have been backed up, press R. KeySoft prompts: "Restorefromwhichdrive?PressENTERfor(drive)."
Press ENTER to select the offered backup drive, or select the drive which has the backup you wish to restore. KeySoft prompts: "Foldername?(suggestedfolder)"
Select the folder that you want to restore. KeySoft prompts: "Restoretowhichdrive?PressENTERforFlashDisk."
Your backup files are copied from the backup disk, and you are returned to the Utilities menu. BrailleNote PK continues to beep once per second during the process, and on completion displays the number of files copied.
If a file already exists, you are asked to confirm that you wish to replace the existing file with one on the backup drive. To replace the existing file press Y, to skip this file press N, to accept all files press A. You can press SPACEwithH to get detailed information on the date and time of creation of a file, and the file size of both the source and destination files, before hte back up process starts
Backup and Restore work on the entire contents of a folder. If you want to restore an individual file, you should use the Copy File option in the File Manager described in 13.6 Copying a File.


14.2 Pronunciation Dictionary.
The Pronunciation Dictionary allows KeySoft to correctly pronounce unusual words, and to expand abbreviations. KeySoft's accuracy is superior to most speech products, but proper names or technical words can be corrected by adding a suitably misspelled version to the pronunciation dictionary.
This is done by entering the correct spelling of the word, together with a suitable misspelling. Before speaking a word, KeySoft searches the pronunciation dictionary and if it finds the word, the misspelled version is spoken instead. Commands are provided to add, delete and change words in the pronunciation dictionary.
To access the Pronunciation Dictionary, start from the Utilities Menu and press P.The Pronunciation Dictionary Menu includes the following 3 options:
Add a word;
Change a word;
Delete a word.


14.2.1 Adding Words to the Pronunciation Dictionary.
If KeySoft mispronounces a word, you may add it to the Pronunciation Dictionary. 
1. From the Pronunciation Dictionary menu, press A.
2. KeySoft prompts, "Typewordtoadd." Type the normal spelling of the word, without spaces or numbers, and press ENTER.
3. KeySoft then prompts,"Typemisspelling."Type in a misspelling of the word, using only letters and spaces, which gives a correct pronunciation for the word. Spaces are useful for changing the stress. Do not pressENTERyet. 
4. To check the new pronunciation, press SPACEwithdots14.If it does not sound correct, change it with the prompt editing commands, or delete it by pressing SPACEwithR, and try again. If it sounds OK, press ENTER. 
You are then returned to the Pronunciation Dictionary Menu.


14.2.2 Changing Words in the Pronunciation Dictionary.
If you are concerned about the pronunciation of a word, you can review the Pronunciation Dictionary to check whether it is included. If it is, you can change the misspelling to improve the rendition.
From the Pronunciation Dictionary menu, press C. KeySoft prompts, "Typewordtochange."Either type the normal spelling of the word and press ENTER, or review the pronunciation dictionary by pressing SPACE repeatedly and select the word from there. KeySoft then prompts: "Typemisspelling,pressENTERfor(default)"
You can now amend the offered default by using the prompt editing commands, or you can type in a new misspelling. Before pressing ENTER, listen to the new pronunciation by pressing SPACEwithdots14. If you are not happy with the sound, continue to edit the misspelling until you are satisfied with the pronunciation, and then press ENTER. The latest misspelling is saved, and you are returned to the Pronunciation Dictionary menu.


14.2.2.1 Foreign words.
It is unusual to find a word which is seriously mispronounced, but people's names and foreign words may be exceptions. Typical problems are a shift in vowel sound, and misplaced stress.
To correct the way a word is spoken, misspell it phonetically, and use a space to shift the stress. For example:
Change "MikhailGorbachov" to "MikhileGorbachoff".
Change "Socrates" to "Socratees".
Change "TajMahal" to "TaajMahharl".


14.2.2.2 Substituting a Text String.
There are various reasons why you may wish to put a substitute text string in the Pronunciation Dictionary. For example, KeySoft correctly speaks many acronyms that contain vowels, such as "IBM".However, a less common acronym may be spoken as a word, so you may wish to use the Pronunciation dictionary to change the rendering. For example:
Change "ATM" to "ATM", or "automatictellermachine".
Change "NaCl" to "NACl", or "sodiumchloride".
You can change the way symbols are spoken. For example, KeySoft says "star" when it encounters the symbol often called "asterisk".If you prefer to hear "asterisk", you may do this with the Pronunciation Dictionary. To do this Braille an asterisk symbol at the "Typewordtoadd" prompt and then Braille the word "asterisk" at the "Typemisspelling"prompt. The pronunciation of the plural of the punctuation name also needs entering. To do this Braille an asterisk symbol followed by an "s" at the "Typemisspelling" prompt and then Braille the word "asterisks" at the "Typemisspelling" prompt.


14.2.2.3 Braille Signs.
You can change the way KeySoft displays the grade 1 and grade 2 signs. For example, KeySoft speaks the dot 3 sign as "apostrophe", but you may prefer to hear "dot3". From the Pronunciation Dictionary menu, press A. KeySoft prompts: "Typewordtoadd."
Press the Computer Braille sign for "apostrophe", which happens to be dot3. For the misspelling, type dot 3, remembering that 3 is a lowered C in computer Braille.


14.2.2.4 Military Renditions.
Finally, you can change the word which KeySoft says when you press SPACEwithdots36, twice to identify an indistinct letter. For instance, if you prefer to hear "toffee" instead of "tango"when you check the letter T, go to the "Addword"option and press T, followed by an exclamation mark. For the misspelling, type "toffee".This now does as you wish, but it does not alter the pronunciation of the word "tango" in normal text.
You can have fun changing the way things are spoken, but take care! It can be a source of mystery later on, when you have forgotten that you made the change.


14.2.3 Deleting Words from the Pronunciation Dictionary.
From the Pronunciation Dictionary menu, press D. KeySoft prompts, "Typewordtodelete."Either type the normal spelling of the word and press ENTER, or review the pronunciation dictionary by pressing SPACE repeatedly and select the word from there. The word is deleted and you are returned to the Pronunciation Dictionary Menu.


14.3 Date and Time Set.
Follow these steps to set KeySoft's internal clock and calendar. Remember that at each point in the process you can obtain relevant help by pressing SPACEwithH.
1. From the Utilities menu, press D for Date and time set. 
2. KeySoft prompts: "Dateformat?(default).PressENTERforUSA."Press S for USA format, which is: month/day/year, or K for UK format which is: day/month/year. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. To leave the date format unchanged, just press ENTER. 
3. 
4. KeySoft prompts: "Timeformat?PressENTERfor12hour."Press A for 12 hour or B for 24 hour clock format, followed by ENTER. To leave the time format unchanged, just press ENTER. 
5. KeySoft prompts: "Time?PressENTERfor(currenttime)."Enter the time, without number signs, in the form: hh:mm, where "hh" is hours and "mm" is minutes, separated by a colon. You may abbreviate an entry with fewer digits and no separator if it is unambiguous. In 12 hour format, follow the minutes by a space and then A or P to denote before noon and after noon. Press ENTER.
6. KeySoft prompts: "Date?PressENTERfor(currentdate)."If the date is correct, press ENTER to retain it, or enter a new date. If USA date format has been selected, enter the date in the form: month/day/year, such as 4/22/05for April 22, 2005. If UK date format has been selected, enter the date in the form: day/month/year, such as 25/02/05for 25 February 2005. When you have typed the date, press ENTER.
As an alternative to entering the date, you may move around the calendar until the date you want is displayed. To move back or forward a day at a time press SPACEwithdot3ordot6. To move a week at a time press SPACEwithdots2or5. To move a month at a time press SPACEwithdots1or4. To move a year at a time press SPACEwithdots23or56. After the date entry is made, you are returned to the Utilities menu.


14.4 Key Management.
The purpose of this menu item is to give you access to information about what kind of addon software products you have installed on your BrailleNote PK. There are two options on the Key Management Menu as follows:
Enter a new product key  If you purchase an add on software product, sometimes part of the installation process may require typing in a security code. This is the place where one would do that. If it is necessary, instructions for correct usage will be included in the add on software's documentation.
System Options  If you press ENTER at this option, the BrailleNote PK will display a list of addon software products. This includes extra languages, software maintenance agreements etc.


14.5 Miscellaneous Options.
The Miscellaneous Options setup list contains two items. The first allows you to choose which connectivity method to use for ActiveSync communication. The second option provides a keyboard compatibility mode for users making the transition from Blazie notetakers.
To access the Miscellaneous Options, start from the Utilities Menu and press M.


14.5.1 ActiveSync Connection.
From the Miscellaneous Options setup list, press SPACE until KeySoft displays:
ActiveSyncConnection?(default)
where the word "default" shown in brackets is the current setting. The options are:
Serial port, press S.
Ethernet connection, press E.
Bluetooth connection, press B.
USB port, press U.


14.5.2 Compatibility Mode.
The keyboard compatibility mode is included to ease the transition to the BrailleNote PK for people used to the command structure of Blazie notetakers.
From the Miscellaneous Options setup list, press SPACE until KeySoft prompts: CompatibilityMode?Currently(default)
where the word "default" shown in brackets is the current setting. The options are:
To select KeySoft "native" commands press F followed by ENTER.
To turn the keyboard compatibility mode On press N followed by ENTER.
With keyboard compatibility mode On, the BACKSPACE key function of deleting the previous character is duplicated by the command SPACEwithB. The Block Commands menu is then transferred to ENTERwithdots23.



15 Accessories.
15.1 Media Player.
The KeySoft Media Player allows you to play music, readings and any other audio in a range of media formats, on your BrailleNote PK. You can play just about any size of media file from either the BrailleNote PK itself or a storage card or memory drive. When the track is playing, you can skip back and forward through it, stop, pause or resume the track as you wish.
The Media player transforms the Braille display into a progress indicator so you can monitor and change the progress of a track.
Other features include volume control that operates independently of speech, changing tasks with one keystroke, track information and the ability to listen to the audio track in the background while performing other tasks in KeySoft.
This section describes the features and their uses in detail.


15.1.1 Supported File Types.
The Media Player can play media files with the following extensions: *.wma, *.wav, *.mp3, *.mpa, *.snd, *.aif, *.aiff, and *.aifc.


15.1.2 Loading MP3 files onto the BrailleNote PK.
You can store MP3 files anywhere you would store any other file. However as they can be large files, they are best stored on a storage card.
You can transfer MP3 files from a PC onto a storage card plugged into your BrailleNote PK via ActiveSync or network client, load them directly onto a storage card using a card reader/writer, or download them directly off the Internet using the web browser on your BrailleNote PK.
While it is possible to play a media file on the BrailleNote PK while it is still located on a network, please be aware that the sound quality will be impacted by any variations in the network, just as it is when using a PC based media player. A much better quality sound can be achieved by copying the file to a storage card in one of the ways listed above.

15.1.3 How to play a media file.
Opening a media file to play is the same as opening a file anywhere else in KeySoft. The steps are laid out below. In this procedure, it is assumed that you know how to select a drive, folder or file from a list.
1. To open the Media Player, either press M at the Main Menu, or press BACKSPACEwithENTERwithManywhere.
2. The BrailleNote PK will display one of the following two prompts:
a) KeySoft prompts Playmediafileinwhichfolder?PressENTERfor(foldername)" where the folder name is "General" the first time you use the media player, and after that, it's the last folder accessed. Go to step 3.
b) KeySoft prompts Continueplaying(file)? where file is the last file you exited while it was playing. To start the track playing from the same point it was exited, press Y. To select a different file, press N and refer to a) above.
3. There are three possible actions at this point:
a) If the folder you want was offered at the prompt, simply press ENTER and go to step 4.
b) If you want a different folder on the same drive as the folder offered, press SPACE and select another folder, then go to step 4.
c) If the folder you want is on a different drive or on a card, press BACKSPACE and select the drive or card from the drive list. Select a folder from the list of folders, and go to step 4.
4. KeySoft will prompt for a file name. Select a file from the list. The track will then start playing.
5. When the track has finished, KeySoft will prompt, "Mediafiletoplay?PressENTERfor(filename)" where file name is the name of the last file played. At this point you can select another file, or exit the media player by pressing SPACEwithE.


15.1.4 How to stop a track from playing.
There are two different ways to interrupt a playing track  pause track and stop track. These commands only work when in the Media Player itself. If you are listening to a media file in the background of another task, they will not only not effect the media file, they will effect the task you are doing at the time instead. Therefore it is important to return to the media player by pressing BACKSPACEwithENTERwithM first.


15.1.4.1 Pause.
To temporarily pause a track, press BACKSPACEwithENTER. The track will resume when you press either BACKSPACEwithENTER again, or SPACEwithG.


15.1.4.2 Stop Track.
To stop the track and select another, press SPACEwithE. KeySoft will prompt, "Playmediafileinwhichfolder?PressENTERfor(foldername)" where the folder name is the last folder accessed.


15.1.5 Skipping Through a Track.
Sometimes you may want to skip through a track rather than listen to it straight through. There are two ways to do this. These operate while you are in the Media Player application, not while a media file is playing in the background of another task.
1. The Braille Display acts as a progress indicator for the track  once the track begins to play it will go blank except for a lowerg(dots2356) indicator that moves evenly along the Braille display as the track progresses. So, for example, half way through the track, the indicator will be on cell 16 of a 32 cell display and cell 9 of an 18 cell display.
As the Braille display represents the total length of the track, this will affect the rate and increments at which the indicator will move. For example, with a 5 minute track, it will move more slowly along the display than with a 3 minute track.
You can use the Braille display to skip along the track in either direction, simply by pressing the touch cursor buttons. The indicator will skip to the position of the button, and the track will skip to that spot as well.
There are also skip commands that use the keyboard. These skip commands skip forwards or backwards by either 1, 5 or ten percent of the total file.
They are:
Skip forward 1%	SPACEwithdot6,
Skip back 1% 	SPACEwithdot3,
Skip forward 5% 	SPACEwithdot5,
Skip back 5% 	SPACEwithdot2,
Skip forward 10% 	SPACEwithdot4,
Skip back 10%	SPACEwithdot1,
You can use these singly or repeatedly to skip through a track.


15.1.6 Restarting a Track.
If you are part way into a track and want it to start from the beginning, press SPACEwithdots123. This is the same command as used elsewhere in KeySoft for returning to the beginning.


15.1.7 Volume Control.
The media player volume controls are:
Louder:	ENTERwithdots46
Softer:	ENTERwithdots13
They operate independently from the speech volume, so you can change the volume without changing the volume of the speech.
This means that you can adjust the volume of the media player anywhere in KeySoft, independently of the speech volume, and vice versa.


15.1.8 Information on your media file.
There are two types of information available about your media file as it is playing  track information and elapsed time.


15.1.8.1 Track Information.
You can check out file information while playing a media file. The list of information available in order is Title, Track Length, Sample rate and bit rate. Time is given as hh:mm:ss.
For example:
Title: Sample.mp3
Track length: 0:1:1
Sample rate: 44100 Hertz
Bit rate: 128 kbps.
To access this information, press SPACEwithI. To pass from one item to the next, press either SPACE or ENTER. To go back to the previous item, press BACKSPACE. To exit from the information at any point, press SPACEwithE.


15.1.8.2 Elapsed time.
You can also find out the elapsed time, that is, how long the track has been playing and the total length of the track. To access this information, press SPACEwithwhsign(dots156). Time is given as hh:mm:ss.
For example: Elapsed time: 0:0:27 of 0:1:1


15.1.9 Changing Tasks.
Having set a track to play, if you then wish to work on a different task while playing it in the background, either press the hotkey combination for the new task, for example BACKSPACEwithENTERwithP for Planner, or exit to the main menu and take it from there. The hotkey combination for returning to the Media player is BACKSPACEwithENTERwithM.


15.2 Using a Computer Keyboard with your BrailleNote PK
As well as the Braille keyboard, you can use a normal qwerty keyboard for input into your BrailleNote PK . This works with keyboards with two types of connection  PS2 and Bluetooth. First we will look at how a qwerty keyboard can interact with the BrailleNote PK, and then at how to connect the two kinds of keyboard.


15.2.1 Setting up qwerty keyboard input.
To use the qwerty keyboard, set the keyboard input grade to computer Braille. From the options menu, SPACE with O, go to the Keyboard settings, then to Preferred keyboard Braille grade. Type Cand press ENTER, on either keyboard.
Changing the preferred keyboard input grade also changes the default document format to kwt text. The Braille keyboard still operates, so you can swap between them if you wish. The Braille display will also behave as normal, as its Braille grade is set separately to input. 
What you cannot do is use the qwerty keyboard to input into a Braille document, even if the grade is changed to computer Braille using the BACKSPACEwithJ command. However, if you think about it, there is not really any reason why one would want to do this. The whole purpose of having the option of a qwerty keyboard input is for typing a lot of text, and that usually means a text document.


15.2.2 Connecting to a PS2 keyboard.
PS2 is the standard connection type for most keyboards. It is a round male plug with a metal cuff about one third of an inch in diameter protecting its pins, and is slightly shorter on one side. The plastic casing is rounded on one side and flat on the other. Not all keyboards have PS2 connectors, some have USB, which is a flat narrow rectangular plug, and some older PS2 keyboards have a larger style plug. Modern PS2 keyboards however are readily available and usually very reasonably priced.
Included in the BrailleNote PK shipping kit are two cables that you can use for connecting the keyboard. If you are only going to connect the keyboard, use the short, serial to PS2 cable. If you wish to be able to access another serial device such as a PC as well as using a separate keyboard, use the double cable. For more information about these cables, refer to Serial Port. 2.6.1 Serial Port.
Simply plug the serial plug into the BrailleNote PK, and the keyboard's plug into the PS2 cable, and you are ready to go. To line up the PS2 connection so that the pins meet the holes, hold them with the flat side of each lined up. The two should join together easily that way.



16 Command Summary.
16.1 General Commands.
16.1.1 Operating Modes.
Speech On Request/Off/On 	SPACE with PREVIOUSnavigationkey
Braille On/Off 	SPACE with NEXT navigationkey
Braille Display:
Auto Display	N1andN4,thetwotopnavigationbuttons.
Slow Down	PREVIOUS
Speed Up	NEXT
Stop	Previouswith Next navigationkey
Back a Word	Previouswith Back navigationkey
Forward a Word	Previouswith Advance navigationkey
Route Cursor Beginning	BackwithAdvance navigationkey
Mode	Previouswith Next (Cycle x 4)
Start in one handed mode:	Hold down BACKSPACE while turning On BrailleNote. BrailleNote remains in onehanded mode until restarted in twohanded mode.
Start in twohanded mode:	Hold down ENTER while turning On BrailleNote PK.


16.1.2 In a Menu or List.
Move forward in a menu or list:	SPACE, or
SPACEwithdot4, or
ADVANCE navigationkey, or
push Joystick DOWN.
Move backward in an menu or list:	BACKSPACE, or
SPACEwithdot1 or
BACK navigationkey, or
push Joystick UP.
Select spoken item:	ENTER or
NEXT navigationkey. or
Push Joystick IN.
Jump to item:	Press firstletter.


16.1.3 Options Available at Any Point.
Return to Main Menu:	SPACEwithdots1to6.
Exit current option:	SPACEwithE.
Obtain help for current operation:	SPACEwithH.
Increase volume of speech:	ENTERwithdot4.
Decrease volume of speech:	ENTERwithdot1.
Speak faster:	ENTERwithdot6.
Speak slower:	ENTERwithdot3.
Raise pitch of speech:	ENTERwithdot5.
Lower pitch of speech:	ENTERwithdot2.
Stop reading, or acknowledge alarm:	BACKSPACEwithENTER
Date announcement:	SPACEwithO, D or
	ENTERwithD.
Time announcement:	SPACEwithO,T,C or
	ENTERwithT.
Stopwatch:	SPACEwithO,T,Sor ENTERwithW.
Keyboard Settings:	SPACEwithO, K or
	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithK.
Review Voice:	SPACEwithO, R or
	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithR.
Power and Battery status:	SPACEwithO,P.
User Guide:	SPACEwithO, U or
	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithH.
Next appointment:	SPACEwithO, N or ENTERwithN.

Repeat the last message or prompt:	SPACEwithR.
Repeat the last prompt with spelling:	SPACEwithO, S or ENTERwithS.
Repeat the last prompt with all punctuation:	SPACEwithO, H or ENTERwithH.
Options Menu:	SPACEwithO.


16.1.4 Switch Programs.
Cycle through programs:	FunctionwithS, or
	SPACEwithO,M, or
Go to Wordprocessor:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithW.
Go to Planner:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithP.
Go to Address List:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithA.
Go to Email:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithE.
Go to Book Reader:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithB.
Go to Calculator:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithS.
Go to Internet:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithI.
Go to Braille Terminal	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithT.
Go to Media Player:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithM.


16.1.5 At Folder Name prompt.
Type folder name and press ENTER, or
Cycle forward through folder list:	SPACE.
Cycle back through folder list:	BACKSPACE.
Select a directory path:	SPACEwithT.
To move up one directory level:	SPACEwithdots23.
Change Drive:	BACKSPACE.


16.1.6 At List of Folders prompt.
Cycle forward through folder list:	SPACE.
Cycle back through folder list:	BACKSPACE.
Jump to folder name starting with:	Press firstletter.
Hear disk name and spaceavailable:	SPACEwithI.
Return to FolderName?prompt:	SPACEwithE.


16.1.7 Within a Folder list.
Return to FolderName?
prompt:	SPACEwithE.
Select prompted FolderName:	ENTER.
Hear Folder information:	SPACEwithI.


16.1.8 At Document to Create prompt.
Type name of new file and press ENTER, or
Toggle document type to create:	BACKSPACEwithX.
Return to FolderName? prompt:	BACKSPACE.


16.1.9 At Document to Open prompt.
Type document name and press ENTER, or
Cycle forward through list of Docs:	SPACE.
Move back through list of Docs:	BACKSPACE.
Toggle Document type to view:	SPACEwithX.
Hear document information:	SPACEwithI.
Cycle forward through most
recently opened documents:	SPACEwithdots23.
Cycle back through most
recently opened documents:	SPACEwithdot1.


16.1.10 Other Useful Commands at prompts.
Singlecharacter wildcard:	SPACEwithdots236.
Multicharacter wildcard:	SPACEwithdots35.
Clear field:	SPACEwithdots356.
Upper case for computer Braille:	SPACE withU.


16.1.11 Options Menu.
The following items are accessed via the Options Menu, and have not previously been covered under 16.1.3 Options Available at Any Point.
Access Options menu:	SPACEwithO.
Grade of Braille:	SPACEwithO,G, or
BACKSPACE withG, or
Set Grade 1:	BACKSPACE with A.
Set Grade 2:	BACKSPACE withB.
Set Grade 0:	BACKSPACE withJ.
Braille Options:	SPACEwithO,B.
Visual Display:	SPACEwithO,V.
Insertion:	SPACEwithO,I, or
ENTER withI.
navigation On/Off toggle:	SPACEwithO,F.


16.2 Word Processor.
16.2.1 KeyWord text review.
Read continuously:	SPACEwithG.
Stop reading:	BACKSPACEwithENTER,orSPACEwithdots146.
Top of file:	SPACEwithdots123.
Bottom of file:	SPACEwithdots456.
Previous character:	SPACEwithdot3.
Current character:	SPACEwithdots36.
Next character:	SPACEwithdot6.
Previous word:	SPACEwithdot2.
Current word:	SPACEwithdots25.
Next word:	SPACEwithdot5.
Start of line:	SPACEwithdots13.
End of line:	SPACEwithdots46.
Start of next line:	SPACEwithdots45.
Reviewonly mode:	SPACEwithX.
Check or change Reading Mode:	SPACEwithM.
Check file name:	SPACEwithI.
Open Previous Document:	SPACEwithdots1256.
In Sentence and Paragraph reading Mode, the following commands review sentences and paragraphs.
Previous sentence:	SPACEwithdot1.
Current sentence:	SPACEwithdots14.
Next sentence:	SPACEwithdot4.
Previous paragraph:	SPACEwithdots23.
Current paragraph:	SPACEwithdots2356.
Next paragraph:	SPACEwithdots56.
In Line Mode, the same commands review lines and sections.
In Column mode, the same commands review the current word on the line above or below and section above or below.


16.2.2 Other Review Commands.
Find where cursor is:	SPACEwithwhsign(dots156).
Go to:	SPACEwithdots126.
Previous page:	SPACEwith126thenSPACEwithdot1.
Next page:	SPACEwithdots126thenSPACEwithdot4.
Go to next Tab position:	BACKSPACEwithT.
Define Place Marker:	BACKSPACE withD.
Jump to Place Marker:	SPACEwithJ.
Find:	SPACEwithF.
Find Next Occurrence:	SPACEwithdots356.


16.2.3 Editing Commands.
Delete menu:	SPACEwithD.
Backspace:	BACKSPACE.
Delete current character:	BACKSPACEwithdots36,
Delete current word:	BACKSPACEwithdots25.
Delete previous word:	BACKSPACEwithdot2.
Delete to end of sentence:	BACKSPACEwithdots14 in Sentence and paragraph reading mode.
Delete to end of paragraph:	BACKSPACEwithdots2356 in Sentence and paragraph reading mode.
Delete to end of line:	BACKSPACEwithdots14 in Line and Column reading modes.
Delete to end of section:	BACKSPACEwithdots2356 in Line and Column reading modes.
Delete to end of document:	BACKSPACEwithdots456.
Find and replace:	BACKSPACEwithF.


16.2.4 Formatting Commands.
New line:	ENTER.
New Page:	SPACEwithP.
TAB:	SPACEwithT.
Binding space:	ENTERwithB.
Format menu:	SPACEwithdots2346.
Document Layout:	SPACE withdots2346,L, or
	BACKSPACE withL.
Style of presentation:	SPACE with dots2346,S, or
	BACKSPACE withS.
Center line:	SPACE with dots2346,C, or
	ENTER withC.
Right justify line:	SPACE with dots2346,R, or
	ENTER withR.
Page settings:	SPACE with dots 2346,P, or
	BACKSPACE withP.
Template Menu:	BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots2346.
Insertion menu:	SPACEwithO,I, or	 ENTERwithI.
Insert the Time:	SPACEwithO,I,T.
Insert the Date:	SPACEwithO,I,D.
Insert calculator result:	SPACEwithO,I,C.


16.2.5 Commands used within Braille Documents.
Inkprint Settings Menu:	Format menu,I.
Inkprint layout:	Inkprint Settings Menu,L,or
	BACKSPACE with ENTER withL.
Inkprint only inclusion:	Inkprint Settings Menu,I, or
	BACKSPACE with ENTER withC.
Start inkprint exclusion:	Inkprint Settings Menu,S, or
	BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots34.
End inkprint exclusion:	Inkprint Settings Menu,E, or
	BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 26.
Inkprint translation options:	Inkprint Settings Menu,T, or
	BACKSPACE with ENTER withO.
Inkprint page settings:	Inkprint Settings Menu,P.
Font control for translated or print document:	ENTER withF.


16.2.6 Commands used within Text Documents.
Underline:	SPACE with dots 2346,U, or
	ENTER withU.
Font:	SPACE with dots2346,F, or
	ENTER withF.
Braille Settings Menu:	Format menu,B.
Braille layout:	Braille Settings Menu,L, or
	BACKSPACE with ENTER withL.
Braille only inclusion:	Braille Settings Menu,I, or
	BACKSPACE with ENTER withC.
Start Braille exclusion:	Braille Settings Menu,S, or
	BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots34.
End Braille exclusion:	Braille Settings Menu,E, or
	BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots26.
Braille page settings:	Braille Settings Menu,P.
Braille translation options:	Braille Settings Menu,T, or
	BACKSPACE with ENTER withO.
Braille grade: 	Braille Settings Menu,B, or ENTER withG.


16.2.7 Block Commands.
Block menu:	SPACEwithB.
Append block to clipboard:	Block menu,A.
Bottom marker insertion:	Block menu,B.
Copy block to clipboard:	Block menu,C.
Delete block:	Block menu,D.
Erase file and exit Keyword:	Block menu,E.
Insert file:	Block menu,I.
Move block to clipboard:	Block menu,M.
Paste clipboard:	Block menu,P.
Read block:	Block menu,R.
Store block:	Block menu,S.
Top marker insertion:	Block menu,T.
Zap block markers:	Block menu,Z.


16.2.8 Quick Mark commands.
Mark character:	Block menu, SPACEwithdots36.
Mark word:	Block menu, SPACEwithdots25.
Mark sentence or line:	Block menu, SPACEwithdots14.
Mark paragraph or section:	Block menu, SPACEwithdots2356.


16.2.9 Miscellaneous KeyWord Commands.
Find where the cursor is:	SPACEwithwhsign(dots156).
Query value of Tab stop:	SPACEwithwhsign(dots156).
Switch document:	SPACEwithdots1256.
Save document:	SPACEwithS.
Quit document:	BACKSPACEwithQ.


16.2.10 Spelling Checker Commands.
Spelling Checker menu:	SPACEwithdots16,thechsign.
Check from cursor to end of document:	Spell Check menu,C.
Document check:	Spell Check menu,D.
Lookup Word in dictionary:	Spell Check menu,L.
Word check:	Spell Check menu,W.
Paragraph or section check:	Spell Check menu,P.
Select Language:	Spell Check menu,S.
At the Spelling Checker "Option?" prompt, the following are valid:
Review the word:	SPACEwithdots25.
Ignore the word:	I.
Skip this occurrence of the word:	SPACEwithdot5.
Add the word to the dictionary:	A.
Correct the word:	C, new word.
Review suggested spellings:	S.
Look up a word in the dictionary:	L.
Read sentence containing word:	SPACEwithdots14.
Read paragraph containing word:	SPACEwithdots2356.
During Suggested Spelling Review:
display original word:	I.Second press spells word.
Spell current suggestion:	SPACEwithO, thenS.
Use suggestion:	ENTER.
Return to option prompt:	SPACEwithE.


16.2.11 When Looking up Word in Dictionary.
Spell current word in dictionary:	SPACEwithO, thenS.
display original word:	I.
Replace original word:	ENTER.


16.2.12 Template Commands.
Template Menu:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithdots2346.
Insert Field:	Template Menu,I, or
	BACKSPACE withI.
Force inclusion of line:	Template Menu,F.
Start conditional suppression:	Template Menu,S.
End conditional suppression:	Template Menu,E.
Mark comment line:	Template Menu,M.


16.3 Calculator.
16.3.1 Nemeth Math.
1	A or loweredA, etc.
Plus:	dots346.
Minus:	HYPHEN, which is dots36.
Multiplied by: 	dots16.
Divided by:	SLASH, which is dots34.
Equals:	ENTER.
Decimal point:	dots46.
Negative number: 	SPACE with dots36.
Percent operator:	dots146.
Left parenthesis:	dots12356.
Right parenthesis:	dots23456.
Set decimal places:	SPACE with dots46.
Clear calculation:	SPACE with dots356.
Delete last key:	BACKSPACE.
display calculation or result:	SPACE withC.
Read last number or sign entered:	SPACE withdots25.
Square root:	dots345.
Squared:	SPACE with dots345.
Decimal exponent:	X.
Log to base e of:	N.
e to the power of:	SPACE withN.
Log to base 10 of:	L.
10 to the power of:	SPACEwithL.
To the power of:	dots45.
To the power of 1 divided by:	SPACE with dots45.
Degrees:	SPACEwithD.
Radians:	SPACEwithR.
PI:	Y.
Sine:	T,S.
Arc sine:	SPACE withT,S.
Cosine:	T,C.
Arc cosine:	SPACE withT,C.
Tan:	T,T.
Arc tan:	SPACE withT,T.
Clear memory:	SPACE withK, then 0through9.
Store memory:	SPACE withS, then 0through9.
Add to memory:	SPACE withA, then 0through9.
Recall memory:	SPACE withM, then 0through9.
display memory:	M, then 0through9.
Announce Key Mode:	SPACE withW.


16.3.2 UK Math.
1	A, etc.
Plus:	dots235.
Minus:	HYPHEN, which is dots 36.
Multiplied by: 	dots236.
Divided by:	dots256.
Equals:	ENTER.
Decimal point:	dot2.
Negative number: 	SPACE with dots36.
Percent operator:	P.
Left parenthesis:	dots126.
Right parenthesis:	dots345.
Set decimal places:	SPACE with dot 2.
Clear calculation:	BACKSPACE with dots14.
Delete last key:	BACKSPACE.
display calculation or result:	SPACE withC.
Read last number or sign entered:	SPACE with dots25.
Square root:	dots146.
Squared:	dots23.
Decimal exponent:	X.
Log to base e of:	N.
e to the power of:	SPACE withN.
Log to base 10 of:	L.
10 to the power of:	SPACE withL.
To the power of:	dots346.
To the power of 1 divided by:	SPACE with dots346.
Degrees:	SPACE withD.
Radians:	SPACEwithR.
Pi:	Y.
Sine:	T,S.
Arc sine:	SPACE withT,S.
Cosine:	T,C.
Arc cosine:	SPACEwithT,C.
Tan:	T,T.
Arc tan:	SPACEwithT,T.
Clear memory:	SPACE withK, then 0through9.
Store memory:	SPACE withS, then 0through9.
Add to memory:	SPACE withA, then 0through9.
Recall memory:	SPACE withM, then 0through9.
display memory:	M, then 0through9.
Display Calculation Formula:	PREVIOUSwith NEXT.
Announce Key Mode:	SPACE withW.


16.4 Planner
16.4.1 Selecting a New Date.
At the calendar:
Move by day:	SPACEwithdot3ordot6.
Move by week:	SPACE with dot2ordot5.
Move by month:	SPACE withdot1ordot4.
Move by year:	SPACE with dots23ordots56.
In a planner page:
Go to a new date:	SPACE with dots126, then,
Select Forward or Back: 	ForB, then,
(where n equals a number)
Move by n day/s:	nD.
Move by n week/s:	nW.
Move by n month/s:	nM.	
Move by n year/s:	nY.


16.4.2 Reading the Entries.
Previous entry:	SPACE withdot1.
Current entry:	SPACE with dots14.
Next entry:	SPACE withdot4.
Note: In Notes, the above commands move by sentence or line as in KeyWord.
All entries for previous day:	SPACE with dots23.
All entries for current day:	SPACE with dots 2356.
All entries for next day:	SPACE with dots 56.
Top of current day:	SPACE with dots 123.
Bottom of current day:	SPACE with dots 456.
Note: In Notes, the top and bottom commands take you to top or bottom of the notes.
Read continuously:	SPACE withG, or
	SPACE with dots 1245.
Find text string:	SPACE withF.
Find next occurrence:	SPACE withN.
Appointment menu:	SPACE with dots 34.
Schedule appointment:	Appointment menu,S, or
	SPACE with dots 26.
Review or Modify appointment:	Appointment menu,R, or
	BACKSPACE withR.
Cancel appointment:	Appointment menu,C, or
	BACKSPACE with dots 14.
Hear next appointment anywhere
in KeySoft:	SPACEwithO,N, or ENTER withN.
Go to next overlapping appt:	SPACEwith3456.
Go to previous overlapping appt:	SPACEwithdots1236.
When the cursor is in the date line of a calendar page:
Number of appointments and allday events 	SPACEwithI
Date and days away from current date	SPACEwithdots156
When the cursor is in an appointment:
Summary of recurrences and alarm status 	SPACEwithI
Date and time and days away from current date	SPACEwithdots156.


16.4.2.1 Recurring Appointments.
Move to next occurrence:	SPACEwithdots356
Move to previous occurrence:	SPACEwithdots236
Patterns:	
Daily:	Type number of days
Weekly, Yearly:	Sunday 	Su
Monday	Mo
Tuesday	Tu
Wednesday	We
Thursday	Th
Friday	Fr
Saturday	Sa
every day	v
weekdays	d
weekend days	e
Note: you can type less letters for Monday, Wednesday or Friday as their initial letters are unique. You can also type more of the name of a day, for example, Thurs for Thursday.	
Weeks between occurrences	Type number of weeks
Monthly, Yearly:	first week	1
second week	2
third week	3
fourth week	4
last week	l
Months between occurrences	Type number of months

Number of Recurrences: (not all options documented)
Days	SPACEwithdot6
Weeks	SPACEwithdot5
Months	SPACEwithdot4
Years	SPACEwithdots56


16.4.3 Alarms.
Acknowledge alarm: BACKSPACEwithENTER
then:
Read alarm details:	R.
Cancel alarm:	C.
Postpone alarm:	P.
Go to diary entry:	G.


16.4.4 Miscellaneous Functions.
Move from planner page
to calendar:	SPACEwithE.
Hear the current time:	ENTERwithT.
Hear today's date:	ENTERwithD.
Query day, date and duration:	SPACEwithwhsign(dots156).
Announce Key Names:	SPACEwithW.


16.5 Address List.
Previous record:	SPACE with dots 23.
Current record:	SPACE with dots 2356.
Next record:	SPACE with dots 56.
Previous field:	BACKSPACE.
Current field:	SPACE with dots 14.
Next field:	SPACE.
Previous word:	SPACE with dot 2.
Current word:	SPACE with dots 25.
Next word:	SPACE with dot 5.
Add a completed record:	SPACE with dots 26.
Change current or other field:	BACKSPACE with dots 14.
Clear current field:	SPACE with dots 356.
Delete record:	BACKSPACE with dots 2356.
Copy record to Clipboard:	SPACE withB.


16.6 Email.
16.6.1 In an Email Folder.
Read Email:	ENTER.
Next field:	SPACE.
Previous field:	BACKSPACE.
Next Email:	SPACE with dots 56.
Previous Email:	SPACE with dots 23.
Move Email to Trash:	BACKSPACE with dots 2356.
Mark Email:	SPACE withM.
Mark All:	SPACE with dots 26, thenA.
Search:	SPACE withF.
Email Action Menu:	SPACE with dots 26.
Move forward by day:	BACKSPACE with dot 6.
Move back a day:	BACKSPACE with dot 3.
Move forward by week:	BACKSPACE with dot 5.
Move back a week:	BACKSPACE with dot 2.
Move forward by month:	BACKSPACE with dot 4.
Move back a month:	BACKSPACE with dot 1.
Move forward by year:	BACKSPACE with dots 56.
Move back a year:	BACKSPACE with dots 23.
Move to first email:	SPACE with dots 123.
Move to last email:	SPACE with dots 456.


16.6.2 In a List of Email Folders.
Select prompted folder:	ENTER.
Delete folder:	BACKSPACE with dots 2356.
Rename folder:	ENTER withR.
display Number of emails:	SPACE withI.


16.6.3 At Ready to send prompt.
Send email:	Y.
Return to Send to? prompt:	N.
Save email as a Draft:	D.
Abandon email without sending:	SPACEwithE.


16.6.4 Email in Trash Folder.
At Empty Trash? prompt,
Leave items in Trash:	N.
Delete items in Trash:	Y.
Review items in Trash:	R.
Options after selecting Review,
Move to next email:	SPACE with dots 56.
Move to previous email:	SPACE with dots 23.
Delete email being reviewed:	BACKSPACE with dots 2356.
Trash Folder Menu:	SPACE with dots 26.
then,
Restore email to original folder:	R.
Empty Trash folder:	E.


16.7 Unicode Characters.
These commands only function in Text or Computer Braille documents.
Unicode character entry:	BACKSPACE with dots 35.
Select Unicode Table:	SPACE, then ENTER.
Select Unicode Character:	SPACE or letter, then ENTER.
Review or change a way a
character is displayed in Braille:	Unicode Table, SPACE withD.
Review or change a macro for
a character:	Unicode Table, SPACE withK.


16.8 Web Browser.
Open a new URL:	ENTERwithO.
Go forward one page:	ENTERwithF.
Go back one page:	ENTERwithB.
Save web page:	SPACEwithS.
Refresh Page:	ENTERwithR.
Hear URL contents:	SPACEwithdots36.
Modem disconnect:	SPACEwithO then Select from Menu.
Progress Tone:	SPACEwithOthenR, select from list.
Internet Options Menu:	ENTERwithM.
Favorites Menu	SPACEwithdots235.


16.8.1 Move by Element.
"Click" on an item:	ENTER.
Read Input Control Prompt:	SPACEwithR.
Move to next element:	SPACEwithdots46.
Move to previous element:	SPACEwithdots13.
Current element:	SPACEwithdots1346.
Change move type:	SPACEwithT.
Link:	L.
Input Control:	I.
Heading:	H.
Frame:	F.


16.8.2 Move from link to link.
Move backwards:	BACKSPACE.
Move forwards:	SPACE.


16.8.3 Tables.
Table Mode:	SPACEwithM.
Query Cursor Position:	SPACEwithwhsign(dots156).
While in Table Mode:
Move forward one cell along a row:	SPACEwithdot4.
To hear the current cell in a row:	SPACEwithdots2356.
Move back one cell along a row:	SPACEwithdot1.
Move down one cell in a column:	SPACEwithdots56.
To hear the current cell in a column:	SPACEwithdots14.
Move down one cell in a column:	SPACEwithdots23.


16.8.4 History.
History command list:	ENTERwithdots236,
Navigate to current record:	ENTER.
Next Field:	SPACE.
Previous field:	BACKSPACE.
Next History record:	SPACEwithdots56.
Previous History record: 	SPACEwithdots23.
Forward one Day:	BACKSPACEwithdot6.
Back one Day:	BACKSPACEwithdot3.
Forward one week:	BACKSPACEwithdot5.
Back one week:	BACKSPACEwithdot2.
Previous Domain name:	BACKSPACEwithdot4.
Next Domain name:	BACKSPACEwithdot1.
Newest History record:	SPACEwithdots123.
Oldest History record:	SPACEwithdots456.
Sort by domain/day:	SPACEwithS.
Note: history is presented alphabetically for day or domain.


16.9 Stopwatch.
Go to StopWatch:	ENTERwithW,or
	SPACEwithO,thenT,S.
Stop or Start Stopwatch:	SPACE.
Set time back to Zero:	BACKSPACEwithdots14.
Stop stopwatch altogether:	SPACEthenBACKSPACEwithdots14.
Hear elapsed time:	SPACEwithR
Hear elapsed time again:	L


16.10 Media Player.
Go to Media Player:	BACKSPACEwithENTERwithM
Volume increase:	ENTERwithdots46
Volume decrease:	ENTERwithdots13
Pause track:	BACKSPACEwithENTER
Restart track:	BACKSPACEwithENTERor SPACEwithG
Skip forward 1% 	SPACEwithdot6
Skip back 1% 	SPACEwithdot3
Skip forward 5% 	SPACEwithdot5
Skip back 5% 	SPACEwithdot2
Skip forward 10% 	SPACEwithdot4
Skip back 10%	SPACEwithdot1
Elapsed time of total time	SPACEwithwhsign(dots156)
Track Information	SPACEwithF
Stop track and exit	SPACEwithE

End of Command Summary.


Appendix A User Settings for BrailleNote PK.
The following User settings should be setup and/or checked on the BrailleNote PK.


A.1 Speech; volume, rate, and pitch.
Refer to: 1.17.6 Setting Speech Volume Speed and Pitch

A.2 Time and date set, and in preferred format.
Refer to 1.22 Setting Time and Date: or 14.3 Date and Time Set.

A.3 Keyboard input voice setting; words, characters, or off.
Refer to 1.14.1 Help Messages.

A.4 Reviewing or reading voice settings; punctuation settings, numbers or digits.
Refer to: 3.8.1 Reading Using the Braille Display.


A.5 Braille language; US, UK, or Australian.
Refer to: 5.4 Braille Display Options, then Section 5.4.8 Braille Language.

A.6 Braille grade for keyboard input; grade 1, 2, or computer Braille.
Refer to: 5.5.2 Preferred Keyboard Braille Grade

A.7 Calculator Braille code; Nemeth math, or UK math.
Refer to 5.4 Braille Display Options, then 5.4.9 Calculator Braille Language.

A.8 Computer Braille language; US or UK.
Refer 5.4 Braille Display Options, then 5.4.10 Computer Braille Language.

A.9 Computer Braille; 6 or 8 dot.
Refer to 5.4.12 Display Computer Braille using 6 or 8 dots.

A.10 Spelling checker dictionary language installed.
Open the "DemonstrationDocument" in the "General" folder, and access the spelling checker by pressing SPACEwithdots16,thechsign. If the spelling dictionary has not been installed you will advised that there is no language currently installed, followed by a prompt to choose the language. Press SPACErepeatedly until the dictionary name is displayed, for example "USASpellingDictionary," then press ENTER.

A.11 Address list data base installed.
From the Main Menu select the Address List, then press A to add an address. You will be advised if the address list data base does not exist, followed by the prompt to create a data base called "AddressList." Press Y to create the data base named "AddressList."

A.12 Email data base installed.
From the Main Menu select the Email option, then press S for Setup, and select the "DirectoryofEmailAccount" item from the Setup menu. Press A to add a service. You will be advised if the data base for "DirectoryofEmailAccounts"does not exist, followed by the prompt to create a data base called "DirectoryofEmailAccounts."Press Y to create the data base.
You will then be placed in the entry list for the "DirectoryofEmailAccounts." Unless you wish to continue on and setup a "DirectoryofEmailAccounts" record, press SPACEwithE to exit, and answer N to the prompt "Addthisrecord?"


Appendix B Information on BookShare.
At the time of publishing, the Bookshare service is only available to residents of the United States. Up to date information on Bookshare.org and eligibility to join etc is available from their website: http://www.bookshare.org.
For information on the special offer for BrailleNote PK users as well as how to join, go to:
http://www.bookshare.org/braillenote

For membership information, go to:
http://www.bookshare.org/web/AboutMembership.html

To join Bookshare.org, go to:
https://www.bookshare.org/web/MembersJoinForm.html

For Frequently Asked Questions about Bookshare.org, go to:
http://www.bookshare.org/web/SupportFAQ.html

There is also a book available called "FindingebooksontheInternet", by BrailleNote user Anna Dresner, available through National Braille Press, which tells you how to find, download, and access electronic books from a variety of sources, including Bookshare.org. Sources for free public domain eBooks, as well as for commercially available accessible eBooks, are also included. For more information, including a link to the table of contents, visit:
http://www.nbp.org/ebook.html



Appendix C Troubleshooting the BrailleNote PK.
If the BrailleNote PK does not respond as you expect, there are a number of things you should check:
C.1 Make sure that the BrailleNote PK has power.
Connect the AC adapter. The BrailleNote PK should detect the AC adapter when the adapter is powered on even if the BrailleNote PK is switched off. The message "ACadapteron," is spoken when the unit is on standby, but not when turned fully off by pressing C1and C4 together.
C.2 Switch off then on again.
If the BrailleNote PK does not respond, leave the AC adapter connected. Wait 10 minutes, then try switching the BrailleNote PK off, then on again.
C.3 Resets.
There are three kinds of resets possible on the BrailleNote PK, each has a different function. They are described below.
C.3.1 Standard Reset
Perform a standard reset when:
 prompted to do so during an upgrade/new feature installation program to install new drivers and restart KeySoft
 the BN stops responding for any reason (assuming the problem is not that the power is off, or the battery is flat!)
 the BN generally seems to not be its normal self.
To perform a standard reset, hold down the two right hand control keys, C3 and C4, until you hear a deep chirp. 
You will lose data if you have to reset while a file is open in the word processor, the planner is open, an email is being written or the address list is open and changes have been made and not saved, before performing the reset.
C.3.2 Reset with 1 2 3 held down.
Hold down the dots 123 then press C3 and C4until you hear the BrailleNote PK chime.
Runs the original factoryinstalled software. Useful if an upgrade or addon has become corrupted and the BrailleNote PK will not start after a reset due to this. The data lost will be the same as above.
C.3.3 Reinitialize with 456 (Hard Reset)
If KeySoft still does not start, BrailleNote PK's memory may have been corrupted. If this has happened, then it is necessary to reinitialize the memory. Make sure the BrailleNote PK is switched on. Hold down keys 456and then C3 and C4. The BrailleNote PK should beep immediately. Continue to hold down 456. After about ten seconds silence, a chime should sound and the BrailleNote PK should speak. Release the keys. KeySoft reports the software version and prompts for the date and time to be set.
"KeySoftCE,version3.0x.Build(number).Theclockneedssetting.Dateformat.PressENTERforUSA."
Press ENTER or S for USA format or press K for UK format. Press HELPat any time if you need help. KeySoft then prompts:
"Timeformat.PressENTERfor12hour."
Press 1 for a 12 hour clock, press 2 for the 24 hour clock followed by ENTER.
"Time?PressENTERfor(time)."
Press SPACEwithH to obtain help on how to set the time.
"Date?PressENTERfor(date)."
Press SPACEwithH to obtain help on how to set the date.
Finally KeySoft displays:
"MainMenu."
C.4 Still doesn't start.
Telephone your BrailleNote PK Distributor for further advice.
General Caution: While copying or moving any files onto your FlashDisk from any location, never perform a reset. This can cause your Flashdisk to disappear and can cause corruption.



Appendix D Computer Braille Reference List.
The BrailleNote PK supports USA and UK Computer Braille in both 6 dot and 8 dot forms.
This Appendix contains 6 tables which give you the dot combination used for each ASCII character available in each of the supported configurations. The 6 tables are listed in the following order:
United States 6 dot Computer Braille  Lower Case
United States 6 dot Computer Braille  Upper Case
United States 8 dot Computer Braille
United Kingdom 6 dot Computer Braille  Lower Case
United Kingdom 6 dot Computer Braille  Upper Case
United Kingdom 8 dot Computer Braille
Each table has two columns. The first column contains the actual ASCII character enclosed in single quote marks so that it is read at all punctuation levels. The second column lists the dots required to obtain this character. Each table is divided into sections according to the type of character. For example, the lower case letters are in one section, the digits are in another, and so on. The sections are divided by a blank line.
Reading of this Appendix may be best accomplished by using KeyWord to select Appendix D from the Manual folder on the "KeySoft System Disk"
To find a particular character, first find the start of the relevant table. Next set your Reading Mode to the "Line Reading" option, by pressing SPACEwithM as many times as necessary. Now, using the "Read next line" command, which is SPACEwithdot4, start reading the first line of the table. As soon as you have heard the character name, if it is not the character you are looking for, press SPACEwithdot4 again to cut off the speech and instantly start reading the next line. If you determine that the character you are looking for is in another section, press SPACEwithdots56 to start reading the next section. Continue skimming through by line or section until you find the character you are looking for. Now let KeySoft read the whole line, and you will hear the dot combination for this character. 


D.1 United States Computer Braille
D.1.1 United States 6 dot Computer Braille  Lower Case
exclamation mark	'!'	2,3,4,6
quotation mark	'"'	5
hash sign	'#'	3,4,5,6
dollar sign	'$'	1,2,4,6
percent	'%'	1,4,6
ampersand	'&'	1,2,3,4,6
apostrophe	'''	3
left bracket	'('	1,2,3,5,6
right bracket	')'	2,3,4,5,6
asterisk	'*'	1,6
plus sign	'+'	3,4,6
comma	','	6
hyphen	''	3,6
period	'.'	4,6
forward slash	'/'	3,4
colon	':'	1,5,6
semi colon	';'	5,6
less than	'<'	1,2,6
equals	'='	1,2,3,4,5,6
greater than	'>'	3,4,5
question mark	'?'	1,4,5,6
underscore	'_'	4,5,6
grave accent	'`'	4
left curly brace	'{'	2,4,6
right curly brace	'}'	1,2,4,5,6
upright slash	'|'	1,2,5,6
tilde	'~'	4,5

zero	'0'	3,5,6
one	'1'	2
two	'2'	2,3
three	'3'	2,5
four	'4'	2,5,6
five	'5'	2,6
six	'6'	2,3,5
seven	'7'	2,3,5,6
eight	'8'	2,3,6
nine	'9'	3,5

'a'	1
'b'	1,2
'c'	1,4
'd'	1,4,5
'e'	1,5
'f'	1,2,4
'g'	1,2,4,5
'h'	1,2,5
'i'	2,4
'j'	2,4,5
'k'	1,3
'l'	1,2,3
'm'	1,3,4
'n'	1,3,4,5
'o'	1,3,5
'p'	1,2,3,4
'q'	1,2,3,4,5
'r'	1,2,3,5
's'	2,3,4
't'	2,3,4,5
'u'	1,3,6
'v'	1,2,3,6
'w'	2,4,5,6
'x'	1,3,4,6
'y'	1,3,4,5,6
'z'	1,3,5,6
D.1.2 United States 6 dot Computer Braille Upper Case
The following table shows the combinations which change when a keystroke is immediately preceded by SPACEwithU or when Caps Lock has been turned on by pressing SPACEwithU twice in succession.
'A'	1
'B'	1,2
'C'	1,4
'D'	1,4,5
'E'	1,5
'F'	1,2,4
'G'	1,2,4,5
'H'	1,2,5
'I'	2,4
'J'	2,4,5
'K'	1,3
'L'	1,2,3
'M'	1,3,4
'N'	1,3,4,5
'O'	1,3,5
'P'	1,2,3,4
'Q'	1,2,3,4,5
'R'	1,2,3,5
'S'	2,3,4
'T'	2,3,4,5
'U'	1,3,6
'V'	1,2,3,6
'W'	2,4,5,6
'X'	1,3,4,6
'Y'	1,3,4,5,6
'Z'	1,3,5,6

at symbol	'@'	4
left square bracket	'['	2,4,6
right square bracket	']'	1,2,4,5,6
back slash	'\'	1,2,5,6
carat symbol	'^'	4,5
underscore	'_'	4,5,6

D.1.3 United States 8 dot Computer Braille

exclamation mark	'!'	2,3,4,6
quotation mark	'"'	5
hash sign	'#'	3,4,5,6
dollar sign	'$'	1,2,4,6
percent	'%'	1,4,6
ampersand	'&'	1,2,3,4,6
apostrophe	'''	3
left bracket	'('	1,2,3,5,6
right bracket	')'	2,3,4,5,6
asterisk	'*'	1,6
plus sign	'+'	3,4,6
comma	','	6
hyphen	''	3,6
period	'.'	4,6
forward slash	'/'	3,4
colon	':'	1,5,6
semi colon	';'	5,6
less than	'<'	1,2,6
equals	'='	1,2,3,4,5,6
greater than	'>'	3,4,5
question mark	'?'	1,4,5,6
at symbol	'@'	4,7
left square bracket	'['	2,4,6,7
back slash	'\'	1,2,5,6
right square bracket	']'	1,2,4,5,6
carat sign	'^'	4,5,7
underscore	'_'	4,5,6,7
'_'	4,5,6
grave accent	'`'	4
left curly brace	'{'	2,4,6
upright slash	'|'	1,2,5,6
right curly brace	'}'	1,2,4,5,6
tilde	'~'	4,5
Delete	8
Delete	1,2,3,4,5,6

'0'	3,5,6
'1'	2
'2'	2,3
'3'	2,5
'4'	2,5,6
'5'	2,6
'6'	2,3,5
'7'	2,3,5,6
'8'	2,3,6
'9'	3,5

'A'	1,7
'B'	1,2,7
'C'	1,4,7
'D'	1,4,5,7
'E'	1,5,7
'F'	1,2,4,7
'G'	1,2,4,5,7
'H'	1,2,5,7
'I'	2,4,7
'J'	2,4,5,7
'K'	1,3,7
'L'	1,2,3,7
'M'	1,3,4,7
'N'	1,3,4,5,7
'O'	1,3,5,7
'P'	1,2,3,4,7
'Q'	1,2,3,4,5,7
'R'	1,2,3,5,7
'S'	2,3,4,7
'T'	2,3,4,5,7
'U'	1,3,6,7
'V'	1,2,3,6,7
'W'	2,4,5,6,7
'X'	1,3,4,6,7
'Y'	1,3,4,5,6,7
'Z'	1,3,5,6,7

'a'	1
'b'	1,2
'c'	1,4
'd'	1,4,5
'e'	1,5
'f'	1,2,4
'g'	1,2,4,5
'h'	1,2,5
'i'	2,4
'j'	2,4,5
'k'	1,3
'l'	1,2,3
'm'	1,3,4
'n'	1,3,4,5
'o'	1,3,5
'p'	1,2,3,4
'q'	1,2,3,4,5
'r'	1,2,3,5
's'	2,3,4
't'	2,3,4,5
'u'	1,3,6
'v'	1,2,3,6
'w'	2,4,5,6
'x'	1,3,4,6
'y'	1,3,4,5,6
'z'	1,3,5,6


D.2 United Kingdom Computer Braille.
D.2.1 United Kingdom 6 dot Computer Braille Lower Case.
exclamation mark	'!'	3,4,5,6
quotation mark	'"'	4
hash sign	'#'	5,6
dollar sign	'$'	4,5,6
percent	'%'	4,6
ampersand	'&'	1,2,3,4,6
apostrophe	'''	3
left bracket	'('	4,5
right bracket	')'	3,4,5
asterisk	'*'	3,5
plus sign	'+'	2,3,5
comma	','	2
hyphen	''	3,6
period	'.'	2,5,6
forward slash	'/'	3,4
colon	':'	2,5
semi colon	';'	2,3
less than	'<'	2,3,6
equals	'='	2,3,5,6
greater than	'>'	3,5,6
question mark	'?'	2,6
grave accent	'`'	2,3,4,6
left curly brace	'{'	1,2,3,5,6
upright slash	'|'	5
right curly brace	'}'	2,3,4,5,6
tilde	'~'	6
Delete		
Delete		
Delete	3,4,6

'0'	1,2,3,4,5,6
'1'	1,6
'2'	1,2,6
'3'	1,4,6
'4'	1,4,5,6
'5'	1,5,6
'6'	1,2,4,6
'7'	1,2,4,5,6
'8'	1,2,5,6
'9'	2,4,6

'a'	1
'b'	1,2
'c'	1,4
'd'	1,4,5
'e'	1,5
'f'	1,2,4
'g'	1,2,4,5
'h'	1,2,5
'i'	2,4
'j'	2,4,5
'k'	1,3
'l'	1,2,3
'm'	1,3,4
'n'	1,3,4,5
'o'	1,3,5
'p'	1,2,3,4
'q'	1,2,3,4,5
'r'	1,2,3,5
's'	2,3,4
't'	2,3,4,5
'u'	1,3,6
'v'	1,2,3,6
'w'	2,4,5,6
'x'	1,3,4,6
'y'	1,3,4,5,6
'z'	1,3,5,6
D.2.2 United Kingdom 6 dot Computer Braille Upper Case
The following table shows the combinations which change when a keystroke is immediately preceded by SPACEwithU or when Caps Lock has been turned on by pressing SPACEwithU twice in succession.
'A',	1
'B',	1,2
'C',	1,4
'E',	1,5
'D',	1,4,5
'F',	1,2,4
'G',	1,2,4,5
'H',	1,2,5
'I',	2,4
'J',	2,4,5
'K',	1,3
'L',	1,2,3
'M',	1,3,4
'N',	1,3,4,5
'O',	1,3,5
'P',	1,2,3,4
'Q',	1,2,3,4,5
'R',	1,2,3,5
'S',	2,3,4
'T',	2,3,4,5
'U',	1,3,6
'V',	1,2,3,6
'W',	2,4,5,6
'X',	1,3,4,6
'Y',	1,3,4,5,6
'Z',	1,3,5,6

at symbol	'@',	2,3,4,6
left square bracket	'[',	1,2,3,5,6
back slash	'\',	5
right square bracket	']',	2,3,4,5,6
carat sign	'^',	6
underscore	'_',	3,4,6

D.2.3 United Kingdom 8 dot Computer Braille

exclamation mark	'!'	3,4,5,6
quotation mark	'"'	4
hash sign	'#'	5,6
dollar sign	'$'	4,5,6
percent	'%'	4,6
ampersand	'&'	1,2,3,4,6
apostrophe	'''	3
left bracket	'('	4,5
right bracket	')'	3,4,5
asterisk	'*'	3,5
plus sign	'+'	2,3,5
comma	','	2
hyphen	''	3,6
period	'.'	2,5,6
forward slash	'/'	3,4
colon	':'	2,5
semi colon	';'	2,3
less than	'<'	2,3,6
equals	'='	2,3,5,6
greater than	'>'	3,5,6
question mark	'?'	2,6
at symbol	'@'	2,3,4,6,7
left square bracket	'['	1,2,3,5,6,7
back slash	'\'	5,7
right square bracket	']'	2,3,4,5,6,7
carat sign	'^'	6,7
underscore	'_'	3,4,6,7
grave accent	'`'	2,3,4,6
left curly brace	'{'	1,2,3,5,6
upright slash	'|'	5
right curly brace	'}'	2,3,4,5,6
tilde	'~'	6
Delete	3,4,6

'0'	1,2,3,4,5,6
'1'	1,6
'2'	1,2,6
'3'	1,4,6
'4'	1,4,5,6
'5'	1,5,6
'6'	1,2,4,6
'7'	1,2,4,5,6
'8'	1,2,5,6
'9'	2,4,6

'A'	1,7
'B'	1,2,7
'C'	1,4,7
'D'	1,4,5,7
'E'	1,5,7
'F'	1,2,4,7
'G'	1,2,4,5,7
'H'	1,2,5,7
'I'	2,4,7
'J'	2,4,5,7
'K'	1,3,7
'L'	1,2,3,7
'M'	1,3,4,7
'N'	1,3,4,5,7
'O'	1,3,5,7
'P'	1,2,3,4,7
'Q'	1,2,3,4,5,7
'R'	1,2,3,5,7
'S'	2,3,4,7
'T'	2,3,4,5,7
'U'	1,3,6,7
'V'	1,2,3,6,7
'W'	2,4,5,6,7
'X'	1,3,4,6,7
'Y'	1,3,4,5,6,7
'Z'	1,3,5,6,7

'a'	1
'b'	1,2
'c'	1,4
'd'	1,4,5
'e'	1,5
'f'	1,2,4
'g'	1,2,4,5
'h'	1,2,5
'i'	2,4
'j'	2,4,5
'k'	1,3
'l'	1,2,3
'm'	1,3,4
'n'	1,3,4,5
'o'	1,3,5
'p'	1,2,3,4
'q'	1,2,3,4,5
'r'	1,2,3,5
's'	2,3,4
't'	2,3,4,5
'u'	1,3,6
'v'	1,2,3,6
'w'	2,4,5,6
'x'	1,3,4,6
'y'	1,3,4,5,6
'z'	1,3,5,6

a acute	''	8
a grave	''	4,6,7,8
a circumflex	''	5,6,7,8
Cap A diaeresis	''	2,5,6,7,8
a diaeresis	''	4,5,6,7,8
Cap a ring	''	3,4,7,8
a ring	''	1,2,3,4,6,7,8

cap a diphthong	''	1,2,6,7,8
a diphthong	''	1,6,7,8
feminine ordinal	''	1,2,3,4,6,8
masculine ordinal	''	3,8
	
c cedilla	''	7,8
cap C cedilla	''	3,7,8

cap E acute	''	1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
e acute	''	4,7,8
e grave	''	3,5,7,8
e circumflex	''	4,5,7,8
e diaeresis	''	3,4,5,7,8
	
i acute	''	3,4,5,6,8
i grave	''	3,6,7,8
i circumflex	''	2,7,8
i diaeresis	''	2,3,5,7,8
	
cap N tilde	''	4,6,8
n tilde	''	4,5,6,8
	
o acute	''	4,8
o grave	''	1,5,6,7,8
o circumflex	''	1,4,6,7,8
cap O diaeresis	''	2,4,6,7,8
o diaeresis	''	1,4,5,6,7,8
	
u acute	''	5,6,8
u grave	''	1,2,4,5,6,7,8
u circumflex	''	1,2,4,6,7,8
Cap U diaeresis	''	2,5,7,8
u diaeresis	''	3,4,5,6,7,8

y diaeresis	''	1,2,5,6,7,8
Exclamation inverted	''	3,6,8
question mark inverted	''	4,5,8
	
Start of 	''	3,5,8
Logical NOT 	'?'	3,4,5,8
Right double angle quotation	''	3,4,8
Left double angle quotation	''	2,5,6,8
	
Pounds sign	''	2,3,6,7,8
cent sign	''	2,3,7,8
Florin sign	'?'	2,6,7,8
Yen sign 	'?'	3,5,6,7,8
Peseta sign 	''	2,3,5,6,7,8
	
half 	''	2,3,5,8
quarter	''	2,8
Plus or minus	''	1,2,3,4,5,8
Greater than or equal to	''	1,2,3,6,8
Less than or equal to	'?'	2,3,4,8
Greater than or equal to	'?'	1,2,3,5,8
Nearly equals	'?'	2,4,5,6,8
Identity symbol	'?'	1,2,3,4,8
Superscript 2 	''	2,3,4,5,6,8
Superscript n	'?'	5,8
Radical symbol 	'?'	1,2,3,5,6,8
Integral sign 	'?'	2,3,4,5,8
Integral sign 	'?'	1,3,6,8
degree sign	''	1,3,4,6,8
Intersection symbol 	'?'	1,3,5,8
Greek epsilon	'?'	1,3,4,5,8
	
''	1,3,5,6,8
'?'	1,3,4,5,6,8
Solid square 	'?'	6,8
	
Greek alpha 	'?'	2,3,4,6,8
Greek beta, 	''	1,8
Greek Gamma 	'?'	1,2,8
Greek pi 	'?'	1,4,8
Greek Sigma 	'?'	1,4,5,8
Greek sigma 	'?'	1,5,8
Greek mu 	''	1,2,4,8
Greek tau 	'?'	1,2,4,5,8
Greek Fi 	'?'	1,2,5,8
Greek Theta 	'?'	2,4,8
Greek Omega 	'?'	2,4,5,8
Greek delta 	'?'	1,3,8
Infinity 	'?'	1,2,3,8
Greek fi 	'?'	1,3,4,8
	
Upper left	'?'	1,3,5,6,7,8
Center box 	'?'	1,4,6,8
Lower Left	'?'	2,3,4,6,7,8
Upper right 	'?'	2,6,8
Lower right	'?'	1,3,4,5,6,7,8
Middle box	'?'	1,2,7,8
Left middle	'?'	1,4,7,8
Box intersection	'?'	1,5,7,8
Right middle	'?'	1,4,5,6,8
Middle box	'?'	1,7,8
Center box	'?'	1,4,5,7,8
	
Double upper left	'?'	2,4,7,8
Double center box 	'?'	2,5,8
Double lower left	'?'	1,2,5,7,8
Double upper right 	'?'	2,3,8
Double lower right	'?'	2,3,6,8
Double middle box	'?'	1,3,7,8
Double left middle	'?'	1,2,3,7,8
Double box intersection	'?'	1,3,4,5,7,8
Double right middle	'?'	2,4,6,8
Double middle box	'?'	2,4,5,7,8
Double center box	'?'	1,3,4,7,8
	
Double horizontal upper right	'?'	1,2,5,6,8
Double horizontal right middle 	'?'	1,5,6,8
Double horizontal left middle	'?'	1,2,4,8
Double horizontal lower right 	'?'	3,5,6,8
Double horizontal upper right	'?'	1,3,6,8
Double horizontal lower left	'?'	2,3,4,5,7,8
Double horizontal top middle	'?'	1,2,3,4,5,7,8
Double horizontal intersection	'?'	1,3,4,6,7,8
Double horizontal bottom middle	'?'	1,3,5,7,8
	
Double vertical upper right	'?'	1,2,4,5,6,8
Double vertical left middle 	'?'	1,2,4,5,7,8
Double vertical right middle	'?'	1,2,4,6,8
Double vertical lower right 	'?'	2,3,5,6,8
Double vertical upper left	'?'	1,2,3,6,7,8
Double vertical intersection	'?'	2,4,5,6,7,8
Double vertical lower left	'?'	2,3,4,7,8
Double vertical top middle	'?'	1,2,3,5,7,8
Double vertical bottom middle	'?'	1,2,3,4,7,8
	
Fill character 	'?'	1,2,3,4,5,6,8
Fill character 	'?'	1,6,8
Fill character 	'?'	1,2,6,8
Solid fill 	'?'	5,7,8
Solid fill 	'?'	6,7,8
Solid fill 	'?'	3,4,6,7,8
Solid fill 	'?'	1,2,3,5,6,7,8
Solid fill 	'?'	2,3,4,5,6,7,8
End of Appendix D Computer Braille Reference List.



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


1-36



1-1



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


2-50



2-49



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


3-94



3-93



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


4-108



4-107



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


5-130



5-129



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


6-192



6-191



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


7-204



7-205



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


8-210



8-211



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


9-248



9-247



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


10-280



10-279



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


11-300



11-299



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


12-356



12-355



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


13-392



13-393



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


14-404



14-405



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


15-414



15-413



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


16-448



16-449



BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


452


451


BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


2


453


BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


456


455


BrailleNote PK


BrailleNote PK


478


477






492


491






